1. real estate
2. architects

 BAMA Architecture and Design
PROJECT MANUAL
MORELAND STATION APARTMENT BUILDING
VOLUME I
PORTLAND, OREGON
68 UNIT APARTMENT BUILDING
HUD PROJECT # 126‐35306 ARCHITECT PROJECT NUMBER 201207 CONSTRUCTION SET AUGUST 21, 2013 Architect:
BAMA Architecture and Design, LLC
by
Print Name
Signature
Owner: Urban Evolution Development, Inc.
by
Print Name
Signature
Contractor: Pavilion Construction, LLC
by
Print Name
Signature
Lender:
by
Print Name
Signature
Bonding Company:
by
Print Name
Signature
Owner:
Architect:
Urban Evolution Development, Inc.
7400 SE Milwaukie Avenue
Portland, Oregon 97202
BAMA Architecture and Design
1631 NE Broadway #754
Portland, Oregon 97232
MORELAND STATION APARTMENT BUILDING
PROJECT MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
VOLUME I
TABULATION OF UNITS
DRAWING INDEX
DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
007200
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR
CONSTRUCTION AIA 201 – 2007
HUD SUPPLEMNETARY CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR
CONSTRUCTION HUD-92554M
HUD SPECIAL CONDITIONS, NOTES FOR MULTIFAMILY
INSURED PROGRAMS
HUD CONTRACTOR’S REQUESTION HUD 92448
HUD CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE HUD 5372
HUD REQUEST FOR CONSTRUCTION CHANGES HUD 92437
HUD REQUEST FOR APPROVAL OF ADVANCE OF ESCROW FUNDS HUD 92464
DAVIS BACON WAGE REQUIREMENTS
DAVIS BACON MULTNOMAH COUNTY WATE RATES
DAVIS BACON WAGE REPORTING FORM00
REQUEST FOR WAGE DETERMINATION FORM 308
007300
007301
007501
007502
007505
007508
008001
008005
008010
008015
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
011000
011150
013000
013216
014000
014216
015000
016000
016116
017000
017419
017 00
SUMMARY OF WORK
CONTRACTOR ENGINEERED COMPONENT PROCEDURES / DEFERRED SUBMITTALS
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
DEFINITIONS
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUND (VOC) CONTENT RESTRICTIONS
EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
FORMS
HUD 2328
020712
HUD 5372
HUD 92330
HUD 92437
CONTRACTOR’S AND/OR MORTGAGOR’S COST
BREAKDOWN
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE
CONTRACTOR’S CERTIFICATE OF ACTUAL COST
CONSTRUCTION CHANGES ON PROJECT
Moreland Station Apartment Building
2/21/13 HUD Review
Table of Contents
1
HUD
HUD
HUD
HUD
HUD
HUD
HUD
MORTGAGES
92442M CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT
92448 CONTRACTOR’S REQUISITION
92485 PERMISSION TO OCCUPY
95379 HUD REPRESENTATIVE’S TRIP REPORT
92450M COMPLETION ASSURANCE AGREEMENT
92452A PAYMENT BOND
92452M PERFORMANCE BOND DUAL OBLIGEE
000000
OWNER PROVIDED INFORMATION
000000
GEOTECHNICAL REPORT
DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS
NOT USED
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
033000
034900
035400
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
GLASS-FIBER REINFORCED CONCRETE
CAST UNDERLAYMENT
DIVISION 04 - MASONRY
NOT USED
DIVISION 05 - METALS
051200
054000
055000
055213
STRUCTURAL STEEL
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
METAL FABRICATIONS
PIPE AND PIPE RAILINGS
DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
061000
061600
061733
062000
064100
ROUGH CARPENTRY
SHEATHING
PRE-FABRICATED PLYWOOD I JOISTS
FINISH CARPENTRY
ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
071300
071713
071800
071900
072100
SHEET WATERPROOFING
BENTONITE PANEL WATERPROOFING
TRAFFIC COATING
WATER REPELLENTS
THERMAL INSULATION
021207
Moreland Station Apartment Building
2/21/2013 HUD Review
Table of Contents
2
072500
074646
075400
076200
077200
0784 00
079005
WEATHER BARRIERS
FIBER CEMENT SIDING
THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
ROOF ACCESSORIES
FIRESTOPPING
JOINT SEALERS
DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS
081113
081416
081613
083100
083613
084126
084313
085313
087100
088000
088300
089100
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
FIBERGLASS DOORS
ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
SECTIONAL DOORS
ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS
VINYL WINDOWS
DOOR HARDWARE
GLAZING
MIRRORS
LOUVERS
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
092116
093000
096500
096800
096801
096813
097200
099000
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
TILING
RESILIENT FLOORING
CARPETING
CARPET HUD CERTIFICATE HGG48
TILE CARPETING
WALL COVERINGS
PAINTING AND COATING
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
101400
102213
102800
103100
104400
105523
SIGNAGE
SHEET METAL PARTITIONS
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
MANUFACTURED FIREPLACES
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
MAIL BOXES
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
11 31 00
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES
021207
Moreland Station Apartment Building
2/21/2013 HUD Review
Table of Contents
3
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
122113
122216
123600
129300
129313
HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS
DRAPERY TRACK AND ACCESSORIES
COUNTERTOPS
SITE FURNISHINGS
BICYCLE RACKS
DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
NOT USED
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
142040
HYDRAULICELEVATOR
021207
Moreland Station Apartment Building
2/21/2013 HUD Review
Table of Contents
4
BAMA Architecture and Design
DRAWING INDEX
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
DRAWING INDEX
00 00 02 - 1
DIVISION 00
PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
007200
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR
CONSTRUCTION AIA 201 – 2007
HUD SUPPLEMNETARY CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR
CONSTRUCTION HUD-2554
HUD SPECIAL CONDITIONS, NOTES FOR MULTIFAMILY
INSURED PROGRAMS
HUD CONTRACTOR’S REQUESTION HUD 92448
HUD REQUEST FOR CONSTRUCTION CHANGES HUD 92437
HUD REQUEST FOR APPROVAL OF ADVANCE OF ESCROW FUNDS HUD 92464
DAVIS BACON WAGE REQUIREMENTS
DAVIS BACON MULTNOMAH COUNTY WATE RATES
DAVIS BACON WAGE REPORTING FORMS
REQUEST FOR WAGE DETERMINATION FORM 308
007300
007301
007501
007505
007508
008001
008005
008010
008015
020712
Moreland Station Apartment Building 7/16/2012
Construction Documents
Document A201 – 2007
TM
General Conditions of the Contract for Construction
for the following
PROJECT: (Name and
location or address) For
Review
THE OWNER:
(Name, legal status and address)
THE ARCHITECT:
(Name, legal status and address)
TABLE OF ARTICLES
Init.
/
1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
2
OWNER
3
CONTRACTOR
4
ARCHITECT
5
SUBCONTRACTORS
6
CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE
CONTRACTORS
7
CHANGES IN THE WORK
8
TIME
9
PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
10
PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
11
INSURANCE AND BONDS
12
UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK
13
MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
14
TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT
15
CLAIMS AND DISPUTES
ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS:
The author of this document has
added information needed for its
completion. The author may also
have revised the text of the original
AIA standard form. An Additions and
Deletions Report that notes added
information as well as revisions to the
standard form text is available from
the author and should be reviewed. A
vertical line in the left margin of this
document indicates where the author
has added necessary information
and where the author has added to or
deleted from the original AIA text.
This document has important legal
consequences. Consultation with an
attorney is encouraged with respect
to its completion or modification.
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires
on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
(1784302197)
User Notes:
1
INDEX
(Topics and numbers in bold are section
headings.)
Acceptance of Nonconforming Work
9.6.6, 9.9.3, 12.3
Acceptance of Work
9.6.6, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 12.3
Access to
Work 3.16,
6.2.1, 12.1
Accident
Prevention 10
Acts and Omissions
3.2, 3.3.2, 3.12.8, 3.18, 4.2.3, 8.3.1, 9.5.1,
10.2.5,
10.2.8, 13.4.2, 13.7, 14.1, 15.2
Addenda
1.1.1, 3.11.1
Additional Costs, Claims for
3.7.4, 3.7.5, 6.1.1, 7.3.7.5, 10.3, 15.1.4
Additional Inspections and Testing
9.4.2, 9.8.3, 12.2.1, 13.5
Additional
Insured 11.1.4
Additional Time, Claims for
3.2.4, 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.10.2, 8.3.2, 15.1.5
Administration of the Contract
3.1.3, 4.2, 9.4, 9.5
Advertisement or Invitation to
Bid 1.1.1
Aesthetic Effect
4.2.13
Allowanc
es 3.8,
7.3.8
All-risk Insurance
11.3.1, 11.3.1.1
Applications for Payment
4.2.5, 7.3.9, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5.1, 9.6.3, 9.7, 9.10,
11.1.3
Approvals
2.1.1, 2.2.2, 2.4, 3.1.3, 3.10.2, 3.12.8, 3.12.9,
3.12.10,
4.2.7, 9.3.2, 13.5.1
Arbitration
8.3.1, 11.3.10, 13.1.1, 15.3.2, 15.4
ARCHITECT
4
Architect, Definition of
4.1.1
Architect, Extent of Authority
2.4.1, 3.12.7, 4.1, 4.2, 5.2, 6.3, 7.1.2, 7.3.7, 7.4,
9.2,
9.3.1, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.3, 9.8, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 12.1,
Init.
/
12.2.1,
13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.3, 15.2.1
Architect, Limitations of Authority and Responsibility 2.1.1,
3.12.4, 3.12.8, 3.12.10, 4.1.2, 4.2.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.3,
4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.10, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 5.2.1, 7.4, 9.4.2,
9.5.3, 9.6.4, 15.1.3, 15.2
Architect’s Additional Services and Expenses 2.4.1,
11.3.1.1, 12.2.1, 13.5.2, 13.5.3, 14.2.4
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires
on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
(1784302197)
User Notes:
2
Architect’s Administration of the
Contract 3.1.3, 4.2, 3.7.4, 15.2,
9.4.1, 9.5
Architect’s Approvals
2.4.1, 3.1.3, 3.5, 3.10.2, 4.2.7
Architect’s Authority to Reject Work
3.5, 4.2.6, 12.1.2, 12.2.1
Architect’
s
Copyrigh
t 1.1.7,
1.5
Architect’s Decisions
3.7.4, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 4.2.14,
6.3,
7.3.7, 7.3.9, 8.1.3, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.8.4,
9.9.1,
13.5.2, 15.2, 15.3
Architect’s Inspections
3.7.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.5
Architect’s Instructions
3.2.4, 3.3.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 13.5.2
Architect’s
Interpretation
s 4.2.11,
4.2.12
Architect’s Project
Representative 4.2.10
Architect’s Relationship with Contractor
1.1.2, 1.5, 3.1.3, 3.2.2, 3.2.3, 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.4.2,
3.5,
3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.9.2, 3.9.3, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 3.16,
3.18,
4.1.2, 4.1.3, 4.2, 5.2, 6.2.2, 7, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4,
9.5,
9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 10.2.6, 10.3, 11.3.7, 12, 13.4.2, 13.5,
15.2
Architect’s Relationship with
Subcontractors 1.1.2, 4.2.3,
4.2.4, 4.2.6, 9.6.3, 9.6.4,
11.3.7
Architect’s Representations
9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.10.1
Architect’s Site Visits
3.7.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.5
As
be
st
os
10
.3.
1
Attorney
s’ Fees
3.18.1,
9.10.2,
Init.
/
10.3.3
Award of Separate
Contracts 6.1.1, 6.1.2
Award of Subcontracts and Other
Contracts for Portions of the Work
5.2
Basic Definitions
1.1
Bidding Requirements
1.1.1, 5.2.1, 11.4.1
Binding Dispute Resolution
9.7, 11.3.9, 11.3.10, 13.1.1, 15.2.5, 15.2.6.1, 15.3.1,
15.3.2, 15.4.1
Boiler and Machinery Insurance
11.3.2
Bonds, Lien
7.3.7.4, 9.10.2, 9.10.3
Bonds, Performance, and Payment
7.3.7.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.3.9, 11.4
Building Permit
3.7.1
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires
on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
(1784302197)
User Notes:
3
Capitalization
1.3
Certificate of Substantial Completion
9.8.3, 9.8.4, 9.8.5
Certificates for Payment
4.2.1, 4.2.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.6,
9.7,
9.10.1, 9.10.3, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4, 15.1.3
Certificates of Inspection, Testing or
Approval 13.5.4
Certificates of Insurance
9.10.2, 11.1.3
Change Orders
1.1.1, 2.4.1, 3.4.2, 3.7.4, 3.8.2.3, 3.11.1, 3.12.8,
4.2.8,
5.2.3, 7.1.2, 7.1.3, 7.2, 7.3.2, 7.3.6, 7.3.9, 7.3.10,
8.3.1,
9.3.1.1, 9.10.3, 10.3.2, 11.3.1.2, 11.3.4, 11.3.9,
12.1.2,
15.1.3
Change Orders, Definition of
7.2.1
CHANGES IN THE WORK
2.2.1, 3.11, 4.2.8, 7, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4, 8.3.1,
9.3.1.1,
11.3.9
Claims, Definition of
15.1.1
CLAIMS AND DISPUTES
3.2.4, 6.1.1, 6.3, 7.3.9, 9.3.3, 9.10.4, 10.3.3, 15,
15.4
Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims
15.4.1
Claims for Additional Cost
3.2.4, 3.7.4, 6.1.1, 7.3.9, 10.3.2, 15.1.4
Claims for Additional Time
3.2.4, 3.7.46.1.1, 8.3.2, 10.3.2, 15.1.5
Concealed or Unknown Conditions,
Claims for 3.7.4
Claims for Damages
3.2.4, 3.18, 6.1.1, 8.3.3, 9.5.1, 9.6.7, 10.3.3,
11.1.1,
11.3.5, 11.3.7, 14.1.3, 14.2.4, 15.1.6
Claims Subject to
Arbitration 15.3.1, 15.4.1
Cleaning Up
3.15, 6.3
Commencement of the Work, Conditions
Relating to 2.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.4.1, 3.7.1, 3.10.1,
3.12.6, 5.2.1, 5.2.3,
6.2.2, 8.1.2, 8.2.2, 8.3.1, 11.1, 11.3.1, 11.3.6,
11.4.1,
15.1.4
Commencement of the Work, Definition of
8.1.2
Communications Facilitating Contract
Administration
Init.
/
3.9.1, 4.2.4
Completion, Conditions Relating to
3.4.1, 3.11, 3.15, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 8.2, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1,
9.10, 12.2, 13.7, 14.1.2
COMPLETION, PAYMENTS AND 9
Completion, Substantial
4.2.9, 8.1.1, 8.1.3, 8.2.3, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.3, 12.2,
13.7
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires
on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
(1784302197)
User Notes:
4
Compliance with Laws
1.6.1, 3.2.3, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 4.1.1, 9.6.4,
10.2.2,
11.1, 11.3, 13.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 13.6, 14.1.1,
14.2.1.3, 15.2.8, 15.4.2, 15.4.3
Concealed or Unknown Conditions
3.7.4, 4.2.8, 8.3.1, 10.3
Conditions of the
Contract 1.1.1,
6.1.1, 6.1.4
Consent, Written
3.4.2, 3.7.4, 3.12.8, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 9.3.2, 9.8.5,
9.9.1,
9.10.2, 9.10.3, 11.3.1, 13.2, 13.4.2, 15.4.4.2
Consolidati
on or
Joinder
15.4.4
CONSTRUCTION BY
OWNER OR BY
SEPARATE
CONTRACTORS
1.1.4, 6
Construction Change Directive, Definition of
7.3.1
Construction Change Directives
1.1.1, 3.4.2, 3.12.8, 4.2.8, 7.1.1, 7.1.2, 7.1.3, 7.3,
9.3.1.1
Construction Schedules,
Contractor’s 3.10, 3.12.1,
3.12.2, 6.1.3, 15.1.5.2
Contingent Assignment
of Subcontracts 5.4,
14.2.2.2
Continuing Contract
Performance 15.1.3
Contract, Definition of
1.1.2
CONTRACT,
TERMINATION OR
SUSPENSION OF THE
5.4.1.1, 11.3.9, 14
Contract
Administrat
ion 3.1.3,
4, 9.4, 9.5
Contract Award and Execution,
Conditions Relating to
3.7.1, 3.10, 5.2, 6.1, 11.1.3, 11.3.6, 11.4.1
Contract Documents, Copies
Furnished and Use of 1.5.2, 2.2.5,
5.3
Contract Documents, Definition of
1.1.1
Contract Sum
3.7.4, 3.8, 5.2.3, 7.2, 7.3, 7.4, 9.1, 9.4.2, 9.5.1.4,
9.6.7,
Init.
/
9.7, 10.3.2, 11.3.1, 14.2.4, 14.3.2, 15.1.4, 15.2.5
Contract Sum, Definition of
9.1
Contract Time
3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.10.2, 5.2.3, 7.2.1.3, 7.3.1, 7.3.5, 7.4,
8.1.1, 8.2.1, 8.3.1, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 12.1.1, 14.3.2,
15.1.5.1, 15.2.5
Contract Time, Definition of
8.1.1
CONTRACTOR
3
Contractor, Definition of
3.1, 6.1.2
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires
on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
(1784302197)
User Notes:
5
Contractor’s Construction
Schedules 3.10, 3.12.1, 3.12.2,
6.1.3, 15.1.5.2
Contractor’s Employees
3.3.2, 3.4.3, 3.8.1, 3.9, 3.18.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 10.2,
10.3,
11.1.1, 11.3.7, 14.1, 14.2.1.1
Contractor’s Liability Insurance
11.1
Contractor’s Relationship with Separate
Contractors
and Owner’s Forces
3.12.5, 3.14.2, 4.2.4, 6, 11.3.7, 12.1.2, 12.2.4
Contractor’s Relationship with
Subcontractors 1.2.2, 3.3.2, 3.18.1, 3.18.2,
5, 9.6.2, 9.6.7, 9.10.2,
11.3.1.2, 11.3.7, 11.3.8
Contractor’s Relationship with the Architect
1.1.2, 1.5, 3.1.3, 3.2.2, 3.2.3, 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.4.2,
3.5,
3.7.4, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 3.16, 3.18, 4.1.3, 4.2, 5.2,
6.2.2,
7, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 10.2.6,
10.3,
11.3.7, 12, 13.5, 15.1.2, 15.2.1
Contractor’s Representations
3.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.5, 3.12.6, 6.2.2, 8.2.1, 9.3.3, 9.8.2
Contractor’s Responsibility for Those Performing
the Work
3.3.2, 3.18, 5.3.1, 6.1.3, 6.2, 9.5.1, 10.2.8
Contractor’s Review of Contract
Documents 3.2
Contractor’s Right to Stop the Work
9.7
Contractor’s Right to Terminate the Contract
14.1, 15.1.6
Contractor’s Submittals
3.10, 3.11, 3.12.4, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 9.2, 9.3,
9.8.2,
9.8.3, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 11.1.3, 11.4.2
Contractor’s
Superintendent 3.9,
10.2.6
Contractor’s Supervision and Construction
Procedures
1.2.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 6.1.3, 6.2.4,
7.1.3,
7.3.5, 7.3.7, 8.2, 10, 12, 14, 15.1.3
Contractual Liability Insurance
11.1.1.8, 11.2
Coordination and Correlation
1.2, 3.2.1, 3.3.1, 3.10, 3.12.6, 6.1.3, 6.2.1
Copies Furnished of Drawings and
Specifications 1.5, 2.2.5, 3.11
Copyrights
1.5, 3.17
Correction of Work
Init.
/
2.3, 2.4, 3.7.3, 9.4.2, 9.8.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.1, 12.1.2, 12.2
Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents 1.2
Cost, Definition of
7.3.7
Costs
2.4.1, 3.2.4, 3.7.3, 3.8.2, 3.15.2, 5.4.2, 6.1.1, 6.2.3,
7.3.3.3, 7.3.7, 7.3.8, 7.3.9, 9.10.2, 10.3.2, 10.3.6, 11.3,
12.1.2, 12.2.1, 12.2.4, 13.5, 14
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires
on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
(1784302197)
User Notes:
6
Cutting and
Patching
3.14, 6.2.5
Damage to Construction of
Owner or Separate Contractors
3.14.2, 6.2.4, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.4, 11.1.1, 11.3,
12.2.4
Damage to the Work
3.14.2, 9.9.1, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.4.1, 11.3.1,
12.2.4
Damages, Claims for
3.2.4, 3.18, 6.1.1, 8.3.3, 9.5.1, 9.6.7, 10.3.3,
11.1.1,
11.3.5, 11.3.7, 14.1.3, 14.2.4, 15.1.6
Damages for Delay
6.1.1, 8.3.3, 9.5.1.6, 9.7, 10.3.2
Date of Commencement of the Work, Definition
of
8.1.2
Date of Substantial Completion, Definition of
8.1.3
Day, Definition of
8.1.4
Decisions of the Architect
3.7.4, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 15.2, 6.3,
7.3.7, 7.3.9, 8.1.3, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.4, 9.5.1, 9.8.4,
9.9.1,
13.5.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.1, 15.2
Decisions to Withhold Certification
9.4.1, 9.5, 9.7, 14.1.1.3
Defective or Nonconforming Work,
Acceptance, Rejection and Correction of
2.3.1, 2.4.1, 3.5, 4.2.6, 6.2.5, 9.5.1, 9.5.2, 9.6.6,
9.8.2,
9.9.3, 9.10.4, 12.2.1
Definitions
1.1, 2.1.1, 3.1.1, 3.5, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 3.12.3, 4.1.1,
15.1.1, 5.1, 6.1.2, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 8.1, 9.1, 9.8.1
Delays and Extensions of Time
3.2, 3.7.4, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7,
10.3.2, 10.4.1, 14.3.2, 15.1.5, 15.2.5
Disputes
6.3, 7.3.9, 15.1, 15.2
Documents and
Samples at the Site
3.11
Drawings, Definition of
1.1.5
Drawings and Specifications, Use and Ownership
of
3.11
Effective Date of
Insurance 8.2.2,
11.1.2
Emergencies
10.4, 14.1.1.2, 15.1.4
Employees, Contractor’s
Init.
/
3.3.2, 3.4.3, 3.8.1, 3.9, 3.18.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 10.2,
10.3.3, 11.1.1, 11.3.7, 14.1, 14.2.1.1
Equipment, Labor, Materials or
1.1.3, 1.1.6, 3.4, 3.5, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, 3.13.1, 3.15.1,
4.2.6, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.7, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.5.1.3,
9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 14.2.1.2
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires
on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
(1784302197)
User Notes:
7
Execution and Progress of the Work
1.1.3, 1.2.1, 1.2.2, 2.2.3, 2.2.5, 3.1, 3.3.1, 3.4.1,
3.5,
3.7.1, 3.10.1, 3.12, 3.14, 4.2, 6.2.2, 7.1.3, 7.3.5,
8.2,
9.5.1, 9.9.1, 10.2, 10.3, 12.2, 14.2, 14.3.1, 15.1.3
Extensions of Time
3.2.4, 3.7.4, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3, 7.4, 9.5.1, 9.7,
10.3.2,
10.4.1, 14.3, 15.1.5, 15.2.5
Failure of Payment
9.5.1.3, 9.7, 9.10.2, 13.6, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2
Faulty Work
(See Defective or Nonconforming Work)
Final Completion and Final Payment
4.2.1, 4.2.9, 9.8.2, 9.10, 11.1.2, 11.1.3, 11.3.1,
11.3.5,
12.3.1, 14.2.4, 14.4.3
Financial Arrangements, Owner’s
2.2.1, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.4
Fire and Extended Coverage
Insurance 11.3.1.1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
1
Governing Law
13.1
Guarantees (See Warranty)
Hazardous Materials
10.2.4, 10.3
Identification of Subcontractors and
Suppliers 5.2.1
Indemnification
3.17, 3.18, 9.10.2, 10.3.3, 10.3.5, 10.3.6,
11.3.1.2,
11.3.7
Information and Services Required of the
Owner
2.1.2, 2.2, 3.2.2, 3.12.4, 3.12.10, 6.1.3, 6.1.4,
6.2.5,
9.6.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.2, 9.10.3, 10.3.3, 11.2, 11.4,
13.5.1,
13.5.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4, 15.1.3
Initial
Decision 15.2
Initial Decision Maker, Definition of
1.1.8
Initial Decision Maker, Decisions
14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.2.1, 15.2.2, 15.2.3, 15.2.4,
15.2.5
Initial Decision Maker, Extent of Authority
14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.3, 15.2.1, 15.2.2, 15.2.3,
15.2.4,
15.2.5
Injury or Damage to Person or
Property 10.2.8, 10.4.1
Inspections
3.1.3, 3.3.3, 3.7.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.6, 4.2.9, 9.4.2,
Init.
/
9.8.3,
9.9.2, 9.10.1, 12.2.1, 13.5
Instructions to Bidders 1.1.1
Instructions to the Contractor
3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.8.1, 5.2.1, 7, 8.2.2, 12, 13.5.2
Instruments of Service, Definition of
1.1.7
Insurance
3.18.1, 6.1.1, 7.3.7, 9.3.2, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 11
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires
on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
(1784302197)
User Notes:
8
Insurance, Boiler
and Machinery
11.3.2
Insurance,
Contractor’s
Liability 11.1
Insurance, Effective Date of
8.2.2, 11.1.2
Insuranc
e, Loss of
Use
11.3.3
Insurance,
Owner’s
Liability 11.2
Insurance, Property
10.2.5, 11.3
Insurance,
Stored
Materials
9.3.2
INSURANCE
AND BONDS 11
Insurance Companies, Consent to Partial
Occupancy
9.9.1
Intent of the Contract
Documents 1.2.1,
4.2.7, 4.2.12, 4.2.13,
7.4
I
n
t
e
r
e
s
t
3.15.1,
4.2.6, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.7, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.5.1.3,
9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 14.2.1.2
Labor Disputes
8.3.1
Laws and Regulations
1.5, 3.2.3, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13.1, 4.1.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.1,
10.2.2, 11.1.1, 11.3, 13.1.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2,
13.6.1, 14, 15.2.8, 15.4
Liens
2.1.2, 9.3.3, 9.10.2, 9.10.4, 15.2.8
Limitations, Statutes of
12.2.5, 13.7, 15.4.1.1
Limitations of Liability
2.3.1, 3.2.2, 3.5, 3.12.10, 3.17, 3.18.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7,
4.2.12, 6.2.2, 9.4.2, 9.6.4, 9.6.7, 10.2.5, 10.3.3, 11.1.2,
11.2, 11.3.7, 12.2.5, 13.4.2
Limitations of Time
2.1.2, 2.2, 2.4, 3.2.2, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12.5, 3.15.1, 4.2.7,
5.2, 5.3.1, 5.4.1, 6.2.4, 7.3, 7.4, 8.2, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3,
9.4.1, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 9.10, 11.1.3, 11.3.1.5,
11.3.6, 11.3.10, 12.2, 13.5, 13.7, 14, 15
Loss of Use
Insurance 11.3.3
Material Suppliers
1.5, 3.12.1, 4.2.4, 4.2.6, 5.2.1, 9.3, 9.4.2, 9.6, 9.10.5
Materials, Hazardous
10.2.4, 10.3
1
3
.
6
Interpretation
1.2.3, 1.4, 4.1.1, 5.1, 6.1.2, 15.1.1
Interpreta
tions,
Written
4.2.11,
4.2.12,
15.1.4
Judgment
on Final
Award
15.4.2
Labor and Materials, Equipment
1.1.3, 1.1.6, 3.4, 3.5, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, 3.13,
Init.
/
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires
on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
(1784302197)
User Notes:
9
Materials, Labor, Equipment and
1.1.3, 1.1.6, 1.5.1, 3.4.1, 3.5, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12,
3.13.1,
3.15.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.7, 9.3.2,
9.3.3,
9.5.1.3, 9.10.2, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1,
14.2.1.2
Means, Methods, Techniques, Sequences and
Procedures of Construction
3.3.1, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7,
9.4.2
Mechanic’s
Lien 2.1.2,
15.2.8
Mediation
8.3.1, 10.3.5, 10.3.6, 15.2.1, 15.2.5, 15.2.6, 15.3,
15.4.1
Minor Changes in the Work
1.1.1, 3.12.8, 4.2.8, 7.1, 7.4
MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
13
Modifications, Definition of
1.1.1
Modifications to the Contract
1.1.1, 1.1.2, 3.11, 4.1.2, 4.2.1, 5.2.3, 7, 8.3.1,
9.7,
10.3.2, 11.3.1
Mutual Responsibility
6.2
Nonconforming Work, Acceptance of
9.6.6, 9.9.3, 12.3
Nonconforming Work, Rejection and Correction
of 2.3.1, 2.4.1, 3.5, 4.2.6, 6.2.4, 9.5.1, 9.8.2,
9.9.3, 9.10.4,
12.2.1
Notice
2.2.1, 2.3.1, 2.4.1, 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.7.2, 3.12.9,
5.2.1, 9.7,
9.10, 10.2.2, 11.1.3, 12.2.2.1, 13.3, 13.5.1,
13.5.2,
14.1, 14.2, 15.2.8, 15.4.1
Notice, Written
2.3.1, 2.4.1, 3.3.1, 3.9.2, 3.12.9, 3.12.10, 5.2.1,
9.7,
9.10, 10.2.2, 10.3, 11.1.3, 11.3.6, 12.2.2.1, 13.3,
14,
15.2.8, 15.4.1
Notice of Claims
3.7.4, 10.2.8, 15.1.2, 15.4
Notice of Testing and Inspections
13.5.1, 13.5.2
Observations, Contractor’s
3.2, 3.7.4
Occupancy
2.2.2, 9.6.6, 9.8, 11.3.1.5
Orders, Written
1.1.1, 2.3, 3.9.2, 7, 8.2.2, 11.3.9, 12.1, 12.2.2.1,
Init.
/
13.5.2,
14.3.1
OWNER 2
Owner, Definition of
2.1.1
Owner, Information and Services Required of the
2.1.2, 2.2, 3.2.2, 3.12.10, 6.1.3, 6.1.4, 6.2.5, 9.3.2,
9.6.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.2, 9.10.3, 10.3.3, 11.2, 11.3, 13.5.1,
13.5.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4, 15.1.3
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires
on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
(1784302197)
User Notes:
1
Owner’s Authority
1.5, 2.1.1, 2.3.1, 2.4.1, 3.4.2, 3.8.1, 3.12.10,
3.14.2,
4.1.2, 4.1.3, 4.2.4, 4.2.9, 5.2.1, 5.2.4, 5.4.1, 6.1,
6.3,
7.2.1, 7.3.1, 8.2.2, 8.3.1, 9.3.1, 9.3.2, 9.5.1, 9.6.4,
9.9.1, 9.10.2, 10.3.2, 11.1.3, 11.3.3, 11.3.10,
12.2.2,
12.3.1, 13.2.2, 14.3, 14.4, 15.2.7
Owner’s Financial
Capability 2.2.1,
13.2.2, 14.1.1.4
Owner’s Liability
Insurance 11.2
Owner’s Relationship with Subcontractors
1.1.2, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 9.6.4, 9.10.2, 14.2.2
Owner’s Right to Carry
Out the Work 2.4, 14.2.2
Owner’s Right
to Clean Up
6.3
Owner’s Right to Perform
Construction and to Award Separate
Contracts
6.1
Owner’s Right to
Stop the Work 2.3
Owner’s Right to Suspend the Work
14.3
Owner’s Right to
Terminate the Contract
14.2
Ownership and Use of Drawings,
Specifications and Other
Instruments of Service
1.1.1, 1.1.6, 1.1.7, 1.5, 2.2.5, 3.2.2, 3.11.1, 3.17,
4.2.12, 5.3.1
Partial Occupancy or Use
9.6.6, 9.9, 11.3.1.5
Patching,
Cutting
and 3.14,
6.2.5
P
a
t
e
n
t
s
9.10.1,
14.2.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3
Payment, Certificates for
4.2.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.6, 9.7, 9.10.1,
9.10.3, 13.7, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4
Payment, Failure of
9.5.1.3, 9.7, 9.10.2, 13.6, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2
Payment, Final
4.2.1, 4.2.9, 9.8.2, 9.10, 11.1.2, 11.1.3, 11.4.1, 12.3.1,
13.7, 14.2.4, 14.4.3
Payment Bond, Performance Bond and
7.3.7.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.4
Payments, Progress
9.3, 9.6, 9.8.5, 9.10.3, 13.6, 14.2.3, 15.1.3
PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
9
Payments to Subcontractors
5.4.2, 9.5.1.3, 9.6.2, 9.6.3, 9.6.4, 9.6.7, 14.2.1.2
PCB
10.3.
1
3
.
1
7
Payment, Applications for
4.2.5, 7.3.9, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.3, 9.7, 9.8.5,
Init.
/
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires
on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
(1784302197)
User Notes:
1
Performance Bond and Payment Bond
7.3.7.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.4
Permits, Fees, Notices and Compliance with
Laws
2.2.2, 3.7, 3.13, 7.3.7.4, 10.2.2
PERSONS AND PROPERTY, PROTECTION
OF 10
Polychlorinated Biphenyl
10.3.1
Product Data, Definition of
3.12.2
Product Data and Samples, Shop Drawings
3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7
Progress and Completion
4.2.2, 8.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 14.1.4, 15.1.3
Progress Payments
9.3, 9.6, 9.8.5, 9.10.3, 13.6, 14.2.3, 15.1.3
Project, Definition of
1.1.4
Project Representatives
4.2.10
Property Insurance
10.2.5, 11.3
PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND
PROPERTY 10
Regulations and Laws
1.5, 3.2.3, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 4.1.1, 9.6.4,
9.9.1,
10.2.2, 11.1, 11.4, 13.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2,
13.6, 14,
15.2.8, 15.4
Rejection of Work
3.5, 4.2.6, 12.2.1
Releases and Waivers of
Liens 9.10.2
Representations
3.2.1, 3.5, 3.12.6, 6.2.2, 8.2.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.2, 9.5.1,
9.8.2,
9.10.1
Representatives
2.1.1, 3.1.1, 3.9, 4.1.1, 4.2.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.10, 5.1.1,
5.1.2,
13.2.1
Responsibility for Those Performing the Work
3.3.2, 3.18, 4.2.3, 5.3.1, 6.1.3, 6.2, 6.3, 9.5.1, 10
Retainage
9.3.1, 9.6.2, 9.8.5, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3
Review of Contract Documents and
Field Conditions by Contractor
3.2, 3.12.7, 6.1.3
Review of Contractor’s Submittals by Owner
and Architect
3.10.1, 3.10.2, 3.11, 3.12, 4.2, 5.2, 6.1.3, 9.2,
9.8.2
Review of Shop Drawings, Product Data and
Samples by Contractor
3.12
Init.
/
Rights and Remedies
1.1.2, 2.3, 2.4, 3.5, 3.7.4, 3.15.2, 4.2.6, 5.3, 5.4, 6.1,
6.3, 7.3.1, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.2.5, 10.3, 12.2.2, 12.2.4,
13.4, 14, 15.4
Royalties, Patents and Copyrights 3.17
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires
on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
(1784302197)
User Notes:
1
Rules and Notices for
Arbitration 15.4.1
Safety of Persons
and Property
10.2, 10.4
Safety Precautions and Programs
3.3.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 5.3.1, 10.1, 10.2, 10.4
Samples, Definition of
3.12.3
Samples, Shop Drawings, Product Data and
3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7
Samples at the Site,
Documents and 3.11
Sched
ule of
Values
9.2,
9.3.1
Schedules, Construction
3.10, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 6.1.3, 15.1.5.2
Separate Contracts and Contractors
1.1.4, 3.12.5, 3.14.2, 4.2.4, 4.2.7, 6, 8.3.1, 12.1.2
Shop Drawings, Definition of
3.12.1
Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples
3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7
Site
,
Use
of
3.13
,
6.1.
1,
6.2.
1
Site Inspections
3.2.2, 3.3.3, 3.7.1, 3.7.4, 4.2, 9.4.2, 9.10.1, 13.5
Site Visits, Architect’s
3.7.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.5
Special
Inspections and
Testing 4.2.6,
12.2.1, 13.5
Specifications, Definition of
1.1.6
Specifications
1.1.1, 1.1.6, 1.2.2, 1.5, 3.11, 3.12.10, 3.17, 4.2.14
Statute
of
Limitatio
ns 13.7,
15.4.1.1
Stoppi
ng the
Work
2.3,
9.7,
Init.
/
10.3, 14.1
Stored Materials
6.2.1, 9.3.2, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.4
Subcontractor, Definition
of 5.1.1
SUBCONTRACTORS
5
Subcontractors, Work by
1.2.2, 3.3.2, 3.12.1, 4.2.3, 5.2.3, 5.3, 5.4, 9.3.1.2, 9.6.7
Subcontractual Relations
5.3, 5.4, 9.3.1.2, 9.6, 9.10, 10.2.1, 14.1, 14.2.1
Submittals
3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 7.3.7, 9.2, 9.3, 9.8,
9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 11.1.3
Submittal Schedule
3.10.2, 3.12.5, 4.2.7
Subrogation, Waivers of
6.1.1, 11.3.7
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires
on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
(1784302197)
User Notes:
1
Substantial Completion
4.2.9, 8.1.1, 8.1.3, 8.2.3, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.3,
12.2,
13.7
Substantial Completion, Definition of
9.8.1
Substitution of Subcontractors
5.2.3, 5.2.4
Substitution of
Architect 4.1.3
Substitutions of
Materials 3.4.2, 3.5,
7.3.8
Sub-subcontractor, Definition of
5.1.2
Subsurface Conditions
3.7.4
Successors and
Assigns 13.2
Superintendent
3.9, 10.2.6
Supervision and Construction Procedures
1.2.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 6.1.3, 6.2.4,
7.1.3,
7.3.7, 8.2, 8.3.1, 9.4.2, 10, 12, 14, 15.1.3
Surety
5.4.1.2, 9.8.5, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 14.2.2, 15.2.7
Surety, Consent
of 9.10.2, 9.10.3
Surveys
2.2.3
Suspension by the Owner for
Convenience 14.3
Suspension of the Work
5.4.2, 14.3
Suspension or Termination of the
Contract 5.4.1.1, 14
Taxes
3.6, 3.8.2.1, 7.3.7.4
Termination by the
Contractor 14.1, 15.1.6
Termination by the Owner for Cause
5.4.1.1, 14.2, 15.1.6
Termination by the Owner for
Convenience 14.4
Termination of the Architect
4.1.3
Termination of the
Contractor 14.2.2
TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE
CONTRACT
14
Tests and Inspections
3.1.3, 3.3.3, 4.2.2, 4.2.6, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3,
9.9.2,
9.10.1, 10.3.2, 11.4.1.1, 12.2.1, 13.5
TIME
Init.
/
8
Time, Delays and Extensions of
3.2.4, 3.7.4, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7,
10.3.2, 10.4.1, 14.3.2, 15.1.5, 15.2.5
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires
on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
(1784302197)
User Notes:
1
Time Limits
2.1.2, 2.2, 2.4, 3.2.2, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12.5, 3.15.1,
4.2,
5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 6.2.4, 7.3, 7.4, 8.2, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3,
9.4.1,
9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 9.10, 11.1.3, 12.2, 13.5, 13.7,
14,
15.1.2, 15.4
Time Limits on Claims
3.7.4, 10.2.8, 13.7, 15.1.2
T
itl
e
t
o
W
o
r
k
9
.
3
.
2
,
9
.
3
.
3
Transmission of Data in
Digital Form 1.6
UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION
OF WORK 12
Uncovering
of Work
12.1
Unforeseen Conditions, Concealed or Unknown
3.7.4, 8.3.1, 10.3
U
n
it
P
r
i
c
e
s
7
.
3
.
3
.
2
,
7
Init.
/
.3.4
Use of Documents
1.1.1, 1.5, 2.2.5, 3.12.6, 5.3
Use of Site
3.13, 6.1.1, 6.2.1
Values, Schedule of
9.2, 9.3.1
Waiver of Claims by the
Architect 13.4.2
Waiver of Claims by the Contractor
9.10.5, 13.4.2, 15.1.6
Waiver of Claims by the Owner
9.9.3, 9.10.3, 9.10.4, 12.2.2.1, 13.4.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.6
Waiver of Consequential
Damages 14.2.4, 15.1.6
Waiver of Liens
9.10.2, 9.10.4
Waivers of Subrogation
6.1.1, 11.3.7
Warranty
3.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 9.10.4, 12.2.2, 13.7
Weather
Delays
15.1.5.2
Work, Definition of
1.1.3
Written Consent
1.5.2, 3.4.2, 3.7.4, 3.12.8, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 9.3.2, 9.8.5,
9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 11.4.1, 13.2, 13.4.2, 15.4.4.2
Written
Interpretations
4.2.11, 4.2.12
Written Notice
2.3, 2.4, 3.3.1, 3.9, 3.12.9, 3.12.10, 5.2.1, 8.2.2, 9.7,
9.10, 10.2.2, 10.3, 11.1.3, 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 13.3, 14,
15.4.1
Written Orders
1.1.1, 2.3, 3.9, 7, 8.2.2, 12.1, 12.2, 13.5.2, 14.3.1,
15.1.2
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires
on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
(1784302197)
User Notes:
1
ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
§ 1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS
§ 1.1.1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
The Contract Documents are enumerated in the Agreement between the Owner and Contractor (hereinafter the
Agreement) and consist of the Agreement, Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other
Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract, other documents
listed in the Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of the Contract. A Modification is (1) a
written amendment to the Contract signed by both parties, (2) a Change Order, (3) a Construction Change
Directive or (4) a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect. Unless specifically
enumerated in the Agreement, the Contract Documents do not include the advertisement or invitation to
bid, Instructions to Bidders, sample forms, other information furnished by the Owner in anticipation of
receiving bids or proposals, the Contractor’s bid or proposal, or portions of Addenda relating to bidding
requirements.
§ 1.1.2 THE CONTRACT
The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction. The Contract represents the entire and
integrated
agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations or agreements,
either written or oral. The Contract may be amended or modified only by a Modification. The Contract
Documents shall not be construed to create a contractual relationship of any kind (1) between the
Contractor and the Architect or the Architect’s consultants, (2) between the Owner and a Subcontractor or
a Sub-subcontractor, (3) between the Owner and the Architect or the Architect’s consultants or (4)
between any persons or entities other than the Owner and the Contractor. The Architect shall, however, be
entitled to performance and enforcement of obligations under the Contract intended to facilitate
performance of the Architect’s duties.
§ 1.1.3 THE WORK
The term "Work" means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, whether completed or
partially completed, and includes all other labor, materials, equipment and services provided or to be
provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor’s obligations. The Work may constitute the whole or a part
of the Project.
§ 1.1.4 THE PROJECT
The Project is the total construction of which the Work performed under the Contract Documents may be the
whole or
a part and which may include construction by the Owner and by separate contractors.
§ 1.1.5 THE DRAWINGS
The Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents showing the design,
location and
dimensions of the Work, generally including plans, elevations, sections, details, schedules and diagrams.
§ 1.1.6 THE SPECIFICATIONS
The Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for
materials,
equipment, systems, standards and workmanship for the Work, and performance of related services.
§ 1.1.7 INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE
Instruments of Service are representations, in any medium of expression now known or later developed, of
the tangible
and intangible creative work performed by the Architect and the Architect’s consultants under their
respective professional services agreements. Instruments of Service may include, without limitation,
studies, surveys, models, sketches, drawings, specifications, and other similar materials.
§ 1.1.8 INITIAL DECISION MAKER
The Initial Decision Maker is the person identified in the Agreement to render initial decisions on Claims in
accordance with Section 15.2 and certify termination of the Agreement under Section 14.2.2.
Init.
/
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires
on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
(1784302197)
User Notes:
1
§ 1.2 CORRELATION AND INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
§ 1.2.1 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and
completion of the Work by the Contractor. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is
required by one shall be as binding as if required by all; performance by the Contractor shall be required
only to the extent consistent with the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable from them as being
necessary to produce the indicated results.
Init.
/
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires
on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
(1784302197)
User Notes:
1
§ 1.2.2 Organization of the Specifications into divisions, sections and articles, and arrangement of
Drawings shall not control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the
extent of Work to be performed by any trade.
§ 1.2.3 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, words that have well-known technical or
construction industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized
meanings.
§ 1.3 CAPITALIZATION
Terms capitalized in these General Conditions include those that are (1) specifically defined, (2) the titles of numbered
articles or (3) the titles of other documents published by the American Institute of Architects.
§ 1.4 INTERPRETATION
In the interest of brevity the Contract Documents frequently omit modifying words such as "all" and "any"
and articles
such as "the" and "an," but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one statement and appears in
another is not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement.
§ 1.5 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER INSTRUMENTS
OF SERVICE
§ 1.5.1 The Architect and the Architect’s consultants shall be deemed the authors and owners of their
respective Instruments of Service, including the Drawings and Specifications, and will retain all common law,
statutory and other reserved rights, including copyrights. The Contractor, Subcontractors, Subsubcontractors, and material or equipment suppliers shall not own or claim a copyright in the Instruments of
Service. Submittal or distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in
connection with this Project is not to be construed as publication in derogation of the Architect’s or
Architect’s consultants’ reserved rights.
§ 1.5.2 The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors and material or equipment suppliers are
authorized to use and reproduce the Instruments of Service provided to them solely and exclusively for
execution of the Work. All copies made under this authorization shall bear the copyright notice, if any,
shown on the Instruments of Service. The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, and material or
equipment suppliers may not use the Instruments of Service on other projects or for additions to this Project
outside the scope of the Work without the specific written consent of the Owner, Architect and the
Architect’s consultants.
§ 1.6 TRANSMISSION OF DATA IN DIGITAL FORM
If the parties intend to transmit Instruments of Service or any other information or documentation in digital
form, they
shall endeavor to establish necessary protocols governing such transmissions, unless otherwise already
provided in the Agreement or the Contract Documents.
ARTICLE 2 OWNER
§ 2.1 GENERAL
§ 2.1.1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout
the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The Owner shall designate in writing a representative
who shall have express
authority to bind the Owner with respect to all matters requiring the Owner’s approval or authorization.
Except as otherwise provided in Section 4.2.1, the Architect does not have such authority. The term
"Owner" means the Owner or the Owner’s authorized representative.
§ 2.1.2 The Owner shall furnish to the Contractor within fifteen days after receipt of a written request,
information necessary and relevant for the Contractor to evaluate, give notice of or enforce mechanic’s lien
rights. Such information shall include a correct statement of the record legal title to the property on which
the Project is located, usually referred to as the site, and the Owner’s interest therein.
§ 2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER
Init.
/
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires
on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
(1784302197)
User Notes:
10
§ 2.2.1 Prior to commencement of the Work, the Contractor may request in writing that the Owner provide
reasonable evidence that the Owner has made financial arrangements to fulfill the Owner’s obligations
under the Contract. Thereafter, the Contractor may only request such evidence if (1) the Owner fails to
make payments to the Contractor as the Contract Documents require; (2) a change in the Work materially
changes the Contract Sum; or (3) the Contractor identifies in writing a reasonable concern regarding the
Owner’s ability to make payment when due. The Owner shall furnish such evidence as a condition
precedent to commencement or continuation of the Work or the
Init.
/
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires
on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
(1784302197)
User Notes:
10
portion of the Work affected by a material change. After the Owner furnishes the evidence, the Owner shall
not materially vary such financial arrangements without prior notice to the Contractor.
§ 2.2.2 Except for permits and fees that are the responsibility of the Contractor under the Contract
Documents, including those required under Section 3.7.1, the Owner shall secure and pay for
necessary approvals, easements, assessments and charges required for construction, use or
occupancy of permanent structures or for permanent changes in existing facilities.
§ 2.2.3 The Owner shall furnish surveys describing physical characteristics, legal limitations and utility
locations for the site of the Project, and a legal description of the site. The Contractor shall be entitled to
rely on the accuracy of information furnished by the Owner but shall exercise proper precautions relating to
the safe performance of the Work.
§ 2.2.4 The Owner shall furnish information or services required of the Owner by the Contract Documents
with reasonable promptness. The Owner shall also furnish any other information or services under the
Owner’s control and relevant to the Contractor’s performance of the Work with reasonable promptness after
receiving the Contractor’s written request for such information or services.
§ 2.2.5 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor
one copy of the Contract Documents for purposes of making reproductions pursuant to Section 1.5.2.
§ 2.3 OWNER’S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK
If the Contractor fails to correct Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents as
required by Section 12.2 or repeatedly fails to carry out Work in accordance with the Contract Documents,
the Owner may issue a written order to the Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the
cause for such order has been eliminated; however, the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give
rise to a duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other
person or entity, except to the extent required by Section 6.1.3.
§ 2.4 OWNER’S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK
If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents
and fails within a ten-day period after receipt of written notice from the Owner to commence and continue
correction of such
default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner may, without prejudice to other remedies the
Owner may have, correct such deficiencies. In such case an appropriate Change Order shall be issued
deducting from payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the reasonable cost of correcting such
deficiencies, including Owner’s expenses and compensation for the Architect’s additional services made
necessary by such default, neglect or failure. Such action by the Owner and amounts charged to the
Contractor are both subject to prior approval of the Architect. If payments then or thereafter due the
Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amounts, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner.
ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR
§ 3.1 GENERAL
§ 3.1.1 The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to
throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The Contractor shall be lawfully licensed, if
required in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. The Contractor shall designate in writing a
representative who shall have express authority to bind the Contractor with respect to all matters under
this Contract. The term "Contractor" means the Contractor or the Contractor’s authorized representative.
§ 3.1.2 The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
§ 3.1.3 The Contractor shall not be relieved of obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the
Contract Documents either by activities or duties of the Architect in the Architect’s administration of the
Contract, or by tests, inspections or approvals required or performed by persons or entities other than the
Contractor.
Init.
/
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires
on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
(1784302197)
User Notes:
11
§ 3.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR
§ 3.2.1 Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a representation that the Contractor has visited the
site, become generally familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed and correlated
personal observations with requirements of the Contract Documents.
§ 3.2.2 Because the Contract Documents are complementary, the Contractor shall, before starting each
portion of the Work, carefully study and compare the various Contract Documents relative to that portion of
the Work, as well as the information furnished by the Owner pursuant to Section 2.2.3, shall take field
measurements of any existing conditions related to that portion of the Work, and shall observe any
conditions at the site affecting it. These obligations are for the purpose of facilitating coordination and
construction by the Contractor and are not for the purpose of discovering errors, omissions, or
inconsistencies in the Contract Documents; however, the Contractor shall promptly report to the Architect
any errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered by or made known to the Contractor as a request for
information in such form as the Architect may require. It is recognized that the Contractor’s review is made
in the Contractor’s capacity as a contractor and not as a licensed design professional, unless otherwise
specifically provided in the Contract Documents.
§ 3.2.3 The Contractor is not required to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with
applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful orders of public authorities,
but the Contractor shall promptly report to the Architect any nonconformity discovered by or made known to
the Contractor as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require.
§ 3.2.4 If the Contractor believes that additional cost or time is involved because of clarifications or
instructions the Architect issues in response to the Contractor’s notices or requests for information pursuant
to Sections 3.2.2 or 3.2.3, the Contractor shall make Claims as provided in Article 15. If the Contractor fails
to perform the obligations of Sections 3.2.2 or 3.2.3, the Contractor shall pay such costs and damages to
the Owner as would have been avoided if the Contractor had performed such obligations. If the Contractor
performs those obligations, the Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or Architect for damages
resulting from errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents, for differences between field
measurements or conditions and the Contract Documents, or for nonconformities of the Contract
Documents to applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of
public authorities.
§ 3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES
§ 3.3.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using the Contractor’s best skill and attention.
The Contractor shall be solely responsible for, and have control over, construction means, methods,
techniques, sequences
and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract, unless the Contract
Documents give other specific instructions concerning these matters. If the Contract Documents give
specific instructions concerning construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, the
Contractor shall evaluate the jobsite safety thereof and, except as stated below, shall be fully and solely
responsible for the jobsite safety of such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures. If the
Contractor determines that such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures may not be safe,
the Contractor shall give timely written notice to the Owner and Architect and shall not proceed with that
portion of the Work without further written instructions from the Architect. If the Contractor is then instructed
to proceed with the required means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures without acceptance of
changes proposed by the Contractor, the Owner shall be solely responsible for any loss or damage arising
solely from those Owner-required means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures.
§ 3.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contractor’s
employees, Subcontractors and their agents and employees, and other persons or entities performing
portions of the Work for, or on behalf of, the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors.
§ 3.3.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of portions of Work already performed to
determine that such portions are in proper condition to receive subsequent Work.
§ 3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS
Init.
/
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires
on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
(1784302197)
User Notes:
12
§ 3.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for
labor, materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities,
transportation, and other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the
Work, whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work.
Init.
/
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires
on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
(1784302197)
User Notes:
13
§ 3.4.2 Except in the case of minor changes in the Work authorized by the Architect in accordance with Sections
3.12.8 or 7.4, the Contractor may make substitutions only with the consent of the Owner, after evaluation by the
Architect and in accordance with a Change Order or Construction Change Directive.
§ 3.4.3 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among the Contractor’s employees
and other persons carrying out the Work. The Contractor shall not permit employment of unfit persons or
persons not properly skilled in tasks assigned to them.
§ 3.5 WARRANTY
The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will be
of good quality and new unless the Contract Documents require or permit otherwise. The Contractor
further warrants that the Work will conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents and will be free
from defects, except for those inherent in the quality of the Work the Contract Documents require or permit.
Work, materials, or equipment not conforming to these requirements may be considered defective. The
Contractor’s warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse, alterations to the Work not
executed by the Contractor, improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operation, or normal wear and
tear and normal usage. If required by the Architect, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to
the kind and quality of materials and equipment.
§ 3.6 TAXES
The Contractor shall pay sales, consumer, use and similar taxes for the Work provided by the Contractor
that are
legally enacted when bids are received or negotiations concluded, whether or not yet effective or merely
scheduled to go into effect.
§ 3.7 PERMITS, FEES, NOTICES AND COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS
§ 3.7.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall secure and pay for the
building permit as well as for other permits, fees, licenses, and inspections by government agencies
necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work that are customarily secured after execution of
the Contract and legally required at the time bids are received or negotiations concluded.
§ 3.7.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by applicable laws, statutes,
ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities applicable to performance
of the Work.
§ 3.7.3 If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to applicable laws, statutes, ordinances,
codes, rules and regulations, or lawful orders of public authorities, the Contractor shall assume appropriate
responsibility for such Work and shall bear the costs attributable to correction.
§ 3.7.4 Concealed or Unknown Conditions. If the Contractor encounters conditions at the site that are (1)
subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions that differ materially from those indicated in the
Contract Documents or
(2) unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature, that differ materially from those ordinarily found to
exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the
Contract Documents, the Contractor shall promptly provide notice to the Owner and the Architect before
conditions are disturbed and in no event later than 21 days after first observance of the conditions. The
Architect will promptly investigate such conditions and, if the Architect determines that they differ materially
and cause an increase or decrease in the
Contractor’s cost of, or time required for, performance of any part of the Work, will recommend an equitable
adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. If the Architect determines that the conditions at
the site are not materially different from those indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change in the
terms of the Contract is justified, the Architect shall promptly notify the Owner and Contractor in writing,
stating the reasons. If either party disputes the Architect’s determination or recommendation, that party
may proceed as provided in Article 15.
§ 3.7.5 If, in the course of the Work, the Contractor encounters human remains or recognizes the
Init.
/
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires
on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
(1784302197)
User Notes:
14
existence of burial markers, archaeological sites or wetlands not indicated in the Contract Documents, the
Contractor shall immediately suspend any operations that would affect them and shall notify the Owner and
Architect. Upon receipt of such notice, the Owner shall promptly take any action necessary to obtain
governmental authorization required to resume the operations. The Contractor shall continue to suspend
such operations until otherwise instructed by the Owner but shall continue with all other operations that do
not affect those remains or features. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time
arising from the existence of such remains or features may be made as provided in Article 15.
Init.
/
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires
on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
(1784302197)
User Notes:
15
§ 3.8 ALLOWANCES
§ 3.8.1 The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum all allowances stated in the Contract Documents.
Items covered by allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by such persons or entities as the
Owner may direct, but the Contractor shall not be required to employ persons or entities to whom the
Contractor has reasonable objection.
§ 3.8.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,
.1
Allowances shall cover the cost to the Contractor of materials and equipment delivered at
the site and all required taxes, less applicable trade discounts;
.2
Contractor’s costs for unloading and handling at the site, labor, installation costs, overhead,
profit and other expenses contemplated for stated allowance amounts shall be included in
the Contract Sum but not in the allowances; and
.3
Whenever costs are more than or less than allowances, the Contract Sum shall be adjusted
accordingly by Change Order. The amount of the Change Order shall reflect (1) the difference
between actual costs and the allowances under Section 3.8.2.1 and (2) changes in
Contractor’s costs under Section 3.8.2.2.
§ 3.8.3 Materials and equipment under an allowance shall be selected by the Owner with reasonable promptness.
§ 3.9 SUPERINTENDENT
§ 3.9.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be in
attendance at the Project site during performance of the Work. The superintendent shall represent the
Contractor, and communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the
Contractor.
§ 3.9.2 The Contractor, as soon as practicable after award of the Contract, shall furnish in writing to the
Owner through the Architect the name and qualifications of a proposed superintendent. The Architect may
reply within 14 days to the Contractor in writing stating (1) whether the Owner or the Architect has
reasonable objection to the proposed superintendent or (2) that the Architect requires additional time to
review. Failure of the Architect to reply within the 14 day period shall constitute notice of no reasonable
objection.
§ 3.9.3 The Contractor shall not employ a proposed superintendent to whom the Owner or Architect has
made reasonable and timely objection. The Contractor shall not change the superintendent without the
Owner’s consent, which shall not unreasonably be withheld or delayed.
§ 3.10 CONTRACTOR’S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
§ 3.10.1 The Contractor, promptly after being awarded the Contract, shall prepare and submit for the
Owner’s and Architect’s information a Contractor’s construction schedule for the Work. The schedule shall
not exceed time limits current under the Contract Documents, shall be revised at appropriate intervals as
required by the conditions of the Work and Project, shall be related to the entire Project to the extent
required by the Contract Documents, and shall provide for expeditious and practicable execution of the
Work.
§ 3.10.2 The Contractor shall prepare a submittal schedule, promptly after being awarded the Contract
and thereafter as necessary to maintain a current submittal schedule, and shall submit the schedule(s) for
the Architect’s approval. The Architect’s approval shall not unreasonably be delayed or withheld. The
submittal schedule shall (1) be coordinated with the Contractor’s construction schedule, and (2) allow the
Architect reasonable time to review submittals. If the Contractor fails to submit a submittal schedule, the
Contractor shall not be entitled to any increase in Contract Sum or extension of Contract Time based on
the time required for review of submittals.
§ 3.10.3 The Contractor shall perform the Work in general accordance with the most recent schedules
submitted to the Owner and Architect.
§ 3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE
Init.
/
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires
on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
(1784302197)
User Notes:
16
The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Owner one copy of the Drawings, Specifications, Addenda,
Change
Orders and other Modifications, in good order and marked currently to indicate field changes and
selections made during construction, and one copy of approved Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples
and similar required submittals. These shall be available to the Architect and shall be delivered to the
Architect for submittal to the Owner upon completion of the Work as a record of the Work as constructed.
Init.
/
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires
on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
(1784302197)
User Notes:
17
§ 3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES
§ 3.12.1 Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules and other data specially prepared for the
Work by the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor to
illustrate some portion of the Work.
§ 3.12.2 Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures,
diagrams and other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials or equipment for some
portion of the Work.
§ 3.12.3 Samples are physical examples that illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship and
establish standards by which the Work will be judged.
§ 3.12.4 Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals are not Contract Documents. Their
purpose is to demonstrate the way by which the Contractor proposes to conform to the information given
and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents for those portions of the Work for which the
Contract Documents require submittals. Review by the Architect is subject to the limitations of Section
4.2.7. Informational submittals upon which the Architect is not expected to take responsive action may be so
identified in the Contract Documents. Submittals that are not required by the Contract Documents may be
returned by the Architect without action.
§ 3.12.5 The Contractor shall review for compliance with the Contract Documents, approve and submit to
the Architect Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals required by the Contract
Documents in accordance with the submittal schedule approved by the Architect or, in the absence of an
approved submittal schedule, with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in
the Work or in the activities of the Owner or of separate contractors.
§ 3.12.6 By submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals, the Contractor
represents to the Owner and Architect that the Contractor has (1) reviewed and approved them, (2)
determined and verified materials, field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto, or will
do so and (3) checked and coordinated the information contained within such submittals with the
requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents.
§ 3.12.7 The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work for which the Contract Documents require
submittal and review of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals until the respective
submittal has been approved by the Architect.
§ 3.12.8 The Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals except that the Contractor shall not be
relieved of responsibility for deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents by the Architect’s
approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals unless the Contractor has
specifically informed the Architect in writing of such deviation at the time of submittal and (1) the Architect
has given written approval to the specific deviation as a minor change in the Work, or (2) a Change Order
or Construction Change Directive has been issued authorizing the deviation. The Contractor shall not be
relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar
submittals by the Architect’s approval thereof.
§ 3.12.9 The Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product
Data, Samples or similar submittals, to revisions other than those requested by the Architect on previous
submittals. In the absence of such written notice, the Architect’s approval of a resubmission shall not apply
to such revisions.
§ 3.12.10 The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services that constitute the practice
of architecture or engineering unless such services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for
a portion of the Work or unless the Contractor needs to provide such services in order to carry out the
Contractor’s responsibilities for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures.
The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services in violation of applicable law. If
professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems, materials or
equipment are specifically required of the Contractor by the Contract Documents, the Owner and the
Init.
/
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires
on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
(1784302197)
User Notes:
18
Architect will specify all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. The Contractor
shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by a properly licensed design professional,
whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, Shop
Drawings and other submittals prepared by such professional. Shop Drawings and other submittals related
to the Work designed or certified by such professional, if prepared by others, shall bear such professional’s
written approval when submitted to the Architect. The Owner and the Architect shall be entitled to rely upon
the adequacy, accuracy and
Init.
/
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires
on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
(1784302197)
User Notes:
19
completeness of the services, certifications and approvals performed or provided by such design
professionals, provided the Owner and Architect have specified to the Contractor all performance and
design criteria that such services must satisfy. Pursuant to this Section 3.12.10, the Architect will review,
approve or take other appropriate action on submittals only for the limited purpose of checking for
conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. The
Contractor shall not be responsible for the adequacy of the performance and design criteria specified in the
Contract Documents.
§ 3.13 USE OF SITE
The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes,
rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities and the Contract Documents and shall not
unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment.
§ 3.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING
§ 3.14.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, fitting or patching required to complete the Work or to make
its parts fit together properly. All areas requiring cutting, fitting and patching shall be restored to the condition
existing prior to the cutting, fitting and patching, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents.
§ 3.14.2 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger a portion of the Work or fully or partially completed
construction of the Owner or separate contractors by cutting, patching or otherwise altering such
construction, or by excavation. The Contractor shall not cut or otherwise alter such construction by the
Owner or a separate contractor except with written consent of the Owner and of such separate contractor;
such consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. The Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold from the
Owner or a separate contractor the Contractor’s consent to cutting or otherwise altering the Work.
§ 3.15 CLEANING UP
§ 3.15.1 The Contractor shall keep the premises and surrounding area free from accumulation of waste
materials or rubbish caused by operations under the Contract. At completion of the Work, the Contractor
shall remove waste materials, rubbish, the Contractor’s tools, construction equipment, machinery and
surplus materials from and about the Project.
§ 3.15.2 If the Contractor fails to clean up as provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so
and Owner shall be entitled to reimbursement from the Contractor.
§ 3.16 ACCESS TO WORK
The Contractor shall provide the Owner and Architect access to the Work in preparation and progress
wherever
located.
§ 3.17 ROYALTIES, PATENTS AND COPYRIGHTS
The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for
infringement of copyrights and patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless from loss on
account thereof, but shall
not be responsible for such defense or loss when a particular design, process or product of a particular
manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents, or where the copyright violations
are contained in Drawings, Specifications or other documents prepared by the Owner or Architect.
However, if the Contractor has reason to believe that the required design, process or product is an
infringement of a copyright or a patent, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless such
information is promptly furnished to the Architect.
§ 3.18 INDEMNIFICATION
§ 3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner,
Architect, Architect’s consultants, and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims,
damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys’ fees, arising out of or resulting from
performance of the Work, provided that such claim, damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury,
sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), but
only to the extent caused by the negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone
Init.
/
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires
on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
(1784302197)
User Notes:
20
directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, regardless of whether
or not such claim, damage, loss or expense is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. Such
obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity that
would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Section 3.18.
Init.
/
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires
on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
(1784302197)
User Notes:
21
§ 3.18.2 In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Section 3.18 by an employee of the
Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they
may be liable, the indemnification obligation under Section 3.18.1 shall not be limited by a limitation on
amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or a Subcontractor
under workers’ compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts.
ARTICLE 4 ARCHITECT
§ 4.1 GENERAL
§ 4.1.1 The Owner shall retain an architect lawfully licensed to practice architecture or an entity lawfully
practicing architecture in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. That person or entity is identified as
the Architect in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in
number.
§ 4.1.2 Duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Architect as set forth in the Contract
Documents shall not be restricted, modified or extended without written consent of the Owner, Contractor
and Architect. Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld.
§ 4.1.3 If the employment of the Architect is terminated, the Owner shall employ a successor architect as to
whom the Contractor has no reasonable objection and whose status under the Contract Documents shall be
that of the Architect.
§ 4.2 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT
§ 4.2.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract Documents
and will be an Owner’s representative during construction until the date the Architect issues the final
Certificate for Payment. The Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent
provided in the Contract Documents.
§ 4.2.2 The Architect will visit the site at intervals appropriate to the stage of construction, or as otherwise
agreed with the Owner, to become generally familiar with the progress and quality of the portion of the
Work completed, and to determine in general if the Work observed is being performed in a manner
indicating that the Work, when fully completed, will be in accordance with the Contract Documents.
However, the Architect will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check
the quality or quantity of the Work. The Architect will not have control over, charge of, or responsibility for,
the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or for the safety precautions and
programs in connection with the Work, since these are solely the Contractor’s rights and responsibilities
under the Contract Documents, except as provided in Section 3.3.1.
§ 4.2.3 On the basis of the site visits, the Architect will keep the Owner reasonably informed about the
progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed, and report to the Owner (1) known deviations
from the Contract Documents and from the most recent construction schedule submitted by the
Contractor, and (2) defects and deficiencies observed in the Work. The Architect will not be responsible for
the Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract
Documents. The Architect will not have control over or charge of and will not be responsible for acts or
omissions of the Contractor, Subcontractors, or their agents or employees, or any other persons or entities
performing portions of the Work.
§ 4.2.4 COMMUNICATIONS FACILITATING CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION
Except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or when direct communications have been specially
authorized, the Owner and Contractor shall endeavor to communicate with each other through the
Architect about matters arising out of or relating to the Contract. Communications by and with the
Architect’s consultants shall be through the Architect. Communications by and with Subcontractors and
material suppliers shall be through the Contractor. Communications by and with separate contractors shall
be through the Owner.
§ 4.2.5 Based on the Architect’s evaluations of the Contractor’s Applications for Payment, the Architect will
review and certify the amounts due the Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts.
Init.
/
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires
on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
(1784302197)
User Notes:
22
§ 4.2.6 The Architect has authority to reject Work that does not conform to the Contract Documents.
Whenever the Architect considers it necessary or advisable, the Architect will have authority to require
inspection or testing of the Work in accordance with Sections 13.5.2 and 13.5.3, whether or not such Work
is fabricated, installed or completed. However, neither this authority of the Architect nor a decision made in
good faith either to exercise or not to exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the
Architect to the Contractor, Subcontractors, material and equipment suppliers, their agents or employees,
or other persons or entities performing portions of the Work.
Init.
/
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires
on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
(1784302197)
User Notes:
23
§ 4.2.7 The Architect will review and approve, or take other appropriate action upon, the Contractor’s
submittals such as Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, but only for the limited purpose of
checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract
Documents. The Architect’s action will be taken in accordance with the submittal schedule approved by
the Architect or, in the absence of an approved submittal schedule, with reasonable promptness while
allowing sufficient time in the Architect’s professional judgment to permit adequate review. Review of such
submittals is not conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of other details
such as dimensions and quantities, or for substantiating instructions for installation or performance of
equipment or systems, all of which remain the responsibility of the Contractor as required by the Contract
Documents. The Architect’s review of the Contractor’s submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of the
obligations under Sections 3.3, 3.5 and 3.12. The Architect’s review shall not constitute approval of safety
precautions or, unless otherwise specifically stated by the Architect, of any construction means, methods,
techniques, sequences or procedures. The Architect’s approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval
of an assembly of which the item is a component.
§ 4.2.8 The Architect will prepare Change Orders and Construction Change Directives, and may
authorize minor changes in the Work as provided in Section 7.4. The Architect will investigate and
make determinations and recommendations regarding concealed and unknown conditions as provided
in Section 3.7.4.
§ 4.2.9 The Architect will conduct inspections to determine the date or dates of Substantial Completion and
the date of final completion; issue Certificates of Substantial Completion pursuant to Section 9.8; receive
and forward to the Owner, for the Owner’s review and records, written warranties and related documents
required by the Contract and assembled by the Contractor pursuant to Section 9.10; and issue a final
Certificate for Payment pursuant to Section 9.10.
§ 4.2.10 If the Owner and Architect agree, the Architect will provide one or more project representatives to
assist in carrying out the Architect’s responsibilities at the site. The duties, responsibilities and limitations of
authority of such project representatives shall be as set forth in an exhibit to be incorporated in the Contract
Documents.
§ 4.2.11 The Architect will interpret and decide matters concerning performance under, and requirements
of, the Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contractor. The Architect’s response
to such requests will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable
promptness.
§ 4.2.12 Interpretations and decisions of the Architect will be consistent with the intent of, and reasonably
inferable from, the Contract Documents and will be in writing or in the form of drawings. When making such
interpretations and decisions, the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and
Contractor, will not show partiality to either and will not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions
rendered in good faith.
§ 4.2.13 The Architect’s decisions on matters relating to aesthetic effect will be final if consistent with the
intent expressed in the Contract Documents.
§ 4.2.14 The Architect will review and respond to requests for information about the Contract Documents.
The Architect’s response to such requests will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or
otherwise with reasonable promptness. If appropriate, the Architect will prepare and issue supplemental
Drawings and Specifications in response to the requests for information.
ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS
§ 5.1 DEFINITIONS
§ 5.1.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform a
portion of the Work at the site. The term "Subcontractor" is referred to throughout the Contract Documents
as if singular in number and means a Subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Subcontractor.
The term "Subcontractor" does not include a separate contractor or subcontractors of a separate contractor.
Init.
/
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires
on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
(1784302197)
User Notes:
24
§ 5.1.2 A Sub-subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor
to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term "Sub-subcontractor" is referred to throughout the
Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Sub-subcontractor or an authorized
representative of the Sub-subcontractor.
Init.
/
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires
on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
(1784302197)
User Notes:
25
§ 5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK
§ 5.2.1 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents or the bidding requirements, the Contractor,
as soon as practicable after award of the Contract, shall furnish in writing to the Owner through the
Architect the names of persons or entities (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment
fabricated to a special design) proposed for each principal portion of the Work. The Architect may reply
within 14 days to the Contractor in writing stating (1) whether the Owner or the Architect has reasonable
objection to any such proposed person or entity or (2) that the Architect requires additional time for review.
Failure of the Owner or Architect to reply within the 14-day period shall constitute notice of no reasonable
objection.
§ 5.2.2 The Contractor shall not contract with a proposed person or entity to whom the Owner or Architect
has made reasonable and timely objection. The Contractor shall not be required to contract with anyone to
whom the Contractor has made reasonable objection.
§ 5.2.3 If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Contractor,
the Contractor shall propose another to whom the Owner or Architect has no reasonable objection. If the
proposed but rejected Subcontractor was reasonably capable of performing the Work, the Contract Sum and
Contract Time shall be increased or decreased by the difference, if any, occasioned by such change, and an
appropriate Change Order shall be issued before commencement of the substitute Subcontractor’s Work.
However, no increase in the Contract Sum or Contract Time shall be allowed for such change unless the
Contractor has acted promptly and responsively in submitting names as required.
§ 5.2.4 The Contractor shall not substitute a Subcontractor, person or entity previously selected if the
Owner or Architect makes reasonable objection to such substitution.
§ 5.3 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS
By appropriate agreement, written where legally required for validity, the Contractor shall require each
Subcontractor,
to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to the Contractor by terms of
the Contract Documents, and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities,
including the responsibility for safety of the Subcontractor’s Work, which the Contractor, by these
Documents, assumes toward the Owner and Architect. Each subcontract agreement shall preserve and
protect the rights of the Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be
performed by the Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights, and shall allow
to the Subcontractor, unless specifically provided otherwise in the subcontract agreement, the benefit of all
rights, remedies and redress against the Contractor that the Contractor, by the Contract Documents, has
against the Owner. Where appropriate, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar
agreements with Sub-subcontractors. The Contractor shall make available to each proposed
Subcontractor, prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement, copies of the Contract Documents to
which the Subcontractor will be bound, and, upon written request of the Subcontractor, identify to the
Subcontractor terms and conditions of the proposed subcontract agreement that may be at variance with
the Contract Documents. Subcontractors will similarly make copies of applicable portions of such
documents available to their respective proposed Sub-subcontractors.
§ 5.4 CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT OF SUBCONTRACTS
§ 5.4.1 Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work is assigned by the Contractor to the Owner,
provided that
.1
assignment is effective only after termination of the Contract by the Owner for cause
pursuant to Section 14.2 and only for those subcontract agreements that the Owner
accepts by notifying the Subcontractor and Contractor in writing; and
.2
assignment is subject to the prior rights of the surety, if any, obligated under bond
relating to the Contract.
When the Owner accepts the assignment of a subcontract agreement, the Owner assumes the
Contractor’s rights and obligations under the subcontract.
§ 5.4.2 Upon such assignment, if the Work has been suspended for more than 30 days, the
Init.
/
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires
on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
(1784302197)
User Notes:
26
Subcontractor’s compensation shall be equitably adjusted for increases in cost resulting from the
suspension.
§ 5.4.3 Upon such assignment to the Owner under this Section 5.4, the Owner may further assign the
subcontract to a successor contractor or other entity. If the Owner assigns the subcontract to a successor
contractor or other entity, the
Init.
/
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires
on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
(1784302197)
User Notes:
27
Owner shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all of the successor contractor’s obligations under
the subcontract.
ARTICLE 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS
§ 6.1 OWNER’S RIGHT TO PERFORM CONSTRUCTION AND TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS
§ 6.1.1 The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or operations related to the Project with the
Owner’s own forces, and to award separate contracts in connection with other portions of the Project or
other construction or operations on the site under Conditions of the Contract identical or substantially
similar to these including those portions related to insurance and waiver of subrogation. If the Contractor
claims that delay or additional cost is involved because of such action by the Owner, the Contractor shall
make such Claim as provided in Article 15.
§ 6.1.2 When separate contracts are awarded for different portions of the Project or other construction or
operations on the site, the term "Contractor" in the Contract Documents in each case shall mean the
Contractor who executes each separate Owner-Contractor Agreement.
§ 6.1.3 The Owner shall provide for coordination of the activities of the Owner’s own forces and of each
separate contractor with the Work of the Contractor, who shall cooperate with them. The Contractor shall
participate with other separate contractors and the Owner in reviewing their construction schedules. The
Contractor shall make any revisions to the construction schedule deemed necessary after a joint review and
mutual agreement. The construction schedules shall then constitute the schedules to be used by the
Contractor, separate contractors and the Owner until subsequently revised.
§ 6.1.4 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, when the Owner performs construction or
operations related to the Project with the Owner’s own forces, the Owner shall be deemed to be subject to
the same obligations and to have the same rights that apply to the Contractor under the Conditions of the
Contract, including, without excluding others, those stated in Article 3, this Article 6 and Articles 10, 11 and
12.
§ 6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY
§ 6.2.1 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and separate contractors reasonable opportunity for
introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and performance of their activities, and shall
connect and coordinate the Contractor’s construction and operations with theirs as required by the Contract
Documents.
§ 6.2.2 If part of the Contractor’s Work depends for proper execution or results upon construction or
operations by the Owner or a separate contractor, the Contractor shall, prior to proceeding with that portion
of the Work, promptly report to the Architect apparent discrepancies or defects in such other construction
that would render it unsuitable for such proper execution and results. Failure of the Contractor so to report
shall constitute an acknowledgment that the Owner’s or separate contractor’s completed or partially
completed construction is fit and proper to receive the Contractor’s Work, except as to defects not then
reasonably discoverable.
§ 6.2.3 The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for costs the Owner incurs that are payable to a
separate contractor because of the Contractor’s delays, improperly timed activities or defective
construction. The Owner shall be responsible to the Contractor for costs the Contractor incurs because of
a separate contractor’s delays, improperly timed activities, damage to the Work or defective construction.
§ 6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage the Contractor wrongfully causes to completed or
partially completed construction or to property of the Owner or separate contractors as provided in Section
10.2.5.
§ 6.2.5 The Owner and each separate contractor shall have the same responsibilities for cutting and
patching as are described for the Contractor in Section 3.14.
§ 6.3 OWNER’S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP
If a dispute arises among the Contractor, separate contractors and the Owner as to the responsibility under their
Init.
/
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires
on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
(1784302197)
User Notes:
20
respective contracts for maintaining the premises and surrounding area free from waste materials and
rubbish, the Owner may clean up and the Architect will allocate the cost among those responsible.
Init.
/
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires
on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
(1784302197)
User Notes:
20
ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK
§ 7.1 GENERAL
§ 7.1.1 Changes in the Work may be accomplished after execution of the Contract, and without
invalidating the Contract, by Change Order, Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in
the Work, subject to the
limitations stated in this Article 7 and elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
§ 7.1.2 A Change Order shall be based upon agreement among the Owner, Contractor and Architect; a
Construction Change Directive requires agreement by the Owner and Architect and may or may not be
agreed to by the Contractor; an order for a minor change in the Work may be issued by the Architect alone.
§ 7.1.3 Changes in the Work shall be performed under applicable provisions of the Contract Documents,
and the Contractor shall proceed promptly, unless otherwise provided in the Change Order, Construction
Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work.
§ 7.2 CHANGE ORDERS
§ 7.2.1 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner,
Contractor and Architect stating their agreement upon all of the following:
.1
The change in the Work;
.2
The amount of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum; and
.3
The extent of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Time.
§ 7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES
§ 7.3.1 A Construction Change Directive is a written order prepared by the Architect and signed by the
Owner and
Architect, directing a change in the Work prior to agreement on adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum or
Contract Time, or both. The Owner may by Construction Change Directive, without invalidating the
Contract, order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions,
deletions or other revisions, the Contract Sum and Contract Time being adjusted accordingly.
§ 7.3.2 A Construction Change Directive shall be used in the absence of total agreement on the terms of a
Change Order.
§ 7.3.3 If the Construction Change Directive provides for an adjustment to the Contract Sum, the adjustment
shall be based on one of the following methods:
.1
Mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient
substantiating data to permit evaluation;
.2
Unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon;
.3
Cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and a mutually
acceptable fixed or percentage fee; or
.4
As provided in Section 7.3.7.
§ 7.3.4 If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon, and if quantities
originally contemplated are materially changed in a proposed Change Order or Construction Change
Directive so that application of such unit prices to quantities of Work proposed will cause substantial
inequity to the Owner or Contractor, the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted.
§ 7.3.5 Upon receipt of a Construction Change Directive, the Contractor shall promptly proceed with the
change in the Work involved and advise the Architect of the Contractor’s agreement or disagreement with
the method, if any, provided in the Construction Change Directive for determining the proposed adjustment
in the Contract Sum or Contract Time.
§ 7.3.6 A Construction Change Directive signed by the Contractor indicates the Contractor’s agreement
therewith, including adjustment in Contract Sum and Contract Time or the method for determining them.
Such agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be recorded as a Change Order.
§ 7.3.7 If the Contractor does not respond promptly or disagrees with the method for adjustment in the
Init.
/
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires
on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
(1784302197)
User Notes:
21
Contract Sum, the Architect shall determine the method and the adjustment on the basis of reasonable
expenditures and savings of those performing the Work attributable to the change, including, in case of an
increase in the Contract Sum, an amount
Init.
/
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires
on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
(1784302197)
User Notes:
22
for overhead and profit as set forth in the Agreement, or if no such amount is set forth in the Agreement, a
reasonable amount. In such case, and also under Section 7.3.3.3, the Contractor shall keep and present,
in such form as the Architect may prescribe, an itemized accounting together with appropriate supporting
data. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, costs for the purposes of this Section 7.3.7
shall be limited to the following:
.1
Costs of labor, including social security, old age and unemployment insurance, fringe benefits
required by agreement or custom, and workers’ compensation insurance;
.2
Costs of materials, supplies and equipment, including cost of transportation, whether
incorporated or consumed;
.3
Rental costs of machinery and equipment, exclusive of hand tools, whether rented from the
Contractor or others;
.4
Costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance, permit fees, and sales, use or similar taxes
related to the Work; and
.5
Additional costs of supervision and field office personnel directly attributable to the change.
§ 7.3.8 The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contractor to the Owner for a deletion or change that
results in a net decrease in the Contract Sum shall be actual net cost as confirmed by the Architect. When
both additions and credits covering related Work or substitutions are involved in a change, the allowance for
overhead and profit shall be figured on the basis of net increase, if any, with respect to that change.
§ 7.3.9 Pending final determination of the total cost of a Construction Change Directive to the Owner, the
Contractor may request payment for Work completed under the Construction Change Directive in
Applications for Payment. The Architect will make an interim determination for purposes of monthly
certification for payment for those costs and certify for payment the amount that the Architect determines,
in the Architect’s professional judgment, to be reasonably justified. The Architect’s interim determination of
cost shall adjust the Contract Sum on the same basis as a Change Order, subject to the right of either
party to disagree and assert a Claim in accordance with Article 15.
§ 7.3.10 When the Owner and Contractor agree with a determination made by the Architect concerning
the adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time, or otherwise reach agreement upon the
adjustments, such agreement shall be effective immediately and the Architect will prepare a Change
Order. Change Orders may be issued for all or any part of a Construction Change Directive.
§ 7.4 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK
The Architect has authority to order minor changes in the Work not involving adjustment in the Contract Sum
or
extension of the Contract Time and not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract Documents. Such
changes will be effected by written order signed by the Architect and shall be binding on the Owner and
Contractor.
ARTICLE 8 TIME
§ 8.1 DEFINITIONS
§ 8.1.1 Unless otherwise provided, Contract Time is the period of time, including authorized adjustments,
allotted in the Contract Documents for Substantial Completion of the Work.
§ 8.1.2 The date of commencement of the Work is the date established in the Agreement.
§ 8.1.3 The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified by the Architect in accordance with Section
9.8.
§ 8.1.4 The term "day" as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar day unless otherwise
specifically defined.
§ 8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION
§ 8.2.1 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. By executing the
Agreement the Contractor confirms that the Contract Time is a reasonable period for performing the Work.
Init.
/
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires
on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
(1784302197)
User Notes:
23
§ 8.2.2 The Contractor shall not knowingly, except by agreement or instruction of the Owner in writing,
prematurely commence operations on the site or elsewhere prior to the effective date of insurance required
by Article 11 to be furnished by the Contractor and Owner. The date of commencement of the Work shall
not be changed by the effective date of such insurance.
Init.
/
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires
on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
(1784302197)
User Notes:
24
§ 8.2.3 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Substantial
Completion within the Contract Time.
§ 8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME
§ 8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the commencement or progress of the Work by an act or neglect of
the Owner or Architect, or of an employee of either, or of a separate contractor employed by the Owner; or
by changes ordered in the Work; or by labor disputes, fire, unusual delay in deliveries, unavoidable
casualties or other causes beyond the Contractor’s control; or by delay authorized by the Owner pending
mediation and arbitration; or by other causes that the Architect determines may justify delay, then the
Contract Time shall be extended by Change Order for such reasonable time as the Architect may
determine.
§ 8.3.2 Claims relating to time shall be made in accordance with applicable provisions of Article 15.
§ 8.3.3 This Section 8.3 does not preclude recovery of damages for delay by either party under other
provisions of the Contract Documents.
ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
§ 9.1 CONTRACT SUM
The Contract Sum is stated in the Agreement and, including authorized adjustments, is the total amount
payable by the
Owner to the Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents.
§ 9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
Where the Contract is based on a stipulated sum or Guaranteed Maximum Price, the Contractor shall
submit to the
Architect, before the first Application for Payment, a schedule of values allocating the entire Contract Sum
to the various portions of the Work and prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate
its accuracy as the Architect may require. This schedule, unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used
as a basis for reviewing the Contractor’s Applications for Payment.
§ 9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
§ 9.3.1 At least ten days before the date established for each progress payment, the Contractor shall
submit to the Architect an itemized Application for Payment prepared in accordance with the schedule of
values, if required under
Section 9.2, for completed portions of the Work. Such application shall be notarized, if required, and
supported by such data substantiating the Contractor’s right to payment as the Owner or Architect may
require, such as copies of requisitions from Subcontractors and material suppliers, and shall reflect
retainage if provided for in the Contract Documents.
§ 9.3.1.1 As provided in Section 7.3.9, such applications may include requests for payment on account of
changes in the Work that have been properly authorized by Construction Change Directives, or by interim
determinations of the Architect, but not yet included in Change Orders.
§ 9.3.1.2 Applications for Payment shall not include requests for payment for portions of the Work for
which the Contractor does not intend to pay a Subcontractor or material supplier, unless such Work has
been performed by others whom the Contractor intends to pay.
§ 9.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, payments shall be made on account of
materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the Work.
If approved in advance by the Owner, payment may similarly be made for materials and equipment suitably
stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing. Payment for materials and equipment stored on or
off the site shall be conditioned upon compliance by the Contractor with procedures satisfactory to the
Owner to establish the Owner’s title to such materials and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner’s
interest, and shall include the costs of applicable insurance, storage and transportation to the site for such
materials and equipment stored off the site.
Init.
/
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires
on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
(1784302197)
User Notes:
25
§ 9.3.3 The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by an Application for Payment will pass to the
Owner no later than the time of payment. The Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an
Application for Payment all Work for which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued and
payments received from the Owner shall, to the best of the Contractor’s knowledge, information and belief,
be free and clear of liens, claims, security interests or
Init.
/
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires
on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
(1784302197)
User Notes:
26
encumbrances in favor of the Contractor, Subcontractors, material suppliers, or other persons or entities
making a claim by reason of having provided labor, materials and equipment relating to the Work.
§ 9.4 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT
§ 9.4.1 The Architect will, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor’s Application for Payment, either
issue to the Owner a Certificate for Payment, with a copy to the Contractor, for such amount as the
Architect determines is
properly due, or notify the Contractor and Owner in writing of the Architect’s reasons for withholding
certification in whole or in part as provided in Section 9.5.1.
§ 9.4.2 The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a representation by the Architect to the
Owner, based on the Architect’s evaluation of the Work and the data comprising the Application for
Payment, that, to the best of the Architect’s knowledge, information and belief, the Work has progressed to
the point indicated and that the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents. The
foregoing representations are subject to an evaluation of the Work for conformance with the Contract
Documents upon Substantial Completion, to results of subsequent tests and inspections, to correction of
minor deviations from the Contract Documents prior to completion and to specific qualifications expressed
by the Architect. The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will further constitute a representation that the
Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified. However, the issuance of a Certificate for Payment
will not be a representation that the Architect has (1) made exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to
check the quality or quantity of the Work, (2) reviewed construction means, methods, techniques,
sequences or procedures, (3) reviewed copies of requisitions received from Subcontractors and material
suppliers and other data requested by the Owner to substantiate the Contractor’s right to payment, or (4)
made examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used money previously paid on
account of the Contract Sum.
§ 9.5 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION
§ 9.5.1 The Architect may withhold a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part, to the extent reasonably
necessary to protect the Owner, if in the Architect’s opinion the representations to the Owner required by
Section 9.4.2 cannot be made. If the Architect is unable to certify payment in the amount of the Application,
the Architect will notify the Contractor and Owner as provided in Section 9.4.1. If the Contractor and
Architect cannot agree on a revised amount, the Architect will promptly issue a Certificate for Payment for
the amount for which the Architect is able to make such representations to the Owner. The Architect may
also withhold a Certificate for Payment or, because of subsequently discovered evidence, may nullify the
whole or a part of a Certificate for Payment previously issued, to such extent as may be necessary in the
Architect’s opinion to protect the Owner from loss for which the Contractor is responsible, including loss
resulting from acts and omissions described in Section 3.3.2, because of
.1
defective Work not remedied;
.2
third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims unless
security acceptable to the Owner is provided by the Contractor;
.3
failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or for labor,
materials or equipment;
.4
reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum;
.5
damage to the Owner or a separate contractor;
.6
reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time, and that
the unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover actual or liquidated damages for the
anticipated delay; or
.7
repeated failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
§ 9.5.2 When the above reasons for withholding certification are removed, certification will be made for
amounts previously withheld.
§ 9.5.3 If the Architect withholds certification for payment under Section 9.5.1.3, the Owner may, at its sole
option, issue joint checks to the Contractor and to any Subcontractor or material or equipment suppliers to
whom the Contractor failed to make payment for Work properly performed or material or equipment
suitably delivered. If the Owner makes payments by joint check, the Owner shall notify the Architect and
the Architect will reflect such payment on the next Certificate for Payment.
Init.
/
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires
on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
(1784302197)
User Notes:
27
§ 9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS
§ 9.6.1 After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment, the Owner shall make payment in the
manner and
within the time provided in the Contract Documents, and shall so notify the Architect.
Init.
/
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires
on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
(1784302197)
User Notes:
28
§ 9.6.2 The Contractor shall pay each Subcontractor no later than seven days after receipt of payment
from the Owner the amount to which the Subcontractor is entitled, reflecting percentages actually retained
from payments to the Contractor on account of the Subcontractor’s portion of the Work. The Contractor
shall, by appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor, require each Subcontractor to make payments to
Sub-subcontractors in a similar manner.
§ 9.6.3 The Architect will, on request, furnish to a Subcontractor, if practicable, information regarding
percentages of completion or amounts applied for by the Contractor and action taken thereon by the
Architect and Owner on account of portions of the Work done by such Subcontractor.
§ 9.6.4 The Owner has the right to request written evidence from the Contractor that the Contractor has
properly paid Subcontractors and material and equipment suppliers amounts paid by the Owner to the
Contractor for subcontracted Work. If the Contractor fails to furnish such evidence within seven days, the
Owner shall have the right to contact Subcontractors to ascertain whether they have been properly paid.
Neither the Owner nor Architect shall have an obligation to pay or to see to the payment of money to a
Subcontractor, except as may otherwise be required by law.
§ 9.6.5 Contractor payments to material and equipment suppliers shall be treated in a manner similar to
that provided in Sections 9.6.2, 9.6.3 and 9.6.4.
§ 9.6.6 A Certificate for Payment, a progress payment, or partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project
by the Owner shall not constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents.
§ 9.6.7 Unless the Contractor provides the Owner with a payment bond in the full penal sum of the
Contract Sum, payments received by the Contractor for Work properly performed by Subcontractors and
suppliers shall be held by the Contractor for those Subcontractors or suppliers who performed Work or
furnished materials, or both, under contract with the Contractor for which payment was made by the
Owner. Nothing contained herein shall require money to be placed in a separate account and not
commingled with money of the Contractor, shall create any fiduciary liability or tort liability on the part of the
Contractor for breach of trust or shall entitle any person or entity to an award of punitive damages against
the Contractor for breach of the requirements of this provision.
§ 9.7 FAILURE OF PAYMENT
If the Architect does not issue a Certificate for Payment, through no fault of the Contractor, within seven days after
receipt of the Contractor’s Application for Payment, or if the Owner does not pay the Contractor within
seven days after the date established in the Contract Documents the amount certified by the Architect or
awarded by binding dispute resolution, then the Contractor may, upon seven additional days’ written notice
to the Owner and Architect, stop the Work until payment of the amount owing has been received. The
Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of
the Contractor’s reasonable costs of
shut-down, delay and start-up, plus interest as provided for in the Contract Documents.
§ 9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
§ 9.8.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated
portion thereof is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can
occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use.
§ 9.8.2 When the Contractor considers that the Work, or a portion thereof which the Owner agrees to
accept separately, is substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect a
comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment. Failure to include an item
on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the
Contract Documents.
§ 9.8.3 Upon receipt of the Contractor’s list, the Architect will make an inspection to determine whether
the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete. If the Architect’s inspection discloses any
item, whether or not included on the Contractor’s list, which is not sufficiently complete in accordance with
the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work or designated portion thereof for
Init.
/
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires
on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
(1784302197)
User Notes:
29
its intended use, the Contractor shall, before issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion,
complete or correct such item upon notification by the Architect. In such case, the Contractor shall then
submit a request for another inspection by the Architect to determine Substantial Completion.
Init.
/
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires
on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
(1784302197)
User Notes:
30
§ 9.8.4 When the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete, the Architect will prepare a
Certificate of Substantial Completion that shall establish the date of Substantial Completion, shall establish
responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work
and insurance, and shall fix the time within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the list
accompanying the Certificate. Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the
date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the
Certificate of Substantial Completion.
§ 9.8.5 The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be submitted to the Owner and Contractor for their
written acceptance of responsibilities assigned to them in such Certificate. Upon such acceptance and
consent of surety, if any, the Owner shall make payment of retainage applying to such Work or designated
portion thereof. Such payment shall be adjusted for Work that is incomplete or not in accordance with the
requirements of the Contract Documents.
§ 9.9 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE
§ 9.9.1 The Owner may occupy or use any completed or partially completed portion of the Work at any
stage when such portion is designated by separate agreement with the Contractor, provided such
occupancy or use is consented to by the insurer as required under Section 11.3.1.5 and authorized by
public authorities having jurisdiction over the Project. Such partial occupancy or use may commence
whether or not the portion is substantially complete, provided the Owner and Contractor have accepted in
writing the responsibilities assigned to each of them for payments, retainage, if any, security, maintenance,
heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and have agreed in writing concerning the period for
correction of the Work and commencement of warranties required by the Contract Documents. When the
Contractor considers a portion substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit a list to the
Architect as provided under Section 9.8.2. Consent of the Contractor to partial occupancy or use shall not
be unreasonably withheld. The stage of the progress of the Work shall be determined by written
agreement between the Owner and Contractor or, if no agreement is reached, by decision of the Architect.
§ 9.9.2 Immediately prior to such partial occupancy or use, the Owner, Contractor and Architect shall
jointly inspect the area to be occupied or portion of the Work to be used in order to determine and record
the condition of the Work.
§ 9.9.3 Unless otherwise agreed upon, partial occupancy or use of a portion or portions of the Work shall
not constitute acceptance of Work not complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
§ 9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT
§ 9.10.1 Upon receipt of the Contractor’s written notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and
acceptance and
upon receipt of a final Application for Payment, the Architect will promptly make such inspection and, when
the Architect finds the Work acceptable under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully performed,
the Architect will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment stating that to the best of the Architect’s
knowledge, information and belief, and on the basis of the Architect’s on-site visits and inspections, the
Work has been completed in accordance with terms and conditions of the Contract Documents and that
the entire balance found to be due the Contractor and noted in the final Certificate is due and payable. The
Architect’s final Certificate for Payment will constitute a further representation that conditions listed in
Section 9.10.2 as precedent to the Contractor’s being entitled to final payment have been fulfilled.
§ 9.10.2 Neither final payment nor any remaining retained percentage shall become due until the
Contractor submits to the Architect (1) an affidavit that payrolls, bills for materials and equipment, and other
indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner’s property might be responsible
or encumbered (less amounts withheld by Owner) have been paid or otherwise satisfied, (2) a certificate
evidencing that insurance required by the Contract Documents to remain in force after final payment is
currently in effect and will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days’ prior written notice
has been given to the Owner, (3) a written statement that the Contractor knows of no substantial reason
that the insurance will not be renewable to cover the period required by the Contract Documents, (4)
consent of surety, if any, to final payment and (5), if required by the Owner, other data establishing
payment or satisfaction of obligations, such as receipts, releases and waivers of liens, claims, security
Init.
/
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires
on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
(1784302197)
User Notes:
31
interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract, to the extent and in such form as may be
designated by the Owner. If a Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the Owner,
the Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against such lien. If
such lien remains unsatisfied after payments are made, the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all money
that the Owner may be compelled to pay in discharging such lien, including all costs and reasonable
attorneys’ fees.
Init.
/
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires
on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
(1784302197)
User Notes:
32
§ 9.10.3 If, after Substantial Completion of the Work, final completion thereof is materially delayed through
no fault of the Contractor or by issuance of Change Orders affecting final completion, and the Architect so
confirms, the Owner shall, upon application by the Contractor and certification by the Architect, and
without terminating the Contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully
completed and accepted. If the remaining balance for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than
retainage stipulated in the Contract Documents, and if bonds have been furnished, the written consent of
surety to payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be
submitted by the Contractor to the Architect prior to certification of such payment. Such payment shall be
made under terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of
claims.
§ 9.10.4 The making of final payment shall constitute a waiver of Claims by the Owner except those arising from
.1
liens, Claims, security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract and unsettled;
.2
failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents; or
.3
terms of special warranties required by the Contract Documents.
§ 9.10.5 Acceptance of final payment by the Contractor, a Subcontractor or material supplier shall
constitute a waiver of claims by that payee except those previously made in writing and identified by that
payee as unsettled at the time of final Application for Payment.
ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
§ 10.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS
The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in
connection with the performance of the Contract.
§ 10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
§ 10.2.1 The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for safety of, and shall provide reasonable
protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to
.1
employees on the Work and other persons who may be affected thereby;
.2
the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or
off the site, under care, custody or control of the Contractor or the Contractor’s
Subcontractors or
Sub-subcontractors; and
.3
other property at the site or adjacent thereto, such as trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements,
roadways, structures and utilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the
course of construction.
§ 10.2.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by applicable laws, statutes,
ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on safety of
persons or property or their protection from damage, injury or loss.
§ 10.2.3 The Contractor shall erect and maintain, as required by existing conditions and performance of
the Contract, reasonable safeguards for safety and protection, including posting danger signs and other
warnings against hazards, promulgating safety regulations and notifying owners and users of adjacent
sites and utilities.
§ 10.2.4 When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment or unusual
methods are necessary for execution of the Work, the Contractor shall exercise utmost care and carry on
such activities under supervision of properly qualified personnel.
§ 10.2.5 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss (other than damage or loss insured
under property insurance required by the Contract Documents) to property referred to in Sections 10.2.1.2
and 10.2.1.3 caused in whole or in part by the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub-subcontractor, or anyone
directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable and for which
the Contractor is responsible under Sections
10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3, except damage or loss attributable to acts or omissions of the Owner or Architect or
anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them, or by anyone for whose acts either of them may
Init.
/
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires
on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
(1784302197)
User Notes:
33
be liable, and not attributable to the fault or negligence of the Contractor. The foregoing obligations of the
Contractor are in addition to the Contractor’s obligations under Section 3.18.
Init.
/
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires
on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
(1784302197)
User Notes:
34
§ 10.2.6 The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of the Contractor’s organization at the site
whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractor’s superintendent
unless otherwise designated by the Contractor in writing to the Owner and Architect.
§ 10.2.7 The Contractor shall not permit any part of the construction or site to be loaded so as to cause
damage or create an unsafe condition.
§ 10.2.8 INJURY OR DAMAGE TO PERSON OR PROPERTY
If either party suffers injury or damage to person or property because of an act or omission of the other party, or of
others for whose acts such party is legally responsible, written notice of such injury or damage, whether or not
insured, shall be given to the other party within a reasonable time not exceeding 21 days after discovery.
The notice shall provide sufficient detail to enable the other party to investigate the matter.
§ 10.3 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
§ 10.3.1 The Contractor is responsible for compliance with any requirements included in the Contract
Documents regarding hazardous materials. If the Contractor encounters a hazardous material or
substance not addressed in the Contract Documents and if reasonable precautions will be inadequate to
prevent foreseeable bodily injury or death to persons resulting from a material or substance, including but
not limited to asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB), encountered on the site by the Contractor, the
Contractor shall, upon recognizing the condition, immediately stop Work in the affected area and report the
condition to the Owner and Architect in writing.
§ 10.3.2 Upon receipt of the Contractor’s written notice, the Owner shall obtain the services of a licensed
laboratory to verify the presence or absence of the material or substance reported by the Contractor and, in
the event such material or substance is found to be present, to cause it to be rendered harmless. Unless
otherwise required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall furnish in writing to the Contractor and
Architect the names and qualifications of persons or entities who are to perform tests verifying the
presence or absence of such material or substance or who are to perform the task of removal or safe
containment of such material or substance. The Contractor and the Architect will promptly reply to the
Owner in writing stating whether or not either has reasonable objection to the persons or entities proposed
by the Owner. If either the Contractor or Architect has an objection to a person or entity proposed by the
Owner, the Owner shall propose another to whom the Contractor and the Architect have no reasonable
objection. When the material or substance has been rendered harmless, Work in the affected area shall
resume upon written agreement of the Owner and Contractor. By Change Order, the Contract Time shall be
extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased in the amount of the Contractor’s
reasonable additional costs of shut-down, delay and start-up.
§ 10.3.3 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the
Contractor, Subcontractors, Architect, Architect’s consultants and agents and employees of any of them
from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys’ fees,
arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work in the affected area if in fact the material or
substance presents the risk of bodily injury or death as described in Section 10.3.1 and has not been
rendered harmless, provided that such claim, damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury,
sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself),
except to the extent that such damage, loss or expense is due to the fault or negligence of the party
seeking indemnity.
§ 10.3.4 The Owner shall not be responsible under this Section 10.3 for materials or substances the
Contractor brings to the site unless such materials or substances are required by the Contract Documents.
The Owner shall be responsible for materials or substances required by the Contract Documents, except to
the extent of the Contractor’s fault or negligence in the use and handling of such materials or substances.
§ 10.3.5 The Contractor shall indemnify the Owner for the cost and expense the Owner incurs (1) for
remediation of a material or substance the Contractor brings to the site and negligently handles, or (2)
where the Contractor fails to perform its obligations under Section 10.3.1, except to the extent that the cost
and expense are due to the Owner’s fault or negligence.
Init.
/
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires
on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
(1784302197)
User Notes:
35
§ 10.3.6 If, without negligence on the part of the Contractor, the Contractor is held liable by a government
agency for the cost of remediation of a hazardous material or substance solely by reason of performing
Work as required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall indemnify the Contractor for all cost and
expense thereby incurred.
Init.
/
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires
on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
(1784302197)
User Notes:
36
§ 10.4 EMERGENCIES
In an emergency affecting safety of persons or property, the Contractor shall act, at the Contractor’s
discretion, to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss. Additional compensation or extension of time
claimed by the Contractor on
account of an emergency shall be determined as provided in Article 15 and Article 7.
ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS
§ 11.1 CONTRACTOR’S LIABILITY INSURANCE
§ 11.1.1 The Contractor shall purchase from and maintain in a company or companies lawfully authorized
to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located such insurance as will protect the Contractor
from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from the Contractor’s operations and completed
operations under the Contract and for which the Contractor may be legally liable, whether such operations
be by the Contractor or by a Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or
by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable:
.1
Claims under workers’ compensation, disability benefit and other similar employee benefit acts
that are applicable to the Work to be performed;
.2
Claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or
death of the Contractor’s employees;
.3
Claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person
other than the Contractor’s employees;
.4
Claims for damages insured by usual personal injury liability coverage;
.5
Claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of
tangible property, including loss of use resulting therefrom;
.6
Claims for damages because of bodily injury, death of a person or property damage
arising out of ownership, maintenance or use of a motor vehicle;
.7
Claims for bodily injury or property damage arising out of completed operations; and
.8
Claims involving contractual liability insurance applicable to the Contractor’s obligations
under Section 3.18.
§ 11.1.2 The insurance required by Section 11.1.1 shall be written for not less than limits of liability
specified in the Contract Documents or required by law, whichever coverage is greater. Coverages,
whether written on an occurrence or claims-made basis, shall be maintained without interruption from the
date of commencement of the Work until the date of final payment and termination of any coverage
required to be maintained after final payment, and, with respect to the Contractor’s completed operations
coverage, until the expiration of the period for correction of Work or for such other period for maintenance of
completed operations coverage as specified in the Contract Documents.
§ 11.1.3 Certificates of insurance acceptable to the Owner shall be filed with the Owner prior to
commencement of the Work and thereafter upon renewal or replacement of each required policy of
insurance. These certificates and the insurance policies required by this Section 11.1 shall contain a
provision that coverages afforded under the policies will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least
30 days’ prior written notice has been given to the Owner. An additional certificate evidencing continuation
of liability coverage, including coverage for completed operations, shall be submitted with the final
Application for Payment as required by Section 9.10.2 and thereafter upon renewal or replacement of such
coverage until the expiration of the time required by Section 11.1.2. Information concerning reduction of
coverage on account of revised limits or claims paid under the General Aggregate, or both, shall be
furnished by the Contractor with reasonable promptness.
§ 11.1.4 The Contractor shall cause the commercial liability coverage required by the Contract Documents
to include
(1) the Owner, the Architect and the Architect’s consultants as additional insureds for claims caused in whole or in part
by the Contractor’s negligent acts or omissions during the Contractor’s operations; and (2) the Owner as an
additional insured for claims caused in whole or in part by the Contractor’s negligent acts or omissions
during the Contractor’s completed operations.
§ 11.2 OWNER’S LIABILITY INSURANCE
Init.
/
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires
on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
(1784302197)
User Notes:
37
The Owner shall be responsible for purchasing and maintaining the Owner’s usual liability insurance.
Init.
/
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires
on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
(1784302197)
User Notes:
38
§ 11.3 PROPERTY INSURANCE
§ 11.3.1 Unless otherwise provided, the Owner shall purchase and maintain, in a company or companies
lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located, property insurance
written on a builder’s risk "all-risk" or equivalent policy form in the amount of the initial Contract Sum, plus
value of subsequent Contract Modifications and cost of materials supplied or installed by others, comprising
total value for the entire Project at the site on a replacement cost basis without optional deductibles. Such
property insurance shall be maintained, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or otherwise
agreed in writing by all persons and entities who are beneficiaries of such insurance, until final payment has
been made as provided in Section 9.10 or until no person or entity other than the Owner has an insurable
interest in the property required by this Section 11.3 to be covered, whichever is later. This insurance shall
include interests of the Owner, the Contractor, Subcontractors and
Sub-subcontractors in the Project.
§ 11.3.1.1 Property insurance shall be on an "all-risk" or equivalent policy form and shall include, without
limitation, insurance against the perils of fire (with extended coverage) and physical loss or damage
including, without duplication of coverage, theft, vandalism, malicious mischief, collapse, earthquake, flood,
windstorm, falsework, testing and startup, temporary buildings and debris removal including demolition
occasioned by enforcement of any applicable legal requirements, and shall cover reasonable
compensation for Architect’s and Contractor’s services and expenses required as a result of such insured
loss.
§ 11.3.1.2 If the Owner does not intend to purchase such property insurance required by the Contract and
with all of the coverages in the amount described above, the Owner shall so inform the Contractor in writing
prior to commencement of the Work. The Contractor may then effect insurance that will protect the interests
of the Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Work, and by appropriate Change Order
the cost thereof shall be charged to the Owner. If the Contractor is damaged by the failure or neglect of the
Owner to purchase or maintain insurance as described above, without so notifying the Contractor in
writing, then the Owner shall bear all reasonable costs properly attributable thereto.
§ 11.3.1.3 If the property insurance requires deductibles, the Owner shall pay costs not covered because
of such deductibles.
§ 11.3.1.4 This property insurance shall cover portions of the Work stored off the site, and also portions of
the Work in transit.
§ 11.3.1.5 Partial occupancy or use in accordance with Section 9.9 shall not commence until the insurance
company or companies providing property insurance have consented to such partial occupancy or use by
endorsement or otherwise. The Owner and the Contractor shall take reasonable steps to obtain consent of
the insurance company or companies and shall, without mutual written consent, take no action with
respect to partial occupancy or use that would cause cancellation, lapse or reduction of insurance.
§ 11.3.2 BOILER AND MACHINERY INSURANCE
The Owner shall purchase and maintain boiler and machinery insurance required by the Contract Documents or by
law, which shall specifically cover such insured objects during installation and until final acceptance by
the Owner; this insurance shall include interests of the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors and Subsubcontractors in the Work, and the Owner and Contractor shall be named insureds.
§ 11.3.3 LOSS OF USE INSURANCE
The Owner, at the Owner’s option, may purchase and maintain such insurance as will insure the Owner against loss of
use of the Owner’s property due to fire or other hazards, however caused. The Owner waives all rights
of action against the Contractor for loss of use of the Owner’s property, including consequential losses
due to fire or other hazards however caused.
§ 11.3.4 If the Contractor requests in writing that insurance for risks other than those described herein or
other special causes of loss be included in the property insurance policy, the Owner shall, if possible,
include such insurance, and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor by appropriate Change
Order.
Init.
/
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires
on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
(1784302197)
User Notes:
30
§ 11.3.5 If during the Project construction period the Owner insures properties, real or personal or both, at
or adjacent to the site by property insurance under policies separate from those insuring the Project, or if
after final payment
Init.
/
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires
on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
(1784302197)
User Notes:
30
property insurance is to be provided on the completed Project through a policy or policies other than those
insuring the Project during the construction period, the Owner shall waive all rights in accordance with the
terms of Section 11.3.7 for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss covered by this separate
property insurance. All separate policies shall provide this waiver of subrogation by endorsement or
otherwise.
§ 11.3.6 Before an exposure to loss may occur, the Owner shall file with the Contractor a copy of each
policy that includes insurance coverages required by this Section 11.3. Each policy shall contain all
generally applicable conditions, definitions, exclusions and endorsements related to this Project. Each
policy shall contain a provision that the policy will not be canceled or allowed to expire, and that its limits will
not be reduced, until at least 30 days’ prior written notice has been given to the Contractor.
§ 11.3.7 WAIVERS OF SUBROGATION
The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against (1) each other and any of their subcontractors, sub-subcontractors,
agents and employees, each of the other, and (2) the Architect, Architect’s consultants, separate
contractors described in Article 6, if any, and any of their subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents and
employees, for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss to the extent covered by property
insurance obtained pursuant to this Section 11.3 or other property insurance applicable to the Work,
except such rights as they have to proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner as fiduciary. The Owner
or Contractor, as appropriate, shall require of the Architect, Architect’s consultants, separate contractors
described in Article 6, if any, and the subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents and employees of any of
them, by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, similar waivers each in favor of
other parties enumerated herein. The policies shall provide such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or
otherwise. A waiver of subrogation shall be effective as to a person or entity even though that person or
entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification, contractual or otherwise, did not pay the insurance
premium directly or indirectly, and whether or not the person or entity had an insurable interest in the
property damaged.
§ 11.3.8 A loss insured under the Owner’s property insurance shall be adjusted by the Owner as fiduciary
and made payable to the Owner as fiduciary for the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to
requirements of any applicable mortgagee clause and of Section 11.3.10. The Contractor shall pay
Subcontractors their just shares of insurance proceeds received by the Contractor, and by appropriate
agreements, written where legally required for validity, shall require Subcontractors to make payments to
their Sub-subcontractors in similar manner.
§ 11.3.9 If required in writing by a party in interest, the Owner as fiduciary shall, upon occurrence of an
insured loss, give bond for proper performance of the Owner’s duties. The cost of required bonds shall be
charged against proceeds received as fiduciary. The Owner shall deposit in a separate account proceeds
so received, which the Owner shall distribute in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest
may reach, or as determined in accordance with the method of binding dispute resolution selected in the
Agreement between the Owner and Contractor. If after such loss no other special agreement is made and
unless the Owner terminates the Contract for convenience, replacement of damaged property shall be
performed by the Contractor after notification of a Change in the Work in accordance with Article 7.
§ 11.3.10 The Owner as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and settle a loss with insurers unless one of
the parties in interest shall object in writing within five days after occurrence of loss to the Owner’s exercise
of this power; if such objection is made, the dispute shall be resolved in the manner selected by the Owner
and Contractor as the method of binding dispute resolution in the Agreement. If the Owner and Contractor
have selected arbitration as the method of binding dispute resolution, the Owner as fiduciary shall make
settlement with insurers or, in the case of a dispute over distribution of insurance proceeds, in accordance
with the directions of the arbitrators.
§ 11.4 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND
§ 11.4.1 The Owner shall have the right to require the Contractor to furnish bonds covering faithful
performance of the Contract and payment of obligations arising thereunder as stipulated in bidding
requirements or specifically required in the Contract Documents on the date of execution of the Contract.
Init.
/
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires
on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
(1784302197)
User Notes:
31
§ 11.4.2 Upon the request of any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of bonds covering
payment of obligations arising under the Contract, the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of the
bonds or shall authorize a copy to be furnished.
Init.
/
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires
on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
(1784302197)
User Notes:
32
ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK
§ 12.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK
§ 12.1.1 If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the Architect’s request or to requirements
specifically expressed in the Contract Documents, it must, if requested in writing by the Architect, be
uncovered for the Architect’s
examination and be replaced at the Contractor’s expense without change in the Contract Time.
§ 12.1.2 If a portion of the Work has been covered that the Architect has not specifically requested to
examine prior to its being covered, the Architect may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered
by the Contractor. If such Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, costs of uncovering and
replacement shall, by appropriate Change Order, be at the Owner’s expense. If such Work is not in
accordance with the Contract Documents, such costs and the cost of correction shall be at the Contractor’s
expense unless the condition was caused by the Owner or a separate contractor in which event the Owner
shall be responsible for payment of such costs.
§ 12.2 CORRECTION OF WORK
§ 12.2.1 BEFORE OR AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
The Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Architect or failing to conform to the requirements of the
Contract Documents, whether discovered before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not
fabricated, installed or completed. Costs of correcting such rejected Work, including additional testing and
inspections, the cost of uncovering and replacement, and compensation for the Architect’s services and
expenses made necessary thereby, shall be at the Contractor’s expense.
§ 12.2.2 AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
§ 12.2.2.1 In addition to the Contractor’s obligations under Section 3.5, if, within one year after the date of
Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof or after the date for commencement of
warranties established under Section 9.9.1, or by terms of an applicable special warranty required by the
Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be not in accordance with the requirements of the
Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of written notice from the Owner
to do so unless the Owner has previously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition. The
Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition. During the one-year period for
correction of Work, if the Owner fails to notify the Contractor and give the Contractor an opportunity to
make the correction, the Owner waives the rights to require correction by the Contractor and to make a
claim for breach of warranty. If the Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work within a reasonable time
during that period after receipt of notice from the Owner or Architect, the Owner may correct it in
accordance with Section 2.4.
§ 12.2.2.2 The one-year period for correction of Work shall be extended with respect to portions of
Work first performed after Substantial Completion by the period of time between Substantial
Completion and the actual completion of that portion of the Work.
§ 12.2.2.3 The one-year period for correction of Work shall not be extended by corrective Work performed
by the Contractor pursuant to this Section 12.2.
§ 12.2.3 The Contractor shall remove from the site portions of the Work that are not in accordance with
the requirements of the Contract Documents and are neither corrected by the Contractor nor accepted by
the Owner.
§ 12.2.4 The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged construction, whether
completed or partially completed, of the Owner or separate contractors caused by the Contractor’s
correction or removal of Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
§ 12.2.5 Nothing contained in this Section 12.2 shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with
respect to other obligations the Contractor has under the Contract Documents. Establishment of the oneyear period for correction of Work as described in Section 12.2.2 relates only to the specific obligation of
the Contractor to correct the Work, and has no relationship to the time within which the obligation to comply
with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, nor to the time within which proceedings may
Init.
/
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires
on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
(1784302197)
User Notes:
33
be commenced to establish the Contractor’s liability with respect to the Contractor’s obligations other than
specifically to correct the Work.
Init.
/
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires
on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
(1784302197)
User Notes:
34
§ 12.3 ACCEPTANCE OF NONCONFORMING WORK
If the Owner prefers to accept Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the
Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction, in which case the Contract Sum will be
reduced as appropriate and equitable. Such adjustment shall be effected whether or not final payment has
been made.
ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
§ 13.1 GOVERNING LAW
The Contract shall be governed by the law of the place where the Project is located except that, if the
parties have
selected arbitration as the method of binding dispute resolution, the Federal Arbitration Act shall govern
Section 15.4.
§ 13.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS
§ 13.2.1 The Owner and Contractor respectively bind themselves, their partners, successors, assigns and
legal representatives to covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents.
Except as provided in
Section 13.2.2, neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract as a whole without written consent of
the other. If either party attempts to make such an assignment without such consent, that party shall
nevertheless remain legally responsible for all obligations under the Contract.
§ 13.2.2 The Owner may, without consent of the Contractor, assign the Contract to a lender providing
construction financing for the Project, if the lender assumes the Owner’s rights and obligations under the
Contract Documents. The Contractor shall execute all consents reasonably required to facilitate such
assignment.
§ 13.3 WRITTEN NOTICE
Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual, to a member of the
firm or entity, or to an officer of the corporation for which it was intended; or if delivered at, or sent by registered
or certified mail or by courier service providing proof of delivery to, the last business address known to the party
giving notice.
§ 13.4 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES
§ 13.4.1 Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and rights and remedies available
thereunder shall be in addition to and not a limitation of duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise
imposed or available by law.
§ 13.4.2 No action or failure to act by the Owner, Architect or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of a right
or duty afforded them under the Contract, nor shall such action or failure to act constitute approval of or
acquiescence in a breach there under, except as may be specifically agreed in writing.
§ 13.5 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
§ 13.5.1 Tests, inspections and approvals of portions of the Work shall be made as required by the
Contract Documents and by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations or lawful
orders of public
authorities. Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections
and approvals with an independent testing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner, or with the
appropriate public authority, and shall bear all related costs of tests, inspections and approvals. The
Contractor shall give the Architect timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made
so that the Architect may be present for such procedures. The Owner shall bear costs of (1) tests,
inspections or approvals that do not become requirements until after bids are received or negotiations
concluded, and (2) tests, inspections or approvals where building codes or applicable laws or regulations
prohibit the Owner from delegating their cost to the Contractor.
§ 13.5.2 If the Architect, Owner or public authorities having jurisdiction determine that portions of the Work
require additional testing, inspection or approval not included under Section 13.5.1, the Architect will, upon
written authorization from the Owner, instruct the Contractor to make arrangements for such additional
Init.
/
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires
on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
(1784302197)
User Notes:
35
testing, inspection or approval by an entity acceptable to the Owner, and the Contractor shall give timely
notice to the Architect of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be
present for such procedures. Such costs, except as provided in Section 13.5.3, shall be at the Owner’s
expense.
§ 13.5.3 If such procedures for testing, inspection or approval under Sections 13.5.1 and 13.5.2 reveal
failure of the portions of the Work to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents, all
costs made necessary by
Init.
/
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires
on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
(1784302197)
User Notes:
36
such failure including those of repeated procedures and compensation for the Architect’s services and
expenses shall be at the Contractor’s expense.
§ 13.5.4 Required certificates of testing, inspection or approval shall, unless otherwise required by the
Contract Documents, be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Architect.
§ 13.5.5 If the Architect is to observe tests, inspections or approvals required by the Contract Documents,
the Architect will do so promptly and, where practicable, at the normal place of testing.
§ 13.5.6 Tests or inspections conducted pursuant to the Contract Documents shall be made promptly to
avoid unreasonable delay in the Work.
§ 13.6 INTEREST
Payments due and unpaid under the Contract Documents shall bear interest from the date payment is due at such rate
as the parties may agree upon in writing or, in the absence thereof, at the legal rate prevailing from time to
time at the place where the Project is located.
§ 13.7 TIME LIMITS ON CLAIMS
The Owner and Contractor shall commence all claims and causes of action, whether in contract, tort, breach of
warranty or otherwise, against the other arising out of or related to the Contract in accordance with the
requirements of the final dispute resolution method selected in the Agreement within the time period
specified by applicable law, but in any case not more than 10 years after the date of Substantial Completion
of the Work. The Owner and Contractor waive all claims and causes of action not commenced in
accordance with this Section 13.7.
ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT
§ 14.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR
§ 14.1.1 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if the Work is stopped for a period of 30 consecutive
days through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or their agents or
employees or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work under direct or indirect contract
with the Contractor, for any of the following reasons:
.1
Issuance of an order of a court or other public authority having jurisdiction that requires all
Work to be stopped;
.2
An act of government, such as a declaration of national emergency that requires all Work to be stopped;
.3
Because the Architect has not issued a Certificate for Payment and has not notified the
Contractor of the reason for withholding certification as provided in Section 9.4.1, or because
the Owner has not made payment on a Certificate for Payment within the time stated in the
Contract Documents; or
.4
The Owner has failed to furnish to the Contractor promptly, upon the Contractor’s request,
reasonable evidence as required by Section 2.2.1.
§ 14.1.2 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if, through no act or fault of the Contractor or a
Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing
portions of the Work under direct or indirect contract with the Contractor, repeated suspensions, delays or
interruptions of the entire Work by the Owner as described in Section 14.3 constitute in the aggregate
more than 100 percent of the total number of days scheduled for completion, or 120 days in any 365-day
period, whichever is less.
§ 14.1.3 If one of the reasons described in Section 14.1.1 or 14.1.2 exists, the Contractor may, upon
seven days’ written notice to the Owner and Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner
payment for Work executed, including reasonable overhead and profit, costs incurred by reason of such
termination, and damages.
§ 14.1.4 If the Work is stopped for a period of 60 consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor
or a Subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons performing portions of the Work under
contract with the Contractor because the Owner has repeatedly failed to fulfill the Owner’s obligations under
the Contract Documents with respect to matters important to the progress of the Work, the Contractor may,
Init.
/
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires
on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
(1784302197)
User Notes:
37
upon seven additional days’ written notice to the Owner and the Architect, terminate the Contract and
recover from the Owner as provided in Section 14.1.3.
Init.
/
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires
on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
(1784302197)
User Notes:
38
§ 14.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CAUSE
§ 14.2.1 The Owner may terminate the Contract if the Contractor
.1
repeatedly refuses or fails to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper materials;
.2
fails to make payment to Subcontractors for materials or labor in accordance with the
respective agreements between the Contractor and the Subcontractors;
.3
repeatedly disregards applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and
regulations, or lawful orders of a public authority; or
.4
otherwise is guilty of substantial breach of a provision of the Contract Documents.
§ 14.2.2 When any of the above reasons exist, the Owner, upon certification by the Initial Decision Maker
that sufficient cause exists to justify such action, may without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of
the Owner and after giving the Contractor and the Contractor’s surety, if any, seven days’ written notice,
terminate employment of the Contractor and may, subject to any prior rights of the surety:
.1
Exclude the Contractor from the site and take possession of all materials, equipment,
tools, and construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor;
.2
Accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to Section 5.4; and
.3
Finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the Owner may deem expedient. Upon
written request of the Contractor, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor a detailed
accounting of the costs incurred by the Owner in finishing the Work.
§ 14.2.3 When the Owner terminates the Contract for one of the reasons stated in Section 14.2.1, the
Contractor shall not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is finished.
§ 14.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work, including
compensation for the Architect’s services and expenses made necessary thereby, and other damages
incurred by the Owner and not expressly waived, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such costs
and damages exceed the unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The
amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner, as the case may be, shall be certified by the Initial Decision
Maker, upon application, and this obligation for payment shall survive termination of the Contract.
§ 14.3 SUSPENSION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE
§ 14.3.1 The Owner may, without cause, order the Contractor in writing to suspend, delay or interrupt the
Work in whole or in part for such period of time as the Owner may determine.
§ 14.3.2 The Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be adjusted for increases in the cost and time caused
by suspension, delay or interruption as described in Section 14.3.1. Adjustment of the Contract Sum shall
include profit. No adjustment shall be made to the extent
.1
that performance is, was or would have been so suspended, delayed or interrupted by
another cause for which the Contractor is responsible; or
.2
that an equitable adjustment is made or denied under another provision of the Contract.
§ 14.4 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE
§ 14.4.1 The Owner may, at any time, terminate the Contract for the Owner’s convenience and without
cause.
§ 14.4.2 Upon receipt of written notice from the Owner of such termination for the Owner’s
convenience, the Contractor shall
.1
cease operations as directed by the Owner in the notice;
.2
take actions necessary, or that the Owner may direct, for the protection and preservation of
the Work; and
.3
except for Work directed to be performed prior to the effective date of termination stated in
the notice, terminate all existing subcontracts and purchase orders and enter into no further
subcontracts and purchase orders.
§ 14.4.3 In case of such termination for the Owner’s convenience, the Contractor shall be entitled to
receive payment for Work executed, and costs incurred by reason of such termination, along with
reasonable overhead and profit on the Work not executed.
Init.
/
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires
on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
(1784302197)
User Notes:
39
ARTICLE 15 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES
§ 15.1 CLAIMS
§ 15.1.1 DEFINITION
A Claim is a demand or assertion by one of the parties seeking, as a matter of right, payment of money, or other relief
with respect to the terms of the Contract. The term "Claim" also includes other disputes and matters in
question between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or relating to the Contract. The responsibility to
substantiate Claims shall rest with the party making the Claim.
§ 15.1.2 NOTICE OF CLAIMS
Claims by either the Owner or Contractor must be initiated by written notice to the other party and to the
Initial
Decision Maker with a copy sent to the Architect, if the Architect is not serving as the Initial Decision
Maker. Claims by either party must be initiated within 21 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to
such Claim or within 21 days after the claimant first recognizes the condition giving rise to the Claim,
whichever is later.
§ 15.1.3 CONTINUING CONTRACT PERFORMANCE
Pending final resolution of a Claim, except as otherwise agreed in writing or as provided in Section 9.7 and
Article 14,
the Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the Contract and the Owner shall continue to
make payments in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Architect will prepare Change Orders
and issue Certificates for Payment in accordance with the decisions of the Initial Decision Maker.
§ 15.1.4 CLAIMS FOR ADDITIONAL COST
If the Contractor wishes to make a Claim for an increase in the Contract Sum, written notice as provided
herein shall
be given before proceeding to execute the Work. Prior notice is not required for Claims relating to an
emergency endangering life or property arising under Section 10.4.
§ 15.1.5 CLAIMS FOR ADDITIONAL TIME
§ 15.1.5.1 If the Contractor wishes to make a Claim for an increase in the Contract Time, written notice as
provided herein shall be given. The Contractor’s Claim shall include an estimate of cost and of probable
effect of delay on progress of the Work. In the case of a continuing delay, only one Claim is necessary.
§ 15.1.5.2 If adverse weather conditions are the basis for a Claim for additional time, such Claim shall be
documented by data substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the period of time, could not
have been reasonably anticipated and had an adverse effect on the scheduled construction.
§ 15.1.6 CLAIMS FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
The Contractor and Owner waive Claims against each other for consequential damages arising out of or
relating to this
Contract. This mutual waiver includes
.1
damages incurred by the Owner for rental expenses, for losses of use, income, profit,
financing, business and reputation, and for loss of management or employee productivity or of
the services of such persons; and
.2
damages incurred by the Contractor for principal office expenses including the compensation
of personnel stationed there, for losses of financing, business and reputation, and for loss of
profit except anticipated profit arising directly from the Work.
This mutual waiver is applicable, without limitation, to all consequential damages due to either party’s
termination in accordance with Article 14. Nothing contained in this Section 15.1.6 shall be deemed to
preclude an award of liquidated damages, when applicable, in accordance with the requirements of the
Contract Documents.
§ 15.2 INITIAL DECISION
§ 15.2.1 Claims, excluding those arising under Sections 10.3, 10.4, 11.3.9, and 11.3.10, shall be referred
to the Initial Decision Maker for initial decision. The Architect will serve as the Initial Decision Maker, unless
Init.
/
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires
on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
(1784302197)
User Notes:
40
otherwise indicated in the Agreement. Except for those Claims excluded by this Section 15.2.1, an initial
decision shall be required as a condition precedent to mediation of any Claim arising prior to the date final
payment is due, unless 30 days have passed after the Claim has been referred to the Initial Decision
Maker with no decision having been rendered. Unless the Initial Decision Maker and all affected parties
agree, the Initial Decision Maker will not decide disputes between the Contractor and persons or entities
other than the Owner.
Init.
/
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires
on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
(1784302197)
User Notes:
41
§ 15.2.2 The Initial Decision Maker will review Claims and within ten days of the receipt of a Claim take one
or more of the following actions: (1) request additional supporting data from the claimant or a response with
supporting data from the other party, (2) reject the Claim in whole or in part, (3) approve the Claim, (4)
suggest a compromise, or (5) advise the parties that the Initial Decision Maker is unable to resolve the
Claim if the Initial Decision Maker lacks sufficient information to evaluate the merits of the Claim or if the
Initial Decision Maker concludes that, in the Initial Decision Maker’s sole discretion, it would be
inappropriate for the Initial Decision Maker to resolve the Claim.
§ 15.2.3 In evaluating Claims, the Initial Decision Maker may, but shall not be obligated to, consult with or
seek information from either party or from persons with special knowledge or expertise who may assist the
Initial Decision Maker in rendering a decision. The Initial Decision Maker may request the Owner to
authorize retention of such persons at the Owner’s expense.
§ 15.2.4 If the Initial Decision Maker requests a party to provide a response to a Claim or to furnish
additional supporting data, such party shall respond, within ten days after receipt of such request, and
shall either (1) provide a response on the requested supporting data, (2) advise the Initial Decision Maker
when the response or supporting data will be furnished or (3) advise the Initial Decision Maker that no
supporting data will be furnished. Upon receipt of the response or supporting data, if any, the Initial
Decision Maker will either reject or approve the Claim in whole or in part.
§ 15.2.5 The Initial Decision Maker will render an initial decision approving or rejecting the Claim, or
indicating that the Initial Decision Maker is unable to resolve the Claim. This initial decision shall (1) be in
writing; (2) state the reasons therefor; and (3) notify the parties and the Architect, if the Architect is not
serving as the Initial Decision Maker, of any change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both. The
initial decision shall be final and binding on the parties but subject to mediation and, if the parties fail to
resolve their dispute through mediation, to binding dispute resolution.
§ 15.2.6 Either party may file for mediation of an initial decision at any time, subject to the terms of Section 15.2.6.1.
§ 15.2.6.1 Either party may, within 30 days from the date of an initial decision, demand in writing that the
other party file for mediation within 60 days of the initial decision. If such a demand is made and the party
receiving the demand fails to file for mediation within the time required, then both parties waive their rights
to mediate or pursue binding dispute resolution proceedings with respect to the initial decision.
§ 15.2.7 In the event of a Claim against the Contractor, the Owner may, but is not obligated to, notify the
surety, if any, of the nature and amount of the Claim. If the Claim relates to a possibility of a Contractor’s
default, the Owner may, but is not obligated to, notify the surety and request the surety’s assistance in
resolving the controversy.
§ 15.2.8 If a Claim relates to or is the subject of a mechanic’s lien, the party asserting such Claim may
proceed in accordance with applicable law to comply with the lien notice or filing deadlines.
§ 15.3 MEDIATION
§ 15.3.1 Claims, disputes, or other matters in controversy arising out of or related to the Contract except
those waived as provided for in Sections 9.10.4, 9.10.5, and 15.1.6 shall be subject to mediation as a
condition precedent to binding dispute resolution.
§ 15.3.2 The parties shall endeavor to resolve their Claims by mediation which, unless the parties mutually
agree otherwise, shall be administered by the American Arbitration Association in accordance with its
Construction Industry Mediation Procedures in effect on the date of the Agreement. A request for mediation
shall be made in writing, delivered to the other party to the Contract, and filed with the person or entity
administering the mediation. The request may be made concurrently with the filing of binding dispute
resolution proceedings but, in such event, mediation shall proceed in advance of binding dispute resolution
proceedings, which shall be stayed pending mediation for a period of 60 days from the date of filing, unless
stayed for a longer period by agreement of the parties or court order. If an arbitration is stayed pursuant to
this Section 15.3.2, the parties may nonetheless proceed to the selection of the arbitrator(s) and agree
upon a schedule for later proceedings.
Init.
/
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires
on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
(1784302197)
User Notes:
42
§ 15.3.3 The parties shall share the mediator’s fee and any filing fees equally. The mediation shall be held
in the place where the Project is located, unless another location is mutually agreed upon. Agreements
reached in mediation shall be enforceable as settlement agreements in any court having jurisdiction
thereof.
§ 15.4 ARBITRATION
§ 15.4.1 If the parties have selected arbitration as the method for binding dispute resolution in the
Agreement, any Claim subject to, but not resolved by, mediation shall be subject to arbitration which, unless
the parties mutually agree
otherwise, shall be administered by the American Arbitration Association in accordance with its Construction
Industry Arbitration Rules in effect on the date of the Agreement. A demand for arbitration shall be made in
writing, delivered to the other party to the Contract, and filed with the person or entity administering the
arbitration. The party filing a notice of demand for arbitration must assert in the demand all Claims then
known to that party on which arbitration is permitted to be demanded.
§ 15.4.1.1 A demand for arbitration shall be made no earlier than concurrently with the filing of a request
for mediation, but in no event shall it be made after the date when the institution of legal or equitable
proceedings based on the Claim would be barred by the applicable statute of limitations. For statute of
limitations purposes, receipt of a written demand for arbitration by the person or entity administering the
arbitration shall constitute the institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on the Claim.
§ 15.4.2 The award rendered by the arbitrator or arbitrators shall be final, and judgment may be entered
upon it in accordance with applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof.
§ 15.4.3 The foregoing agreement to arbitrate and other agreements to arbitrate with an additional person
or entity duly consented to by parties to the Agreement shall be specifically enforceable under applicable
law in any court having jurisdiction thereof.
§ 15.4.4 CONSOLIDATION OR JOINDER
§ 15.4.4.1 Either party, at its sole discretion, may consolidate an arbitration conducted under this
Agreement with any other arbitration to which it is a party provided that (1) the arbitration agreement
governing the other arbitration permits consolidation, (2) the arbitrations to be consolidated substantially
involve common questions of law or fact, and (3) the arbitrations employ materially similar procedural rules
and methods for selecting arbitrator(s).
§ 15.4.4.2 Either party, at its sole discretion, may include by joinder persons or entities substantially
involved in a common question of law or fact whose presence is required if complete relief is to be accorded
in arbitration, provided that the party sought to be joined consents in writing to such joinder. Consent to
arbitration involving an additional person or entity shall not constitute consent to arbitration of any claim,
dispute or other matter in question not described in the written consent.
§ 15.4.4.3 The Owner and Contractor grant to any person or entity made a party to an arbitration conducted
under this Section 15.4, whether by joinder or consolidation, the same rights of joinder and consolidation as
the Owner and Contractor under this Agreement.
Init.
/
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the
maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires
on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
(1784302197)
User Notes:
43
Additions and Deletions Report for
®
AIA Document
A201
TM
– 2007
This Additions and Deletions Report, as defined on page 1 of the associated document, reproduces below all text the author has
added to the standard form AIA document in order to complete it, as well as any text the author may have added to or deleted from the
original AIA text. Added text is shown underlined. Deleted text is indicated with a horizontal line through the original AIA text.
Note: This Additions and Deletions Report is provided for information purposes only and is not incorporated into or constitute any part
of the associated AIA document. This Additions and Deletions Report and its associated document were generated simultaneously by
AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012.
PAGE 1
For Review
Additions and Deletions Report for AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976,
1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and
under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(1784302197)
1
International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012
under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(1784302197)
Certification of Document’s Authenticity
AIA® Document D401™ – 2003
I, , hereby certify, to the best of my knowledge, information and belief, that I created the attached final
document simultaneously with its associated Additions and Deletions Report and this certification at
15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No. 1977182551_1 from AIA Contract Documents software and that
in preparing the attached final document I made no changes to the original text of AIA® Document A201™
– 2007, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, as published by the AIA in its software, other
than those additions and deletions shown in the associated Additions and Deletions Report.
(Signed)
(Title)
(Dated)
AIA Document D401™ – 2003. Copyright © 1992 and 2003 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is
protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may
result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA
software at 15:58:49 on 05/11/2012 under Order No.1977182551_1 which expires on 01/15/2013, and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(1784302197)
1
Supplementary Conditions of
the Contract for Construction
U.S. Department of Housing
and Urban Development
Office of Housing
Federal Housing Commissioner
OMB Approval No. 2502-0470
(Expires 5/31/2010)
Public reporting burden for this collection of information is estimated to average 30 minutes per response, including the time for reviewing instructions,
searching existing data sources, gathering and maintaining the data needed, and completing and reviewing the collection of information. This information is required to obtain benefits and voluntary. HUD may not collect this information, and you are not required to complete this form, unless it displays
a currently valid OMB control number.
This information collection is necessary to ensure that viable projects are developed. It is important to obtain information from applicants to assist
HUD in determining if nonprofit organizations initially funded continue to have the financial and administrative capacity needed to develop a project and
that the project design meets the needs of the residents. The Department will use this information to sets forth the obligations of the contractor or
subcontractor performing under the covered contract. This information is required in order to obtain benefits. This information is considered nonsensitive and no assurance of confidentiality is provided.
Article 1 ! Labor Standards
Instructions
Whenever only FHA mortgage insurance is involved, use paragraph
(A) and (C) of Article 1 ! Labor Standards. Whenever any direct form
of assistance (Section 8, Section 202/811 Capital Advance, grants
etc.) is involved, use paragraphs (A) and (B) and (C) of Article 1 !
Labor Standards.
Applicability
The Project or Program to which the construction work covered by
this contract pertains is being assisted or insured by the United
States of America and the following Federal Labor Standards Provisions are included in this Contract or related instrument pursuant to the
provisions applicable to such Federal assistance or insurance.
A. 1. (i) Minimum Wages. All laborers and mechanics employed
or working upon the site of the work (or under the United States
Housing Act of 1937 or under the Housing Act of 1949 in the
construction or development of the project), will be paid unconditionally and not less often than once a week, and without subsequent
deduction or rebate on any account (except such payroll deductions
as are permitted by regulations issued by the Secretary of Labor
under the Copeland Act (29 CFR Part 3), the full amount of wages
and bona fide fringe benefits (or cash equivalents thereof) due at
time of payment computed at rates not less than those contained in
the wage determination of the Secretary of Labor which is attached
hereto and made a part hereof, regardless of any contractual
relationship which may be alleged to exist between the contractor
and such laborers and mechanics. Contributions made or costs
reasonably anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits under Section
1(b)(2) of the Davis-Bacon Act on behalf of laborers or mechanics
are considered wages paid to such laborers or mechanics, subject
to the provisions of 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1)(iv); also, regular contributions
made or costs incurred for more than a weekly period (but not less
often than quarterly) under plans, funds, or programs, which cover
the particular weekly period, are deemed to be constructively made
or incurred during such weekly period.
Such laborers and mechanics shall be paid the appropriate wage
rate and fringe benefits on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed, without regard to skill, except as
provided in 29 CFR Part 5.5(a)(4). Laborers or mechanics performing work in more than one classification may be compensated at the
rate specified for each classification for the time actually worked
therein: Provided, That the employer's payroll records accurately set
forth the time spent in each classification in which work is performed.
The wage determination (including any additional classification and
wage rates conformed under 29 CFR Part 5.5(a)(1)(ii) and the DavisBacon poster (WH-1321) shall be posted at all times by the contractor
and its subcontractors at the site of the work in a prominent and
accessible place where it can be easily seen by the workers.
(ii) (a) Any class of laborers or mechanics which is not
listed in the wage determination and which is to be employed under
the contract shall be classified in conformance with the wage
determination. HUD shall approve an additional classification and
wage rate and fringe benefits therefore only when the following
criteria have been met:
(1) The work to be performed by the classification
Replaces FHA-2554 which is obsolete.
requested is not performed by a classification in the
wage determination; and
(2) The classification is utilized in the area by the
construction industry; and
(3) The proposed wage rate, including any bona fide
fringe benefits, bears a reasonable relationship to the
wage rates contained in the wage determination.
(b) If the contractor and the laborers and mechanics to
be employed in the classification (if known), or their representatives,
and HUD or its designee agree on the classification and wage rate
(including the amount designated for fringe benefits where appropriate), a report of the action taken shall be sent by HUD or its designee
to the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division, Employment
Standards Administration, U.S. Department of Labor, Washington,
D.C. 20210. The Administrator, or an authorized representative, will
approve, modify, or disapprove every additional classification action
within 30 days of receipt and so advise HUD or its designee or will
notify HUD or its designee within the 30-day period that additional
time is necessary. (Approved by the Office of Management and
Budget under OMB control number 1215-0140.)
(c) In the event the contractor, the laborers or mechanics to be employed in the classification or their representatives, and
HUD or its designee do not agree on the proposed classification and
wage rate (including the amount designated for fringe benefits,
where appropriate), HUD or its designee shall refer the questions,
including the views of all interested parties and the recommendation
of HUD or its designee, to the Administrator for determination. The
Administrator, or an authorized representative, will issue a determination within 30 days of receipt and so advise HUD or its designee
or will notify HUD or its designee within the 30-day period that
additional time is necessary. (Approved by the Office of Management and Budget under OMB Control Number 1215-0140.)
(d) The wage rate (including fringe benefits where
appropriate) determined pursuant to subparagraphs A.1.(ii)(b) or (c)
of this paragraph, shall be paid to all workers performing work in the
classification under this contract from the first day on which work is
performed in the classification.
(iii) Whenever the minimum wage rate prescribed in the
contract for a class of laborers or mechanics includes a fringe benefit
which is not expressed as an hourly rate, the contractor shall either
pay the benefit as stated in the wage determination or shall pay
another bona fide fringe benefit or an hourly cash equivalent thereof.
(iv) If the contractor does not make payments to a trustee or
other third person, the contractor may consider as part of the wages
of any laborer or mechanic the amount of any costs reasonably
anticipated in providing bona fide fringe benefits under a plan or
program, Provided, That the Secretary of Labor has found, upon the
written request of the contractor, that the applicable standards of the
Davis-Bacon Act have been met. The Secretary of Labor may require
the contractor to set aside in a separate account assets for the meeting
of obligations under the plan or program. (Approved by the Office of
Management and Budget under OMB Control Number 1215-0140.)
2. Withholding. HUD or its designee shall upon its own action
or upon written request of an authorized representative of the
Department of Labor withhold or cause to be withheld from the
contractor under this contract or any other Federal contract with the
Page 1 of 4
form HUD-2554 (12/20/2005)
ref. Handbook 4571.1
same prime contractor, or any other Federally-assisted contract
subject to Davis-Bacon prevailing wage requirements, which is held
by the same prime contractor so much of the accrued payments or
advances as may be considered necessary to pay laborers and
mechanics, including apprentices, trainees and helpers, employed
by the contractor or any subcontractor the full amount of wages
required by the contract. In the event of failure to pay any laborer or
mechanic, including any apprentice, trainee or helper, employed or
working on the site of the work (or under the United States Housing
Act of 1937 or under the Housing Act of 1949 in the construction or
development of the project), all or part of the wages required by the
contract, HUD or its designee may, after written notice to the
contractor, sponsor, applicant, or owner, take such action as may be
necessary to cause the suspension of any further payment, advance, or guarantee of funds until such violations have ceased. HUD
or its designee may, after written notice to the contractor, disburse
such amounts withheld for and on account of the contractor or
subcontractor to the respective employees to whom they are due. The
Comptroller General shall make such disbursements in the case of
direct Davis-Bacon Act contracts.
3. (i) Payrolls and basic records. Payrolls and basic records
relating thereto shall be maintained by the contractor during the course
of the work and preserved for a period of three years thereafter for all
laborers and mechanics working at the site of the work (or under the
United States Housing Act of 1937, or under the Housing Act of 1949,
in the construction or development of the project). Such records shall
contain the name, address, and social security number of each such
worker, his or her correct classification, hourly rates of wages paid
(including rates of contributions or costs anticipated for bona fide fringe
benefits or cash equivalents thereof of the types described in Section
1(b)(2)(B) of the Davis-Bacon Act), daily and weekly number of hours
worked, deductions made and actual wages paid. Whenever the
Secretary of Labor has found under 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1)(iv) that the wages
of any laborer or mechanic include the amount of any costs reasonably
anticipated in providing benefits under a plan or program described in
Section 1(b)(2)(B) of the Davis-Bacon Act, the contractor shall maintain
records which show that the commitment to provide such benefits is
enforceable, that the plan or program is financially responsible, and that
the plan or program has been communicated in writing to the laborers
or mechanics affected, and records which show the costs anticipated or
the actual cost incurred in providing such benefits. Contractors employing apprentices or trainees under approved programs shall maintain
written evidence of the registration of apprenticeship programs and
certification of trainee programs, the registration of the apprentices and
trainees, and the ratios and wage rates prescribed in the applicable
programs. (Approved by the Office of Management and budget under
OMB Control Numbers 1215-0140 and 1215-0017.)
(ii) (a) The contractor shall submit weekly for each week in
which any contract work is performed a copy of all payrolls to HUD
or its designee if the agency is a party to the contract, but if the
agency is not such a party, the contractor will submit the payrolls to
the applicant, sponsor, or owner, as the case may be, for transmission to HUD or its designee. The payrolls submitted shall set out
accurately and completely all of the information required to be
maintained under 29 CFR Part 5.5(a)(3)(i). This information may be
submitted in any form desired. Optional Form WH-347 is available for
this purpose and may be purchased from the Superintendent of
Documents (Federal Stock Number 029-005-00014-1), U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C. 20402. The prime contractor is responsible for the submission of copies of payrolls by all
subcontractors. (Approved by the Office of Management and Budget
under OMB Control Number 1215-0149.)
(b) Each payroll submitted shall be accompanied by a
"Statement of Compliance,# signed by the contractor or subcontractor or his or her agent who pays or supervises the payment of the
persons employed under the contract and shall certify the following:
(1) That the payroll for the payroll period contains the
information required to be maintained under 29 CFR
Part 5.5(a)(3)(i) and that such information is correct and
complete;
(2) That each laborer or mechanic (including each
Replaces FHA-2554 which is obsolete.
helper, apprentice, and trainee) employed on the contract during the payroll period has been paid the full
weekly wages earned, without rebate, either directly or
indirectly, and that no deductions have been made either
directly or indirectly from the full wages earned, other
than permissable deductions as set forth in 29 CFR Part
3;
(3) That each laborer or mechanic has been paid not
less than the applicable wage rates and fringe benefits
or cash equivalents for the classification of work performed, as specified in the applicable wage determination incorporated into the contract.
(c) The weekly submission of a properly executed
certification set forth on the reverse side of Optional Form WH-347
shall satisfy the requirement for submission of the "Statement of
Compliance# required by paragraph A.3.(ii)(b) of this section.
(d) The falsification of any of the above certifications
may subject the contractor or subcontractor to civil or criminal
prosecution under Section 1001 of Title 18 and Section 231 of Title
31 of the United States Code.
(iii) The contractor or subcontractor shall make the records
required under paragraph A.3.(i) of this section available for inspection, copying, or transcription by authorized representatives of HUD
or its designee or the Department of Labor, and shall permit such
representatives to interview employees during working hours on the
job. If the contractor or subcontractor fails to submit the required
records or to make them available, HUD or its designee may, after
written notice to the contractor, sponsor, applicant, or owner, take
such action as may be necessary to cause the suspension of any
further payment, advance, or guarantee of funds. Furthermore,
failure to submit the required records upon request or to make such
records available may be grounds for debarment action pursuant to
29 CFR Part 5.12.
4. (i) Apprentices and Trainees. Apprentices. Apprentices
will be permitted to work at less than the predetermined rate for the
work they performed when they are employed pursuant to and
individually registered in a bona fide apprenticeship program registered with the U.S. Department of Labor, Employment and Training
Administration, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training, or with a
State Apprenticeship Agency recognized by the Bureau, or if a
person is employed in his or her first 90 days of probationary
employment as an apprentice in such an apprenticeship program,
who is not individually registered in the program, but who has been
certified by the Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training or a State
Apprenticeship Agency (where appropriate) to be eligible for probationary employment as an apprentice. The allowable ratio of apprentices to journeymen on the job site in any craft classification shall not
be greater than the ratio permitted to the contractor as to the entire
work force under the registered program. Any worker listed on a
payroll at an apprentice wage rate, who is not registered or otherwise
employed as stated above, shall be paid not less than the applicable
wage rate on the wage determination for the classification of work
actually performed. In addition, any apprentice performing work on
the job site in excess of the ratio permitted under the registered
program shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the
wage determination for the work actually performed. Where a contractor is performing construction on a project in a locality other than
that in which its program is registered, the ratios and wage rates
(expressed in percentages of the journeyman's hourly rate) specified in the contractor's or subcontractor's registered program shall be
observed. Every apprentice must be paid at not less than the rate
specified in the registered program for the apprentice's level of
progress, expressed as a percentage of the journeymen hourly rate
specified in the applicable wage determination. Apprentices shall be
paid fringe benefits in accordance with the provisions of the apprenticeship program. If the apprenticeship program does not specify
fringe benefits, apprentices must be paid the full amount of fringe
benefits listed on the wage determination for the applicable classification. If the Administrator determines that a different practice
prevails for the applicable apprentice classification, fringes shall be
paid in accordance with that determination. In the event the Bureau
Page 2 of 4
form HUD-2554 (12/20/2005)
ref. Handbook 4571.1
of Apprenticeship and Training, or a State Apprenticeship Agency
recognized by the Bureau, withdraws approval of an apprenticeship
program, the contractor will no longer be permitted to utilize apprentices at less than the applicable predetermined rate for the work
performed until an acceptable program is approved.
(ii) Trainees. Except as provided in 29 CFR 5.16, trainees
will not be permitted to work at less than the predetermined rate for
the work performed unless they are employed pursuant to and
individually registered in a program which has received prior approval, evidenced by formal certification by the U.S. Department of
Labor, Employment and Training Administration. The ratio of trainees to journeymen on the job site shall not be greater than permitted
under the plan approved by the Employment and Training Administration. Every trainee must be paid at not less than the rate specified
in the approved program for the trainee's level of progress, expressed as a percentage of the journeyman's hourly rate specified in
the applicable wage determination. Trainees shall be paid fringe
benefits in accordance with the provisions of the trainee program. If
the trainee program does not mention fringe benefits, trainees shall
be paid the full amount of fringe benefits listed on the wage determination unless the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division
determines that there is an apprenticeship program associated with
the corresponding journeyman wage rate on the wage determination
which provides for less than full fringe benefits for apprentices. Any
employee listed on the payroll at a trainee rate who is not registered
and participating in a training plan approved by the Employment and
Training Administration shall be paid not less than the applicable
wage rate on the wage determination for the classification of work
actually performed. In addition, any trainee performing work on the
job site in excess of the ratio permitted under the registered program
shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage
determination for the work actually performed. In the event the
Employment and Training Administration withdraws approval of a
training program, the contractor will no longer be permitted to utilize
trainees at less than the applicable predetermined rate for the work
performed until an acceptable program is approved.
(iii) Equal employment opportunity. The utilization of
apprentices, trainees and journeymen under this part shall be in
conformity with the equal employment opportunity requirements of
Executive Order 11246, as amended, and 29 CFR Part 30.
5. Compliance with Copeland Act Requirements. The contractor shall comply with the requirements of 29 CFR Part 3 which are
incorporated by reference in this contract.
6. Subcontracts. The contractor or subcontractor will insert in
any subcontracts the clauses contained in 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1) through
(10) and such other clauses as HUD or its designee may be
appropriate instructions require, and also a clause requiring the
subcontractors to include these clauses in any lower tier subcontracts. The prime contractor shall be responsible for the compliance
by any subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor with all the contract
clauses in 29 CFR Part 5.5.
7. Contract termination; debarment. A breach of the contract
clauses in 29 CFR 5.5 may be grounds for termination of the contract,
and for debarment as a contractor and a subcontractor as provided
in 29 CFR 5.12.
8. Compliance with Davis-Bacon and Related Act Requirements. All rulings and interpretations of the Davis-Bacon and
Related Acts contained in 29 CFR Parts 1, 3, and 5 are herein
incorporated by reference in this contract.
9. Disputes concerning labor standards. Disputes arising
out of the labor standards provisions of this contract shall not be
subject to the general disputes clause of this contract. Such disputes
shall be resolved in accordance with the procedures of the Department of Labor set forth in 29 CFR Parts 5, 6, and 7. Disputes within
the meaning of this clause include disputes between the contractor
(or any of its subcontractors) and HUD or its designee, the U.S.
Department of Labor, or the employees or their representatives.
10. (i) Certification of Eligibility. By entering into this contract
the contractor certifies neither it (nor he or she) nor any person or firm
who has an interest in the contractor's firm is a person or firm
Replaces FHA-2554 which is obsolete.
ineligible to be awarded Government contracts by virtue of Section
3(a) of the Davis-Bacon Act or 29 CFR 5.12(a)(1) or to be awarded
HUD contracts or participate in HUD programs pursuant to 24 CFR
Part 24.
(ii) No part of this contract shall be subcontracted to any
person or firm ineligible for award of a Government contract by virtue
of Section 3(a) of the Davis-Bacon Act or 29 CFR 5.12(a)(1) or to be
awarded HUD contracts or participate in HUD programs pursuant to
24 CFR Part 24.
(iii) The penalty for making false statements is prescribed in
the U.S. Criminal Code, 18 U.S.C. 1001. Additionally, U.S. Criminal
Code, Section 1010, Title 18, U.S.C., "Federal Housing Administration transactions#, provides in part: "Whoever, for the purpose of . .
. influencing in any way the action of such Administration . . . makes,
utters or publishes any statement, knowing the same to be false . .
. shall be fined not more than $5,000 or imprisoned not more than two
years, or both.#
B. Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act. As used in
this paragraph, the terms "laborers# and "mechanics# include watchmen and guards.
1. Overtime requirements. No contractor or subcontractor
contracting for any part of the contract work which may require or
involve the employment of laborers or mechanics shall require or
permit any such laborer or mechanic in any workweek in which he or
she is employed on such work to work in excess of forty hours in such
workweek unless such laborer or mechanic receives compensation
at a rate not less than one and one-half times the basic rate of pay
for all hours worked in excess of forty hours in such workweek.
2. Violation; liability for unpaid wages, liquidated damages. In
the event of any violation of the clause set forth in subparagraph (1)
of this paragraph, the contractor and any subcontractor responsible
therefore shall be liable for the unpaid wages. In addition, such
contractor and subcontractor shall be liable to the United States (in
the case of work done under contract for the District of Columbia or
a territory, to such District or to such territory), for liquidated damages. Such liquidated damages shall be computed with respect to
each individual laborer or mechanic, including watchmen and guards,
employed in violation of the clause set forth in subparagraph (1) of
this paragraph, in the sum of $10 for each calendar day on which
such individual was required or permitted to work in excess of the
standard workweek of forty hours without payment of the overtime
wages required by the clause set forth in subparagraph (1) of this
paragraph.
3. Withholding for unpaid wages and liquidated damages.
HUD or its designee shall upon its own action or upon written request
of an authorized representative of the Department of Labor withhold
or cause to be withheld, from any moneys payable on account of
work performed by the contractor or subcontractor under any such
contract or any other Federal contract with the same prime contractor, or any other Federally-assisted contract subject to the Contract
Work Hours and Safety Standards Act, which is held by the same
prime contractor such sums as may be determined to be necessary
to satisfy any liabilities of such contractor or subcontractor for unpaid
wages and liquidated damages as provided in the clause set forth in
subparagraph (2) of this paragraph.
4. Subcontracts. The contractor or subcontractor shall insert in
any subcontracts the clauses set forth in subparagraph (1) through
(4) of this paragraph and also a clause requiring the subcontractors
to include these clauses in any lower tier subcontracts. The prime
contractor shall be responsible for compliance by any subcontractor
or lower tier subcontractor with the clauses set forth in subparagraphs (1) through (4) of this paragraph.
C. The Contractor will be required to execute FHA Form No. 2403A, Contractor's Prevailing Wage Certificate, as a condition precedent to insurance by the Federal Housing Administration of that
certain mortgage loan, or an advance thereof, made or to be made
by the mortgagee in connection with the construction of the project.
Article 2 ! Equal Employment Opportunity
The applicant hereby agrees that it will incorporate or cause to be
Page 3 of 4
form HUD-2554 (12/20/2005)
ref. Handbook 4571.1
incorporated into any contract for construction work, or modification
thereof, as defined in the regulations of the Secretary of Labor at 41
CFR Chapter 60, which is paid for in whole or in part with funds
obtained from the Federal Government or borrowed on the credit of
the Federal Government pursuant to a grant, contract, loan insurance, or guarantee, or undertaken pursuant to any Federal program
involving such grant, contract, loan, insurance, or guarantee, the
following equal opportunity clause:
During the performance of this contract, the Contractor agrees as
follows:
A. The Contractor will not discriminate against any employee or
applicant for employment because of race, color, religion, sex, or
national origin. The Contractor will take affirmative action to ensure
that applicants are employed, and that employees are treated during
employment without regard to their race, color, religion, sex or
national origin. Such action shall include, but not be limited to the
following: Employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or
other forms of compensation; and selection for training including
apprenticeship. The Contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places
available to employees and applicants for employment notices to be
provided setting forth the provisions of this nondiscrimination clause.
B. The Contractor will, in all solicitations or advertisements for
employees placed by or on behalf of the Contractor state that all
qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to race, color, religion, sex, or national origin.
C. The Contractor will send to each labor union or representative of
workers with which it has a collective bargaining agreement or other
contract or understanding a notice to be provided advising the said
labor union or workers representatives of the Contractor's commitments hereunder, and shall post copies of the notice in conspicuous
places available to employees and applicants for employment.
D. The Contractor will comply with all provisions of Executive Order
11246 of September 24, 1965 and of the rules, regulations, and
relevant orders of the Secretary of Labor.
E. The Contractor will furnish all information and reports required by
Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, and by rules,
regulations, and orders of the Secretary of Labor, or pursuant
thereto, and will permit access to its books, records, and accounts by
the Secretary of Labor for purposes of investigation to ascertain
compliance with such rules, regulations, and orders.
F. In the event of the Contractor's noncompliance with the nondiscrimination clauses of this contract or with any of the said rules,
regulations, or orders, this contract may be canceled, terminated, or
suspended in whole or in part and the Contractor may be declared
ineligible for further government contracts or federally assisted
construction contracts in accordance with procedures authorized in
Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, and such other
sanctions may be imposed and remedies invoked as provided in
Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, or by rule, regulations
or order of the Secretary of Labor, or as otherwise provided by law.
G. The Contractor will include the portion of the sentence immediately preceding paragraph A and the provisions of paragraphs A
through G in every subcontract or purchase order unless exempted
by rules, regulations, or orders of the Secretary of Labor issued
pursuant to Section 204 of Executive Order 11246 of September 24,
1965, so that such provisions will be binding upon each subcontractor or vendor. The Contractor will take such action with respect to any
subcontract or purchase order as the Secretary of Housing and
Urban Development or the Secretary of Labor may direct as a means
of enforcing such provisions, including sanctions for noncompliance. Provided, however, that in the event the Contractor becomes
involved in, or is threatened with, litigation with a subcontractor or
vendor as a result of such direction by the Secretary of Housing and
Urban Development or the Secretary of Labor, the Contractor may
request the United States to ener into such litigation to protect the
interests of the United States.
H. The applicant further agrees that it will be bound by the above
equal opportunity clause with respect to its own employment practices when it participates in federally assisted construction work:
Replaces FHA-2554 which is obsolete.
Provided, That if the applicant so participating is a State or local
government, the above equal opportunity clause is not applicable to
any agency, instrumentality or subdivision of such government
which does not participate in work on or under the contract.
I. The applicant agrees that it will assist and cooperate actively with
the administering agency and the Secretary of Labor in obtaining the
compliance of contractors and subcontractors with the equal opportunity clause and the rules, regulations, and relevant orders of the
Secretary of Labor, that it will furnish the administering agency and
the Secretary of Labor such information as they may require for the
supervision of such compliance, and that it will otherwise assist the
administering agency in the discharge of the agency's primary
responsibility for securing compliance.
J. The applicant further agrees that it will refrain from entering into
any contract or contract modification subject to Executive Order
11246 of September 24, 1965, with a contractor debarred from, or
who has not demonstrated eligibility for, Government contracts and
federally assisted construction contracts pursuant to the Executive
order and will carry out such sanctions and penalties for violation of
the equal opportunity clause as may be imposed upon contractors
and subcontractors by the administering agency or the Secretary of
Labor pursuant to Part II, Subpart D of the Executive order. In
addition, the applicant agrees that if it fails or refuses to comply with
these undertakings, the administering agency may take any or all of
the following actions: Cancel, terminate, or suspend in whole or in
part this grant (contract, loan, insurance, guarantee); refrain from
extending any further assistance to the applicant under the program
with respect to which the failure or refund occurred until satisfactory
assurance of future compliance has been received from such applicant; and refer the case to the Department of Justice for appropriate
legal proceedings.
Article 3 ! Equal Opportunity for Businesses and Lower
Income Persons Located Within the Project Area
(Applicable to Section 236 projects, where the estimated replacement cost of the project as determined by the Secretary of Housing
and Urban Development exceeds $500,000, and to all projects,
including Section 236 regardless of estimated replacement cost,
receiving rent supplement assistance under Title I, Section 101 of the
Housing and Urban Development Act of 1965.)
A. The work to be performed under this contract is on a project
assisted under a program providing direct Federal financial assistance from the Department of Housing and Urban Development and
is subject to the requirements of Section 3 of the Housing and Urban
Development Act of 1968, as amended, 12 U.S.C. 1701u. Section 3
requires that to the greatest extent feasible opportunities for training
and employment be given lower income residents of the unit of local
government or the metropolitan area (or nonmetropolitan county) as
determined by the Secretary of Housing and Urban Development in
which the projects located and contracts for work in connection with
the project be awarded to business concerns which are located in, or
owned in substantial part by persons residing in the same metropolitan area (or nonmetropolitan county) as the project.
Article 4 ! Health and Safety
A. No laborer or mechanic shall be required to work in surroundingss
or under working conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous, or
dangerous to his health and safety as determined under construction
safety and health standards promulgated by the Secretary of Labor
by regulation.
B. The Contractor shall comply with all regulations issued by the
Secretary of Labor pursuant to Title 29 Part 1926 (formerly part 1518)
and failure to comply may result in imposition of sanctions pursuant
to the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (Public Law 9154, 83 Stat. 96).
C. The Contractor shall include the provisions of this Article in every
subcontract so that such provisions will be binding on each subcontractor. The Contractor shall take such action with respect to any
subcontract as the Secretary of Housing and Urban Development of
the Secretary of Labor shall direct as a means of enforcing such
provisions.
Page 4 of 4
form HUD-2554 (12/20/2005)
ref. Handbook 4571.1
SECTION 013000
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Preconstruction meeting.
B.
Site mobilization meeting.
C.
Progress meetings.
D.
Construction progress schedule.
E.
Progress photographs.
F.
Coordination drawings.
G.
Submittals for review, information, and project closeout.
H.
Number of copies of submittals.
I.
Submittal procedures.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Document 007200 - General Conditions:
B.
Document 007300 - Supplementary Conditions:
C.
Document 007301 - HUD Special Conditions, Notes for Multifamily Insured Programs
D.
Section 011000 - Summary of Work: .
E.
Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Additional coordination
requirements.
F.
Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents.
G.
HUD Supplements
PROJECT COORDINATION
A.
Cooperate with the Project Coordinator in allocation of mobilization areas of site; for field offices
and sheds, for access, traffic, and parking facilities.
B.
During construction, coordinate use of site and facilities through the Project Coordinator.
C.
Comply with Project Coordinator's procedures for intra-project communications; submittals,
reports and records, schedules, coordination drawings, and recommendations; and resolution
of ambiguities and conflicts.
D.
Comply with instructions of the Project Coordinator for use of temporary utilities and
construction facilities.
E.
Coordinate field engineering and layout work under instructions of the Project Coordinator.
F.
Make the following types of submittals to Architect through the Project Coordinator:
1. Requests for interpretation.
2. Requests for substitution.
3. Shop drawings, product data, and samples.
4. Test and inspection reports.
5. Manufacturer's instructions and field reports.
6. Applications for payment and change order requests.
7. Progress schedules.
8. Coordination drawings.
9. Closeout submittals.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
ELECTRONIC DOCUMENT SUBMITTAL SERVICE
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
01 30 00 - 1
3.2
A.
All documents transmitted for purposes of administration of the contract are to be in electronic
(PDF) format and transmitted via an Internet-based submittal service that receives, logs and
stores documents, provides electronic stamping and signatures, and notifies addressees via
email.
1. Besides submittals for review, information, and closeout, this procedure applies to
requests for information (RFIs), progress documentation, contract modification documents
(e.g. supplementary instructions, change proposals, change orders), applications for
payment, field reports and meeting minutes, and any other document any participant
wishes to make part of the project record.
2. Contractor and Architect are required to use this service.
3. It is Contractor's responsibility to submit documents in PDF format.
4. Subcontractors, suppliers, and Architect's consultants will be permitted to use the service
at no extra charge.
5. Users of the service need an email address, Internet access, and PDF review software
that includes ability to mark up and apply electronic stamps (such as Adobe Acrobat,
www.adobe.com, or Bluebeam PDF Revu, www.bluebeam.com), unless such software
capability is provided by the service provider.
6. Paper document transmittals will not be reviewed; emailed PDF documents will not be
reviewed.
7. All other specified submittal and document transmission procedures apply, except that
electronic document requirements to not apply to samples or color selection charts.
B.
Submittal Service: The selected service is:
C.
Training: One, one-hour, web-based training session will be arranged for all participants, with
representatives of Architect and Contractor participating; further training is the responsibility of
the user of the service.
D.
Project Closeout: Architect will determine when to terminate the service for the project and is
responsible for obtaining archive copies of files for Owner.
PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING
A.
Preconstruction meeting at HUD office to be scheduled on closing day
1. Attendance Required:
a. Owner.
b. Architect.
c. Contractor.
B.
Owner will schedule a meeting after Notice to Proceed..
C.
Meeting will occur within 7 days after Notice to Proceed.
1. Attendance Required:
a. Owner.
b. Architect.
c. Contractor.
D.
Location of meeting: Project Site.
E.
Agenda:
1. Execution of Owner-Contractor Agreement.
2. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates.
3. Distribution of Contract Documents.
4. Submission of list of Subcontractors, list of Products, schedule of values, and progress
schedule.
5. Designation of personnel representing the parties to Contract, owner, and Architect.
6. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for
payments, proposal request, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures.
7. Scheduling.
8. Temporary utilities provided by Owner.
9. Survey and building layout.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
01 30 00 - 2
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
F.
3.3
3.4
Job inspections.
Early purchase of and/or lead time requirements for materials and equipment.
Pre-purchased equipment.
Maintenance of access and safety.
Labor provisions.
Material submittals.
Owner access during construction.
Review of Contract Documents.
Review of Deferred Submittals requirements.
Coordination procedures and separate contracts.
Progress meetings.
Progress schedules.
Critical Work Sequencing.
Safety and Emergency procedures.
Security and housekeeping procedures.
Procedures for testing.
Procedures for maintaining record documents.
Hazardous materials.
Parking.
Requirements for start-up of equipment.
Inspection and acceptance of equipment put into service during construction period.
Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two
copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made.
PROGRESS MEETINGS
A.
Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at maximum monthly
intervals.
B.
Make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside at
meetings.
C.
Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major Subcontractors and suppliers, Owner,
Architect, as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting.
D.
HUD inspector will attaend monthly draw meetings.
E.
Agenda:
1. Review minutes of previous meetings.
2. Review of Work progress.
3. Field observations, problems, and decisions.
4. Identification of problems that impede, or will impede, planned progress.
5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals.
6. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules.
7. Format and maintenance of progress schedule.
8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules.
9. Planned progress during succeeding work period.
10. Coordination of projected progress.
11. Maintenance of quality and work standards.
12. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination.
13. Other business relating to Work.
F.
Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two
copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made. Electronic
distribution is acceptable in Word or PDF format.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE
A.
Within 10 days after date of the Agreement, submit preliminary schedule defining planned
operations for the first 60 days of Work, with a general outline for remainder of Work.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
01 30 00 - 3
3.5
B.
If preliminary schedule requires revision after review, submit revised schedule within 10 days.
C.
Within 20 days after review of preliminary schedule, submit draft of proposed complete
schedule for review.
1. Include written certification that major contractors have reviewed and accepted proposed
schedule.
D.
Within 10 days after joint review, submit complete schedule.
E.
Submit updated schedule with each Application for Payment.
PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCES
A.
Conduct Pre-Installation Conference before each activity that requires coordination with other
construction activities. Specification Sections requiring Pre-Installation Conferences include:
1. Shoring and demolition of existing structures
2. Concrete Floor Slabs
3. Structural Steel
4. Wood Stairs
5. Architectural Wood Casework
6. Water Repellants
7. Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing
8. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
9. Firestopping
10. Exterior Storefronts
11. Exterior Canopies
12. Vinyl Windows
13. Door Hardware
14. Tiling
15. Elevators
16. Fire Sprinkler System
17. Fire Alarm System
18. Lighting
19. Wood Fences
B.
Attendance Required:
1. Owner’s Authorized Representative.
2. Architect.
3. Contractor.
4. Appropriate subcontractors.
5. Manufacturer's representative, if required by manufacturer or these specifications.
C.
Notifications:
1. Notify attendees of scheduled Conference a minimum of 7 calendar days in advance of
the conference.
D.
Agenda:
1. Submission of list of Subcontractors, list of Products, and progress schedule.
2. Scheduling and preparation for activities of other trades.
3. Review progress of time schedules, manufacturer's preparation and installation
recommendations, safety requirements, weather limitations, substrate acceptability,
compatibility problems, and inspection and testing requirements.
4. Contractor records significant discussions, agreements, and disagreements of each
conference. It is recommended that this meeting be held either preceding or following a
Progress Meeting.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
01 30 00 - 4
a.
b.
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
Number and record meetings sequentially.
Distribute meeting record to concerned parties, including Architect and Owner, within
72 hours after meeting.
REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION
A.
When field conditions or contents of Contract Documents require clarification or verification by
Architect, following procedure is required:
1. Present item or items requiring clarification /verification at Progress Meeting for
discussion. (For critical or emergency items, contact Architect at once.)
2. If it is determined by the Architect that item or items do not require written RFI submittals,
then clarification/verification determination shall be in Progress Meeting Report.
3. If it is determined by the Architect that item or items do require written RFI submittal,
prepare each RFI on a copy of form agreed to by Owner, Contractor and Architect. Design
Clarification/Variation Request (DCVR) and other forms are unacceptable.
4. Number RFI's sequentially from "1".
5. Record each RFI in a log, identifying each by RFI-#, subject, date submitted, date of
response, and disposition. Update and distribute log at project meetings.
6. Provide a proposed solution to the RFI.
7. Architect shall respond to submitted RFI's within five calendar days if provided with
complete information, in space provided on RFI form.
8. If potential cost impact is indicated on RFI, then include change order request for the
proposed work within three calendar days.
9. Architect shall copy response to both Contractor and Owner.
B.
Route and copy RFI's in same manner as correspondence.
C.
If agreement regarding clarification/verification for RFI's acceptable to both parties cannot be
reached, see General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions for procedures to resolve
conflict.
PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS
COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A.
Provide information required by Project Coordinator for preparation of coordination drawings.
B.
Review drawings with all affected subcontractors prior to submission to Architect.
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW
A.
When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for review:
1. Product data.
2. Shop drawings.
3. Samples for selection.
4. Samples for verification.
B.
Submit to Architect for review for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with
information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents.
C.
Samples will be reviewed only for aesthetic, color, or finish selection.
D.
After review, provide copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
article below and for record documents purposes described in Section 01 78 00 - CLOSEOUT
SUBMITTALS.
3.10 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION
A.
When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for information:
1. Design data.
2. Certificates.
3. Test reports.
4. Inspection reports.
5. Manufacturer's instructions.
6. Manufacturer's field reports.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
01 30 00 - 5
7.
B.
Other types indicated.
Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator or for Owner. No action will be
taken.
3.11 SUBMITTALS FOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A.
When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them at project closeout:
1. Project record documents.
2. Operation and maintenance data.
3. Warranties.
4. Bonds.
5. Other types as indicated.
B.
Submit for Owner's benefit during and after project completion.
3.12 NUMBER OF COPIES OF SUBMITTALS
A.
Documents for Review:
1. Small Size Sheets, Not Larger Than 8-1/2 x 11 inches: Submit the number of copies that
Contractor requires, plus two copies that will be retained by Architect.
B.
Documents for Information: Submit two copies.
C.
Samples: Submit the number specified in individual specification sections; one of which will be
retained by Architect.
1. After review, produce duplicates.
2. Retained samples will not be returned to Contractor unless specifically so stated.
3.13 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A.
Transmit each submittal with approved form.
B.
Sequentially number the transmittal form. Revise submittals with original number and a
sequential alphabetic suffix.
C.
Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing and detail number,
and specification section number, as appropriate on each copy.
D.
Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, approval, verification of
Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of
information is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents.
E.
Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and coordinate submission of related items.
F.
For each submittal for review, allow 15 days excluding delivery time to and from the Contractor.
G.
Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations that may be
detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work.
H.
Provide space for Contractor and Architect review stamps.
I.
When revised for resubmission, identify all changes made since previous submission.
J.
Distribute reviewed submittals as appropriate. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to
comply with requirements.
K.
Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed.
END OF SECTION
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
01 30 00 - 6
U.S. Department of Housing
and Urban Development
Office of Housing
Federal Housing
Commissioner
Contractor's Requisition
Project Mortgages
To be submitted to mortgagee in quadruplicate
OMB Approval No. 2502-0028 (exp. 8/31/2013)
This information is used to verify program benefits consisting of distribution of insured mortgage proceeds when construction c osts are
involved. The information regarding completed work items is used by HUD to ensure that payments from mortgage proceeds are made for
work actu ally completed in a satisfactory manner. This information is a requirement under Section 207(b) of the National Housing Act
(Public Law 479, 4S8tat. 1246, 12 U.S.C. 1701 et. seq) authorizing the Secretary of HUD to insure mortgages. The information collection
does not contain information of a se nsitive nature.
Public reporting burden for this collection of information is estimated to average 6 hours per response, including the time for
reviewing
instructions, searching existing data sources, gathering and maintaining the data needed, and completing and reviewing the collection of
inrm
foation. This agency may not collect this information, and you are not required to complete this form, unless it displays a currently valid
OMB control number.
To (owner)
Requisition Number
Project
Project Number
Location
In accordance with the provision of the Construction Contract dated ________________ and Contractor's and/or
Mortgagor's Cost Breakdown (Schedule of Values) attached thereto, this requisition is submitted for the amount of $
__________________ due for work performed up to the ____________ day of ______________ and as itemized below by
the trades listed in the Schedule of Values.
Enter Amounts to Nearest Even Dollar
Trade Item
DIV
3
Concrete
4
Masonry
5
Metals
6
Rough Carpentry
6
Finish Carpentry
7
Waterproofing
7
Insulation
7
Roofing
7
Sheet Metal
8
Doors
8
Windows
8
Glass
9
Lath and Plaster
9
Drywall
9
Tile Work
9
Acoustical
9
Wood Flooring
9
Resilient Flooring
9
Painting and Decorating
10
Specialties
11
Special Equipment
11
Cabinets
11
Appliances
12
Blinds and Shades, Artwork
12
Carpets
13
Special Construction
14
Elevators
15
Plumbing and Hot Water
15
Heat and Ventilation
15
Air Conditioning
16
Electrical
Amounts Complete
(B)
Cost as per Cost
Breakdown (A)
$
$
For HUD-FHA Use
(C)
$
Accessory Buildings
2
Earth Work
2
Site Utilities
2
Roads and Walks
2
Site Improvement
2
Lawns and Planting
Previous editions are obsolete.
Page 1 of 2
form HUD-92448 (1/91)
2
Unusual Site Conditions
1
General Requirements
1
Bond Premium ($
Previous editions are obsolete.
)
Page 2 of 2
form HUD-92448 (1/91)
DIV
1
Other Fees
Trade Item
Enter Amounts to Nearest Even Dollar
For HUD-FHA Use
Amounts Complete
(C)
(B)
Cost as per Cost
Breakdown (A)
($
)
0 *
0 **
(1)
Subtotal of Breakdown Items
$
(2)
Builder's Overhead
$
%$
%$
(3)
Builder's Profit
$
%$
%$
(4)
Total of Cost Breakdown Items
$
$
$
(5)
Inventory of Materials Stored On-site (See Note Below)
$
$
(6)
Inventory of Materials Stored Off-Site (See Note Below)
$
$
(7)
Sum of Cost Breakdown Items Plus Inventories of Materials
$
$
(8)
Less Net Decrease in Cost as a Result of Approved Changes
$
$
(9)
Total After Adjusting for Net Decrease to Approved Changes
$
$
(10)
Less Retained 10%
$
$
(11)
Bal.: Total Amount Due to Date on Account of Construction Contract
$
$
(12)
Less Previous Payments
$
$
(13)
Net Amount of This Requisition
$
$
% $
% $
I certify that the Work covered by this requisition has been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents, and that I have
actually received
$
for Work performed and materials purchased up to the ______________ day of ____________ (date of previous
requisition).
Date
Contractor
* Percentage derived from subtotal of Breakdown Items (col. B divided by col. A)
and costs.
** (col. C divided by col. A) Exclusive of Bond Premium
For Use of HUD-Federal Housing Commissioner
Date
Net Amount Approved for Payment
Reviewed and Approved by (Chief, Mortgage Credit)
Note: Attached inventory of materials item
ized as to quantities
Column C Completed by
(Mortgage Credit Examiner)
Director, Housing Development
Architect's Certificate I certify, based on my on-site observations (or those of my authorized representative) and the data comprising this
requisition,
that the Work has progressed to the point indicated; that to the best of my knowledge, information and belief the Work is in accordance with
the Contract Documents; and that the Contractor is entitled to payment of the amount certified.
Date
Architect
Inspector's Certificate
Amount Modified
No Modification
I certify that I have visited the site on this date ______________________________, observed the Work, and monitored the log and
reports of the Architect (if an architect is administering the Construction Contract); that to the best of my knowledge, information and
belief the amount certified represents acceptable Work; and that I have no personal interest, present or prospective, in the property,
Inspector
applicant or proceeds of the mortgage. Date
Contractor's Prevailing Wage Certificate (For use under all sections of the National Housing Act requiring certification as to payment of
prevailing wages. To be completed with each request for insurance of advance of mortgage proceeds which includes a payment on
account of construction cost, or at the time the mortgage is presented for insurance pursuant to a commitment to insure upon
completion.)
To
Date
Manager
Project Name
Field Office
Project Number
Advance No.
The undersigned, as principal contractor in connection with the construction of the above project, states that he/she is fully familiar with
applicable wage determination decision of the Secretary of Labor and certifies that:
a. A copy of the applicable wage determination decision is posted in a conspicuous place at the site of the work and he/she has
required each
subcontractor as a part of his/her contract, to agree to pay wages at rates not less than those contained in the decision.
b. All laborers and mechanics employed in the construction of the project have been, to the date hereof, paid for such employment at
wage rates not less than those contained in the applicable wage determination decision of the Secretary of Labor and no deductions or
rebates have been made, either
directly or indirectly, from the full weekly wages earned by any person, other than permissible deductions as defined in Regulations of
the Secretary of Labor, Part 3 (29 CFR Part 3).
c. He/She has fulfilled his/her obligations, to the date hereof, under The Labor Standards Provisions of the Supplementary Conditions of
the Contract
for Construction and has included said conditions in all subcontracts.
This certificate is executed by the undersigned for the purpose of inducing the Commissioner to approve for insurance that certain
mortgage loan, or an advance thereof, made or to be made by the mortgagee in connection with the construction of the project, and with
Previous editions are obsolete.
Page 3 of 2
form HUD-92448 (1/91)
the intent that the Commissioner
rely upon this certification to establish compliance with the provisions of Section 212 of the National Housing Act, which provides in
part: The Commissioner shall not insure ... unless the principal contractor files a certificate ... certifying that the laborers and
mechanics ... have not been paid not less than the wages prevailing ... as determined by the Secretary of Labor...”
I hereby certify that all the information stated herein, as well as any information provided in the accompaniment herewith, is true
and accurate. Warning: HUD will prosecute false claims and statements. Conviction may result in criminal and/or civil penalties (18 U.S.C. 1001, 1010,
1012; 31 U.S.C. 3729, 3802). Contractor
By
Date:
X
Previous editions are obsolete.
Page 4 of 2
form HUD-92448 (1/91)
Request for Construction
Changes on Project Mortgages
U.S. Department of Housing
and Urban Development
Office of Housing
Federal Housing Commissioner
OMB Approval No. 2502-0011 (exp. 8/31/2013)
No changes in the drawings and specifications may be effected unless a completed request for construction changes has been filed and
approved by HUD in accordance with the Construction Contract. Read the instructions & Public Burden statement on the back of this form.
Name and location of this project
Request No.(HUD use only)
Name of Contractor
Name of Mortgagor
Project Number
Name of Mortgagee
To the Federal Housing Commissioner: You are requested to consider the following proposed
changes in the project. The changes are satisfactory to the parties hereto, as indicated by the
signatures below.
Description of Changes
a.
Mortgagor
Estimated
Effect on Cost
+ or -
HUD
Estimated
Effect on Cost
+ or -
V = Acceptable
O = Unacceptable
Arch.
Val.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
Amount on deposit with mortgagee to cover
increased cost of changes pursuant to conditions $
of Request No.
.
Total
$
Initial & Date
I certify that I have no financial interest in this project beyond the fee for my professional services, and that I
have no interest with the mortgagor, contractor, or any subcontractor or supplier. The changes set forth in
this request conform to the intent of the contract documents and I recommend that the changes be approved.
Architect (signature)
Contractor (signature)
Mortgagee (signature)
Mortgagor (signature)
Initial&Date Initial&Date
The following is required on requests involving cooperatives and non-profit mortgagors with respect to any increase or decrease in cost resulting from acceptable
changes: (check appropriate box.)
The abovesigned contractor agrees to assume any additional costs and agrees that he will not assert any claim against the Mortgagor in connection therewith.
The abovesigned Mortgagor, acting pursuant to a resolution adopted at a meeting of its stockholders or members, and the abovesigned Contractor, agree to the
above described construction changes and agree that the construction contract executed by them (date)
contract price of $
set forth in Article 3 thereof to $
is amended by increasing the
all other provisions of the Construction Contract remain unchanged.
The abovesigned Mortgagor and the above signed Contractor agree to the construction changes described above and agree that the construction contract
executed by them (date)
$_
is amended by decreasing the contract price of $
Federal Housing Commissioner Findings: 1. Mortgagor's Estimate
a. Effect on cost of previously
accepted changes
$
b. Effect on cost to date
of all changes
$
2. Net effect on Construction Costs
a. Present changes
b. Previous changes
$
$
c. Perc ent
c. Total
$
d. Percent
%
%
Increase
3. Changes
set forth in Article 3 thereof to
; all other provisions of the construction contract remain unchanged.
Decrease
Increase
Decrease
Increase
Decrease
are acceptable and the drawings and specifications amended, provided:
a. That a total sum of $
_is on deposit with the mortgage to cover net increase in cost resulting from present and previous construction changes.
This supersedes any previous requirements. The money will not be released without written consent of HUD prior to final completion and acceptance of the project
construction. No further advances of the mortgage proceeds under the Building Loan Agreement will be approved unless the total sum is on deposit with you.
b. That in order to reflect the net decrease in cost or reduction in mortgage based on net income or number of family units, resulting from acceptable present
and previous construction changes, the amount of $
shall be deducted from the amount entered on the line entitled "Sum of Cost
Breakdown Items Plus Inventories of Materials", form HUD-92448. This amount may be modified by later changes.
c. Consent of surety to these changes is obtained in writing and a signed copy sent to this office prior to effecting the change.
d. There is compliance with the conditions stated on the back of this form.
4.
Changes
are not acceptable. See "Reasons for Unacceptability" on the back of this form.
HUD analysis and findings reviewed and approved:
Director, Housing Development Division (signature)
Date
Mortgage Credit
Initial & Date
Federal Housing Commissioner
Signature of authorized agent
Page 1 of 2
form HUD-92437 (11/00)
ref. Handbook 4480.1
Public Reporting Burden for this collection is estimated to average 2 hours per response, including the time for reviewing, searching existing data
sources, gathering and maintaining the data needed, and compiling and reviewing the collection of information. Send comments regarding this burden
estimate or any other aspect of this collection of information, including suggestions for reducing this burden to the Reports Management Officer, Paperwork
Reduction Project (2502-0011), U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development, 451 7th Street SW, Washington, DC 20410-3600.
The Department of Housing and Urban Development (HUD) is authorized to collect this information by provisions set forth in Section 5 of the
United States Housing Act of 1937, as amended. It is provided by contractors, mortgagors and mortgagees to obtain the FHA Commissioner’s approval of
changes in contract drawings and specifications, and this information is used to ensure that viable projects are developed. This information is used by HUD
to ensure that viable projects are being developed. Furnishing of this information is mandatory, and failure to provide it may result in your not receiving your
benefits.
Privacy Act Notice. The United States Department of Housing and Urban Development, Federal Housing Administration, is authorized to solicit
the information requested in this form by virtue of Title 12, United States Code, Section 1701 et seq., and regulations promulgated thereunder at Title 12,
Code of Federal Regulations. While no assurances of confidentiality is pledged to respondents, HUD generally discloses this data only in response to a
Freedom of Information request. This agency may not conduct or sponsor, and a person is not required to respond to, a collection of information unless that
collection displays a valid OMB control number.
Instructions
Send the original and six copies to HUD through the mortgagee.
Under "Description of Changes" describe each proposed change
and enter the amount by which the construction cost will be
increased or decreased as the net result of each proposed
change. Attach documentation including (1) reason for each
change, (2) general scope, (3) full detailed description of work to
be omitted and/or added and the cost for each trade affected, and
(4) reference any attachments showing proposed revisions.
Estimate the cost of each change on the basis of the current cost
of items omitted, substituted or added. Estimates include job
overhead and builder's fee, or job overhead and general overhead, as applied in the HUD estimate of the project. No allowance
for "Builder's and Sponsor's Profit and Risk" is included. No
architect's or engineer's fee is included.
This form is not used for off-site changes. Such changes must be
submitted in writing, using this form as a guide.
To be acceptable to HUD a proposed change must be due to
necessity, or be an appropriate betterment, or qualify as an
equivalent. In accepting any changes, it is assumed that they will
be executed. If an accepted change is not executed, it must be
nullified by substituting a Request for Construction Changes
amending the drawings and specifications so as to restore the
drawings and specifications to prior status or to a status acceptable to HUD.
Send requests for a time extension on a separate form.
Conditions of Acceptance or Reasons for Unacceptability
When the HUD estimated cost of all accepted changes results in
a net decrease in the total construction cost, the insurable mortgage will be similarly decreased; but if the net effect is an increase,
the additional costs will be defrayed by the mortgagor. The
acceptance of any change or changes involving a net increase
does not increase the mortgage amount.
Page 2 of 2
form HUD-92437 (11/00)
ref. Handbook 4480.1
Request for Approval of
Advance of Escrow Funds
U.S. Department of Housing and
Urban Development
Office of Housing
Federal Housing Commissioner
OMB No. 2502-0018
(Exp.11/30/2009)
Public reporting burden for this collection of information is estimated to average 2 hours per response, including the time for reviewing instructions,
searching existing data sources, gathering and maintaining the data needed, and completing and reviewing the collection of information. The information
collected on this form is utilized to control the disposition of escrow funds for offsite facilities, construction changes, and unpaid construction costs and
repairs pending completion or not paid at final endorsement. This collection of information is authorized by 24 CFR section 200.50. This agency may not
collect this information, and you are not required to complete this form, unless it displays a currently valid OMB control number. Provision of this
information is required to obtain benefits.
Request for Approval of Advance Payment of Escrow Funds
Completed by the depository. Then submitted to HUD in triplicate.
Project Name
Project Number
Name of Mortgagor
Advance Number
Date of Escrow Agreement (mm/dd/yyyy)
Payment Amount Requested
Escrow Account Balance after this payment
$
$
The Payment Requested is for
offsite facilities,
construction changes,
construction costs not paid at final endorsement
noncritical repair
capital needs assessment
The Remaining Balance is for
offsite facilities,
construction changes,
construction costs not paid at final endorsement.
noncritical repair
capital needs assessment
The undersigned received the Request for Payment (see page 2) from the above-named sponsor/mortgagor.
To the best of our knowledge, information, and belief, the sum requested is now payable.
We intend to disburse that sum on or about (date mm/dd/yyyy) ____________________________ upon your approval.
Name of the Depository
Name & Signature of Authorized Official
Date (mm/dd/yyyy)
Note: Original and two copies must be signed.
Warning: HUD will prosecute false claims and statements. Conviction may result in criminal and/or civil penalties. (18 U.S.C. 1001, 1010, 1012; 31 U.S.C. 3729, 3802)
Approval of Advance of Escrow Funds
Completed by the Department of Housing and Urban Development.
Name & Address of Depository
Payment Approved
Disbursement of funds is approved from the Escrow Deposit for
$
offsite facilities,
construction changes,
construction costs not paid at final endorsement.
noncritical repair
capital needs assessment
Approval Recommended
Name of Mortgage Credit Examiner
signature of Mortgage Credit Examiner
date (mm/dd/yyyy)
Authorizing Agent for the Department of Housing and Urban Development
Name
Previous editions are obsolete.
signature
Page 1 of 2
date (mm/dd/yyyy)
form HUD-92464 (5/94)
Request for Payment To be completed by the mortgagor/borrower. To be submitted to the depository in triplicate.
Project Name
Project Number
Name & Address of Depository
Amount Requested
$
The undersigned mortgagor/borrower hereby requests a payment of funds covering advances provided for by the Escrow Agreement for:
offsite facilities heretofore executed on the
day of
,
the net amount due for work performed up to the
day of
,
to the following statement with respect to all items of construction listed in schedule “A” attached to the Agreement;
construction costs not paid at final endorsement and listed in Schedule “A” attached to the Agreement;
construction change(s) as identified by request number(s):
noncritical repairs under Section 223(f),
A. Estimated Cost as
stated in Escrow Agreement
or form HUD-92437
Item or
Construction Change
Request Number
Total
Section 223(a)(7), and
, as indicated by
, according
Preservation Capital Needs Assessment under Section 241(f).
B.
Amounts from Final
Endorsement Escrow
C. Amounts Completed
Offsite
223(f)
223(a)7
241(f)
Change Orders
$
$
$
$
0.00 $
0.00 *
D.
HUD Approved Amount
$
% $
**
% $
Less Retained 10% (Offsite/Construction Change(s))
$
$
Balance: Total amount due to date
$
$
Less previous payments
$
$
Net amount due on this requisition
$
$
* Percentage derived from subtotal of Breakdown Items (Col. C divided by Col. A)
**(Col. D divided by Col. A)
Warning: HUD will prosecute false claims and statements. Conviction may result in criminal and/or civil penalties. (18 U.S.C. 1001, 1010, 1012; 31 U.S.C. 3729, 3802)
Offsite and Construction Change Certification
The undersigned hereby certifies that (mark the appropriate box)
the total cost has been paid in full and in cash from funds other than mortgage proceeds;
upon release of the amount deposited for this offsite item or construction change, payment in full shall be made to the contractor prior to
the next request for an insured advance or loan disbursement and a receipt of payment from the general contractor shall be submitted with
the next request for an insured advance or loan disbursement.
The undersigned further certifies that all work, labor and materials to be paid under this Request are satisfactory and in accordance with the
contract documents.
Name of Mortgagor/Borrower
Signature of authorized Mortgagor/Borrower Official
Date (mm/dd/yyyy)
Architect's Offsite and Construction Change Certification
I certify, based on my on-site observations (or those of my authorized representative), that to the best of my knowledge, information and belief,
the Work covered by the aforementioned is completed.
Architect's Signature
Date (mm/dd/yyyy)
Inspector's Offsite and Construction Change Certification
I certify that to the best of my knowledge, information and belief the aforementioned work has been acceptably completed.
Inspector's Signature
Previous editions are obsolete.
Date (mm/dd/yyyy)
Page 2 of 2
Print
form HUD-92464 (5/94)
U.S. Department of Housing
and Urban Development
Office of Labor Relations
Federal Labor Standards Provisions
Ap p l i c a b i l i t y
T h e P r o j e c t o r P r o g r a m t o wh i c h t h e c o n s t r u c t io n wo rk
c o ve r e d b y t h i s c o n t r a c t p e r t a i n s i s b e i n g a s s i s t e d b y t h e
Un i t e d S t a t e s o f A m e r i c a a n d t h e f o l l o w i n g F e d e r a l La bor
S t a n d a r d s Pr o vi s i o n s a r e i n c l u d e d i n t h i s Co n t r a c t
pur s u a nt t o t he pr ovi s i o ns app l i c abl e t o s uc h F eder al
as s i s t anc e.
A. 1 . ( i ) M i n im u m W a g es . A l l l a b o r e r s a n d m e c h a n i c s
em pl oye d or wor k i n g u pon t he s i t e of t he wo r k , wi l l b e p a i d
unc ondi t i o nal l y a nd n ot l es s o f t en t han onc e a we ek , a n d
wi t h o u t s u b s e q u e n t d e d u c t i o n o r re b a t e o n a n y a c c o u nt
(e xc e p t s u c h p a yr o l l d e d u c t i o n s a s a r e p e r m i t t e d b y
re g u l a t i o n s i s s u e d b y t h e S e c re t a r y o f L a b o r u n d e r th e
Co p e l a n d A c t ( 2 9 C F R P a r t 3 ) , t h e f u l l a m o u n t o f w a g e s
and b on a f i de f r i nge ben ef i t s ( or c as h e qui val e nt s t h e r e o f)
due at t i m e of pa ym ent c om put ed at r at es not l es s t han
th o s e c o n t a i n e d i n t h e w a g e d e t e r m i n a ti o n o f t h e
S e c r e t a r y o f L a b o r wh i c h i s a t t a c h e d h e r e t o a n d m a d e a
par t h er e of , r eg ar dl es s of any c ont r ac t ual r el at i o n s h i p
wh i c h m a y b e a l l e g e d t o e xi s t b e t we e n t h e c o n t r a c t o r a n d
s u c h l a b o r e r s a n d m e c h a n i c s . Co n t r i b u t i o n s m a d e o r
co st s r e a so n ab l y a n t i ci p a t e d f o r b o n a f i d e f r i n g e b ene f i t s
unde r S ec t i on l ( b ) ( 2) of t he Davi s - B ac o n A c t o n beh al f of
la b o r e r s o r m e c h a n ic s a r e c o n s i d e r e d w a g e s p a i d t o s u c h
la b o r e r s o r m e c h a n i c s , s u b je c t t o t h e p r o vi s i o n s o f 2 9 C F R
5. 5( a ) ( 1 ) ( i v) ; al s o, r e gul a r c on t r i but i ons m ade or c o s t s
in c u r r e d f o r m o r e t h a n a w e e k l y p e r i o d ( b u t n o t l e s s o f t e n
th a n q u a r t e r l y ) u n d e r p l a n s , fu n d s , o r p r o g r a m s , wh i c h
c o ve r t h e p a r t i c u l a r we e k l y p e r i o d , a r e d e e m e d t o b e
c o n s t r u c t i ve l y m a d e o r i n c u r r e d d u r i n g s u c h we e k l y per i od.
S u c h l a b o r e r s a n d m e c h a n i c s s h a l l b e p a i d t h e a p p r o pr i a t e
wa g e r a t e a n d f r i n g e b e n e f i t s o n t h e w a g e d e t e r m i n a ti o n
fo r t h e c l a s s i f i c a ti o n o f wo r k a c t u a l l y p e r fo r m e d , wi t h o u t
re g a rd t o s k i l l , e xc e p t a s p r o vi d e d i n 2 9 CF R 5 . 5 ( a) ( 4 ) .
Labo r e r s or m ec hani c s per f or m i ng wo r k i n m or e t ha n o n e
c l a s s i f i c a t i o n m a y b e c o m p e n s a t e d a t t h e r a t e s p e c i fi e d f o r
eac h c l as s i f i c at i on f or t he t i m e ac t ual l y wor k e d t h er ei n:
Pr o vi d e d , T h a t t h e e m p l o ye r ’ s p a yr o l l r e c o r d s a c c u r at e l y
s e t f o r t h t h e t i m e s p e n t i n e a c h c l a s s i f i c a t i o n i n wh i c h
wo r k i s p e r f o r m e d . T h e w a g e d e t e r m i n a t i o n ( i n c l u d i ng a ny
addi t i o nal c l as s i f i c at i on and wa ge r at es c onf or m ed und er
29 C F R 5. 5 ( a ) ( 1 ) ( i i ) an d t he Da vi s - B ac on p o s t er (W H 1321 ) s hal l be pos t ed at al l t i m es by t he c ont r ac t o r a n d i t s
s u b c o n t r a c t o r s a t t h e s i t e o f t h e wo r k i n a p r o m i n e nt a nd
ac c es s i bl e, pl ac e whe r e i t c an be eas i l y s een b y t h e
wo r k e r s .
(ii) ) (a ) A n y c l a s s o f l a b o r e r s o r m e c h a n i c s wh i c h i s
n o t l is t e d i n t h e w a g e d e t e r m i n a t i o n a n d w h ic h is t o
b e em pl oyed unde r t he c ont r ac t s hal l be c l as s i f i e d
i n c o n f o r m a n c e wi t h t h e wa g e d e t e r m i n a t i o n . H UD s h a
l l ap pr ov e a n a ddi t i o nal c l as s i f i c at i on and wa ge r at e
a n d fr i n g e b e n e fi ts t h e r e f o r o n l y wh e n t h e f o l l o wi n g c r i t
e r i a hav e bee n m et :
(1)
)
The work to be p er form ed by the classific
a t io n re q u e s t e d i s n o t p e rf o rm e d b y a c l a s s i f i c a t i o n i n t h e
wa g e det er m i nat i on; an d
(2)
)
T h e c l a s s if i c a t i o n i s u t il iz e d i n t h e a r e a b y
t h e c o n s t r u c t i o n i n d u s t r y; a n d
(3)
)
T h e p r o p o s e d wa g e r a t e , in c l u d i n g a n y b o n a
f i d e f r i n g e b e n e fi t s , b e a r s a r e a s o n a b l e r e l a t i o n s h i p t o
t he w a ge rat e s c o nt ai ne d i n t h e w ag e d e t er m i nati on.
(b) ) If t h e c o n tr a c t o r a n d t h e l a b o r e r s a n d m e c h a n i c s t o
b e em pl oyed i n t he c l as s i f ic at i on ( i f k now n) , or t h
ei r re p re s e n t a t i ve s , a n d H UD o r i t s d e s i g n e e a g r e e o n t
he c l a s s i f i c a t i o n a n d wa g e r a t e ( i n c l u d i n g t h e a m o
u n t de s i gnat e d f or f r i ng e ben ef i t s whe r e ap pr o pr i at e) , a r
ep or t of t he ac t i on t ak en s hal l b e s ent by H UD or i t s des ig n
e e t o t h e A d m i n i s tr a t o r o f t h e W a g e a n d H o u r Di
vi s i o n , E m p l o ym e n t St a n d a r d s A d m i n i s t r a t i o n , U. S . De p a r t
m e n t o f Labo r , W as hi ngt on, D. C . 20 210. T he A dm i ni s t r at
or , o r a n aut ho r i z ed r e pr es ent at i v e, wi l l app r o ve,
m
odi f y, or di s appr ov e e ve r y ad di t i onal c l as s i f i c at i on ac t i o n
wi t h i n 3 0 days of r ec ei pt a nd s o ad vi s e HUD or i t s des i
gn e e o r wi l l not i f y H U D o r i t s des i gn ee w i t hi n t he 30 - da y
p er i o d t h a t addi t i o nal t i m e i s nec ess ar y. ( A ppr ov ed b y t he
O f f i c e o f Ma n a g e m e n t a n d B u d g e t u n d e r O MB c o n t r o l n u m
b e r 1 2 1 5 - 0140. )
(c) ) In t h e e v e n t t h e c o n tr a c to r , th e l a b o r e r s o r m e c h a n
ic s to
be
e m p l o ye d
in
th e
c l a s s i fi c a ti o n
or
t h e i r re p re s e n t a t i ve s , a n d H UD o r i t s d e s i g n e e d o n o t a g r
ee on t h e p r o p o s e d c l a s s i fi c a ti o n a n d w a g e r a t e ( i n c l u d i n
g t he am ount des i gn at ed f o r f r i ng e be nef i t s , whe r e ap pr o p
ri a t e ), H UD o r i t s d e s i g n e e s h a l l r e f e r t h e q u e s t i o n s , i n c l
udi ng t h e vi e ws o f a l l i n t e r e s t e d p a r t i e s a n d t h e r e c o m m e
ndat i on of H U D or i t s des i g nee , t o t he A dm i ni s t r at
or f or det er m i nat i on.
T he A dm i ni s t r at or , o r an a ut
ho r i z ed re p re s e n t a t i ve , wi l l i s s u e a d e t e r m i n a t i o n wi t h i n 3 0
da ys of re c e i p t a n d s o a d vi s e HU D o r i t s d e s i g n e e o r wi l l
not i f y H U D o r i t s d e s i g n e e wi t h i n t h e 3 0 - d a y p e r i o d
t h a t addi t i o nal t i m e i s nec ess ar y. ( A ppr ov ed b y t he O f f i
c e o f Ma n a g e m e n t a n d B u d g e t u n d e r O MB C o n t r o l N
u m b e r 1215 - 01 40. )
(d)
)
Th e wa g e r a t e ( in c l u d i n g f r i n g e b e n e f i t s
w h e r e appr op r i at e ) d et er m i ned
pur s ua nt
to
s ubpa r a
gr a p hs
(1 ) (i i ) (b ) o r (c ) o f t h i s p a ra g ra p h , s h a l l b e p a i d t o a l l
worke rs perfor ming work in the clas sif ic ation und er th is
c o n t r a c t f r o m t h e f i r s t d a y o n wh i c h wo r k i s p e r f o r m e d i n
t h e c l a s s i fi c a ti o n .
(iii) i ) W h e n e ve r t h e m i n i m um wa g e r a t e p r e s c r i b e d i n
t he cont r act f or a cl ass of lab o rers or m echa nics incl u
des a fr i n g e b e n e fi t wh i c h i s n o t e xp r e s s e d a s a n h o u r l y r a t
e, the contractor shall either pay the benefit as st ated
in the wage determination or shall pay another bo na fide
f ri n g e benef i t or an ho ur l y c as h eq ui val ent t her eof .
(iv) ) If t h e c o n t r a c t o r d o e s n o t m a k e p a ym e n t s t o a tr u s t
ee or ot he r t hi r d pe r s on, t he c ont r ac t or m ay c ons i de r as p
ar t
Previous editions are obsolete
Page 1 of 5
form HUD-4010 (06/2009)
ref. Handbook 1344.1
of t he w ag es of an y l abo r e r or m ec hani c t he am ount of a ny
c o s t s r e a s o n a b l y a n t i c i p a t e d i n p r o vi d i n g b o n a f i d e f r i n g e
benef i t s un der a pl a n o r pr og r am , P r ovi d ed, T hat t h e
S e c r e t a r y o f L a b o r h a s f o u n d , u p o n t h e wr i t t e n r e q u es t of
th e c o n tr a c to r , th a t t h e a p p l i c a b l e s t a n d a r d s o f t h e D avi s B a c o n A c t h a ve b e e n m e t . T h e S e c r e t a r y o f L a b o r m a y
re q u i re t h e c o n t ra c t o r t o s e t a s i d e i n a s e p a r a t e a c c o u n t
as s et s f or t he m eet i ng of obl i gat i ons un de r t he pl a n o r
pr og r am . ( A ppr o ve d b y t h e O f f i c e of Man agem ent and
B u d g e t u n d e r O MB Co n t r o l Nu m b e r 1 2 1 5 - 0 1 4 0 . )
2. W i t h h o l d i n g. HU D o r i t s d e s i g n e e s h a l l u p o n i t s o w n
ac t i on o r u pon
wr i t t en
r e ques t of
an
aut h or i zed
re p re s e n t a t i ve o f t h e De p a rt m e n t o f L a b o r wi t h h o l d o r
c a u s e t o b e wi t h h e l d f r o m t h e c o n t r a c t o r u n d e r t h i s
c o n t r a c t o r a n y o t h e r F e d e r a l c o n t r a c t wi t h t h e s a m e pr i m e
contractor, or an y other Feder ally-assisted contrac t
s u b j e c t t o Da vi s - B a c o n p r e v a i l i n g wa g e r e q u i r e m e n t s ,
wh i c h i s h e l d b y t h e s a m e p r i m e c o n t r a c t o r s o m u c h of the
ac c r ued pa ym ent s or ad va nc es as m ay be c ons i de r e d
nec es s ar y t o pa y l abo r e r s and m ec hani c s , i nc l udi ng
appr ent i c es , t r ai ne es and hel pe r s , em pl oyed b y t he
c o n t r a c t o r o r a n y s u b c o n t r a c t o r t h e f u l l a m o u n t o f wa g e s
re q u i r e d b y t h e c o n t r a c t I n t h e e ve n t o f f a i l u re t o p a y a n y
la b o r e r o r m e c h a n i c , i n c l u d i n g a n y a p p r e n t ic e , t r a i ne e or
hel pe r , em pl oyed o r wor k i n g on t he s i t e of t he wo r k , a l l o r
par t of t he w ages r e qui r ed by t he c ont r ac t , H UD or it s
des i gne e m ay, af t er wr i t t en not i c e t o t he c o nt r ac t o r,
s p o n s o r , a p p l i c a n t , o r o wn e r , t a k e s u c h a c t i o n a s m ay b e
nec es s ar y t o c aus e t he s us pens i on of a ny f ur t her
paym ent , adva nc e, or gu ar ant ee of f unds unt i l s uc h
vi o l a t i o n s h a v e c e a s e d . H U D o r i t s d e s i g n e e m a y, aft e r
wr i t t e n n o t i c e t o t h e c o n t r a c t o r , d i s b u r s e s u c h a m o unt s
wi t h h e l d f o r a n d o n a c c o u n t o f t h e c o n t r a c t o r o r
s u b c o n t r a c t o r t o t h e r e s p e c t i ve e m p l o ye e s t o wh o m t hey
ar e d ue. T h e C om pt r ol l er G e ner al s hal l m ak e s uc h
di s bur s em ent s i n t he c as e of di r ec t D avi s - B ac on A c t
contrac ts.
3. ( i ) P a yr o l l s an d b asi c r eco r d s. Pa yr o l l s a n d b a s i c
re c o r d s re l a t i n g t h e r e t o s h a l l b e m a i n t a i n e d b y t h e
c o n t r a c t o r d u r i n g t h e c o u r s e o f t h e wo r k p r e s e r ve d fo r a
per i od of t h r ee ye ar s t he r eaf t er f or al l l a bor er s a nd
m e c h a n i c s wo r k i n g a t t h e s i t e o f t h e wo r k . S u c h r e c o r d s
sh al l con t ai n t he n a m e , a ddr ess, a nd soci al secu r i t y
num ber of eac h s uc h w or k e r , hi s or her c o r r ec t
c l a s s i f i c a t i o n , h o u r l y r a t e s o f wa g e s p a i d ( i n c l u d i ng r a t es
of c ont r i but i ons or c os t s ant i c i pat ed f or bo na f i de f r i n g e
benef i t s or c as h equ i val ent s t her eof of t he t y pes d es c r i b e d
in S e c t i o n l ( b ) ( 2 ) ( B ) o f t h e D a vis - b a c o n A c t ) , d a i l y a n d
we e k l y n u m b e r o f h o u r s w o r k e d , d e d u c t i o n s m a d e a n d
ac t ual wa ges p ai d. W henev er t h e S ec r et a r y of La b or h a s
fo u n d u n d e r 2 9 C F R 5 . 5 ( a ) ( 1 ) ( i v) t h a t t h e wa g e s o f a n y
la b o r e r o r m e c h a n i c in c l u d e t h e a m o u n t o f a n y c o s ts
re a s o n a b l y a n t i c i p a t e d i n p r o vi d i n g b e n e f i t s u n d e r a pl an
or pr ogr am des c r i bed i n S ec t i on l ( b) ( 2 ) ( B ) of t he D a vi s B a c o n A c t , t h e c o n t r a c t o r s h a l l m a i n t a i n r e c o r d s wh i c h
s h o w t h a t t h e c o m m i tm e n t t o p r o vi d e s u c h b e n e f i t s i s
enf or c ea bl e, t hat t h e pl a n or pr ogr am i s f i nanc i al l y
re s p o n s i b l e , a n d t h a t t h e p l a n o r p r o g r a m h a s b e e n
c o m m u n i c a t e d i n wr i t i n g t o t h e l a b o r e r s o r m e c h a n i c s
af f ec t ed, and r ec or ds whi c h s ho w t he c os t s ant i c i pa t e d o r
t h e a c t u a l c o s t i n c u r r e d i n p r o vi d i n g s u c h b e n e fi t s .
C o n t r a c t o r s e m p l o yi n g a p p r e n t i c e s o r t r a i n e e s u n d e r
appr ov ed pr ogr am s s hal l m ai nt ai n wr i t t en e vi d enc e o f t h e
re g i s t ra t i o n o f a p p re n t i c e s h i p p r o g ra m s a n d c e rt i f i c a t i o n o f
t r a i n e e p r o g r a m s , t h e r e g i s t r a t i o n o f t h e a p p r e n ti c es an d
t r a i n e e s , a n d t h e r a ti o s a n d wa g e r a t e s p r e s c r i b e d in t h e
appl i c abl e pr o gr am s . ( A ppr o ved b y t he
Office
of
Ma n a g e m e n t a n d B u d g e t u n d e r O MB C o n t r o l N u m b e r s
1215 - 01 40 a nd 12 15- 001 7. )
(ii) ) ( a ) T h e c o n t r a c t o r s h a l l s u b m i t we e k l y f o r e a c h we
e k i n wh i c h a n y c o n t r a c t w o r k i s p e r f o r m e d a c o p y o f
a ll pay r ol l s t o HU D or i t s des i g nee i f t h e ag enc y i s a pa r t y
t o t h e c o n tr a c t, b u t i f th e a g e n c y i s n o t s u c h a p a r t y ,
t h e c o n t r a c t o r wi l l s u b m i t t h e p a y r o l l s t o t h e a p p l i c
a n t s p o n s o r , o r o wn e r , a s t h e c a s e m a y b e , f o r t r a n s m i s s i o
n t o HU D o r i t s d e s i g n e e . T h e p a yr o l l s s u b m i t t e d s h a l l s e t
ou t ac c ur at el y a nd c om pl et el y al l of t he i nf or m at i on r e qui
r ed t o b e m a i n t a i n e d u n d e r 2 9 C F R 5 .5 ( a ) ( 3 ) ( i ) e xc e p t t hat
f ul l s o c i a l s e c u r i t y n u m b e r s a n d h o m e a d d r e s s e s s h a l l n o t
b e i n c l u d e d o n w e e k l y t r a n s m i t ta l s . I n s t e a d t h e p a y r o l ls s h
a ll onl y ne e d t o i nc l ud e an i ndi vi du al l y i dent i f yi ng nu m b e r f
o r eac h em pl oyee ( e. g. , t he l a s t f our di gi t s of t he em pl
oyee’ s s o c i a l s e c u r i t y n u m b e r ) . T h e r e q u i r e d we e k l y p
a y r o ll i n f o r m a t i o n m a y b e s u b m itt e d i n a n y f o r m d e
s ir e d . Op t i o n a l F o r m W H - 3 4 7 i s a va i l a b l e f o r t h i s p u r p o s e
from the
W age
and
Ho ur
Di vi s i o n
W eb
site
a t htt p:/ / w w w . dol. gov/ esa / w hd/ f orm s / w h347inst r . htm or
its
s u c c e s s o r s it e . T h e p r i m e c o n t r a c t o r i s r e s p o n s i b l e f or
t h e s u b m i ss i o n o f c o p i e s o f p a y r o l l s b y a l l s u b c o n t ra c t o r s .
C o n t r a c t o r s a n d s u b c o n t r a c t o r s s h a l l m a i n t a i n t h e f ul l
soci al security n um ber and current address of e ach
c o ve r e d wo r k e r , a n d s h a l l p r o vi d e t h e m u p o n r e q u e s t t o
HU D o r i t s d e s i g n e e i f t h e a g e n c y i s a p a r t y t o t h e
c o n t r a c t , b u t i f t h e a g e n c y i s n o t s u c h a p a r t y, t h e
c o n t r a c t o r wi l l s u b m i t t h e p a y r o l l s t o t h e a p p l i c a n t
s p o n s o r , o r o wn e r , a s t h e c a s e m a y b e , f o r t r a n s m i s s i o n t o
HU D o r i t s d e s i g n e e , t h e c o n t r a c t o r , o r t h e W a g e a n d H our
Di vi s i o n o f t h e D e p a r t m e n t o f L a b o r f o r p u r p o s e s o f a n
i n ve s t i g a t i o n o r a u d i t o f c o m p l i a n c e wit h p r e va i l i n g wa g e
re q u i r e m e n t s . I t i s n o t a vi o l a t i o n o f t h i s s u b p a r ag r a ph f or
a pr i m e c ont r ac t o r t o r eq ui r e a s u bc ont r ac t or t o p r o vi d e
addr es s es and s oc i al s ecur i t y num ber s t o t he pr i m e
c o n t r a c t o r f o r i t s o wn r e c o r d s , wi t h o u t we e k l y s u b m i s s io n
t o HU D o r i t s d e s i g n e e . ( A p p r o ve d b y t h e O ff i c e o f
Ma n a g e m e n t a n d B u d g e t u n d e r O MB C o n t r o l N u m b e r
1215 - 01 49. )
(b) ) E a c h p a y r o l l s u b m i t t e d s h a l l b e a c c o m p a n i e d b
y a “ S t a t e m e n t o f Co m p l i a n c e , ” s i g n e d b y t h e c o n t ra c t o
r o r s u b c o n t r a c t o r o r h i s o r h e r a g e n t wh o p a ys o r s u p e r
vi s e s t h e p a ym e n t o f t h e p e r s o n s e m p l o ye d u n d e r t h e c o
n tr a c t and s hal l c er t i f y t h e f ol l o wi n g:
(1) ) Th a t t h e p a yr o l l f o r t h e p a y r o l l p e r i o d c o n t a i n s
t h e in f o r m a t i o n r e q u ir e d t o b e p r o vi d e d u n d e r 2 9 CF R
5.5
(a ) ( 3 ) (i i ), t h e a p p r o p ri a t e i n f o rm a t i o n i s b e i n g m a i n t a i n e d
unde r 29 C F R 5. 5( a) ( 3) ( i ) , and t hat s uc h i nf or m at i o n i s
Previous editions are obsolete
Page 2 of 5
form HUD-4010 (06/2009)
ref. Handbook 1344.1
corr ect and c om pl ete;
Previous editions are obsolete
Page 3 of 5
form HUD-4010 (06/2009)
ref. Handbook 1344.1
(2) ) T h a t e a c h la b o r e r o r m e c h a n ic ( i n c l u d i n g e a c h h e l p
e r, appr ent i c e, a nd t r ai nee ) em pl oy ed on t he c o nt r ac t d ur i
ng t h e p a yr o l l p e r i o d h a s b e e n p a i d t h e fu l l we e k l y w a
g e s ear n ed, wi t h out r e bat e, ei t her di r ec t l y o r i ndi r ec t l y,
a n d t h a t n o d e d u c ti o n s h a ve b e e n m a d e e i t h e r d i r e c t l y
o r i n d ir e c t l y f r o m t h e f u l l wa g e s e a r n e d , o t h e r t h
a n per m i s s i bl e deduc t i ons as s et f or t h i n 29 C F R P ar t 3;
ny w o r k e r l i s t e d o n a p a y r o l l a t a n a p p r e n t i c e wa g e r a t e , w h
o
(3) ) T h a t e a c h l a b o r e r o r m e c h a n i c h a s b e e n p a i d n o t l e
s s t h a n t h e a p p l i c a b l e w a g e ra t e s a n d fr i n g e b e n e f i ts or c a
s h equi val e nt s f or t he c l as s i f ic at i on of wo r k per f o r m e d,
as s p e c i f i e d
in
the
appli c able
wa g e
determ inati
on incorpo rat e d int o t he c ont r a ct.
(c)
)
Th e we e k ly s u b m is si o n o f a p r o p e r l y e xe c
u t e d c e r t i f i c a t i o n s e t f o r t h o n t h e r e v e r s e s i d e o f O p t i onal
Form W H-347 shall s atisfy the r eq uirem ent for submis sion
o f t h e “ S t a t e m e n t o f Co m p l i a n c e ” r e q u i re d b y s u b p a r
agr aph
A.3.(ii)(b ).
(d) ) T h e f a l s i f i c a t i o n o f a n y o f t h e a b o ve c e r t i f i c a t i o n s m
a y s u b j e c t t h e c o n t r a c t o r o r s u b c o n t r a c t o r t o c i vi l o r c r i m
in a l pr os ec ut i on un der S ec t i on 1001 of T i t l e 1 8 a nd S ec
t i o n 231 of T i t l e 31 of t he Uni t ed S t at es C ode.
(iii)
i)
Th e c o n t r a c t o r o r s u b c o n t r a c t o r s h a ll m a k e
t h e re c o r d s re q u i re d u n d e r s u b p a r a g r a p h A . 3 . (i ) a va i l a b l e
f o r i n s p e c t i o n , c o p yi n g ,
or
transc ription
by authori
z e d r e p r e s e n t a t i ve s o f HU D o r i t s d e s i g n e e o r t h e De p a
rt m e n t of Labor , an d s hal l per m i t s uc h r epr es ent at i v
es t o i n t e r vi e w e m p l o ye e s d u r i n g wo r k i n g h o u r s o n t h e j
o b . I f t h e c o n tr a c t o r o r s u b c o n tr a c t o r fa i l s to s u b m i t t h e r
e q u i r e d re c o rd s o r t o m a k e t h e m a va i l a b l e , HU D o r i t s d
e s i g n ee m a y, a f t e r wr i t t e n n o t i c e t o t h e c o n t r a c t o r , s
p o n s o r, appl i c ant o r o w ne r , t ak e s uc h ac t i on as m ay be n
ec e s s a r y t o c a u s e t h e s u s p e n s i o n o f a n y f u r t h e r p a ym e n t,
a d v an c e, or gu ar a nt ee of f unds . F ur t her m or e, f ai l u re t o s
ub m i t th e re q u i re d re c o r d s u p o n re q u e s t o r t o m a k e s u c
h re c o rd s avai l abl e m ay b e g r ou nds f o r deb ar m ent ac t i on p
ur s u a n t t o 29 C F R 5. 1 2.
4. Ap p r en t i ce s an d Tr ai n e es.
(i) ) Ap p r e n ti c e s . Ap p r e n t i c e s wi l l b e p e r m i t t e d t o wo r k
a t l e s s t h a n t h e p r e d e t e r m i n e d r a t e f o r t h e wo r k t h
e y per f o r m ed whe n t he y ar e em pl oyed pu r s uant t o a
nd i n d i vi d u a l l y r e g is t e r e d i n a b o n a f id e a p p r e n t i c e s h
ip pr og r am r egi s t er e d wi t h t h e U. S . D epar t m ent of Lab o
r, E m p l o ym e n t
and Training Administration, Offic e
o f A p p r e n t i c e s h i p T r a i n i n g , E m p l o y e r a n d L a b o r S e r vi c e s ,
o r wi t h a S t a t e A p p r e n t i c e s h i p A g e n c y r e c o g n i ze d b y t
h e Of f i c e , o r i f a p e r s o n i s e m p l o ye d i n h i s o r h e r f i rs t
9 0 days of pr o bat i o nar y em pl oy m ent as an appr ent i c e i n s u
c h an ap pr e nt i c e s hi p pr ogr a m , who i s n ot i ndi vi du
al l y r e g i s t e r e d i n t h e p ro g ra m , b u t wh o h a s b e e n c e rt i f i e d
b y t h e O ffi c e o f A p p r e n ti c e s h i p T r a i n i n g , E m p l o ye r a n d L a
b o r S e r vi c e s o r a St a t e A p p r e n t i c e s h i p A g e n c y ( wh
e r e appr op r i at e ) t o be el i gi bl e f or p r obat i ona r y em pl oy m e n t
a s an app r ent i c e.
T he al l o wabl e r at i o of appr ent i c es
to j o u r n e ym e n o n t h e j o b s i t e i n a n y c r a f t c l a s s i f i c a t i o n s h
a ll not b e g r eat er t han t he r at i o pe r m i t t ed t o t he c o nt ra c t o r
a s t o t h e e n t i r e wo r k f o r c e u n d e r th e r e g i s t e r e d p r o g r am . A
Previous editions are obsolete
Page 4 of 5
form HUD-4010 (06/2009)
ref. Handbook 1344.1
is n o t r e g i s t e r e d o r o t h e r wi s e e m p l o ye d a s s t a t e d a bove,
s h a l l b e p a i d n o t l e s s t h a n t h e a p p l i c a b l e wa g e r a t e on t
he wa g e d e t e r m i n a t i o n f o r t h e c l a s s i f i c a t i o n o f wo r k a c t u a l l
y per f o r m ed. I n addi t i on, any appr ent i c e pe r f or m i ng wo r k
o n t h e j o b s i te i n e xc e s s o f t h e r a ti o p e r m i t t e d u n d e r
th e r e g i s t e r e d p r o g ra m s h a l l b e p a i d n o t l e s s t h a n t h
e appl i c abl e wage r at e on t h e wa ge d et er m i nat i on f or t h
e w o r k a c t u a l l y p e r f o r m e d . W h e r e a c o n t r a c t o r i s p e r fo r m i
ng cons truction on a proj ect i n a loc alit y oth er th an th at
i n wh i c h i t s p r o g r a m i s r e g i s t e r e d , t h e r a t i o s a n d wa g e r
at es ( e xp r e s s e d i n p e rc e n t a g e s o f t h e j o u rn e ym a n ’ s h
o u rl y r a t e ) s p e c i f i e d i n t h e c o n t ra c t o r’ s o r s u b c o n t r a
c t or’ s re g i s t e r e d p r o g r a m s h a l l b e o b s e rve d . E ve r y a p p r e
nti c e m u st b e p a i d a t n o t l e s s th a n t h e r a t e s p e c i f i e d i
n t h e re g i s t e r e d p r o g ra m f o r t h e a p p r e n t i c e ’ s l e v e l o f p r o g r
e s s , e xp r e s s e d a s a p e r c e n t a g e o f t h e j o u r n e ym e n h o u r l y
rate spec ified
in
the
applicable
wa g e
det erm i nat
i on. Apprentices shall be paid fringe benefits in accord
an c e wi t h t h e p r o vi s i o n s o f t h e a p p r e n t i c e s h i p p r o g r a m . I f
th e appr ent i c es hi p pr ogr a m do es not s pec i f y f r i n ge ben e f i
ts , appr ent i c es m us t be pai d t he f ul l am ount of f r i nge ben
ef i t s l is t e d o n t h e wa g e d e t e r m i n a t i o n f o r t h e a p p
li c a b l e c l a s s i f i c a t i o n . I f t h e A d m i n i s t r a t o r d e t e r m i n e s
t h at a di f f er ent pr ac t i c e p r e vai l s f or t he appl i c abl e
app r ent i c e c l a s s i f i c a t i o n , f r i n g e s s h a l l b e p a i d i n a c c o r d a n
c e wi t h t h a t det er m i nat i on. I n t h e e ven t t he O f f i c e of A
ppr e nt i c e s h i p Tr a i n i n g , E m p lo ye r a n d L a b o r S e r vi c e s ,
o r a S t a t e A p p r e n t i c e s h i p A g e n c y r e c o g n i ze d
by
the
O f f i c e , wi t h d r a ws a p p r o v a l o f a n a p p r e n t i c e s h i p p
r o g r a m , t h e c o n t r a c t o r wi l l n o l o n g e r b e p e r m i t t e d
t o u t i l i ze appr ent i c es at l es s t han t he ap pl i c abl e pr edet e
r m i n e d r at e f o r th e w o r k p e r fo r m e d u n t i l a n a c c e p t a b l e p
r o g r a m i s appr ov ed.
(ii)
)
Tr a i n e e s .
E xc e p t a s p r o vi d e d i n 2 9 CF R
5 . 1 6 , t r a i n e e s wi l l n o t b e p e r m i tt e d t o w o r k a t l e s s t h
a n t h e pr ed et er m i ned r at e f or t he w or k pe r f or m ed unl es s
t h e y a r e em pl oyed pu r s uant ‘ , t o an d i ndi vi dual l y r e gi s
t er e d i n a pr og r am whi c h has r ec ei ve d pr i or app r o val ,
evi denc e d b y f o r m a l c e r ti fi c a ti o n b y t h e U. S . De p a r t m
e n t o f L a b o r, E m p l o ym e n t a n d T r a i n i n g A d m i n i s t r a t i o n .
T h e r a t i o of tr a i n e e s t o j o u r n e ym e n o n t h e j o b s i t e s h a l l n
o t b e g r e a t e r th a n
perm itted under
the
plan
appr
o ve d
by
t h e E m p l o ym e n t a n d T r a i n i n g A d m i n i s t r a t i o n .
E ve r y t r a i nee m u st b e p a i d a t n o t l e s s th a n t h e r a t e s
p e c i f i e d i n t h e ap pr ov ed pr o gr am f or t h e t r ai n e e’ s l e
vel of pr ogr e s s, e xp r e s s e d a s a p e r c e n t a g e o f t h e j o u r
n e ym a n h o u r l y r a t e s p e c i f i e d i n t h e a p p l i c a b l e wa g e d e t e
r m i n a t i o n . T r ai ne es s h a l l b e p a i d f r i n g e b e n e f i t s i n
a c c o r d a n c e wi t h t h e pr o vi s i ons of t he t r ai nee p r ogr am .
I f t he t r ai nee pr o gr am does not m ent i on f r i nge be nef i t s ,
t r ai nees s hal l be p a i d t h e f u l l a m o u n t o f fr i n g e b e n e
fi ts l i s t e d o n t h e w a ge det er m i nat i on unl es s t he Adm i ni
s t r at or of t he W age an d Ho u r Di vi s i o n d e t e r m i n e s t h a t t
h e r e i s a n a p p r e n t i c es hi p pr og r am as s oc i at ed wi t h t he c
or r es p ondi ng j ou r ne ym a n wa g e r a t e o n t h e w a g e d e t e r
m i n a t i o n w h i c h p r o vi d e s f o r l e s s t h a n f u ll f r in g e b e n
e f it s f o r a p p r e n t i c e s .
A n y em pl oyee l i s t ed o n t he pa
y r ol l at a t r ai n ee r at e wh o i s not re g i s t e r e d a n d p a rt i c i p a t
i n g i n a t ra i n i n g p l a n a p p ro ve d b y
Previous editions are obsolete
Page 5 of 5
form HUD-4010 (06/2009)
ref. Handbook 1344.1
th e E m p l o ym e n t a n d T r a i n i n g A d m i n i s tr a ti o n s h a l l b e p a i d
not l es s t han t he app l i c a bl e wag e r at e on t h e wa ge
det er m i nat i on f or t he wo r k a c t ual l y per f o r m ed. I n ad di t i on,
any t r ai ne e per f or m i ng wor k on t he j ob s i t e i n e xc e s s o f
th e r a t i o p e r m i tte d u n d e r t h e r e g i s t e r e d p r o g r a m s h al l be
pai d n ot l es s t han t he app l i c abl e wa ge r at e on t he w a g e
det er m i nat i on f o r t he wo r k ac t ual l y per f o r m ed . I n t h e
eve nt t he E m pl oym ent and
T r ai ni ng A dm i ni s t r at i o n
wi t h d r a ws a p p r o v a l o f a t r a i n i n g p r o g r a m , t h e c o n t r ac t or
wi l l n o l o n g e r b e p e r m i t t e d t o u t i l i ze t r a i n e e s a t le s s t ha n
th e a p p l i c a b l e p r e d e t e r m i n e d r a t e f o r t h e w o r k p e r f o r m e d
unt i l an ac c ept abl e pr ogr am i s appr o ved.
(iii) i ) E q u a l e m p l o ym e n t o p p o r tu n i t y. T h e u t il i za t i o n
o f ap pr ent i c e s , t r ai ne es and j o ur ne ym e n und er 2 9 C F R P a r t
5 s h a l l b e i n c o n f o r m i t y wi t h t h e e q u a l e m p l o ym e
n t oppo r t uni t y r eq ui r em ent s of E xec ut i v e O r d er 11 246,
as am ended, and 2 9 C F R P a r t 30.
5. Co m p l i an ce w i t h Co p e l an d Act r eq u i r em en t s. T h e
c o n t r a c t o r s h a l l c o m p l y wi t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 2 9 C F R
P a r t 3 wh i c h a r e i n c o r p o r a t e d b y r e f e r e n c e i n t h i s c o n t r a c t
6. S u b co n t r ac t s. T h e c o n t r a c t o r o r s u b c o n t r a c t o r w i l l
in s e r t in a n y s u b c o n t r a c t s t h e c la u s e s c o n t a i n e d in
subpar agraphs 1 through 11 in this paragraph A and su ch
ot her c l a us es as HU D o r i t s des i gne e m ay b y a ppr opr ia t e
in s t r u c t i o n s r e q u i r e , a n d a c o p y o f t h e a p p l ic a b l e
pr e vai l i n g wa ge d ec i s i on, an d al s o a c l aus e r equi r i ng t he
s u b c o n t r a c t o r s t o i n c l u d e t h e s e c l a u s e s i n a n y l o we r t i e r
subcontracts. The prim e contract or shall b e r esponsi ble
fo r t h e c o m p l i a n c e b y a n y s u b c o n t r a c to r o r l o we r t i er
s u b c o n t r a c t o r wi t h a l l t h e c o n t r a c t c l a u s e s i n t h i s
par a gr aph.
7. Co n t r ac t t er m i n at i o n ; d eb ar m en t . A b r e a c h o f t h e
contract clauses in 29 CFR 5.5 m ay be grounds for
te r m i n a ti o n o f t h e c o n tr a c t a n d f o r d e b a r m e n t
as
a
c o n t r a c t o r a n d a s u b c o n t r a c t o r a s p r o vi d e d i n 2 9 C F R
5. 12.
8. Compliance with Davis-Bacon and Related Act Requirements.
Al l r u l i n g s a n d i n t e r p r e t a t i o n s o f t h e D a vi s - B a c o n a n d
Re l a t e d A c t s c o n t a i n e d i n 2 9 CF R P a r t s 1 , 3 , a n d 5 ar e
her e i n i nc or por at ed b y r ef er enc e i n t hi s c ont r ac t
9.
Di sp u t es co n ce r n i n g l ab o r st an d ar d s. Di s p u t e s
ar i s i ng out of t he l ab or s t andar ds pr o vi s i ons of t h is
c o n t r a c t s h a l l n o t b e s u b j e c t t o t h e g e n e r a l d i s p u t es
c l a u s e o f t h i s c o n t r a c t . S u c h d i s p u t e s s h a l l b e r e s o l ve d i n
ac c or danc e wi t h t he pr oc edur es of t he Dep ar t m ent of
Labo r s e t f o r t h i n 29 C F R P ar t s 5, 6, an d 7. Di s put es
wi t h i n t h e m e a n i n g o f t h i s c l a u s e i n c l u d e d i s p u t e s bet we en
th e c o n tr a c t o r ( o r a n y o f i t s s u b c o n tr a c t o r s ) a n d H U D o r
it s d e s i g n e e , t h e U. S . D e p a r t m e n t o f L a b o r , o r t h e
em pl oyees or t he i r r epr es en t at i ves .
10. ( i ) Ce r t i f i c at i o n o f E l i g i b i l i t y. By e n t e r i n g i n t o t h i s
c o n t r a c t t h e c o n t r a c t o r c e r t i f i e s t h a t n e i t h e r i t ( nor he or
s h e ) n o r a n y p e r s o n o r f i r m wh o h a s a n i n t e r e s t i n t h e
cont r act or ’ s f i rm i s a p er so n or f i r m in el ig i bl e t o be
a wa r d e d G o v e r n m e n t c o n t r a c t s b y vi r t u e o f S e c t i o n 3 (a ) o f
th e D a vi s - B a c o n A c t o r 2 9 CF R 5 . 1 2 ( a ) ( 1 ) o r t o b e
a wa r d e d H U D c o n t r a c t s o r p a r t i c i p a t e i n H UD p r o g r a m s
pur s ua nt t o 24 C F R P a r t 24.
(ii) ) N o p a r t o f t h i s c o n t r a c t s h a l l b e s u b c o n t r a c t e d t o
a n y per s on or f i r m i nel i gi bl e f or a wa r d of a G ov er
nm ent c o n t r a c t b y vi r t u e o f S e c t i o n 3 ( a ) o f t h e Da vi s - B a c
on A c t or 2 9 CF R 5. 12( a) ( 1) or t o be a w ar ded H UD c ont r
ac t s o r par t i c i pat e i n H U D pr o gr am s pur s uant t o 2 4 C F R P
ar t 2 4 .
(iii) i ) T h e p e n a l t y f o r m a k in g f a l s e s t a t em e n t s i s p r e s c r i b
ed i n t h e U. S . C r i m i n a l C o d e , 1 8 U. S . C . 1 0 0 1 . A d d i t i o nal
l y,
U. S . Cr i m i n a l C o d e , S e c t i o n 1 0 1 0 , T i t l e 1 8 , U . S . C .,
“F e d e ra l Ho u s i n g A d m i n i s t ra t i o n t ra n s a c t i o n s ”, p r o vi d e s i n
par t : “W hoever , f or t he pu r pos e of . . . i nf l uenc i n g i n any
w a y t h e a c t i o n o f s u c h A d m i n i s t r a t i o n . . . . . m a k e s, u tt e r s o r
publ i s hes a ny s t at e m ent k no wi ng t he s am e t o be f al s e. . . . .
s h a l l b e f i n e d n o t m o r e t h a n $ 5 , 0 0 0 o r i m p r i s o n e d n ot
m o r e t h a n t wo ye a r s , o r b o t h . ”
11.
Co m p l ai n t s, P r o ce ed i n g s, o r Te st i m o n y b y
Em p l o ye e s . No l a b o r e r o r m e c h a n i c t o w h o m t h e w a g e ,
s a l a r y, o r o t h e r l a b o r s t a n d a r d s p r o vi s i o n s o f t h i s C o n t r a c t
ar e a ppl i c abl e s hal l b e di s c har g ed o r i n a ny ot her m a n n e r
di s c r i m i nat e d agai ns t by t he
C ont r ac t o r
or
a ny
s u b c o n t r a c t o r b e c a u s e s u c h e m p l o ye e h a s f i l e d a n y
c o m p l a i n t o r i n s t i t u t e d o r c a u s e d t o b e i n s t i t u t e d any
pr oc e e di ng o r has t es t i f i ed or i s about t o t es t i f y in a n y
pr oc ee di ng un de r o r r el at i ng t o t he l abo r s t an dar ds
appl i c abl e un der t hi s C o nt r a c t t o hi s em pl oyer .
B.
Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act. The
provisions of this paragraph B are applicable where the amount of the
prime contract exceeds $100,000. As used in this paragraph, the
terms “laborers” and “mechanics” in c l u d e wa t c h m e n a nd g ua r d s .
(1) ) O v e r ti m e r e q u i r e m e n t s .
No contractor or
subcontractor contracting for any part of the contract work which
may require or involve the employment of laborers or mechanics
shall require or permit any such laborer or mechanic in any
workweek in which the individual is employed on such work to work
in excess of 40 hours in such workweek unless such laborer
or
mechanic
receives compensation at a rate not less than one
and one-half times the basic rate of pay for all hours worked in
excess of 40 hours in such workweek.
(2)
) V i o l a ti o n ; l i a b i l i t y f o r u n p a i d w a g e s ; l i q u i d
ate d da m a ge s . In th e e v e n t o f a n y vi o l a ti o n o f t h e c l a u s
e s e t f o r th i n s u b p a r a g r a p h ( 1 ) o f t h i s p a r a g r a p h , t h e c o n tr
a c t o r and an y s ubc ont r ac t o r r es p ons i bl e t her ef or s hal l b e
l i a b l e f o r th e u n p a i d wa g e s . In a d d i ti o n , s u c h c o n tr a c t o
r a n d s u b c o n t r a c t o r s h a l l b e l i a b l e t o t h e Un i t e d S t a t e s (i
n t h e c a s e o f wo r k d o n e u n d e r c o n t r a c t f o r t h e Di s t r i
c t o f C o l u m b i a o r a t e r r i t o r y, t o s u c h Di s t r i c t o r t o
s u c h t e r r i to r y ) , fo r l i q u i d a t e d d a m a g e s .
S uc h liqui
d a t e d dam ages s hal l be c om put ed wi t h r es p ec t t o eac h i nd i
vi d u a l l a b o r e r o r m e c h a n i c , i n c l u d i n g w a t c h m e n a n d g
u a r d s , em pl oyed i n vi ol at i o n of t he c l aus e s et f o
r t h i n s u b p a r a g r a p h ( 1 ) o f t h i s p a r a g r a p h , i n the sum of $10
for each calendar day on which such individual was required or
permitted to work in excess of the standard workweek of 40 hours
without payment of the overtime wages r e q u i r e d b y t h e c l a u s e s
Previous editions are obsolete
Page 6 of 5
form HUD-4010 (06/2009)
ref. Handbook 1344.1
e t f o r t h i n s u b par a gr aph ( 1) of t hi s pa r ag r aph.
Previous editions are obsolete
Page 7 of 5
form HUD-4010 (06/2009)
ref. Handbook 1344.1
(3)
)
W i th h o l d i n g fo r u np a i d w a g e s a n d l i q u i d
a te d da m a ge s . HU D o r i t s d e s i g n e e s h a l l u p o n i t s o w n a
c t i o n or u pon wr i t t en r equ es t of a n aut h or i zed r e pr es ent a t i
v e o f t h e De p a r tm e n t o f L a b o r wi t h h o l d o r c a u s e t o b e wi t
hh e l d, fr o m a n y m o n e ys p a y a b l e o n a c c o u n t o f wo r k p e r fo r
m e d by t h e c o n tr a c t o r o r s u b c o n tr a c t o r u n d e r a n y s u c h c o n
t ra c t o r any ot he r F ed er al c ont r ac t wi t h t he s am e pr i m e c
ont ra c t , or a ny ot her F ed er al l y- as s i s t ed c ont r ac t s ubj ec t
to t he Co ntr a ct W ork Hours an d S afet y S ta nd ar ds A ct
wh i c h i s hel d b y t he s am e pr im e c ont r ac t or s uc h s um s as
m ay be det er m i ned t o be nec es s ar y t o s at i s f y any l i abi l
i t i es of s u c h c o n t r a c t o r o r s u b c o n t r a c t o r f o r u n p a i d wa g
e s a nd li q u id a t e d d a m a g e s a s p r o v i d e d i n t h e c la u s e s e t f
o rt h i n s u b p a r a g r a p h ( 2 ) o f t h i s p a r a g r a p h .
(4) ) S u b c o n tr a c ts . Th e c o n t r a c t o r o r s u b c o n t r a c t o r s h
a ll in s e r t i n a n y s u b c o n t r a c t s t h e c l a u s e s s e t f o r t h
in s u b p a r a g r a p h ( 1 ) t h r o u g h ( 4 ) o f t h i s p a r a g r a p h a n d al s o
a clause requi ring the subcontractors to include thes
e c l a u s e s i n a n y l o we r t i e r s u b c o n t r a c t s .
The prim
e contract or shall be r espon sible f or com pliance b y a
ny s u b c o n t r a c t o r o r l o we r t i e r s u b c o n t r a c t o r wi t h t h e c l a u
ses set fort h in subpa ra gra p hs (1) thr oug h ( 4) of
t h i s par a gr aph.
C. He a l t h a n d S a f e t y. The provisions of this paragraph C are
applicable where the amount of the prime contract exceeds $100,000.
(1) ) No l a b o r e r o r m e c h a n i c s h a l l b e r e q u i r e d t o w o r k
in s u r r o u n d i n g s o r u n d e r wo r k i n g c o n d i t i o n s wh i c h a r
e uns ani t a r y, ha za r do us , or dang er o us t o hi s heal t h a
nd s a f e t y a s d e t e r m i n e d u n d e r c o n s t r u c t i o n s a f e t y a n d he al
th standards pr om ulgated by the Secretary of La bor
by r egu lat ion.
(2)
) Th e Co n t r a c t o r s h a ll c o m p ly wit h a l l r e g u l a t
io n s i s s u e d b y t h e S e c r e t a r y o f L a b o r p u r s u a n t t o T i t le 29
P ar t 1926 and f a i l ur e t o c om pl y m ay r es ul t i n i m pos i t i
on o f s a n c t i o n s p u r s u a n t t o t h e C o n t r a c t W o r k Ho u r s a n d
S af et y St a n d a r d s A c t , ( P u b l i c L a w 9 1 - 5 4 , 8 3 S t a t 9 6 ) . 4
0 U SC 3701 et s eq.
(3)
) T h e c o n t ra c t o r s h a l l i n c l u d e t h e p r o vi s i o n s o f t
h i s par a gr aph i n ev er y s ubc ont r ac t s o t hat s uc h p r o vi s i ons
wi l l be bi n di ng on e ac h s ubc on t r ac t or . T he c ont r ac t or s
h a l l t a k e s u c h a c ti o n wi t h r e s p e c t t o a n y s u b c o n t r a c t o r as
t he S e c r e t a r y o f H o u s i n g a n d Ur b a n De ve l o p m e n t o r
t he Sec ret ar y of Lab or shall di rec t as a m eans of enf or
c i n g s u c h p r o vi s i o n s .
Previous editions are obsolete
Page 8 of 5
form HUD-4010 (06/2009)
ref. Handbook 1344.1
COMPLIANCE WITH DAVIS-BACON ACT
PAYROLL REVIEW
The contractor and its subcontractors shall comply with provisions of the Davis-Bacon Act
and Related Acts. Federal minimum wage laws are applicable to all construction contracts in excess
of $2,000. The Davis-Bacon Act stipulates that all laborers and mechanics employed by the
contractor or subcontractors on federally assisted projects shall be paid wages at rates not less than
those prevailing on similar construction in the area as determined by the Secretary of Labor. The
contractor and its subcontractors shall comply with provisions of the Contract Work Hours and
Safety Standards Act generally applicable to any contracts is excess of $100,000.
Wage rates specified in the applicable wage determination for this construction trade
and geographic area follow this section. The wage determination must be posted at the site
of the work in a prominent and accessible place. The contractor or subcontractor shall insert in
any subcontract the clauses included in 29 CFR5.5 (a) (1) through (12) (Contract Provisions and
Related Matters) including the applicable wage rates and a clause requiring the subcontractor
include these clauses in any lower tier subcontract. The prime contactor will be responsible for
compliance by any subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor with all contract clauses in 29 CFR 5.5
(see Department of Labor website or a Federal regulations website).
By entering into this contract the contractor certifies that neither it (nor he or she) nor any
person or firm which has an interest in the contractor's firm is disbarred or suspended from
bidding or working on a federally funded project. No part of this contract will be subcontracted to
any person or firm who has been debarred or suspended from bidding or working on a federally
funded project.
Any class of laborers or mechanics employed under the contract, which is not listed in
the wage
determination, shall be classified in conformance with the wage decision. Additional classifications
shall be requested from the Department of Labor as specified in 29 CFR 5.5 or as amended (see
Department of Labor Website for forms and instructions). Upon issuance of an additional
classification the new wage rate including fringe benefits where appropriate shall be paid to all
workers performing the work in the additional classification from the first day on which work is
performed in the classification. The Department of Labor shall approve an additional classification
and wage rate and fringe benefits therefore only when the following criteria have been met:
(1)
The work to be performed by the classification requested is not
performed by a classification in the wage determination; and
(2)
The classification is utilized in the area by the construction industry: and
(3)
The proposed wage rate, including any bona fide fringe benefits, bears a
reasonable relationship to the wage rates contained in the wage determination.
1) Payroll(s
)
All mechanics and laborers employed upon the site of the work will be paid unconditionally
and not less than once a week without subsequent deduction or rebate on any account the full
amounts of wages and bona fide fringe benefits or cash equivalents thereof except as provided for
by Department of Labor regulations issued in accordance with provisions of the Copeland Act. The
payment shall be computed at wage rates not less than those contained in the "wage determination"
included in these specifications regardless of any contractual relationship alleged to exist between
the contractor or its subcontractors and such laborers and mechanics.
PM - 85
Each contractor and subcontractor shall furnish each week, in which any contract work is
performed, to the loan recipient (owner) a payroll of wages paid to each of its employees engaged
on work during the preceding weekly payroll period. The payroll submitted shall set out
accurately and completely all of the information required to be maintained in the Records
section below. Each payroll* submitted shall be
PM - 86
accompanied by a Statement of Compliance* signed by the contractor or subcontractor or his/her
agent who pays and supervises the payment of persons employed under the contract and shall
certify the following:
1)
That the payroll for the payroll period contains the information noted above
and that such information is true and complete,
2)
That such laborer or mechanic employed on the contract during the payroll period has
been paid the full weekly wage earned, without rebate, either directly or
indirectly, and that no deductions have been made either directly or indirectly
from the full wages earned, other than permissible deductions as set forth in
federal regulation(s), and
3)
That each laborer or mechanic has been paid not less than the applicable wage rate
and fringe benefits or cash equivalent for the classification of work performed, as
specified in the applicable wage determination incorporated into the contract.
*DOL WHD Form 347 is included as an example payroll and certification
statement
Laborers and mechanics performing work in more than one classification may be
compensated at the rate specified for each classification for the actual time worked therein,
provided, that the employee's payroll records accurately set forth the time spent in each classification
in which work is performed.
Whenever the minimum rate prescribed in the contract for a class of laborers or mechanics
includes a fringe benefit which is not expressed as an hourly rate, the contractor shall either pay
the benefit as stated in the wage determination classification or pay another bona fide fringe
benefit or an hourly cash equivalent thereof. If the contractor does not make payment to a
trustee or other third person, the contractor may consider as part of the wages of any laborer or
mechanic the amount of any costs reasonably anticipated in providing bona fide fringe benefits
under a plan or program, Provided, that the Secretary of Labor has found, upon the written request
of the contractor, that the applicable standards of the Davis-Bacon Act have been met. The Secretary
may require the contractor to set aside in a separate account assets for the meeting of obligations
under the plan or program. Contributions made or cost reasonably anticipated for bona fide fringe
benefits under the Davis-Bacon Act on behalf of laborers or mechanics are considered wages paid
to such laborers or mechanics, subject to the provisions above as well as regular contributions
made or costs incurred for more than a weekly period (but not less than quarterly) under plans,
funds, or programs which cover the particular weekly period, are deemed to be constructively made
or incurred during such weekly period.
2) Record
s
Payrolls and basic records shall be maintained by the contractor and each subcontractor for
a period covering three years from the date of completion of the contract for all laborers,
mechanics, apprentices, trainees, watchmen, helpers, and guards working at the site of the work.
Payrolls will include the name; his or her correct classification; hourly rates paid as wages paid
including rates of contributions or costs anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits or cash equivalent
thereof the types described in Section l(b) (2) (B) of the Davis- Bacon Act; daily and weekly number
of hours worked; deductions made; and actual wages paid.
Whenever the Secretary of Labor has found under 29 CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (iv) that wages of any
laborer or
mechanic include the amount of costs reasonably anticipated in providing benefits under a plan or
PM - 87
program described in Section 1 (b) (2) (B) of the Davis-Bacon Act, the contractor shall maintain
records which show the commitment to provide such benefits is enforceable, that the plan or
program is financially responsible, that the plan or program has been communicated in writing
to the laborers or mechanics affected, and records show the costs anticipated or the actual cost
incurred in providing such benefits. Contractors employing apprentices or trainees under approved
programs shall maintain written evidence of the registration of apprenticeship programs and
certification of trainee programs, the registration of the apprentices and trainees, and the ratios and
wage rates prescribed in the applicable programs.
PM - 88
3) Penalties and Withholding
Falsification of a payroll certification may subject the contractor or subcontractor to civil or
criminal prosecution under section 1001 of Title 18 and section 231 of Title 31 of the United
States code. If the contractor or subcontractor fails to submit the required records or to make them
available, the Federal agency or delegated agent may after written notice to the contractor, sponsor,
applicant, or owner, take such action as may be necessary to cause the suspension of any further
payment, advance, or guaranteed of funds.
The contractor or subcontractor shall make the payroll records required available for
inspection, copying, or transcription by authorized representatives of the owner, DOE, or the
Department of Labor and shall permit such representatives to interview employees during working
hours on the job. Failure to submit the required records upon request or to make such records
available may be grounds for debarment action pursuant to 29 CR 5.12.
A breach of the these contract clauses or the clauses continued in 29 CFR 5.5 may be
grounds for termination of the contract, and for debarment as a contractor and a subcontractor as
provided in29 CFR 5.12.
The governing body, shall upon its own actions or upon written request of an authorized
representative of the Department of Labor withhold from the contractor under this contract or any
other federal contract with the same prime contractor, or any other contract subject to Davis-Bacon
prevailing wage requirements, which is held by the same prime contractor, so much of the accrued
payments or advances as may be considered necessary to pay laborers and mechanics including
apprentices, trainees, and helpers employed by the contractor and subcontractor, the full amount of
wages required by the contract. In the event of failure to pay any laborer or a mechanic including
any apprentice, trainee, or helper, employed or working on the site of the work all or part of the
wages required by the contract, the State or the Department of Labor may, after written notice to the
contractor, sponsor, applicant, or owner, take such action as may be necessary to cause the
suspension of any further payment, advance, or guaranteed of funds.
PM - 89
Page 1 of 8
>
General Decision Number: OR120029 04/06/2012
OR2
9 Superseded General Decision Number:
OR20100043 State:
Oregon
Construction Type: Building
County: Multnomah County in
Oregon.
BUILDING CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS (does not include single family
homes or apartments up to and including 4 stories).
Modification Number
0
1
2
3
4
5
BROR0001014
06/01/201
1
Publication Date
01/06/2012
01/13/2012
01/27/2012
02/10/2012
02/17/2012
04/06/2012
Rates
Fringe
s
BRICK FINISHER...................$ 21.84
10.30
BRICKLAYER.......................$ 32.75
15.28
TILE FINISHER....................$ 21.84
9.65
TILE SETTER......................$ 28.94
12.68
---------------------------------------------------------------CARP0001-025 10/01/2011
Rates
Fringe
s Carpenters:
Hardwood floors and batt
insulation..................$ 32.19
14.18
Including metal stud
installation, from work
and scaffold building.......$ 32.04
14.18
---------------------------------------------------------------CARP9001-003 06/20/2007
Rates
Fringe
s Acoustical Ceiling Installer
& Drywall Hanger.................$ 27.95
13.52
LATHER...........................$ 28.15
14.64
---------------------------------------------------------------ELEC0048-018 01/02/2012
file:///C:/Users/EricW/AppData/Local/Temp/FOU1A237.htm
5/22/2012
Rates
Fringe
s ELECTRICIAN......................$ 37.05
3%+16.3
0
---------------------------------------------------------------ELEC0048-020 01/02/2012
file:///C:/Users/EricW/AppData/Local/Temp/FOU1A237.htm
5/22/2012
Rates
Page 2 of 8
Fringes
ELECTRICIAN
Computer Installation,
telephone
installation, HVAC
temperature control
installation,
Electrical low voltage
wiring installer and
sound
technician only.............$ 19.45
3%+12.7
0 Electrical installer
alarms......................$ 27.75
3%+13.65
---------------------------------------------------------------ENGI0701-022 01/01/2012
Rates
Fringe
s Power equipment operators:
GROUP 1.....................$ 37.27
GROUP 1A....................$ 39.13
GROUP 1B....................$ 41.00
GROUP 2.....................$ 35.64
GROUP 3.....................$ 34.65
GROUP 4.....................$ 33.71
GROUP 5.....................$ 32.60
GROUP 6.....................$ 29.61
12.08
12.08
12.08
12.08
12.08
12.08
12.08
12.08
POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATORS CLASSIFICATIONS
GROUP 1: CRANE: Helicopter Operator, when used in
erecting work; Whirley Operator, 90 ton and over;
LATTICE BOOM CRANE: Operator 200 tons through 299
tons, and/or over 200 feet boom; HYDRAULIC CRANE:
Hydraulic Crane Operator 90 tons through 199 tons
with luffing or tower attachments
GROUP 1A: HYDRAULIC CRANE: Hydraulic Operator, 200 tons
and over (with luffing or tower attachment); LATTICE
BOOM CRANE: Operator, 200 tons through 299 tons, with
over 200 feet boom;
GROUP 1B: LATTICE BOOM CRANE: Operator, 300 tons through
399 tons with over 200 feet boom; Operator 400 tons and
over
GROUP 2: CRANE: Cableway Operator, 25 tons and over;
HYDRAULIC CRANE: Hydraulic crane operator 90 tons through
199 tons (without luffing or tower attachment);
TOWER/WHIRLEY OPERATOR: Tower Crane Operator; Whirley
Operator, under 90 tons; LATTICE BOOM CRANE: 90 through
HYDRAULIC
199 tons and/or 150 to 200 feet boom;
CRANE: Hydraulic crane operator, 50 tons through 89
tons (with
luffing or tower attachment); Rubber tired scraper
with tandom scrapers, multi-engineTrenching MachineWheel Operator; Excavator over 130,000 lbs;
file:///C:/Users/EricW/AppData/Local/Temp/FOU1A237.htm
5/22/2012
Loader 120,000
lbs and above; BLADE: Auto Grader; Blade OperatorRobotic
GROUP 3: HYDRAULIC CRANE: Hydraulic crane operator, 50
tons through 89 tons (without luffing or tower
attachment); LATTICE BOOM CRANES: Lattice Boom Crane50 through 89 tons (and less than 150 feet boom);
Rubber Tired Scraper: with
file:///C:/Users/EricW/AppData/Local/Temp/FOU1A237.htm
5/22/2012
Page 3 of 8
tandom scrapers; self loading, paddle wheel, auger
type, finish and/or 2 or more units; Excavator over
80,000 lbs through 130,000; Loader 60,000 lbs and
less than 120,000 lbs.
GROUP 4: CRANE: Hydraulic Crane Operator, under 50
tons; LATTICE BOOM CRANE OPERATOR: Lattice Boom Crane
Operator, under 50 tons; TRACKHOE/EXCAVATOR-ROBOTIC: up
to and including 20,0000 lbs. with any or all
attachments; Excavator Operator over 20,000 lbs
through 80,000 lbs.; BLADE: Blade Operator; Tractor
operator with boom attachment; DRILLING: Churm Drill and
Earth Boring Machine Operator; Directional Drill
Operator over 20,000 lbs pullback; CRANE: Chicago
boom and similar types; Boom type lifting device, 5 ton
capacity or less; HYDRAULIC HOES: Robotic Hydraulic
backhoe operator, track and wheel type up to and
including 20,0000 lbs. with any or all attachments;
Asphalt Paver; Screed Operator; Rubber-Tired Scraper,
single engine, single scraper; Compactor-Self
Propelled; Trenching Machine, digging capacity over 3 ft
Depth; Excavator over 20,000 lbs through 80,000 lbs;
Loaders 25,000 lbs and less than 60,000 lbs
GROUP 5: TRACKHOE/EXCAVATOR-HYDRAULIC: up to and
including 20,000 lbs.; Boom truck operator; DRILLING:
Churm Drill and Earth Boring Machine Operator;
Directional Drill Operator less than 20,000 lbs pullback;
HYDRAULIC HOES: Hydraulic Backhoe Operator, wheel
type (Ford, John Deere, Case type); Hydraulic Backhoe
Operator track type up to and including 20,000 lbs.;
Concrete Pumper; Concrete Paver: Compactor; Loaders,
tired type , less than 25,00 lbs;
rubber
Forklift over 5 ton, Man Lift/Outside Elevator
GROUP 6: LOADERS: (less than 1 cu yd.); Roller
(Non-Asphalt); Oiler; Bobcat/Skid Loader; Grade Checker;
Crane oiler; Drill Assistant; Forklift
---------------------------------------------------------------* IRON0029-011 01/01/2012
Rates
Fringes
IRONWORKER (Ornamental,
Reinforcing, and Structural).....$ 33.87
20.12
---------------------------------------------------------------LABO0001-030 06/01/2008
Rates
Fringe
s Laborers: (Mason
Tender-Cement/Concrete)..........$ 25.75
11.25
---------------------------------------------------------------LABO0001-031 06/01/2008
Rates
Fringes
Laborers: (Mason Tender-Brick)...$ 25.75
11.25
---------------------------------------------------------------LABO0001-032 06/01/2008
file:///C:/Users/EricW/AppData/Local/Temp/FOU1A237.htm
5/22/2012
Rates
file:///C:/Users/EricW/AppData/Local/Temp/FOU1A237.htm
Fringes
5/22/2012
Page 4 of 8
Laborers: (Mason Tender-Stone)...$ 25.75
11.25
---------------------------------------------------------------LABO0003-011 06/01/2010
Rates
Laborers:
GROUP
GROUP
GROUP
GROUP
1....................
$
2....................
$
3....................
$
4....................
$
LABORER CLASSIFICATIONS
GROUP 1: Form-Stripping;
Laborer GROUP 2:
GROUP 3: Vibrating
25.25
25.91
26.38
26.80
Demolition,
Fringes
12.0
12.0
7
12.0
7
12.0
7
General
Power Tool Operator
Plate
GROUP 4: Pipelayer
---------------------------------------------------------------PAIN0055-025
07/01/2009
Rates
Fringes
PAINTER
BRUSH, ROLLER AND SPRAY.....$ 19.59
7.24
---------------------------------------------------------------PAIN0055-026 08/01/2011
Rates
Fringes
DRYWALL FINISHER/TAPER...........$ 31.76
11.86
---------------------------------------------------------------PAIN0740-002 01/01/2012
Rates
Fringes
GLAZIER..........................$ 34.60
13.29
---------------------------------------------------------------PAIN1236-007 01/01/2012
Rates
Fringes
FLOOR LAYER: Vinyl Flooring.....$ 27.45
11.20
---------------------------------------------------------------PLAS0082-004 06/01/2011
Rates
Fringes
PLASTERER
Including Stucco............$ 25.08
11.32
---------------------------------------------------------------PLAS0555-006
06/01/2011
Rates
CEMENT MASON/CONCRETE FINISHER...$ 29.05
file:///C:/Users/EricW/AppData/Local/Temp/FOU1A237.htm
Fringes
17.59
5/22/2012
Page 5 of 8
---------------------------------------------------------------PLUM0290-009 04/01/2011
Rates
Fringes
PIPEFITTER
Including HVAC Pipe
Installation................$ 36.69
20.09
---------------------------------------------------------------PLUM0290-010 04/01/2011
Rates
Fringes
PLUMBER..........................$ 36.69
20.09
---------------------------------------------------------------ROOF0049-004
07/01/2011
Rates
Fringes
ROOFER
Excluding Metal Roof........$ 27.53
9.05
---------------------------------------------------------------SFOR0669-002 04/01/2011
Rates
Fringes
SPRINKLER FITTER
Fire Sprinklers.............$ 32.75
18.25
---------------------------------------------------------------SHEE0016-015 07/01/2011
Rates
Fringe
s Sheet Metal Worker
Including HVAC Duct
Installation................$ 35.32
16.10
---------------------------------------------------------------* SUOR2009-027 11/09/2009
Rates
Fringes
ELECTRICIAN (Low Voltage
Wiring for Alarms)...............$ 27.97
6.41
LABORER: Asphalt Raker..........$ 20.94
7.05
LABORER: Landscape..............$ 12.38
0.00
MILLWRIGHT.......................$ 18.45
3.54
TRUCK DRIVER: Water Truck.......$ 18.11
5.05
---------------------------------------------------------------TEAM0037-008 06/01/2011
Rates
GROUP 1.....................$ 26.90
GROUP
2.....................$ 27.02
drivers:
s Truck
GROUP
3.....................$ 27.15
file:///C:/Users/EricW/AppData/Local/Temp/FOU1A237.htm
Fringe
13.15
13.15
13.15
5/22/2012
GROUP
GROUP
GROUP
GROUP
4.....................
5.....................
$
6.....................
$
7.....................
$
TRUCK DRIVERS CLASSIFICATIONS
27.41
27.63
27.79
27.99
Page 6 of 8
13.1
13.1
5
13.1
5
13.1
5
GROUP 1: Dump trucks, side, end and bottom dumps: up
to and including 10 cu. yds.
GROUP 2: Dump trcuks/articulated dumps 6 cu to 10 cu.;
GROUP 3: Dump trucks, side, end and bottom dumps:
over 10
cu. yds. and including 30 cu. yds., includes articulated
dump trucks
GROUP 4: Dump trucks, side, end and bottom dumps: over
30 cu. yds. and including 50 cu. yds. and includes
articulated
dump trucks
GROUP 5: Dump trucks, side, end and bottom dumps: over
50 cu. yds. and including 60 cu. yds. and includes
articulated dump trucks
GROUP 6: Dump trucks, side, end and bottom dumps:
over 60 cu. yds. and including 80 cu. yds. and
includes articulated dump trucks
GROUP 7: Dump trucks, side, end and bottom dumps:
over 80 cu. yds. and including 100 cu. yds.,
includes articulated dump trucks
---------------------------------------------------------------WELDERS - Receive rate prescribed for craft performing
operation to which welding is incidental.
================================================================
Unlisted classifications needed for work not included
within the scope of the classifications listed may be
added after award only as provided in the labor standards
contract clauses (29CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (ii)).
---------------------------------------------------------------The body of each wage determination lists the
classification and wage rates that have been found to be
prevailing for the cited type(s) of construction in the
area covered by the wage determination. The
classifications are listed in alphabetical order of
"identifiers" that indicate whether the particular rate is
union or non-union.
Union Identifiers
An identifier enclosed in dotted lines beginning with
file:///C:/Users/EricW/AppData/Local/Temp/FOU1A237.htm
5/22/2012
characters other than "SU" denotes that the union
classification and rate have found to be prevailing for
that
file:///C:/Users/EricW/AppData/Local/Temp/FOU1A237.htm
5/22/2012
Page 7 of 8
classification.
Example: PLUM0198-005 07/01/2011.The
first four letters , PLUM, indicate the international union
and the four-digit number, 0198, that follows indicates
the local union number or district council number where
applicable , i.e., Plumbers Local 0198.
The
next number, 005 in the example, is an internal number
used in processing the wage determination.
The
date, 07/01/2011, following these characters is the
effective date of the most current negotiated
rate/collective bargaining agreement which would be July 1,
2011 in the above example.
Union prevailing wage rates will be updated to reflect any
changes in the collective bargaining agreements
governing the rate.
Non-Union Identifiers
Classifications listed under an "SU" identifier were
derived from survey data by computing average rates and
are not union rates; however, the data used in computing
these rates may include both union and non-union data.
Example:
SULA2004-007
5/13/2010. SU indicates the rates are not union rates, LA
indicates the State of Louisiana; 2004 is the year of the
survey; and 007 is an internal number used in producing
the wage determination.
A 1993 or later date,
5/13/2010, indicates the classifications and rates under
that identifier were issued as a General Wage
Determination on that date.
Survey wage rates will remain in effect and will not
change until a new survey is conducted.
---------------------------------------------------------------- WAGE
DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS
1.) Has there been an initial decision in the matter?
This can be:
*
*
*
*
an existing published wage determination
a survey underlying a wage determination
a Wage and Hour Division letter setting forth a
position on a wage determination matter
a conformance (additional classification and rate) ruling
On survey related matters, initial contact, including
requests for summaries of surveys, should be with the Wage
and Hour Regional Office for the area in which the survey
was conducted because those Regional Offices have
responsibility for the Davis-Bacon survey program. If the
response from this initial contact is not satisfactory, then
the process described in 2.) and 3.) should be followed.
With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for the
formal process described here, initial contact should
be with the Branch of Construction Wage
Determinations.
Write to:
Branch of Construction Wage Determinations
file:///C:/Users/EricW/AppData/Local/Temp/FOU1A237.htm
5/22/2012
Wage and Hour Division
U.S. Department of Labor
file:///C:/Users/EricW/AppData/Local/Temp/FOU1A237.htm
5/22/2012
Page 8 of 8
200 Constitution Avenue, N.W.
Washington, DC 20210
2.) If the answer to the question in 1.) is yes, then an
interested party (those affected by the action) can
request review and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour
Administrator (See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7).
Write to:
Wage and Hour Administrator
U.S. Department of Labor
200 Constitution Avenue, N.W.
Washington, DC 20210
The request should be accompanied by a full statement
of the interested party's position and by any information
(wage payment data, project description, area practice
material, etc.) that the requestor considers relevant to
the issue.
3.) If the decision of the Administrator is not
favorable, an interested party may appeal directly to
the Administrative Review Board (formerly the Wage
Appeals Board).
Write to:
Administrative Review Board
U.S. Department of Labor
200 Constitution Avenue, N.W.
Washington, DC 20210
4.) All decisions by the Administrative Review Board are final.
================================================================
END OF GENERAL DECISION
file:///C:/Users/EricW/AppData/Local/Temp/FOU1A237.htm
5/22/2012
Request For Wage Determination And
Response To Request
U.S. Department of Labor
Employment Standards Administration
Wage and Hour Division
(Davis Bacon Act as Amended and Related Statuses)
FOR DEPARTMENT
OF LABOR USE
Mail Your Request To:
U.S. Department of Labor
Employment Standards Administration
Wage and Hour Division
Branch of Construction Contract Wage Determinations
Washington, D.C. 20210
Response To Request
Use area determination issued for
this area
CHECK OR LIST CRAFTS NEEDED
(Attach continuation sheet if needed)
Asbestos workers
Boilermakers
Bricklayers
Requesting Officer (Typed name and signature)
Carpenters
Department, Agency, or Bureau
Cement masons
Phone Number
Electricians
Date of Request
Estimated Advertising Date
Estimated Bid Opening Date
Glaziers
Prior Decision Number (if any)
Estimated $ Value of Contract
Type of Work
Laborers (Specify classes)
Ironworkers
The attached decision noted below
is applicable to this project
Decision Number
Under 1/2 Mil
1 to 5 Mil
Bldg.
Highway
1/2 to 1 Mil
Over 5 Mil
Resid.
Heavy
Address to which wage determination should be mailed. (Print or type)
Lathers
Marble & tile setters, terrazzo workers
Date of Decision
Painters
Piledrivermen
Plasterers
Expires
Plumbers
Roofers
Sheet metal workers
Supersedes Decision Number
Soft floor layers
Stearnfitters
Welders-rate for craft
Approved
Location of Project (City, County, State, Zip Code)
Truck drivers
Power equipment operators
(Specify types)
Description of Work (Be specific) (Print of type)
Other Crafts
308-104
NSN 7540-00-105-0078
*U.S. Government Printing Office: 1986-484-272/39411
Standard Form 308 (Rev. May 1985)
U.S. Department of Labor -29 CFR Part 1
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
011000
011150
013000
013216
014000
014216
015000
016000
016116
017000
017419
017800
SUMMARY OF WORK
CONTRACTOR ENGINEERED COMPONENT PROCEDURES
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
DEFINITIONS
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUND (VOC) CONTENT RESTRICTIONS
EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
FORMS
HUD 2328
HUD
HUD
HUD
HUD
HUD
HUD
HUD
HUD
HUD
HUD
HUD
CONTRACTOR’S AND/OR MORTGAGOR’S COST
BREAKDOWN
5372
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE
92330 CONTRACTOR’S CERTIFICATE OF ACTUAL COST
92437 CONSTRUCTION CHANGES ON PROJECT
MORTGAGES
92442 CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT
92448 CONTRACTOR’S REQUISITION
92485 PERMISSION TO OCCUPY
95379 HUD REPRESENTATIVE’S TRIP REPORT
92450M COMPLETION ASSURANCE AGREEMENT
92452A PAYMENT BOND
92452M PERFORMANCE BOND DUAL OBLIGEE
92457A HUD SURVEY INSTRUCTIONS AND REPORT
OWNER PROVIDED INFORMATION
000000
GEOTECHNICAL REPORT
Moreland Station Apartment Building 1/11/2013
Construction Documents
SECTION 011000
SUMMARY
PART 1 GENERAL
a. PROJECT
i.
Project Name: Moreland Station Apartment Building.
ii.
Owner's Name: Urban Evolution, Development Inc.
iii.
Architect's Name: BAMA Architecture and Design, LLC
iv.
The Project consists of the construction of a 68 unit apartment building with 45 parking
spaces.
b. CONTRACT DESCRIPTION
i. Contract Type: A single prime contract based on a Stipulated Price as described in
Document 005200 - Agreement Form.
c.
WORK BY OWNER
i. Items noted NIC (Not in Contract) will be supplied and installed by Owner before
Substantial Completion. Some items include: Planter boxes, benches.
d. OWNER OCCUPANCY
i. Owner intends to occupy the Project upon Substantial Completion.
ii. Cooperate with Owner to minimize conflict and to facilitate Owner's operations.
iii.
Schedule the Work to accommodate Owner occupancy.
END OF SECTION
020712 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
SUMMARY
110 00 - 1
SECTION 011150
CONTRACTOR ENGINEERED COMPONENT PROCEDURES
DEFERRED SUBMITTALS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.2
1.3
Contractor Engineered Components in accordance with Contract Documents.
RELATED REQUIRMENTS
A.
Construction Drawings – Deferred Submittal list shown on Cover Sheet. Some of the
Contractor Engineered Components listed below are designated as a Deferred Submittal within
the City of Portland’s building permit approval process. Contractor shall serve as Applicant and
submit for review and approval per City of Portland Bureau of Development Services
requirements for all Contractor Engineered Components designated as Deferred Submittals.
B.
Section 054000 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing.
C.
Section 055000 – Metal Fabrications.
D.
Section 061000 – Rough Carpentry
E.
Section 061733 - Prefabricated Plywood I Joists.
F.
Section 078413 – Firestopping.
G.
Section 083613 – Sectional Doors.
H.
Section 084313 – Aluminum-Framed Storefronts.
I.
Section 088000 – Glazing.
J.
Section 092116 – Gypsum Board Assemblies.
K.
Section 1014 00 - Signage
L.
Section 142040 – Hydraulic Elevators.
M.
Section 211300 – Fire Suppression Sprinkler Systems.
N.
Section 230500 – Basic HVAC Materials and Methods.
O.
Construction Drawings – Structural, Architectural, HVAC, Plumbing, and Electrical.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Applicant: Contractor applying for submittal approval by Architect, approved permit for
Deferred Submittals, and coordinating Contractor Engineered Components with Project and
with each other. Includes coordination of required submittals with Architect and City of Portland
Bureau of Development Services.
B.
Architect: Architect registered in the State in which the Project is located and engaged by
Owner to provide contract documents including drawings, computations and specifications
required for building permit approval by City of Portland Bureau of Development Services for
principal project systems. Includes Architect's staff, consultants and consultant's staffs.
C.
Contractor: Firm engaged by Owner to construct Project. Includes employees, subcontractors,
suppliers and their employees.
D.
Contractor Design Engineer: Professional Engineer registered in the State in which the Project
is located and engaged by Contractor, subcontractor or supplier to provide drawings,
computations and specifications required by Building Official for designated Contractor
Engineered specialty system, in accordance with criteria set forth in Contract Documents.
020712 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
7/16/2012 Construction Documents
CONTRACTOR ENGINEERED COMPONENT
PROCEDURES / DEFERRED SUBMITTALS
111 50 - 1
1.4
E.
Seal: Certification that drawings, computations and specifications were designed and prepared
under direct supervision of Architect or Engineer whose name appears thereon.
F.
Review Stamp: Certification that Architect has reviewed drawings, computations and
specifications bearing seal of Contractor Design Engineer, verifying conformance with
information given and design concept set forth in Drawings and Specifications
G.
Approval Stamp: Certification that Building Official has reviewed submittal and finds it
acceptable with respect to applicable code compliance.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Certain components of Project's construction are designated Contractor Engineered.
Contractor is responsible to coordinate and assume or assign to subcontractors and/or
suppliers complete responsibility for design, calculations, submittals, permits if required,
fabrication, delivery and installation of Contractor Engineered Components.
B.
Contractor is responsible, with no exceptions, for submittal of Contractor Engineered
Component documents to City of Portland Bureau of Development Services for review, so
review will not adversely affect Project's construction schedule. Contractor Engineered
Components are defined as complete systems provided for intended use.
C.
Architect's review of Contractor Engineered submittals is for general conformance with design
intent for the Project and documentation required by City of Portland Bureau of Development
Services. Architect not responsible for coordination of Contractor Engineered Components with
Contract Documents. Review does not lessen nor shift burden of responsibility from Contractor
or assigned subcontractor/supplier to Owner or Architect.
D.
Owner not responsible to pay for delays, additional products, hours of work or overtime,
restocking or rework required due to failure to coordinate the Work with other trades or to
provide Contractor Engineered Components and their approval in a timely manner to meet
Project schedule.
E.
Contractor Engineered Components: The following are Contractor Engineered Components
known at this time that are required to receive Architect and/or City of Portland review and
approval as either a Deferred Submittal and/or as a component system for the Project:
1. Cold-formed metal framing – suspended interior gypsum ceiling and soffits.
2. Ground Improvement System (stone aggregate columns)
3. Steel Welding Procedures
4. Lateral hold-down system.
5. Pre-manufactured wood joists
6. Exterior metal soffit panels – panel deflection, anchorage.
7. Firestopping.
8. Exterior aluminum storefront and entrances– anchorage, system deflection, and glazing.
9. Exterior Aluminum Overhead Sectional Doors at Parking Entry and Loading Dock Bays –
misc. steel reinforcement, system deflection, anchorage, track support, and operating
system.
10. All glass entrances - glass thickness, head and sill tracks.
11. Exterior canopy glazing, GL-4S - thickness, system deflection, threaded metal stand-off
frame system and anchorage.
12. Signage: interior, building and parking garage including directional and wayfinding.
13. Elevators – complete system, misc. components and connections for steel guide rails,
hoist beam, and pit ladder.
14. Vehicle lifts.
15. Fire Sprinkler System – complete system, anchorages.
16. Mechanical HVAC equipment - product data, connections seismic calculations, and
anchorages.
201207/ Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
CONTRACTOR ENGINEERED COMPONENT
PROCEDURES / DEFERRED SUBMITTALS
01 11 50- 2
F.
1.5
1.6
1.7
Additional requirements are specified in respective Specification sections for these
components.
SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 30 00 – Administrative Requirements.
B.
Show complete criteria, design assumptions, details, calculations, instructions for fabrications,
assembly, installation and interface with other trades.
C.
Contractor Design Engineer's stamp with calculations for that portion of work.
1. Submittals without required calculations or Contractor Design Engineer's stamp and which
have not been reviewed by Contractor will not be reviewed by Architect.
SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
City of Portland Bureau of Development Services has set policies regarding Contractor
Engineered components of building projects. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to confirm
the applicability of the following and to comply with all current requirements.
B.
Components are those subject to lateral or vertical loads and are not designed by Architect or
Engineers.
1. These components require designing by Contractor Design Engineer who received
subcontract or purchase order for that component of Project.
C.
Components shall be coordinated with adjunct systems whether designed by Architect or are
other Contractor Engineered components.
D.
City of Portland Bureau of Development Services Submittals:
1. Three sets of design drawings and specifications clearly and legibly showing members,
dimensions, connections, materials and indicating how component is attached to main
structure.
a. Design and prepare these drawing stamped by Engineer licensed in the State in
which the Project is located.
b. Drawings require signature indicating General Design Conformance by Architect.
c. Shop drawings or erection drawing not acceptable for above requirements.
2. Submit one set of calculations including criteria, design assumptions, substantiating
computations and additional data sufficient to show correctness of drawings and
compliance with structural revisions of the State in which the Project is located Structural
Specialty Code.
a. Prepare calculations stamped by Contractor Designed Engineer who prepared
drawings.
b. Calculations require signing by Architect indicating acceptance of design concepts,
loading criteria and compatibility of designs.
E.
Before work is allowed to proceed the following must occur:
1. Submit complete legible documents.
2. Documents must be examined and approved by Building Department.
3. Issuance to and approval by Owner of insurance documents as required in the
Supplemental General Conditions.
F.
Documents not completed prior to issuance of building permit, must be completed and
submitted for approval prior to fabrication.
G.
Contractor required to complete and submit Contractor Engineered Summary Sheet listing
Contractor's Engineered subcontractors / suppliers and registered engineer's name, address
and telephone number prior to issuance of components approval.
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
A.
Some Contractor Engineered Components are shown in Construction Drawings for design
intent, context and coordination, and content.
201207/ Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
CONTRACTOR ENGINEERED COMPONENT
PROCEDURES / DEFERRED SUBMITTALS
01 11 50- 3
1.8
B.
Clearly define load reactions at interface between Contractor Engineered components and
structural frame.
C.
Coordinate Contractor Engineered system or component with adjunct components.
PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING
A.
Comply with the requirements specified in respective Sections.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED
END OF SECTION
201207/ Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
CONTRACTOR ENGINEERED COMPONENT
PROCEDURES / DEFERRED SUBMITTALS
01 11 50- 4
SECTION 012300
ALTERNATES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Description of alternates.
B.
Procedures for pricing alternates.
ACCEPTANCE OF ALTERNATES
A.
Alternates quoted on Bid Forms will be reviewed and accepted or rejected at Owner's option.
Accepted alternates will be identified in the Owner-Contractor Agreement.
B.
Coordinate related work and modify surrounding work to integrate the Work of each alternate.
SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES
A. Alternate No. 01, Parking Garage Door:
1. ADD: OVHD-1 (Parking Garage): custom steel tubular frame, swinging gates, two (2)
operating frame panels, electric operating system, frame mullion divisions and perforated
metal panels as shown in Door Schedule, A-602.
B. Alternate No. 02, Loading Dock Door:
1. ADD: OVHD-2 (Loading Dock): custom steel tubular frame, swinging gates, one (1)
operating frame panel, electric operating system, frame mullion divisions and ½” insulated
obscure glass panels (similar to GL-1S) as shown in Door Schedule, A-602.
C. Alternate No. 03, 09 01 16, Gypsum Board Finish, 3.07, Joint Treatment, Item B.1:
1. ADD: Level 4 for all walls and ceilings in tenant and public areas – apartment units, hallways.
D. Alternate No. 04, Countertops - Apartment Unit Kitchens and Bathrooms:
1. ADD: Solid surface countertop instead of T-1 and T-2 porcelain ceramic tile.
2. Solid surface product options:
a. Granite – made in China.
b. Dal-Tile Quartz – made in India.
E. Alternate No. 05, Device Niche and Shelf - Apartment Units:
1. ADD: Recessed niche and shelf per detail C5/A-531.
2. ADD: Shallow depth electrical power outlet above shelf.
F. Alternate No. 06, Light Fixture - Apartment Unit Kitchens:
1. ADD: Alternate kitchen light fixture for Type H, Luminaire Schedule, E003.
a. Liberty Lights, Circleline series, model no. CL-32CD, 14 inch round.
G. Alternate No. 07, Exterior HVAC louvers, exhaust vents - Apartment Unit heat pumps, exhaust:
1. ADD: Custom paint color selected by Architect.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED
END OF SECTION
020712 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
7/16/2012 Construction Documents
ALTERNATES
01 23 00- 1
SECTION 0130 00
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Preconstruction meeting.
B.
Site mobilization meeting.
C.
Progress meetings.
D.
Construction progress schedule.
E.
Progress photographs.
F.
Coordination drawings.
G.
Submittals for review, information, and project closeout.
H.
Number of copies of submittals.
I.
Submittal procedures.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Document 00 72 00 - General Conditions:
B.
Document 00 73 00 - Supplementary Conditions:
C.
Document 00 73 01 - HUD Special Conditions, Notes for Multifamily Insured Programs
D.
Section 01 10 00 - Summary of Work:
E.
Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Additional coordination
requirements.
F.
Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents.
G.
HUD Supplements
PROJECT COORDINATION
A.
Cooperate with the Project Coordinator in allocation of mobilization areas of site; for field offices
and sheds, for delivery access, traffic, and parking facilities.
B.
During construction, coordinate use of site and facilities through the Project Coordinator.
C.
Comply with Project Coordinator's procedures for intra-project communications; submittals,
reports and records, schedules, coordination drawings, and recommendations; and resolution
of ambiguities and conflicts.
D.
Comply with instructions of the Project Coordinator for use of temporary utilities and
construction facilities.
E.
Coordinate field engineering and layout work under instructions of the Project Coordinator.
F.
Make the following types of submittals to Architect through the Project Coordinator:
1. Requests for interpretation.
2. Requests for substitution.
3. Shop drawings, product data, and samples.
4. Test and inspection reports.
5. Manufacturer's instructions and field reports.
6. Applications for payment and change order requests.
7. Progress schedules.
8. Coordination drawings.
9. Closeout submittals.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
ELECTRONIC DOCUMENT SUBMITTAL SERVICE
020712/ Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
01 30 00 - 1
3.2
A.
All documents transmitted for purposes of administration of the contract are to be in electronic
(PDF) format and transmitted via an Internet-based submittal service that receives logs and
stores documents, provides electronic stamping and signatures, and notifies addressees via
email.
1. Besides submittals for review, information, and closeout, this procedure applies to
requests for information (RFIs), progress documentation, contract modification documents
(e.g. supplementary instructions, change proposals, change orders), applications for
payment, field reports and meeting minutes, and any other document any participant
wishes to make part of the project record.
2. Contractor and Architect are required to use this service.
3. It is Contractor's responsibility to submit documents in PDF format.
4. Subcontractors, suppliers, and Architect's consultants will be permitted to use the service
at no extra charge.
5. Users of the service need an email address, Internet access, and PDF review software
that includes ability to mark up and apply electronic stamps (such as Adobe Acrobat,
www.adobe.com, or Bluebeam PDF Revu, www.bluebeam.com), unless such software
capability is provided by the service provider.
6. Paper document transmittals will not be reviewed; emailed PDF documents will not be
reviewed.
7. All other specified submittal and document transmission procedures apply, except that
electronic document requirements to not apply to samples or color selection charts.
B.
Submittal Service: The selected service is:
C.
Training: One, one-hour, web-based training session will be arranged for all participants, with
representatives of Architect and Contractor participating; further training is the responsibility of
the user of the service.
D.
Project Closeout: Architect will determine when to terminate the service for the project and is
responsible for obtaining archive copies of files for Owner.
PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING
A.
Preconstruction meeting at HUD office to be scheduled on closing day
1. Attendance Required:
a. Owner.
b. Architect.
c. Contractor.
B.
Owner will schedule a meeting after Notice to Proceed.
C.
Meeting will occur within 7 days after Notice to Proceed.
1. Attendance Required:
a. Owner.
b. Architect.
c. Contractor.
D.
Location of meeting: Project Site.
E.
Agenda:
1. Execution of Owner-Contractor Agreement.
2. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates.
3. Distribution of Contract Documents.
4. Submission of list of Subcontractors, list of Products, schedule of values, and progress
schedule.
5. Designation of personnel representing the parties to Contract, Owner and Architect.
6. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for
payments, proposal request, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures.
7. Scheduling.
8. Temporary utilities provided by Owner.
9. Survey and building layout.
020712/ Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
01 30 00 - 2
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
F.
3.3
3.4
Job inspections.
Early purchase of and/or lead time requirements for materials and equipment.
Pre-purchased equipment.
Maintenance of access and safety.
Labor provisions.
Material submittals.
Owner access during construction.
Review of Contract Documents.
Review of Deferred Submittals requirements.
Coordination procedures and separate contracts.
Progress meetings.
Progress schedules.
Critical Work Sequencing.
Safety and Emergency procedures.
Security and housekeeping procedures.
Procedures for testing.
Procedures for maintaining record documents.
Hazardous materials.
Parking.
Requirements for start-up of equipment.
Inspection and acceptance of equipment put into service during construction period.
Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two
copies to ArchitectFOwnerFparticipantsFand those affected by decisions made.
PROGRESS MEETINGS
A.
Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at maximum monthly
intervals.
B.
Make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, and preside at
meetings.
C.
Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major Subcontractors and suppliersFOwnerF
Architect, as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting.
D.
HUD inspector will attend monthly draw meetings.
E.
Agenda:
1. Review minutes of previous meetings.
2. Review of Work progress.
3. Field observations, problems, and decisions.
4. Identification of problems that impede, or will impede, planned progress.
5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals.
6. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules.
7. Format and maintenance of progress schedule.
8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules.
9. Planned progress during succeeding work period.
10. Coordination of projected progress.
11. Maintenance of quality and work standards.
12. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination.
13. Other business relating to Work.
F.
Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two
copies to ArchitectFOwnerFparticipantsFand those affected by decisions made. Electronic
distribution is acceptable in Word or PDF format.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE
A.
Within 10 days after date of the Agreement, submit preliminary schedule defining planned
operations for the first 60 days of Work, with a general outline for remainder of Work.
020712/ Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
01 30 00 - 3
3.5
B.
If preliminary schedule requires revision after review, submit revised schedule within 10 days.
C.
Within 20 days after review of preliminary schedule, submit draft of proposed complete
schedule for review.
1. Include written certification that major contractors have reviewed and accepted proposed
schedule.
D.
Within 10 days after joint review, submit complete schedule.
E.
Submit updated schedule with each Application for Payment.
PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCES
A.
Conduct Pre-Installation Conference before each activity that requires coordination with other
construction activities. Specification Sections requiring Pre-Installation Conferences include:
1. Shoring and demolition of existing exterior walls and floor structures
2. Concrete Shear Walls
3. Concrete Floor Slabs
4. Masonry Veneer and Adhered Masonry Veneer
5. Structural Steel
6. Metal Stairs
7. Architectural Wood Casework
8. Water Repellants
9. Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing
10. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
11. Firestopping
12. Exterior and Interior Storefronts
13. Exterior Canopies
14. Vinyl Windows
15. Door Hardware
16. Tiling
17. Loading Dock Equipment
18. Elevators
19. Vehicle Lifts
20. Facility Chutes
21. Fire Sprinkler System
22. Fire Alarm System
23. Lighting
24. Decorative Metal Fences
B.
Attendance Required:
1. Owner’s Authorized Representative.
2. Architect.
3. Contractor.
4. Appropriate subcontractors.
5. Manufacturer's representative, if required by manufacturer or these specifications.
C.
Notifications:
1. Notify attendees of scheduled Conference a minimum of 7 calendar days in advance of
the conference.
D.
Agenda:
1. Submission of list of Subcontractors, list of Products, and progress schedule.
2. Scheduling and preparation for activities of other trades.
3. Review progress of time schedules, manufacturer's preparation and installation
recommendations, safety requirements, weather limitations, substrate acceptability,
compatibility problems, and inspection and testing requirements.
4. Contractor records significant discussions, agreements, and disagreements of each
conference. It is recommended that this meeting be held either preceding or following a
Progress Meeting.
020712/ Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
01 30 00 - 4
a.
b.
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
Number and record meetings sequentially.
Distribute meeting record to concerned parties, including Architect and Owner, within
72 hours after meeting.
REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION
A.
When field conditions or contents of Contract Documents require clarification or verification by
Architect, following procedure is required:
1. Present item or items requiring clarification /verification at Progress Meeting for
discussionT(For critical or emergency items, contact Architect at once.)
2. If it is determined by the Architect that item or items do not require written RFI submittals,
then clarification/verification determination shall be in Progress Meeting Report.
3. If it is determined by the Architect that item or items do require written RFI submittal,
prepare each RFI on a copy of form agreed to by Owner, Contractor and Architect. Design
Clarification/Variation Request (DCVR) and other forms are unacceptable.
4. Number RFI's sequentially from "1".
5. Record each RFI in a log, identifying each by RFI-#, subject, date submitted, date of
response, and disposition. Update and distribute log at project meetings.
6. Provide a proposed solution to the RFI.
7. Architect shall respond to submitted RFI's within five calendar days if provided with
complete information, in space provided on RFI form.
8. If potential cost impact is indicated on RFI, then include change order request for the
proposed work within three calendar days.
9. Architect shall copy response to both Contractor and Owner.
B.
Route and copy RFI's in same manner as correspondence.
C.
If agreement regarding clarification/verification for RFI's acceptable to both parties cannot be
reached, see General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions for procedures to resolve
conflict.
PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS
COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A.
Provide information required by Project Coordinator for preparation of coordination drawings.
B.
Review drawings with all affected subcontractors prior to submission to Architect.
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW
A.
When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for review:
1. Product data.
2. Shop drawings.
3. Samples for selection.
4. Samples for verification.
B.
Submit to Architect for review for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with
information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents.
C.
Samples will be reviewed only for aesthetic, color, or finish selection.
D.
After review, provide copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
article below and for record documents purposes described in Section 01 78 00 - CLOSEOUT
SUBMITTALS.
3.10 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION
A.
When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for information:
1. Design data.
2. Certificates.
3. Test reports.
4. Inspection reports.
5. Manufacturer's instructions.
6. Manufacturer's field reports.
020712/ Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
01 30 00 - 5
7.
B.
Other types indicated.
Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator or for Owner. No action will be
taken.
3.11 SUBMITTALS FOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A.
When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them at project closeout:
1. Project record documents.
2. Operation and maintenance data.
3. Warranties.
4. Bonds.
5. Other types as indicated.
B.
Submit for Owner's benefit during and after project completion.
3.12 NUMBER OF COPIES OF SUBMITTALS
A.
Documents for Review:
1. Small Size Sheets, Not Larger than 8-1/2 x 11 inches: Submit the number of copies that
Contractor requires, plus two copies that will be retained by Architect.
B.
Documents for Information: Submit two copies.
C.
Samples: Submit the number specified in individual specification sections; one of which will be
retained by Architect.
1. After review, produce duplicates.
2. Retained samples will not be returned to Contractor unless specifically so stated.
3.13 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A.
Transmit each submittal with approved form.
B.
Sequentially number the transmittal form. Revise submittals with original number and a
sequential alphabetic suffix.
C.
Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing and detail number,
and specification section number, as appropriate on each copy.
D.
Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, approval, verification of
Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of
information is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents.
E.
Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and coordinate submission of related items.
F.
For each submittal for review, allow 15 days excluding delivery time to and from the Contractor.
G.
Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations that may be
detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work.
H.
Provide space for Contractor and Architect review stamps.
I.
When revised for resubmission, identify all changes made since previous submission.
J.
Distribute reviewed submittals as appropriate. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to
comply with requirements.
K.
Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed.
END OF SECTION
020712/ Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
01 30 00 - 6
SECTION 01 32 16
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Preliminary schedule.
B.
Construction progress schedule, bar chart type.
REFERENCES
A.
1.3
1.4
AGC (CPSM) - Construction Planning and Scheduling Manual; Associated General Contractors
of America; 2004.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Within 10 days after date of Agreement, submit preliminary schedule defining planned
operations for the first 60 days of Work, with a general outline for remainder of Work.
B.
Submit schedule on form: HUD -5372 Construction Progress Schedule
C.
If preliminary schedule requires revision after review, submit revised schedule within 10 days.
D.
Within 20 days after review of preliminary schedule, submit draft of proposed complete
schedule for review.
1. Include written certification that major contractors have reviewed and accepted proposed
schedule.
E.
Within 10 days after joint review, submit complete schedule.
F.
Submit updated schedule with each Application for Payment.
G.
Submit under transmittal letter form specified in Section 01 30 00.
SCHEDULE FORMAT
A.
Listings: In chronological order according to the start date for each activity. Identify each
activity with the applicable specification section number.
B.
Diagram Sheet Size: Maximum 24 x 36 inches or width required.
C.
Sheet Size: Multiples of 8-1/2 x 11 inches.
D.
Scale and Spacing: To allow for notations and revisions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
PRELIMINARY SCHEDULE
A.
3.2
CONTENT
A.
3.3
Prepare preliminary schedule in the form of a horizontal bar chart.
Show complete sequence of construction by activity, with dates for beginning and completion of
each element of construction.
B.
Identify each item by specification section number.
C.
Identify work of separate stages and other logically grouped activities.
D.
Provide sub-schedules to define critical portions of the entire schedule.
E.
Show accumulated percentage of completion of each item, and total percentage of Work
completed, as of the first day of each month.
F.
Indicate delivery dates for owner-furnished products.
G.
Provide legend for symbols and abbreviations used.
BAR CHARTS
A.
Include a separate bar for each major portion of Work or operation.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE
01 32 16 - 1
B.
3.4
3.5
3.6
Identify the first work day of each week.
REVIEW AND EVALUATION OF SCHEDULE
A.
Participate in joint review and evaluation of schedule with Architect at each submittal.
B.
Evaluate project status to determine work behind schedule and work ahead of schedule.
C.
After review, revise as necessary as result of review, and resubmit within 10 days.
UPDATING SCHEDULE
A.
Maintain schedules to record actual start and finish dates of completed activities.
B.
Indicate progress of each activity to date of revision, with projected completion date of each
activity.
C.
Annotate diagrams to graphically depict current status of Work.
D.
Identify activities modified since previous submittal, major changes in Work, and other
identifiable changes.
E.
Indicate changes required to maintain Date of Substantial Completion.
F.
Submit reports required to support recommended changes.
G.
Provide narrative report to define problem areas, anticipated delays, and impact on the
schedule. Report corrective action taken or proposed and its effect including the effects of
changes on schedules of separate contractors.
DISTRIBUTION OF SCHEDULE
A.
Distribute copies of updated schedules to Contractor's project site file, to Subcontractors,
suppliers, Architect, Owner , and other concerned parties.
B.
Instruct recipients to promptly report, in writing, problems anticipated by projections shown in
schedules.
END OF SECTION
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE
01 32 16 - 2
SECTION 014000
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Codes, Regulations and Permits.
B.
References and Standards.
C.
Quality assurance submittals.
D.
Mock-ups.
E.
Control of installation.
F.
Tolerances.
G.
Testing and inspection services.
H.
Manufacturers' field services.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Submittal procedures.
B.
Section 01 42 16 - Definitions.
C.
Section 01 42 19 - Reference Standards.
D.
Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Requirements for material and product quality.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM E 329 - Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged Construction Inspection and/or
Testing; 2009.
B.
ASTM E 543 - Standard Specification for Agencies Performing Nondestructive Testing; 2009.
CODES, REGULATIONS AND PERMITS
A.
All Work shall conform to the 2010 Oregon Structural Specialty Code Edition of the
International Building Code (hereinafter referred to as (IBC), as amended by the State of
Oregon Department of Consumer and Business Services, and the State of Oregon Office of the
State Fire Marshall.
B.
Contractor shall comply with all applicable state and local construction codes.
C.
References to codes, specifications and standards referred to in the Contract Documents shall
mean, and are intended to be, the latest edition, amendment or revision of such reference
standard in effect as of the date of these Contract Documents.
D.
The Owner shall be responsible for the City of Portland Bureau of Development Services plan
review and building permit fees; the Contractor shall be responsible for all other permits,
licenses, and fees required for the Project.
E.
Contractor shall arrange and attend all required permit inspections and furnish evidence of
approved City inspection reports per Section 01 70 00.
F.
Contractor shall provide an Asbestos Operations and Maintenance Plan.
G.
Contractor shall provide a Lead Based Operations and Maintenance Plan.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Testing Agency Qualifications:
1. Prior to start of Work, submit agency name, address, and telephone number, and names
of full time registered Engineer and responsible officer.
B.
Design Data: Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator for the limited purpose
of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the
contract documents, or for Owner's information.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
2/21/2013 HUD Review
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
01 40 00 - 1
C.
Test Reports: After each test/inspection, promptly submit two copies of report to Architect and
to Contractor.
1. Include:
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
2/21/2013 HUD Review
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
01 40 00 - 2
2.
1.6
1.7
a. Date issued.
b. Project title and number.
c. Name of inspector.
d. Date and time of sampling or inspection.
e. Identification of product and specifications section.
f.
Location in the Project.
g. Type of test/inspection.
h. Date of test/inspection.
i.
Results of test/inspection.
j.
Conformance with Contract Documents.
k. When requested by Architect, provide interpretation of results.
Test report submittals are for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator for the
limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept
expressed in the contract documents, or for Owner's information.
D.
Certificates: When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by the
manufacturer and Contractor or installation/application subcontractor to Architect, in quantities
specified for Product Data.
1. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit
supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate.
E.
Manufacturer's Instructions: When specified in individual specification sections, submit printed
instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, for the
Owner's information. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special
attention, and special environmental criteria required for application or installation.
REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A.
For products and workmanship specified by reference to a document or documents not
included in the Project Manual, also referred to as reference standards, comply with
requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are
required by applicable codes.
B.
Conform to reference standard of date of issue current on date of Contract Documents, except
where a specific date is established by applicable code.
C.
Obtain copies of standards where required by product specification sections.
D.
Maintain copy at project site during submittals, planning, and progress of the specific work, until
Substantial Completion.
E.
Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification
from Architect before proceeding.
F.
Neither the contractual relationships, duties, or responsibilities of the parties in Contract nor
those of Architect shall be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or inference
otherwise in any reference document.
TESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCIES
A.
Owner will employ and pay for services of an independent testing agency to perform other
specified testing.
B.
As indicated in individual specification sections, Owner or Contractor shall employ and pay for
services of an independent testing agency to perform other specified testing.
C.
Employment of agency in no way relieves Contractor of obligation to perform Work in
accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.
D.
Contractor Employed Agency:
1. Inspection agency: Comply with requirements of ASTM E329.
2. Laboratory: Authorized to operate in the State in which the Project is located.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
2/21/2013 HUD Review
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
01 40 00 - 3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
SUPERVISION
A.
The Contractor shall maintain effective supervision on the Project at all times Work is being
performed.
B.
The superintendent shall be the same person throughout the Project and shall attend the
preconstruction and pre-installation conferences.
CONTROL OF INSTALLATION
A.
Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and
workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality.
B.
Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence.
C.
Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from
Architect before proceeding.
D.
Failure to secure interpretation may cause rejection of installation by Architect or Owner.
E.
Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent
tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise
workmanship.
F.
Have Work performed by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality.
G.
Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the
manufacturer.
H.
Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand
stresses, vibration, physical distortion, and disfigurement.
MOCK-UPS
A.
Tests will be performed under provisions identified in this section and identified in the
respective product specification sections.
B.
Assemble and erect specified items with specified attachment and anchorage devices,
flashings, seals, and finishes.
C.
Accepted mock-ups shall be a comparison standard for the remaining Work.
D.
Where mock-up has been accepted by Architect and is specified in product specification
sections to be removed, remove mock-up and clear area when directed to do so.
TOLERANCES
A.
Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work.
Do not permit tolerances to accumulate.
B.
Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. Should manufacturers' tolerances conflict with
Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding.
C.
Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place.
TESTING AND INSPECTION
A.
See individual specification sections for testing required.
B.
Testing Agency Duties:
1. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in
performance of services.
2. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified
standards.
3. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents.
4. Promptly notify Architect and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-conformance of
Work or products.
5. Perform additional tests and inspections required by Architect.
6. Submit reports of all tests/inspections specified.
C.
Limits on Testing/Inspection Agency Authority:
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
2/21/2013 HUD Review
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
01 40 00 - 4
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.6
3.7
Agency may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract
Documents.
Agency may not approve or accept any portion of the Work.
Agency may not assume any duties of Contractor.
Agency has no authority to stop the Work.
D.
Contractor Responsibilities:
1. Deliver to agency at designated location, adequate samples of materials proposed to be
used that require testing, along with proposed mix designs.
2. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work and to
manufacturers' facilities.
3. Provide incidental labor and facilities:
a. To provide access to Work to be tested/inspected.
b. To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be
tested/inspected.
c. To facilitate tests/inspections.
d. To provide storage and curing of test samples.
4. Notify Architect and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring
testing/inspection services.
5. Employ services of an independent qualified testing laboratory and pay for additional
samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements.
6. Arrange with Owner's agency and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections
required by Contractor beyond specified requirements.
E.
Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed
by the same agency on instructions by Architect.
F.
Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be paid for by
Contractor.
MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES
A.
When specified in individual specification sections, require material or product suppliers or
manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of
surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment, test, adjust and
balance of equipment as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary.
B.
Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are
supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions.
DEFECT ASSESSMENT
A.
Results of laboratory and/or field control tests and inspections shall be the principal basis upon
which satisfactory completion of Work shall be judged.
B.
If results of tests and inspections indicate Work is below requirements of Contract Documents,
that portion of Work is subject to rejection.
C.
Remove and replace Work so rejected at Contractor’s expense including costs of subsequent
tests and inspections until Work meets requirements of Contract Documents.
D.
Noncompliant Work shall be corrected and testing will be repeated until the Work complies with
the Contract Documents. Contractor will pay costs for retesting noncompliant Work.
E.
If, in the opinion of Architect, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, Architect will
direct an appropriate remedy or adjust payment.
END OF SECTION
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
2/21/2013 HUD Review
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
01 40 00 - 5
SECTION 014216
DEFINITIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Words which may be found elsewhere in the Contract Documents are defined in accordance
with the standards set forth in the following table:
1. Approve: Where used in conjunction with Architect's response to submittals, requests,
applications, inquiries, reports and claims by Contractor, the meaning of term "approved"
will be limited to the Architect's responsibilities and duties as specified in General and
Supplementary Conditions. In no case will "approval" by Architect be interpreted as a
release of Contract Documents.
2. As Detailed, As Shown: Where “as detailed”, “as shown” or words of similar importance
are used, it shall be understood that reference to the Drawings accompanying the
Specifications is made unless otherwise stated.
3. As Directed, As Required, As Authorized, As Reviewed, As Accepted: Where “as
directed”, “as required”, “as authorized”, “as reviewed”, “as accepted” or words of similar
importance are used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirement, permission,
authorization, review, or acceptance of the Architect is intended, unless otherwise stated.
4. As Indicated: Where “as indicated” is used it shall be understood that reference to
Drawings and/or Specifications is made unless otherwise stated.
5. Directed, Requested, etc.: Terms such as "directed," "requested," "authorized,"
"selected," will be understood as "directed by Architect," "requested by Architect," and
similar phrases shall not be interpreted to extend Architect's responsibility into
Contractor's responsibility for construction supervision.
6. Furnish: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail the term "furnish" is used to mean
supply and deliver to project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation,
etc., as applicable in each instance.
7. Indicated: The term "indicated" is a cross-reference to graphic representations, notes or
schedules on drawings, to other paragraphs or schedules in the specifications and to
similar means of recording requirements in Contract Documents. Where terms such as
"shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" are used in lieu of "indicated," it is for
purpose of helping reader locate cross-reference and no limitation of location is intended
except as specifically noted.
8. Install: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, the term "install" is used to describe
operations at project site including unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing,
anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning and
similar operations, as applicable in each instance.
9. Installer: The term "installer" is defined as the entity (person or firm) engaged by
Contractor, or its subcontractor or sub-subcontractor for performance of a particular unit of
Work at project site, including installation, erection, application and similar required
operations. It is a general requirement that such entities (Installers) be expert in
operations they are engaged to perform.
10. Provide: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, term "provide" means furnish and
install, complete and ready for intended use, as applicable in each instance.
END OF SECTION
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2012 Bid Documents
DEFINITIONS
01 42 16 - 1
SECTION 015000
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Requirements of Regulatory Agencies.
B.
Protection.
C.
Temporary utilities.
D.
Temporary telecommunications services.
E.
Temporary sanitary facilities.
F.
Temporary Controls: Barriers, enclosures, and fencing.
G.
Security requirements.
H.
Vehicular access and parking.
I.
Waste removal facilities and services.
J.
Project identification sign.
K.
Field offices.
REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
A.
Regulations: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations of authorities
having jurisdiction.
B.
Standards: Comply with NFPA Code 241, "Building Construction and Demolition Operations",
ANSI-A10 Series standards for "Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition".
C.
Electrical Service: Comply with NEMA, NEC and UL standards and regulations for temporary
electric service; install service in compliance with National Electric Code (NFPA 70).
D.
Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to inspect and test each temporary utility
before use; obtain required certifications and permits if required.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect public right-of-way sidewalks, asphalt paving, concrete, trees, shrubs, and lawn areas
at all times from damage resulting from construction activities.
B.
Prevent materials from clogging catch basins and yard drains; leave drains clean and in proper
working condition.
C.
Clean, repair, resurface, or restore existing surfaces to their original, or better, condition, or
completely replace such surfaces to match existing, where damaged by construction
operations.
D.
The Contractor shall manage a safe job environment for both the safety of all the people
around the Work site as well as the safety of the Owner's and general public's property.
TEMPORARY UTILITIES
A.
Owner will provide the following:
1. Electrical power and metering, consisting of
2. Water supply, consisting of
.
_.
B.
Contractor will provide and pay for all electrical power, lighting, water, heating and cooling, and
ventilation required for construction purposes.
C.
New permanent facilities may not be used.
D.
Use trigger-operated nozzles for water hoses, to avoid waste of water.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
01 50 00 - 1
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
TELECOMMUNICATIONS SERVICES
A.
Provide, maintain, and pay for telecommunications services to field office at time of project
mobilization.
B.
Telecommunications services shall include:
TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES
A.
Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures. Provide at time of project mobilization.
B.
New permanent facilities may not be used during construction operations.
C.
Provide enclosed, weatherproof facilities with heat as required.
D.
Maintain daily in clean and sanitary condition.
BARRIERS
A.
Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas, to prevent access to areas
that could be hazardous to workers or the public, to allow for owner's use of site and to protect
existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations and
demolition.
B.
Provide barricades and covered walkways required by governing authorities for public rights-ofway .
C.
Provide protection for plants designated to remain. Replace damaged plants.
D.
Protect non-owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site, and structures from damage.
FENCING
A.
Construction: Commercial grade chain link fence.
B.
Provide 6 foot high fence around construction site; equip with vehicular and pedestrian gates
with locks.
EXTERIOR ENCLOSURES
A.
Provide temporary weather tight closure of exterior openings to accommodate acceptable
working conditions and protection for Products, to allow for temporary heating and maintenance
of required ambient temperatures identified in individual specification sections, and to prevent
entry of unauthorized persons. Provide access doors with self-closing hardware and locks.
1.10 SECURITY
A.
Security is the responsibility of the Contractor.
B.
Provide security and facilities to protect Work, existing facilities, and Owner's operations from
unauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft.
1.11 FIRE SAFETY
A.
Ensure that required exit routes remain unobstructed while building is occupied.
B.
Abide by all fire safety requirements for buildings under construction, alteration or demolition as
required by Article 87, of the Uniform Fire Code as adopted by the State of Oregon.
C.
An emergency telephone shall be provided on site. Cellular telephone equipment is
acceptable.
D.
Fire Suppression Equipment:
1. Install and maintain temporary fire protection facilities of the types needed to protect
against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 10
"Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers", and NFPA 241 "Standard for Safeguarding
Construction, Alterations and Demolition Operations".
2. Maintain equipment in working condition with current inspection certificate attached to
each.
3. Locate fire extinguishers where convenient and effective for their intended purpose, but
not less than one extinguisher on each floor at or near each usable stairwell.
4. Store combustible materials in containers in fire-safe locations.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
01 50 00 - 2
5.
6.
7.
Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary fire protection
facilities, stairways, and other access routes for fighting fires.
Prohibit smoking inside the building and in hazardous fire exposure areas.
Provide supervision of welding operations, combustion type temporary heating units, and
similar sources of fire ignition.
1.12 CONSTRUCTION AIDS
A.
Scaffolding: comply with applicable OSHA requirements.
B.
Material Handling Equipment:
1. Provide necessary cranes, hoists, towers, or other lifting devices.
2. Use only certified, experienced operators.
3. Remove equipment as soon as possible after task is completed.
4. Coordinate placement of such equipment with Owner’s Authorized Representative.
5. Obtain required permits and meet requirement of governing authorities regarding
applicable regulations.
C.
Materials or debris shall not be allowed to free fall from building.
1.13 VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING
A.
Coordinate access and haul routes with governing authorities and Owner.
B.
Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants, free of obstructions.
C.
Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering streets.
D.
Provide temporary parking areas to accommodate construction personnel. When site space is
not adequate, provide additional off-site parking.
1.14 WASTE REMOVAL
A.
See Section 01 74 19 - Waste Management, for additional requirements.
B.
Provide waste removal facilities and services as required to maintain the site in clean and
orderly condition.
C.
Provide containers with lids. Remove trash from site periodically.
D.
If materials to be recycled or re-used on the project must be stored on-site, provide suitable
non-combustible containers; locate containers holding flammable material outside the structure
unless otherwise approved by the authorities having jurisdiction.
E.
Open free-fall chutes are not permitted. Terminate closed chutes into appropriate containers
with lids.
1.15 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION
A.
Provide project identification sign:
1. Size: 4’ x 8’ x 3/4" MDO plywood
2. Graphics:
a. See layout
3. Final graphic layout to be approved by owner and architect
4. Erect on site at location indicated.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
01 50 00 - 3
C.
No other signs are allowed without Owner permission except those required by law.
1.16 FIELD OFFICES
A.
Office: Weathertight, with lighting, electrical outlets, heating, cooling equipment, and equipped
with sturdy furniture.
B.
Provide space for Project meetings, with table and chairs to accommodate 6 persons.
C.
Locate offices a minimum distance of 30 feet from existing and new structures.
1.17 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS
A.
Remove temporary utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior to Substantial Completion
inspection.
B.
Remove underground installations to a minimum depth of 2 feet. Grade site as indicated.
C.
Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work.
D.
Restore new permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED
END OF SECTION
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
01 50 00 - 4
SECTION 016000
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
General product requirements.
B.
LEED-related product requirements.
C.
Re-use of existing products.
D.
Transportation, handling, storage and protection.
E.
Product option requirements.
F.
Substitution limitations and procedures.
G.
Procedures for Owner-supplied products.
H.
Maintenance materials, including extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Product quality monitoring.
B.
Section 01 61 16 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions: Requirements for
VOC-restricted product categories.
C.
Section 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Waste disposal
requirements potentially affecting packaging and substitutions.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data Submittals: Submit manufacturer's standard published data. Mark each copy to
identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers'
standard data to provide information specific to this Project.
B.
Shop Drawing Submittals: Prepared specifically for this Project; indicate utility and electrical
characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for
functional equipment and appliances.
C.
Sample Submittals: Illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the product, with
integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work.
1. For selection from standard finishes, submit samples of the full range of the
manufacturer's standard colors, textures, and patterns.
D.
LEED Submittals: Use forms provided in Section 01 35 16.
E.
LEED Submittals: Use forms provided by
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
EXISTING PRODUCTS
A.
Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises unless specifically
required or permitted by the Contract Documents.
B.
Existing materials and equipment indicated to be removed, but not to be re-used, relocated,
reinstalled, delivered to the Owner, or otherwise indicated as to remain the property of the
Owner, become the property of the Contractor; remove from site.
C.
Reused Products: Reused products include materials and equipment previously used in this or
other construction, salvaged and refurbished as specified.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
01 60 00 - 1
2.2
NEW PRODUCTS
A.
Provide new products unless specifically required or permitted by the Contract Documents.
B.
Unless otherwise specified, all material and equipment shall be new; free from defects
impairing strength, durability, and appearance; of current manufacture.
C.
Items specified shall be considered minimum as to quality, function, capacity, and suitability for
application intended.
D.
Items incorporated into the Work shall conform to applicable specifications and standards
designated, and shall be of size, make, type, and quality specified.
E.
Manufacture like parts of duplicate units to standard size and gauge to make them
interchangeable.
F.
Two or more items of the same kind shall be identical and made by the same manufacturer.
G.
Do not use products having any of the following characteristics:
1. Made using or containing CFC's or HCFC's.
2. Made of wood from newly cut old growth timber.
H.
Where all other criteria are met, Contractor shall give preference to products that:
1. Are extracted, harvested, and/or manufactured closer to the location of the project.
2. Have longer documented life span under normal use.
3. Result in less construction waste.
4. Are made of vegetable materials that are rapidly renewable.
I.
Regionally-Sourced Products:
1. Specific Product Categories: Provide regionally-sourced products as specified elsewhere.
J.
Products with Rapidly Renewable Material Content:
1. Definition: Materials made from plants that are typically harvested within 10 years or less
after planting.
2. Specific Product Categories: Provide renewable material content as specified elsewhere.
3. Calculations: Where information about renewable material content is required to be
submitted and an item is not made completely of rapidly renewable material, calculate
content by dividing the renewable material content by weight by the total weight of the
item.
K.
Products with Recycled Content:
1. Specific Product Categories: Provide recycled content as specified elsewhere.
2. Calculations: Where information about recycled content is required to be submitted:
a. Determine percentage of post-consumer and post-industrial content separately, using
the guidelines contained in 16 CFR 260.7(e).
b. Previously used, reused, refurbished, and salvaged products are not considered
recycled.
c. Wood fabricated from timber abandoned in transit to original mill is considered
reused, not recycled.
d. Determine percentage of recycled content of any item by dividing the weight of
recycled content in the item by the total weight of all material in the item.
e. Determine value of recycled content of each item separately, by multiplying the
content percentage by the value of the item.
L.
Sustainably Harvested Wood:
1. Definition: Wood-based materials include but are not limited to structural framing,
dimension lumber, flooring, wood doors, finishes, and furnishings that are permanently
installed in the project. Wood and wood-based products not permanently installed in the
project are not included in the definition.
2. Specific Wood-Based Fabrications: Fabricate of sustainably harvested wood when so
specified elsewhere.
3. Certification: Provide wood certified or labeled by an organization accredited by one of
the following:
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
01 60 00 - 2
a.
4.
M.
2.3
2.4
The Forest Stewardship Council, The Principles for Natural Forest Management; for
Canada visit http://www.fsccanada.org, for the USA visit http://www.fscus.org.
LEED Submittals: State unit cost of each wood-based item, quantity installed, quantity
certified as sustainably harvested, total wood-based material cost, and total sustainably
harvested value; provide letter of certification signed by supplier of each item, indicating
compliance with the specified requirements and identifying the certifying organization.
a. Include the certifying organization's certification numbers for each certified product,
itemized on a line-item basis.
b. Attach copies of invoices bearing the certifying organization's certification numbers.
Provide interchangeable components of the same manufacture for components being replaced.
PRODUCT OPTIONS
A.
Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Use any product meeting
those standards or description.
B.
Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Use a product of one of the
manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed.
C.
Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions:
Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named.
MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software of types and in quantities specified in
individual specification sections.
B.
Deliver to Project site; obtain receipt prior to final payment.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
A.
Instructions to Bidders specify time restrictions for submitting requests for substitutions during
the bidding period. Comply with requirements specified in this section.
B.
Architect will consider requests for substitutions only within 30 days after date of Agreement.
C.
Substitutions may be considered when a product becomes unavailable through no fault of the
Contractor.
D.
Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution
with Contract Documents.
E.
A request for substitution constitutes a representation that the submitter:
1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality
level of the specified product.
2. Will provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product.
3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work that may be required for the
Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner.
4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension that may subsequently become
apparent.
5. Will reimburse Owner and Architect for review or redesign services associated with reapproval by authorities.
F.
Substitutions will normally not be considered after date of Agreement except when required due
to unforeseen circumstances and/or approval by Architect and Owner.
G.
Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or
product data submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will require
revision to the Contract Documents.
H.
Substitution Submittal Procedure:
1. Submit two (2) copies of HUD 92437 Request for Construction Changes on Project
Mortgages form for consideration. Limit each request to one proposed substitution.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
01 60 00 - 3
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
3.2
3.3
3.4
Submit comparison of proposed substitution with product, material or system specified.
Submit shop drawings, product data, and certified test results and reports attesting to the
proposed product equivalence with the Contract Documents. Burden of proof is on
proposer.
Reference applicable Specification sections where product is specified.
Submit evidence that warranty requirements are equal to or greater than specified
product.
Submit applicable product samples for review.
The Architect will notify Contractor in writing of decision to accept or reject request.
OWNER-SUPPLIED PRODUCTS
A.
See Section 01 10 00 - Summary for identification of Owner-supplied products.
B.
Owner's Responsibilities:
1. Arrange for and deliver Owner reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples, to
Contractor.
2. Arrange and pay for product delivery to site.
3. On delivery, inspect products jointly with Contractor.
4. Submit claims for transportation damage and replace damaged, defective, or deficient
items.
5. Arrange for manufacturers' warranties, inspections, and service.
C.
Contractor's Responsibilities:
1. Designate delivery dates of Owner-furnished items in the construction schedule.
2. Review Owner reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples.
3. Receive and unload products at site; inspect for completeness or damage jointly with
Owner.
4. Handle, store, install and finish products.
5. Repair or replace items damaged after receipt.
TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING
A.
Coordinate schedule of product delivery to designated prepared areas in order to minimize site
storage time and potential damage to stored materials.
B.
Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Transport materials in covered trucks to prevent contamination of product and littering of
surrounding areas.
D.
Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements, quantities are
correct, and products are undamaged.
E.
Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling,
disfigurement, or damage.
F.
Arrange for the return of packing materials, such as wood pallets, where economically feasible.
STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A.
Designate receiving/storage areas for incoming products so that they are delivered according to
installation schedule and placed convenient to work area in order to minimize waste due to
excessive materials handling and misapplication.
B.
Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.
C.
Store with seals and labels intact and legible.
D.
Store sensitive products in weather tight, climate controlled, enclosures in an environment
favorable to product.
E.
For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground.
F.
Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to
prevent condensation and degradation of products.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
01 60 00 - 4
G.
Prevent contact with material that may cause corrosion, discoloration, or staining.
H.
Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling,
disfigurement, or damage.
I.
Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify
products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition.
END OF SECTION
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
01 60 00 - 5
SECTION 016116
VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUND (VOC) CONTENT RESTRICTIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
VOC restrictions for product categories listed below under "DEFINITIONS."
B.
All products of each category that are installed in the project must comply; Owner's project
goals do not allow for partial compliance.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Submittal procedures.
B.
Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Procedures for testing and certifications.
C.
Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Fundamental product requirements, substitutions
and product options, delivery, storage, and handling.
DEFINITIONS
A.
VOC-Restricted Products: All products of each of the following categories when installed or
applied on-site in the building interior:
1. Adhesives, sealants, and sealer coatings.
2. Laminate flooring.
3. Carpet.
4. Carpet cushion.
5. Carpet tile.
6. Resilient floor coverings.
7. Paints and coatings.
B.
Interior of Building: Anywhere inside the exterior weather barrier.
C.
Adhesives: All gunnable, trowelable, liquid-applied, and aerosol adhesives, whether specified
or not; including flooring adhesives, resilient base adhesives, and pipe jointing adhesives.
D.
Sealants: All gunnable, trowelable, and liquid-applied joint sealants and sealant primers,
whether specified or not; including firestopping sealants and duct joint sealers.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
CRI (GLCC) - Green Label Testing Program - Approved Product Categories for Carpet
Cushion; Carpet and Rug Institute; Current Edition.
B.
CRI (GLP) - Green Label Plus Carpet Testing Program - Approved Products; Carpet and Rug
Institute; Current Edition.
C.
GreenSeal GS-36 - Commercial Adhesives; Green Seal, Inc.; 2000.
D.
SCAQMD 1168 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168; current edition;
www.aqmd.gov.
E.
SCS (CPD) - SCS Certified Products; Scientific Certification Systems; current listings at
www.scscertified.com.
SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Evidence of Compliance: Submit for each different product in each applicable category.
1. Identify evidence submittals with the words "LEED Report".
C.
Product Data: For each VOC-restricted product used in the project, submit product data
showing compliance, except when another type of evidence of compliance is required.
D.
Installer Certifications for Accessory Materials: Require each installer of any type of product
(not just the products for which VOC restrictions are specified) to certify that either 1) no
adhesives, joint sealants, paints, coatings, or composite wood or agrifiber products have been
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUND
(VOC) CONTENT RESTRICTIONS
01 61 16 - 1
used in the installation of his products, or 2) that such products used comply with these
requirements.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Testing Agency Qualifications: Independent firm specializing in performing testing and
inspections of the type specified in this section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Adhesives and Joint Sealants: Provide only products having volatile organic compound (VOC)
content not greater than required by South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule
No.1168.
1. Evidence of Compliance: Acceptable types of evidence are:
a. Report of laboratory testing performed in accordance with requirements.
b. Published product data showing compliance with requirements.
c. Certification by manufacturer that product complies with requirements.
B.
Aerosol Adhesives: Provide only products having volatile organic compound (VOC) content not
greater than required by GreenSeal GS-36.
1. Evidence of Compliance: Acceptable types of evidence are:
a. Current GreenSeal Certification.
b. Published product data showing compliance with requirements.
C.
Paints and Coatings:
1. Provide coatings that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the
following:
a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D--National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for
Architectural Coatings.
b. USGBC LEED Rating System LEED for Homes Mid-Rise; for interior wall and ceiling
finish (all coats), anti-corrosive paints on interior ferrous metal, clear wood stains and
finishes, sanding sealers, other sealers, shellac, and floor coatings.
2. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59,
Subpart D (EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water added
at project site; or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Evidence of Compliance: Acceptable types of evidence are:
a. Report of laboratory testing performed in accordance with requirements.
b. Published product data showing compliance with requirements.
c. Certification by manufacturer that product complies with requirements.
D.
Carpet and Adhesive: Provide products having VOC content not greater than that required for
CRI Green Label Plus certification.
1. Evidence of Compliance: Acceptable types of evidence are:
a. Current Green Label Plus Certification.
b. Report of laboratory testing performed in accordance with requirements.
E.
Carpet, Carpet Cushion, and Adhesive: Provide products having VOC content as specified in
Section 09 68 00.
F.
Carpet Cushion: Provide products having VOC content not greater than that required for CRI
Green Label certification.
1. Evidence of Compliance: Acceptable types of evidence are:
a. Current Green Label Certification.
b. Report of laboratory testing performed in accordance with requirements.
G.
Carpet Tile and Adhesive: Provide products having VOC content not greater than that required
for CRI Green Label Plus certification.
1. Evidence of Compliance: Acceptable types of evidence are:
a. Current Green Label Plus Certification.
b. Report of laboratory testing performed in accordance with requirements.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUND
(VOC) CONTENT RESTRICTIONS
01 61 16 - 2
H.
Carpet Tile and Adhesive: Provide products having VOC content as specified in Section 09 68
13.
I.
Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products and Adhesives Used for Laminating Them: Provide
products having no added urea-formaldehyde resins.
1. Evidence of Compliance: Acceptable types of evidence are:
a. Current SCS "No Added Urea Formaldehyde" certification; www.scscertified.com.
b. Published product data showing compliance with requirements.
c. Certification by manufacturer that product complies with requirements.
J.
Other Product Categories: Comply with limitations specified elsewhere.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Owner reserves the right to reject non-compliant products, whether installed or not, and require
their removal and replacement with compliant products at no extra cost to Owner.
B.
All additional costs to restore indoor air quality due to installation of non-compliant products will
be borne by Contractor.
END OF SECTION
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUND
(VOC) CONTENT RESTRICTIONS
01 61 16 - 3
SECTION 017000
EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Examination, preparation, and general installation procedures.
B.
Pre-installation meetings.
C.
Cutting and patching.
D.
Surveying for laying out the work.
E.
Cleaning and protection.
F.
Starting of systems and equipment.
G.
Demonstration and instruction of Owner personnel.
H.
Closeout procedures, except payment procedures.
I.
General requirements for maintenance service.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures.
B.
Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Testing and inspection procedures.
C.
Section 01 50 00 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Temporary exterior enclosures.
D.
Section 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Additional procedures for
trash/waste removal, recycling, salvage, and reuse.
E.
Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents, operation and maintenance
data, warranties and bonds.
SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Survey work: Submit name, address, and telephone number of Surveyor before starting survey
work.
1. On request, submit documentation verifying accuracy of survey work.
2. Submit a copy of site drawing signed by the Land Surveyor, that the elevations and
locations of the work are in conformance with Contract Documents.
3. Submit surveys and survey logs for the project record.
C.
Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of capped and active utilities.
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
For survey work, employ a land surveyor registered in the State in which the Project is located
and acceptable to Architect. Submit evidence of Surveyor's Errors and Omissions insurance
coverage in the form of an Insurance Certificate.
B.
For field engineering, employ a professional engineer of the discipline required for specific
service on Project, licensed in the State in which the Project is located.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Use of explosives is not permitted.
B.
Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and maintain
pumping equipment.
C.
Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect site
from soil erosion.
D.
Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent
accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT
REQUIREMENTS
01 70 00 - 1
1.6
E.
Dust Control: Execute work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations.
Provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from dispersing into atmosphere and over
adjacent property.
F.
Erosion and Sediment Control: Plan and execute work by methods to control surface drainage
from cuts and fills, from borrow and waste disposal areas. Prevent erosion and sedimentation.
1. Minimize amount of bare soil exposed at one time.
2. Provide temporary measures such as berms, dikes, and drains, to prevent water flow.
3. Construct fill and waste areas by selective placement to avoid erosive surface silts or
clays.
4. Periodically inspect earthwork to detect evidence of erosion and sedimentation; promptly
apply corrective measures.
G.
Noise Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to minimize noise produced by
construction operations.
1. Outdoors: Limit conduct of especially noisy exterior work to the hours of 8 am to 5 pm.
H.
Pest and Rodent Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent pests and insects
from damaging the work.
I.
Pollution Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent contamination of soil,
water, and atmosphere from discharge of noxious, toxic substances, and pollutants produced
by construction operations. Comply with federal, state, and local regulations.
COORDINATION
A.
See Section 01 10 00 for occupancy-related requirements.
B.
Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of the Project Manual to
ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements,
with provisions for accommodating items installed later.
C.
Notify affected utility companies and comply with their requirements.
D.
Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of new operating equipment are compatible
with building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent
responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment.
E.
Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical work
that are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and
conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces
efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs.
F.
In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the
construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements.
G.
Coordinate completion and clean-up of work of separate sections.
H.
After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective work
and work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's
activities.
PART 200PRODUCTS
2.1
PATCHING MATERIALS
A.
New Materials: As specified in product sections; match existing products and work for patching
and extending work.
B.
Type and Quality of Existing Products: Determine by inspecting and testing products where
necessary, referring to existing work as a standard.
C.
Product Substitution: For any proposed change in materials, submit request for substitution
described in Section 01 60 00.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT
REQUIREMENTS
01 70 00 - 2
3.2
3.3
3.4
A.
Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent work.
Start of work means acceptance of existing conditions.
B.
Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new work being
applied or attached.
C.
Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections.
D.
Take field measurements before confirming product orders or beginning fabrication, to minimize
waste due to over-ordering or misfabrication.
E.
Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct
locations.
F.
Prior to Cutting: Examine existing conditions prior to commencing work, including elements
subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. After uncovering existing work,
assess conditions affecting performance of work. Beginning of cutting or patching means
acceptance of existing conditions.
G.
HUD requires as-built record documents in electronic format.
PREPARATION
A.
Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance.
B.
Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance.
C.
Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to
applying any new material or substance in contact or bond.
D.
HUD requires an al-built ALTA Survey at the completion of the project.
PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A.
When required in individual specification sections, convene a preinstallation meeting at the site
prior to commencing work of the section.
B.
Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific section.
C.
Notify Architect four days in advance of meeting date.
D.
Prepare agenda and preside at meeting:
1. Review conditions of examination, preparation and installation procedures.
2. Review coordination with related work.
E.
Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two
copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made.
LAYING OUT THE WORK
A.
Verify locations of survey control points prior to starting work.
B.
Promptly notify Architect of any discrepancies discovered.
C.
Contractor shall locate and protect survey control and reference points.
D.
Control datum for survey is that indicated on Drawings.
E.
Protect survey control points prior to starting site work; preserve permanent reference points
during construction.
F.
Promptly report to Architect the loss or destruction of any reference point or relocation required
because of changes in grades or other reasons.
G.
Replace dislocated survey control points based on original survey control. Make no changes
without prior written notice to Architect.
H.
Utilize recognized engineering survey practices.
I.
Establish elevations, lines and levels. Locate and lay out by instrumentation and similar
appropriate means:
1. Site improvements including pavements; stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement;
utility locations, slopes, and invert elevations.
2. Grid or axis for structures.
EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
REQUIREMENTS
01 70 00 - 3
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
3.
J.
Building foundation, column locations, ground floor elevations.
Periodically verify layouts by same means.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT
REQUIREMENTS
01 70 00 - 4
K.
3.5
3.6
3.7
Maintain a complete and accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses.
GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Install products as specified in individual sections, in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and recommendations, and so as to avoid waste due to necessity for replacement.
B.
Make vertical elements plumb and horizontal elements level, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Install equipment and fittings plumb and level, neatly aligned with adjacent vertical and
horizontal lines, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Make consistent texture on surfaces, with seamless transitions, unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Make neat transitions between different surfaces, maintaining texture and appearance.
CUTTING AND PATCHING
A.
Whenever possible, execute the work by methods that avoid cutting or patching.
B.
Perform whatever cutting and patching is necessary to:
1. Complete the work.
2. Fit products together to integrate with other work.
3. Provide openings for penetration of mechanical, electrical, and other services.
4. Match work that has been cut to adjacent work.
5. Repair areas adjacent to cuts to required condition.
6. Repair new work damaged by subsequent work.
7. Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested.
8. Remove and replace defective and non-conforming work.
C.
Execute work by methods that avoid damage to other work and that will provide appropriate
surfaces to receive patching and finishing.
D.
Employ skilled and experienced installer to perform cutting for weather exposed and moisture
resistant elements, and sight exposed surfaces.
E.
Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior
approval.
F.
Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.
G.
Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces.
H.
At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids
with fire rated material in accordance with Section 07 84 00, to full thickness of the penetrated
element.
I.
Patching:
1. Finish patched surfaces to match finish that existed prior to patching. On continuous
surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire
unit.
2. Match color, texture, and appearance.
3. Repair patched surfaces that are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other
imperfections due to patching work. If defects are due to condition of substrate, repair
substrate prior to repairing finish.
PROGRESS CLEANING
A.
Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly
condition.
B.
Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed
or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space.
C.
Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning
to eliminate dust.
D.
Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and trash/rubbish from site periodically and
dispose off-site; do not burn or bury.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT
REQUIREMENTS
01 70 00 - 5
3.8
PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK
A.
3.9
Protect installed work from damage by construction operations.
B.
Provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections.
C.
Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate
work area to prevent damage.
D.
Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings.
E.
Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement
of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials.
F.
Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is
necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material
manufacturer.
G.
Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas.
H.
Remove protective coverings when no longer needed; reuse or recycle plastic coverings if
possible.
SYSTEM STARTUP
A.
Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems.
B.
Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive
rotation, belt tension, control sequence, and for conditions that may cause damage.
C.
Verify tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required
by the equipment or system manufacturer.
D.
Verify that wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested.
E.
Execute start-up under supervision of applicable Contractor personnel and manufacturer's
representative in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.
F.
Submit a written report that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning
correctly.
3.10 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTION
A.
Demonstrate operation and maintenance of products to Owner's personnel two weeks prior to
date of Substantial Completion.
B.
For each training session, the Contractor shall submit for approval a proposed outline of the
subjects to be covered. The training shall not be conducted until the outline is approved.
C.
B. As specified herein and in individual sections, furnish the services of instructors to train
designated personnel in adjustment, operation, including seasonal and emergency operations,
if applicable, maintenance, and safety requirements of equipment and systems. Instructors
shall be thoroughly trained in operating theory as well as practical operation and maintenance
work for each type of equipment or system. The sequence of the training shall follow the
approved training outline.
D.
Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance,
and shutdown of each item of equipment at scheduled time, at equipment location.
E.
For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other
season within six months.
F.
Provide a qualified person who is knowledgeable about the Project to perform demonstration
and instruction of owner personnel.
G.
Videotapes of demonstrations and training sessions:
1. Provide original and one copy of each tape.
2. Label each videotape with the date of demonstration or training, the instructor's name, and
provide an index of the contents. The index shall list the start and end time of each
subject covered during the training session. The sequence of the training subjects shall
follow the sequence listed in the approved training outline or as actually conducted.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT
REQUIREMENTS
01 70 00 - 6
3.
4.
5.
Provide a separate videotape for each separate training session.
Videotape all of the above sessions at the taping speed which produces the highest
resolution picture. The instructor's voice shall be clearly audible and understandable on
the tape. Utilize a supplemental microphone worn by the instructor.
Videotapes with poor video or audio quality will be rejected and the training re-taped.
3.11 ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation.
3.12 FINAL CLEANING
A.
Use cleaning materials that are nonhazardous.
B.
Clean interior and exterior glass, surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains
and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft
surfaces.
C.
Remove all labels that are not permanent. Do not paint or otherwise cover fire test labels or
nameplates on mechanical and electrical equipment.
D.
Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to the
surface and material being cleaned.
E.
Clean filters of operating equipment.
F.
Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems.
G.
Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces.
H.
Remove waste, surplus materials, trash/rubbish, and construction facilities from the site;
dispose of in legal manner; do not burn or bury.
3.13 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
A.
Coordinate and apply for occupancy utilizing HUD -92485 Permission To Occupy Project
Mortgages. HUD Inspector will determine final completion.
B.
Make submittals that are required by governing or other authorities.
1. Provide copies to Architect and Owner.
C.
Notify the Owner 90 days prior to the anticipated date of Substantial Completion.
D.
Prior to completion, the Contractor shall inspect the Work and make a Punch-List noting all
items that are incomplete and/or incorrect.
E.
The Contractor shall notify all Subcontractors in writing of incomplete and/or incorrect items.
Notify far enough in advance of the completion date that the Work can be completed on
schedule. Said Work shall be immediately corrected.
F.
Submit written Notice of Substantial Completion to Architect and/or Owner, stating that the
Contract Documents have been reviewed, the Work has been inspected, with Contractor’s
attached Punch-list for items remaining to be completed, and that Work is complete in
accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect's review.
G.
Accompany Architect and Owner on preliminary final inspection. Architect and/or Owner shall
record any additional items of the Work in a supplementary Punch-list that require completion
and/or correction. This supplementary Punch-list will be added to the Contractor’s Punch-list.
H.
Correct items of work listed in executed Certificates of Substantial Completion and comply with
requirements for access to Owner-occupied areas.
I.
Notify Architect when work is considered finally complete.
J.
Complete items of work determined by Architect's final inspection.
K.
All warranties shall commence and become effective beginning on the date of the executed
Certificate of Substantial Completion.
3.14 FINAL REVIEW, ACCEPTANCE, AND PAYMENT
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT
REQUIREMENTS
01 70 00 - 7
A.
Notify the Architect and/or Owner in writing that all items of the Work are completed and ready
for final review. Submit all record documents at this time.
B.
Accompany Architect and Owner on final inspection.
C.
Complete all items of the Work determined by Architect's and/or Owner’s final inspection.
D.
The Owner will review all documents. When the documents include a Contractor's request for
delay in completion, the Owner will review all Work which is certified as complete to the best
knowledge of the Contractor. The Owner will also review the listed incomplete Work and
assign a value to such uncompleted work.
E.
The Contractor shall make the required corrections to the Work expeditiously. A letter will be
addressed to the Contractor informing the Contractor of the project status.
F.
When Contract closeout procedures are completed and all Punch-list deficiencies have been
corrected, Final Acceptance by the Owner will be documented. The Contractor will receive
written notice of Final Acceptance of the Work and notification that final payment may be billed
and released.
3.15 MAINTENANCE
A.
Provide service and maintenance of components indicated in specification sections.
B.
Maintenance Period: As indicated in specification sections or, if not indicated, not less than
one year from the Date of Substantial Completion or the length of the specified warranty,
whichever is longer.
C.
Examine system components at a frequency consistent with reliable operation. Clean, adjust,
and lubricate as required.
D.
Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of components. Repair or replace
parts whenever required. Use parts produced by the manufacturer of the original component.
E.
Maintenance service shall not be assigned or transferred to any agent or subcontractor without
prior written consent of the Owner.
END OF SECTION
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT
REQUIREMENTS
01 70 00 - 8
SECTION 017419
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
WASTE MANAGEMENT REQUIREMENTS
A.
Owner requires that this project generate the least amount of trash and waste possible.
B.
Employ processes that ensure the generation of as little waste as possible due to error, poor
planning, breakage, mishandling, contamination, or other factors.
C.
Minimize trash/waste disposal in landfills; reuse, salvage, or recycle as much waste as
economically feasible.
D.
Required Recycling, Salvage, and Reuse: The following may not be disposed of in landfills or
by incineration:
1. Aluminum and plastic beverage containers.
2. Corrugated cardboard.
3. Wood pallets.
4. Clean dimensional wood: May be used as blocking or furring.
5. Metals, including packaging banding, metal studs, sheet metal, structural steel, piping,
reinforcing bars, door frames, and other items made of steel, iron, galvanized steel,
stainless steel, aluminum, copper, zinc, lead, brass, and bronze.
6. Carpet, carpet cushion, carpet tile, and carpet remnants , both new and removed: DuPont
(http://flooring.dupont.com) and Interface (www.interfaceinc.com) conduct reclamation
programs.
7. Paint.
E.
LEED Certification for this project is dependent on diversion of
potential landfill trash/waste by recycling and/or salvage.
F.
Contractor shall submit periodic Waste Disposal Reports; all landfill disposal, recycling,
salvage, and reuse must be reported regardless of to whom the cost or savings accrues; use
the same units of measure on all reports.
G.
Contractor shall develop and follow a Waste Management Plan designed to implement these
requirements.
H.
The following sources may be useful in developing the Waste Management Plan:
I.
Methods of trash/waste disposal that are not acceptable are:
1. Burning on the project site.
2. Burying on the project site.
3. Dumping or burying on other property, public or private.
4. Other illegal dumping or burying.
5. Incineration, either on- or off-site.
J.
Regulatory Requirements: Contractor is responsible for knowing and complying with regulatory
requirements, including but not limited to Federal, state and local requirements, pertaining to
legal disposal of all construction and demolition waste materials.
percent, by weight, of
DEFINITIONS
A.
Clean: Untreated and unpainted; not contaminated with oils, solvents, caulk, or the like.
B.
Construction and Demolition Waste: Solid wastes typically including building materials,
packaging, trash, debris, and rubble resulting from construction, remodeling, repair and
demolition operations.
C.
Hazardous: Exhibiting the characteristics of hazardous substances, i.e., ignitibility, corrosivity,
toxicity or reactivity.
D.
Nonhazardous: Exhibiting none of the characteristics of hazardous substances, i.e., ignitibility,
corrosivity, toxicity, or reactivity.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT
AND DISPOSAL
01 74 19 - 1
1.3
E.
Nontoxic: Neither immediately poisonous to humans nor poisonous after a long period of
exposure.
F.
Recyclable: The ability of a product or material to be recovered at the end of its life cycle and
remanufactured into a new product for reuse by others.
G.
Recycle: To remove a waste material from the project site to another site for remanufacture
into a new product for reuse by others.
H.
Recycling: The process of sorting, cleansing, treating and reconstituting solid waste and other
discarded materials for the purpose of using the altered form. Recycling does not include
burning, incinerating, or thermally destroying waste.
I.
Return: To give back reusable items or unused products to vendors for credit.
J.
Reuse: To reuse a construction waste material in some manner on the project site.
K.
Salvage: To remove a waste material from the project site to another site for resale or reuse by
others.
L.
Sediment: Soil and other debris that has been eroded and transported by storm or well
production run-off water.
M.
Source Separation: The act of keeping different types of waste materials separate beginning
from the first time they become waste.
N.
Toxic: Poisonous to humans either immediately or after a long period of exposure.
O.
Trash: Any product or material unable to be reused, returned, recycled, or salvaged.
P.
Waste: Extra material or material that has reached the end of its useful life in its intended use.
Waste includes salvageable, returnable, recyclable, and reusable material.
SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
LEED Submittals: Submit Landfill Alternatives Proposal, Waste Management Plan, and Waste
Disposal Reports in accordance with procedures specified in Section 01 35 15.
C.
Waste Management Plan: Include the following information:
1. Analysis of the trash and waste projected to be generated during the entire project
construction cycle, including types and quantities.
2. Landfill Options: The name, address, and telephone number of the landfill(s) where
trash/waste will be disposed of, the applicable landfill tipping fee(s), and the projected cost
of disposing of all project trash/waste in the landfill(s).
3. Landfill Alternatives: List all waste materials that will be diverted from landfills by reuse,
salvage, or recycling.
4. Meetings: Describe regular meetings to be held to address waste prevention, reduction,
recycling, salvage, reuse, and disposal.
5. Materials Handling Procedures: Describe the means by which materials to be diverted
from landfills will be protected from contamination and prepared for acceptance by
designated facilities; include separation procedures for recyclables, storage, and
packaging.
6. Transportation: Identify the destination and means of transportation of materials to be
recycled; i.e. whether materials will be site-separated and self-hauled to designated
centers, or whether mixed materials will be collected by a waste hauler.
D.
Waste Disposal Reports: Submit at specified intervals, with details of quantities of trash and
waste, means of disposal or reuse, and costs; show both totals to date and since last report.
1. Submit updated Report with each Application for Progress Payment; failure to submit
Report will delay payment.
2. Submit Report on a form acceptable to Owner.
3. Landfill Disposal: Include the following information:
a. Identification of material.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT
AND DISPOSAL
01 74 19 - 2
b.
4.
5.
6.
Amount, in tons or cubic yards, of trash/waste material from the project disposed of in
landfills.
c. State the identity of landfills, total amount of tipping fees paid to landfill, and total
disposal cost.
d. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices as evidence of quantity and
cost.
Recycled and Salvaged Materials: Include the following information for each:
a. Identification of material, including those retrieved by installer for use on other
projects.
b. Amount, in tons or cubic yards, date removed from the project site, and receiving
party.
c. Transportation cost, amount paid or received for the material, and the net total cost or
savings of salvage or recycling each material.
d. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices as evidence of quantity and
cost.
e. Certification by receiving party that materials will not be disposed of in landfills or by
incineration.
Material Reused on Project: Include the following information for each:
a. Identification of material and how it was used in the project.
b. Amount, in tons or cubic yards.
c. Include weight tickets as evidence of quantity.
Other Disposal Methods: Include information similar to that described above, as
appropriate to disposal method.
PART 3 EXECUTION
2.1
2.2
WASTE MANAGEMENT PROCEDURES
A.
See Section 01 30 00 for additional requirements for project meetings, reports, submittal
procedures, and project documentation.
B.
See Section 01 50 00 for additional requirements related to trash/waste collection and removal
facilities and services.
C.
See Section 01 60 00 for waste prevention requirements related to delivery, storage, and
handling.
D.
See Section 01 70 00 for trash/waste prevention procedures related to demolition, cutting and
patching, installation, protection, and cleaning.
WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN IMPLEMENTATION
A.
Manager: Designate an on-site person or persons responsible for instructing workers and
overseeing and documenting results of the Waste Management Plan.
B.
Communication: Distribute copies of the Waste Management Plan to job site foreman, each
subcontractor, Owner, and Architect.
C.
Instruction: Provide on-site instruction of appropriate separation, handling, and recycling,
salvage, reuse, and return methods to be used by all parties at the appropriate stages of the
project.
D.
Meetings: Discuss trash/waste management goals and issues at project meetings.
1. Pre-bid meeting.
2. Pre-construction meeting.
3. Regular job-site meetings.
E.
Facilities: Provide specific facilities for separation and storage of materials for recycling,
salvage, reuse, return, and trash disposal, for use by all contractors and installers.
1. Provide containers as required.
2. Provide adequate space for pick-up and delivery and convenience to subcontractors.
3. Keep recycling and trash/waste bin areas neat and clean and clearly marked in order to
avoid contamination of materials.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT
AND DISPOSAL
01 74 19 - 3
F.
Recycling: Separate, store, protect, and handle at the site identified recyclable waste products
in order to prevent contamination of materials and to maximize recyclability of identified
materials. Arrange for timely pickups from the site or deliveries to recycling facility in order to
prevent contamination of recyclable materials.
G.
Reuse of Materials On-Site: Set aside, sort, and protect separated products in preparation for
reuse.
H.
Salvage: Set aside, sort, and protect products to be salvaged for reuse off-site.
END OF SECTION
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT
AND DISPOSAL
01 74 19 - 4
SECTION 017800
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Project Record Documents.
B.
Operation and Maintenance Data.
C.
Warranties and bonds.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 00 72 00 - General Conditions: Performance bond and labor and material payment
bonds, warranty, and correction of work.
B.
Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures, shop drawings,
product data, and samples.
C.
Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Contract closeout procedures.
D.
Individual Product Sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance data.
E.
Individual Product Sections: Warranties required for specific products or Work.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Project Record Documents: Submit documents to Architect with claim for final Application for
Payment.
B.
Operation and Maintenance Data:
1. Submit two copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents before
start of Work. Architect will review draft and return one copy with comments.
2. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and
operated by Owner, submit completed documents within ten days after acceptance.
3. Submit one copy of completed documents 15 days prior to final inspection. This copy will
be reviewed and returned after final inspection, with Architect comments. Revise content
of all document sets as required prior to final submission.
4. Submit two sets of revised final documents in final form within 10 days after final
inspection.
C.
Warranties and Bonds:
1. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with
Owner's permission, submit documents within 10 days after acceptance.
2. Make other submittals within 10 days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final
Application for Payment.
3. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial
Completion, submit within 10 days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the
beginning of the warranty period.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A.
Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work:
1. Drawings.
2. Specifications.
3. Addenda.
4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract.
5. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples.
6. Manufacturer's instruction for assembly, installation, and adjusting.
B.
"HUD AS-BUILT SET" Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual
revisions to the Work:
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
01 78 00 - 1
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.2
C.
Turn over HUD As-built Set to HUD Representative as part of Final Completion requirements.
Note: this set is in addition to any other 'as -built' documentation.
D.
Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner.
E.
Store record documents separate from documents used for construction.
F.
Record information concurrent with construction progress.
G.
Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each product section description of actual products
installed, including the following:
1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number.
2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized.
3. Changes made by Addenda and modifications.
H.
Record Drawings and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction
including:
1. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish first floor datum.
2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances,
referenced to permanent surface improvements.
3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction,
referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work.
4. Field changes of dimension and detail.
5. Details not on original Contract drawings.
AS-BUILT TOPOGRAPHIC SURVEY
A.
3.3
3.4
Drawings.
Specifications.
Addenda.
Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract.
Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples.
Manufacturer's instruction for assembly, installation, and adjusting.
Provide 'As-built' Topographic Survey as part of final record documentation, turn over survey to
HUD representative.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A.
For Each Product or System: List names, addresses and telephone numbers of Subcontractors
and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts.
B.
Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and
data applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable information.
C.
Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and
systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use Project Record Documents as
maintenance drawings.
D.
Typed Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructions
for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA AND MAINTENANCE STOCK FOR MATERIALS AND
FINISHES
A.
For Each Product, Applied Material, and Finish:
1. Product data, with catalog number, size, composition, and color and texture designations.
2. Information for re-ordering custom manufactured products.
B.
Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents
and methods, precautions against detrimental cleaning agents and methods, and
recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.
C.
Moisture protection and weather-exposed products: Include product data listing applicable
reference standards, chemical composition, and details of installation. Provide
recommendations for inspections, maintenance, and repair.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
01 78 00 - 2
3.5
3.6
3.7
D.
Additional information as specified in individual product specification sections.
E.
Provide list of maintenance stock items and in quantities specified and turn over to owner.
Deliver to location specified by owner.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
A.
For Each Item of Equipment and Each System:
1. Description of unit or system, and component parts.
2. Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.
3. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests.
4. Complete nomenclature and model number of replaceable parts.
B.
Panel board Circuit Directories: Provide electrical service characteristics, controls, and
communications; typed.
C.
Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions
and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and emergency instructions.
Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions.
D.
Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for preventative
maintenance and trouble-shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and
alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions.
E.
Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required.
F.
Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions.
G.
Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer.
H.
Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams
required for maintenance.
I.
Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification sections.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A.
Prepare instructions and data by personnel experienced in maintenance and operation of
described products.
B.
Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual.
C.
Binders: Commercial quality, 8-1/2 by 11 inch three D side ring binders with durable plastic
covers; 2 inch maximum ring size. When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related
consistent groupings.
D.
Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
INSTRUCTIONS; identify title of Project; identify subject matter of contents.
E.
Provide tabbed dividers for each separate product and system, with typed description of
product and major component parts of equipment.
F.
Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to
size of text pages.
G.
Arrange content by systems under section numbers and sequence of Table of Contents of this
Project Manual.
H.
Table of Contents: Provide title of Project; names, addresses, and telephone numbers of
Architect , Consultants, and Contractor with name of responsible parties; schedule of products
and systems, indexed to content of the volume.
WARRANTIES AND BONDS
A.
Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors, suppliers,
and manufacturers, within 10 days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for
items put into use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until the
Date of Substantial completion is determined.
B.
Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
01 78 00 - 3
C.
Co-execute submittals when required.
D.
Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal.
E.
Manual: Bind in commercial quality 8-1/2 by 11 inch three D side ring binders with durable
plastic covers.
F.
Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title WARRANTIES AND BONDS, with title of
Project; name, address and telephone number of Contractor and equipment supplier; and
name of responsible company principal.
G.
Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in the sequence of the Table of Contents of the Project
Manual, with each item identified with the number and title of the specification section in which
specified, and the name of product or work item.
H.
Separate each warranty or bond with index tab sheets keyed to the Table of Contents listing.
Provide full information, using separate typed sheets as necessary. List Subcontractor,
supplier, and manufacturer, with name, address, and telephone number of responsible
principal.
END OF SECTION
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
01 78 00 - 4
Contractor's and/or Mortgagor's
Cost Breakdown
Schedules of Values
U.S. Department of Housing and
Urban Development
Office of Housing
Federal Housing Commissioner
OMB No. 2502-0044 (exp. 12/31/2009)
Public reporting burden for this collection of information is estimated to average 4 hours per response, including the time for reviewing instructions, searching existing
data sources, gathering and maintaining the data needed, and completing and reviewing the collection of information. This information is required to obtain benefits.
HUD may not collect this information, and you are not required to complete this form, unless it displays a currently valid OMB Control Number.
Section 227 of the National Housing Act (Section 126 of the Housing Act of 1954, Public Law 560, 12 U.S.C., 1715r), authorizes the collection of this information. The
information is required for a general contractor when an identity of interest exists between the general contractor and the mortgagor or when the mortgagor is a nonprofit entity and a cost plus contract has been used. The information is used by HUD to facilitate the advances of mortgage proceeds and their monitoring.
Privacy Act Notice. The United States Department of Housing and Urban Development, Federal Housing Administration, is authorized to solicit the information
requested in this form by virtue of Title 12, United States Code, Section 1701 et seq., and regulations promulgated thereunder at Title 12, Code of Federal Regulations.
While no assurances of confidentiality is pledged to respondents, HUD generally discloses this data only in response to a Freedom of Information request.
Date
Sponsor
Project No.
Building Identification
Name of Project
Location
This form represents the Contractors and/or Mortgagors firm costs and services as a basis for disbursing dollar amounts when insured
advances are requested. Detailed instructions for completing this form are included on the reverse side.
Line Div.
Trade Item
1
3
Concrete
2
4
Masonry
3
5
Metals
4
6
Rough Carpentry
5
6
Finish Carpentry
6
7
Waterproofing
7
7
Insulation
8
7
Roofing
9
7
Sheet Metal
10
8
Doors
11
8
Windows
12
8
Glass
13
9
Lath and Plaster
14
9
Drywall
15
9
Tile Work
16
9
Acoustical
17
9
Wood Flooring
18
9
Resilient Flooring
19
9
Painting and Decorating
20
10
Specialties
21
11
Special Equipment
22
11
Cabinets
23
11
Appliances
24
12
Blinds and Shades, Artwork
25
12
Carpets
26
13
Special Construction
27
14
Elevators
28
15
Plumbing and Hot Water
29
15
Heat and Ventilation
30
15
Air Conditioning
31
16
Cost
Trade Description
Electrical
32
Subtotal (Structures)
33
Accessory Structures
34
Total (Lines 32 and 33)
Previous edition is obsolete
Page 1 of 3
form HUD-2328 (5/95)
ref. Handbook 4450.1 & 4460.1
Line Div.
Trade Item
35
2
Earth Work
36
2
Site Utilities
37
2
Roads and Walks
38
2
Site Improvements
39
2
Lawns and Planting
40
2
Unusual Site Condition
41
Trade Description
Nonresidential and Special
Exterior Land Improvement
(costs included in trade item breakdown)
Total Land Improvements
42
43
Cost
Est. Cost
Description
Total Struct. & Land Imprvts.
1
Offsite Costs
(costs not included in trade item breakdown)
Est. Cost
Description
General Requirements
44
Subtotal (Lines 42 and 43)
45
Builder's Overhead
46
Builder's Profit
47
Subtotal (Lines 44 thru 46)
Total
48
49
Other Fees
50
Bond Premium
51
Total for All Improvements
52
Builder's Profit Paid by Means
$
Total
Other Fees
$
Demolition
(costs not included in trade item breakdown)
Description
Est. Cost
Other Than Cash
53
Total for All Improvements
Total $
Less Line 52
Total
$
I hereby certify that all the information stated herein, as well as any information provided in the accompaniment herewith, is true and accurate.
Warning: HUD will prosecute false claims and statements. Conviction may result in criminal and/or civil penalties. (18 U.S.C. 1001, 1010, 1012; 31 U.S.C. 3729, 3802)
Mortgagor
By
Date
Contractor
By
Date
FHA (Processing Analyst)
Date
FHA (Chief, Cost Branch or Cost Analyst)
FHA (Chief Underwriter)
Date
Date
Instructions for Completing Form HUD-2328
This form is prepared by the contractor and/or mortgagor as a requirement for the issuance of a firm commitment. The firm replacement
cost of the project also serves as a basis for the disbursement of dollar amounts when insured advances are requested. A detailed
breakdown of trade items is provided along with spaces to enter dollar amounts and trade descriptions.
A separate form is prepared through line 32 for each structure type. A summation of these structure costs are entered on line 32 of a master
form. Land improvements, General Requirements and Fees are completed through line 53 on the master 2328 only.
Unusual Site Conditions—This trade item reflects rock excavation,
high water table, excessive cut and fill, retaining walls, erosion, poor
drainage and other on-site conditions considered unusual.
Date—Date form was prepared.
Sponsor—Name of sponsor or sponsoring organization.
Project No.—Eight-digit assigned project number.
Building Identification—Number(s) or Letter(s) of each building as
designated on plans.
Name of Project—Sponsors designated name of project.
Location—Street address, city and state.
Division—Division numbers and trade items have been developed
from the cost accounting section of the uniform system.
Accessory Structures—This item reflects structures, such as: community, storage, maintenance, mechanical, laundry and project office
buildings. Also included are garages and carports or other buildings.
When the amount shown on line 33 is $20,000.00 or 2% of line 32
whichever is the lesser, a separate form HUD-2328 will be prepared
through line 32 for Accessory Structures.
Previous edition is obsolete
Cost—Enter the cost being submitted by the Contractor or bids
submitted by a qualified subcontractor for each trade item. These
costs will include, as a minimum, prevailing wage rates as determined
by the Secretary of Labor.
Trade Description—Enter a brief description of the work included in
each trade item.
Other Fees—Includable are fees to be paid by the Contractor, such as
sewer tap fees not included in the plumbing contract. Fees paid or to
be paid by the Mortgagor are not to be included on this form.
Total For All Improvements—This is the sum of lines 1 through 50
and is to include the total builder's profit (line 46).
Page 2 of 3
form HUD-2328 (5/95)
ref. Handbook 4450.1 & 4460.1
Line 52—When applicable, enter that portion of the builder's profit
(line 46) to be paid by means other than cash and/or any part of the
builder's profit to be waived during construction.
Non-Residential and Special Exterior Land Improvement Costs—
Describe and enter the cost of each improvement, i.e. on-site parking
facilities including individual garages and carports, commercial facilities, swimming pools with related facilities and on-site features provided to enhance the environment and livability of the project and the
neighborhood. The Design Representative and Cost Analyst shall
collaborate with the mortgagor or his representative in designating the
items to be included.
Previous edition is obsolete
Off-Site Costs—Enter description and dollar amount including fees
and bond premium for off-site improvements.
Demolition—Enter description and dollar amount of demolition work
necessary to condition site for building improvements including the
removal of existing structures, foundations, utilities, etc.
Other Fees—Enter a brief description of item involved and cost
estimate for each item.
Signatures—Enter the firm name, signature of authorized officer of
the contractor and/or mortgagor and date the form was completed.
Page 3 of 3
form HUD-2328 (5/95)
ref. Handbook 4450.1 & 4460.1
Construction Progress
Schedule
U.S. Department of Housing
OMB Approval No. 2577-0157 (Exp. 01/31/2014)
and Urban Development
Public reporting burden for this collection of information is estimated to average 1 hour per response, including the time fo r reviewing instructions, searching
existing data sources, gathering and maintaining the data needed, and completing and reviewing the collection of information. This age ncy may not
conduct or sponsor, and a person is not required to respond to, a collection of information unless that collecton displ ays a valid OMB control number.
Construction practices and HUD administrative requirements establish the need that HAs maintain certain records or submit cer tain documents in
conjunction with the oversight of the award of construction contracts for the con struction of new low-income housing developments or modernization of
existing developments. These forms are used by HAs to provide information on the construction progress schedule and schedule of amounts for contract
payments. Responses to the collection of information are required to obtain a benefit or to retain a benefit. The information requested does not lend
itself to confidentiality.
1. Name of Public Housing Agency/Indian Housing Authority (PHA/IHA)
2. City
3. State
4. Location
7.
5. Project Name
6. P roj ec t N um b er
Contract For
8. Contract Time (Days)
9.
From
(mm/dd/ yyyy)
To (mm/dd/yyyy)
1 1.
N um ber of
Bui l di n gs
Submit as man
pagesasnecessary
to cover the
construction period.)
Actual Monthly
Work in Place
12 .
Number of
Rooms
Value,
($)
Anticipated Monthly
Value
($)
Accumulated
Scheduled Progress
(/o)
Contractor's Name
Title
Approved by
13 .
Month
(/o)
Approved by
Number of Dwelling
Units
Cont ract Pri ce $
Year
(yyyy)
Actual Accumulated
Progress
Submitted by
10 .
Signature
Date (mm/dd/yyyy)
PHA/IHA
Title
Date (mm/dd/yyyy)
Architect
Date (mm/dd/yyyy)
form HUD-5372 (2/93)
Previous edition is obsolete
ref Handbook 7417.1, 7485.1, 7450.1 & 7460.8
Page 1 of 2form HUD-5372 (2/93)
Instructions for Preparation of Construction Progress Schedule
Form HUD-5372
General. The information required for items 1 through 6
can be obtained from the contract documents. (7.) Enter the
type of work awarded by the PHA/IHA. This may be "general
construction," "plumbing," "heating," "electrical," etc.,
depending upon prime contract awards. (8.) Enter the
contract time in calendar days (unless otherwise stated).
(9.) Enter the starting and completion dates as established
by the Notice to Proceed.
Year and Month. At the top of the Schedule, space is
provided for inserting the "Year" and "Month" to identify the
times during which the work is to be performed.
Year. Enter the year when the Notice to Proceed was
issued. If the starting date of the contract is such that the
time assigned for completion will be carried into a
succeeding year, two yearly designations will be shown,
each centered over the applicable spread of time for each
year.
Month. The body of the Schedule is divided into
Columns, each representing a period of one month.
Starting in the Column with the month stated in the Notice
to Proceed, enter at the top of each column the successive
months corresponding to the entire spread of the total
contract time. The Schedule must contain monthly columns
to cover the entire active period of contract, with extra
columns for possible overruns in contract time.
Computation of Anticipated Monthly Value of Work in
Place
Before presenting the form for approval, enter in each
monthly column the dollar value (omit cents) of the increment
of work anticipated to be put in place during that interval
of time. This shall be the Contractor's best estimate of the
rate of progress for each month. This section contains a
suggested guide for the elapsed contract time vs. progress
percentages.
The horizontal total of the monthly dollars shown for
"Antici- pated Monthly Value" must equal the contract price
shown in the heading.
Accumulated Scheduled Progress
ñ%
Entries on this line shall show in percentage of total
completion the cumulative stage of progress that is
scheduled to be reached at the end of each monthly
interval. It is generally sufficient to state this anticipated
progress to the nearest tenth of one percent, but for very
large contracts it may be advisable to extend computations to the nearest hundredth.
The entry for the first month's column should be the %
obtained by the anticipated monthly dollar value of work in
place at the close of the first month being divided by the
contract price.
The entry for the second month's column is obtained by
the sum of the anticipated monthly dollar values of work in
place for Columns 1 and 2 being divided by the contract
price.
Enter in the third month's column the percentage
computed similarly, using the sum of dollar values of
work in place for Columns 1, 2, and 3. Continue in this
manner for the succeeding monthly columns until "100" is
reached in the final column.
Charting Actual Progress. The horizontal space
extending through the monthly columns is divided into
"Actual Monthly Value of Work in Place ñ $" and Actual
Accumulated Progress ñ
%." In each monthly column show the actual
accumulated % of progress and the actual value of work
in place for that month, as the work progresses. An
anticipated complete shutdown at some stage in the work
because of adverse seasonal weather or other- wise, as
may occur in road work, excavation (grading), etc., is
readily shown by a gap.
The Contractor's name shall be placed in the lower left hand corner of the form, together with the signature and
title of the employee who prepared the Schedule and the
date. The form then shall be sent to the Architect for
review. If the Architect considers that changes are
necessary to make the Schedule more realistic, it will
withhold approval and so advise the Contractor. When
the form is acceptable and approved by the Architect, and
the PHA/ IHA, it will be returned to the Contractor, who
shall reproduce and submit the number and style of prints
required by the PHA/ IHA.
Normal building construction experience has proved that
the rate of overall progress (as measured by work in
place) accelerates slowly at the start, reaches its peak
in the middle third of the construction period, and tapers
down at the close. The data following illustrate the general
average expectancy of a well- balanced operation and may
be used as a guide. If the proposed progress lies within
reasonable range of these check points, the Schedule may
be considered satisfactory insofar as the time - performance
feature is involved.
%of
% of
Contract
Accumulated
Time
Progres
s
0
0
10
2
20
8
30
20
40
37
50
57
60
75
70
89
80
96
90
99
100
100
The foregoing percentages
must be tempered
by
consideration of seasonal weather conditions and other
known conditions which may affect the progress of the
work. These percentages are offered for information only.
form HUD-5372 (2/93)
Previous edition is obsolete
Page 2 of 2form HUD-5372 (2/93)
ref Handbook 7417.1, 7485.1, 7450.1 & 7460.8
Mortgagor's Certificate of
Actual Cost
U.S. Department of
Housing and Urban
Development Office of
OMB Approval No. 2502·0112
(exp. 12/31/2014)
Housing
Federal Housing Commissioner
Public reporting burden for this collection of information is estimated to average 8 hours per response, including the time for reviewing instructions,
searching existing data sources, gathering and maintaining the data needed, and completing and reviewing the collection of information. This agency
may not collect this information, and you are not required to complete this form, unless it displays a currently valid OMB control number.
The collection of this information is required by Section 227 of the National Housing Act (P.L. 479, 48 Stat., 1246, 12 USC 1701 et seq). Regulations
stipulating these rules are Section 200.95 and 891.545. This form must be completed so that HUD can make an informed determination of mortgage insurance
acceptability and to prevent windfall profits. The data collected is from the mortgagor relative to the actual cost of the project. The actual cost data is
reviewed by HUD staff to determine that the mortgagor's original endorsement mortgage is supported by the applicable percentage of approved costs.
Failure to receive and review the cost certification data could result in the Department's over-insurance ofthe mortgage in violation of the law. No questions
of a sensitive nature are included on this form.
To: Federal Housing Commissioner
Project Number
Project Name
Location
No mortgage shall be insured unless a Certificate of Actual Cost is executed upon completion of all physical improvements on the
mortgaged property and prior to final endorsement (Section 227, P.L. 479, 49 Stat., 12 U.S.C.)
All references to "Identity oflnterest" herein made are
made in the context of the defmition printed below, which has
This Certificate is made pursuant to the provisions of that
Agreement and Certification of
been read by the undersigned.
Identity of Interest between the mortgagor and/or sponsor
as
parties of the first part and general contractors,
subcontractors, mate- rial suppliers, or equipment lessors as
parties of the second part will be
construed as existing under any of the following conditions:
(Mortgagor)
and in order
to
dated(mm/dd!yyyy)
induce you to finally endorse the mortgage for
insurance.
The actual cost to the owner of labor and materials and
necessary services for construction of the physical
improvements in connection with the subject project, after
deduction of all kickbacks, rebates, adjustruents, discounts,
promotional or advertising recoupment made or to be made to
the
mortgagor,
sponsor
or
any
corporation,
trust,
partnership, joint venture or other legal entity in which they or
any of them hold any interests set forth below, the cost of
construction is (is not) supported by Form HUD-92330-A,
Contractor Certificate of Actoal Cost. (Form HUD-92330-A
must be submitted when there is an identity of interest
between mortgagor and general contractor and when a Cost
Plus Contract is required in nonprofit projects.)
Note: This Certificate must be supported by a certification
as to actual cost by an independent Certified Public
Accountant or by an independent public accountant if
required by HUD regulations or handbooks.
The undersigned hereby certifies that, except as noted
below, there
has not been and is not now any identity of interest between
mortgagor and general contractor and/or any subcontractor,
material supplier, or equipment lessor. Itis further certified that,
except as noted, there are not and have not been any such
relationships between sponsor(s) of this project and general
contractor and/or subcontractor, material supplier and
equipment lessor.
Previous editions are obsolete.
When there is any financial interest of the party of the first
part in
the party of the second part; when one or more officers,
directors or stockholders of the party of the first part is
also an officer, director, or stockholder of the party of the
second part; when any officer, director, or stockholder of
the party of the first part has any financial interest
whatsoever in the party of the second part; when the
party of the second part advances any funds to the party of
the first part; when the party of the second part provides
and pays on behalf of the party of the first part the
cost of any architectural or engineering services other
than those of a sur- veyor, general superintendent, or
engineer employed by a general contractor in connection
with his or its obligations under the construction
contract; when the party of the second part takes stock
or any interest in the party of the first part as part of the
consideration to be paid them; when there exists or
comes into being any side deals, agreements, contracts
or undertaking en- tered into or contemplated, thereby
altering, amending, or cancel- ling any of the required
closing documents except as approved by the
commissioner; when any relationship (e.g. family)
existing which would give the mortgagor or general
contractor control or influence over the price of the
contract or the price paid to the subcontractor, material
supplier or lessor of equipment.
The following identities of interest exist: If none, so state.
Page 1 of 2
ref. Handbooks 4470.1, 4470.2
I hereby certify that all the information stated herein, as well as any information provided in the accompaniment herewith, is true and
accurate.
Wamlng: HUD will prosecute false claims and statements. Conviction may resu in criminal and/or civil penalties. (18 U.S.C. 1001, 1010, 1012; 31 U.S.C. 3729, 3602)
Mortgagor Name
Title
Signature
Date (mm/ddlyyyy)
form HUD-92330 (3194)
Previous editions are obsolete.
Page 1 of 2
ref. Handbooks 4470.1, 4470.2
Item
Column A
• Attach Itemized schedules and copies of bills and receipts where appllcabl
•
Paid in Cash
Column B
To be paid in cash
within 45 days after final
endorsement
Column C
Total
Ia. Amount due under terms of Lump-Sum Construction Contract (as adjusted)
*
1b. Amount due under terms of Cost-Plus Construction Contract (as
adjusted and exclusive of Builder's Profit)
*
1c. Allowable Builder's Profit (Use only if 1b is
used)
*
2a. Architect's Fee - Design
2b. Architect's Fee - Supervision
• 2c.
Architect's Fee - Additional Services
• 3.
Interest During Construction
• 4.
Taxes During Construction
• 5.
Property Insurance
• 6.
Mortgage Insurance Premium (MIP)
• 9.
7.
FHA Examination Fee
8.
FHA Inspection Fee
Title and Recording Fees
*
10. Allowance To Make Project Operational (AMPO)
*
11a. Initial Financing Fee
*
11b. Permanent Placement fee
*
11c. Discounts
*
11d. Other Approved Financing Expenses
*
12a. Legal
*
12b. Organization
*
12c. Mortgagor's Cost Certification Audit Fee
*
13. Other (exclusive of items required by the Construction Contract)
Subtotal
14. Profit and Risk (if
applicable) 15a. Consultant's Fee
*
15b. Major Moveable Equipment
*
15c. Oflsite and Demolition
*
15d. Other
Subtotal
*
16a. Reduction (if any) resulting from Operating Statement Attached
*
16b. Reduction (if any) resulting from Grants I Loans
Total
Previous editions are obsolete.
Page 2 of 2
ref. Handbooks 4470.1, 4470.2
form HUD-92330 (3/94)
Previous editions are obsolete.
Page 2 of 2
ref. Handbooks 4470.1, 4470.2
Request for Construction
Changes on Project Mortgages
U.S. Department of Housing
and Urban Development
Office of Housing
Federal Housing Commissioner
OMB Approval No. 2502-0011 (exp. 8/31/2013)
No changes in the drawings and specifications may be effected unless a completed request for construction changes has been filed and
approved by HUD in accordance with the Construction Contract. Read the instructions & Public Burden statement on the back of this form.
Name and location of this project
Request No.(HUD use only)
Name of Contractor
Name of Mortgagor
Project Number
Name of Mortgagee
To the Federal Housing Commissioner: You are requested to consider the following proposed
changes in the project. The changes are satisfactory to the parties hereto, as indicated by the
signatures below.
Description of Changes
a.
Mortgagor
Estimated
Effect on Cost
+ or -
HUD
Estimated
Effect on Cost
+ or -
V = Acceptable
O = Unacceptable
Arch.
Val.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
Amount on deposit with mortgagee to cover
increased cost of changes pursuant to conditions $
of Request No.
.
Total
$
Initial & Date
I certify that I have no financial interest in this project beyond the fee for my professional services, and that I
have no interest with the mortgagor, contractor, or any subcontractor or supplier. The changes set forth in
this request conform to the intent of the contract documents and I recommend that the changes be approved.
Architect (signature)
Contractor (signature)
Mortgagee (signature)
Mortgagor (signature)
Initial&Date Initial&Date
The following is required on requests involving cooperatives and non-profit mortgagors with respect to any increase or decrease in cost resulting from acceptable
changes: (check appropriate box.)
The abovesigned contractor agrees to assume any additional costs and agrees that he will not assert any claim against the Mortgagor in connection therewith.
The abovesigned Mortgagor, acting pursuant to a resolution adopted at a meeting of its stockholders or members, and the abovesigned Contractor, agree to the
above described construction changes and agree that the construction contract executed by them (date)
contract price of $
set forth in Article 3 thereof to $
is amended by increasing the
all other provisions of the Construction Contract remain unchanged.
The abovesigned Mortgagor and the above signed Contractor agree to the construction changes described above and agree that the construction contract
executed by them (date)
$_
is amended by decreasing the contract price of $
Federal Housing Commissioner Findings: 1. Mortgagor's Estimate
a. Effect on cost of previously
accepted changes
$
b. Effect on cost to date
of all changes
$
2. Net effect on Construction Costs
a. Present changes
b. Previous changes
$
$
c. Perc ent
c. Total
$
d. Percent
%
%
Increase
3. Changes
set forth in Article 3 thereof to
; all other provisions of the construction contract remain unchanged.
Decrease
Increase
Decrease
Increase
Decrease
are acceptable and the drawings and specifications amended, provided:
a. That a total sum of $
_is on deposit with the mortgage to cover net increase in cost resulting from present and previous construction changes.
This supersedes any previous requirements. The money will not be released without written consent of HUD prior to final completion and acceptance of the project
construction. No further advances of the mortgage proceeds under the Building Loan Agreement will be approved unless the total sum is on deposit with you.
b. That in order to reflect the net decrease in cost or reduction in mortgage based on net income or number of family units, resulting from acceptable present
and previous construction changes, the amount of $
shall be deducted from the amount entered on the line entitled "Sum of Cost
Breakdown Items Plus Inventories of Materials", form HUD-92448. This amount may be modified by later changes.
c. Consent of surety to these changes is obtained in writing and a signed copy sent to this office prior to effecting the change.
d. There is compliance with the conditions stated on the back of this form.
4.
Changes
are not acceptable. See "Reasons for Unacceptability" on the back of this form.
HUD analysis and findings reviewed and approved:
Director, Housing Development Division (signature)
Date
Mortgage Credit
Initial & Date
Federal Housing Commissioner
Signature of authorized agent
Page 1 of 2
form HUD-92437 (11/00)
ref. Handbook 4480.1
Public Reporting Burden for this collection is estimated to average 2 hours per response, including the time for reviewing, searching existing data
sources, gathering and maintaining the data needed, and compiling and reviewing the collection of information. Send comments regarding this burden
estimate or any other aspect of this collection of information, including suggestions for reducing this burden to the Reports Management Officer, Paperwork
Reduction Project (2502-0011), U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development, 451 7th Street SW, Washington, DC 20410-3600.
The Department of Housing and Urban Development (HUD) is authorized to collect this information by provisions set forth in Section 5 of the
United States Housing Act of 1937, as amended. It is provided by contractors, mortgagors and mortgagees to obtain the FHA Commissioner’s approval of
changes in contract drawings and specifications, and this information is used to ensure that viable projects are developed. This information is used by HUD
to ensure that viable projects are being developed. Furnishing of this information is mandatory, and failure to provide it may result in your not receiving your
benefits.
Privacy Act Notice. The United States Department of Housing and Urban Development, Federal Housing Administration, is authorized to solicit
the information requested in this form by virtue of Title 12, United States Code, Section 1701 et seq., and regulations promulgated thereunder at Title 12,
Code of Federal Regulations. While no assurances of confidentiality is pledged to respondents, HUD generally discloses this data only in response to a
Freedom of Information request. This agency may not conduct or sponsor, and a person is not required to respond to, a collection of information unless that
collection displays a valid OMB control number.
Instructions
Send the original and six copies to HUD through the mortgagee.
Under "Description of Changes" describe each proposed change
and enter the amount by which the construction cost will be
increased or decreased as the net result of each proposed
change. Attach documentation including (1) reason for each
change, (2) general scope, (3) full detailed description of work to
be omitted and/or added and the cost for each trade affected, and
(4) reference any attachments showing proposed revisions.
Estimate the cost of each change on the basis of the current cost
of items omitted, substituted or added. Estimates include job
overhead and builder's fee, or job overhead and general overhead, as applied in the HUD estimate of the project. No allowance
for "Builder's and Sponsor's Profit and Risk" is included. No
architect's or engineer's fee is included.
This form is not used for off-site changes. Such changes must be
submitted in writing, using this form as a guide.
To be acceptable to HUD a proposed change must be due to
necessity, or be an appropriate betterment, or qualify as an
equivalent. In accepting any changes, it is assumed that they will
be executed. If an accepted change is not executed, it must be
nullified by substituting a Request for Construction Changes
amending the drawings and specifications so as to restore the
drawings and specifications to prior status or to a status acceptable to HUD.
Send requests for a time extension on a separate form.
Conditions of Acceptance or Reasons for Unacceptability
When the HUD estimated cost of all accepted changes results in
a net decrease in the total construction cost, the insurable mortgage will be similarly decreased; but if the net effect is an increase,
the additional costs will be defrayed by the mortgagor. The
acceptance of any change or changes involving a net increase
does not increase the mortgage amount.
Page 2 of 2
form HUD-92437 (11/00)
ref. Handbook 4480.1
Construction Contract
Lump Sum
U.S. Department of Housing
and Urban Development
Office of Housing
Federal Housing Commissioner
OMB Approval No. 2502-0011 (Exp. 9/30/2013)
Public Reporting Burden for this collection is estimated to average 16 hours per response, including the time for reviewing, searching existing data sources,
gathering and maintaining the data needed, and compiling and reviewing the collection of information. Send comments regarding this burden estimate or any other
aspect of this collection of information, including suggestions for reducing this burden to the Reports Management Officer, Paperwork Reduction Project (25020011), U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development, 451 7 th Street SW, Washington, DC 20410-3600.
The Department of Housing and Urban Development (HUD) is authorized to collect this information by provisions set forth in Article I.E. of the National
Housing Act (Public Law 479, 48 Stat. 1246, 12 U.S.C. 1701 et. seq.). This information is provided to the FHA-Commissioner to obtain approval by contractors and
mortgagors to document the terms and conditions of any Contract Document, or order for extra work, or changes by altering or adding to the work, or which will
change the design concept. The information is used by HUD to ensure that viable projects are developed. Furnishing of this information is mandatory, and failure
to provide it may result in your not receiving your benefits.
Privacy Act Notice. The United States Department of Housing and Urban Development, Federal Housing Administration, is authorized to solicit the information requested in this form by virtue of Title 12, United States Code, Section 1701 et seq., and regulations promulgated thereunder at Title 12, Code of Federal
Regulations. While no assurances of confidentiality is pledged to respondents, HUD generally discloses this data only in response to a Freedom of Information
request. This agency may not conduct or sponsor, and a person is not required to respond to, a collection of information unless that collection displays a valid
OMB control number.
This Agreement, made the ____________ day of __________________ 20____, between
__________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________
(hereinafter called the “Contractor”) and
____________________________________________________________________________
(hereinafter called the “Owner”).
Witnesseth, that the Contractor and the Owner, for the consideration hereinafter set out, agree as follows:
Article 1—Scope of Contract
A. The Contract between the parties is set forth in the “Contract
Documents,” which consist of this Agreement, the Drawings and
Specifications, which include the current edition of AIA Document
A201, “General Conditions of the Contract for Construction,” and
Form HUD-2554, “Supplementary Conditions of the Contract for
Construction.” The provisions of this instrument and the said HUD
Supplementary Conditions take precedence over all inconsistent
provisions in the said AIA General Conditions. This Contract constitutes the entire agreement between the parties, and any previously
existing contract concerning the work contemplated by the Contract
Documents is hereby revoked.
B. The Contractor shall furnish all of the materials and perform all
of the work (within the property lines) shown on, and in accordance
with, the Drawings and Specifications entitled ______________
_________________________________________________
,
HUD Project No.___________________, dated _______________.
C.
The Drawings, which are numbered _____________________,
and the Specifications, the pages of which are numbered
_________________________________________________
,
have been prepared by _______________________________
__________________________________
(“Design Architect”).
The Architect administering the Construction Contract (hereinafter,
and elsewhere in the Contract Documents, referred to as the “Architect”) is ____________________________________________
_________________________________________________
.
D. A master set of said Drawings and Specifications, identified by
the parties hereto and by the Design Architect, the Architect, and the
Contractor's Surety or Guarantor have been placed on file with the
Federal Housing Commissioner (hereinafter referred to as the “Commissioner”), and shall govern in all matters which arise with respect
to such Drawings and Specifications.
Replaces form FHA-2442 which is obsolete
Previous editions are obsolete
E. Changes in the Drawings and Specifications or any terms of the
Contract Documents, or orders for extra work, or changes by altering
or adding to the work, or which will change the design concept, may
be effected only with the prior written approval of the Owner's Lender
(more particularly identified below and hereinafter referred to as the
“Lender”) and the Commissioner under such conditions as either the
Lender or the Commissioner may establish.
Article 2—Time
A. The work to be performed under this Contract shall be commenced within ______ days of this Agreement, and shall be completed by __________________, 20____. The time by which the
work shall be completed may be extended in accordance with the
terms of the said AIA General Conditions only with the prior written
approval of the Commissioner.
B. The Contractor shall correct any defects due to faulty materials
or workmanship which appear within one year from the date of final
completion.
C. If the work is not brought to final completion in accordance with
the Drawings and Specifications, including any authorized changes,
by the date specified above, or by such date to which the contract
time may be extended, the contract sum stated in Article 3A below
shall be reduced by $_______________, as liquidated damages, for
each day of delay until the date of final completion. When the Owner
cost certifies to HUD, the actual cost of interest, taxes, insurance,
mortgage insurance premiums, and construction and permanent
loan extension fees, as approved by the Commissioner, for the
period from the scheduled date of completion through the date
construction was actually completed, shall be determined. The
lesser of the liquidated or actual damages shall be applied. The
applicable amount shall be reduced by the project's net operating
income (as determined by the Commissioner) for the damage
period.
Page 1 of 3
form HUD-92442 (11/00)
ref Handbook 4430.1
D. The Owner and Contractor may amend this contract prior to
initial endorsement (insurance of advances projects) or upon execution of the construction contract (insurance upon completion projects),
in a form prescribed by the Commissioner, to provide for an incentive
payment to the Contractor, which will result in an increase in the
contract sum stated in Article 3A below, if the work is completed
before the date specified in this contract. The Contractor will not be
entitled to any incentive payment resulting from early completion if
HUD determines that the Contractor’s cost certification, if required
by Article 7, is fraudulent or materially misrepresents the Contractor’s
actual cost of construction.
E. The date of final completion shall be the date the HUD representative signs the final HUD Representative’s Trip Report provided that
the trip report is subsequently endorsed by the Chief Architect.
Article 3—Contract Sum and Payments
A. The Owner shall pay the Contractor for the performance of the
Contract, as hereinafter provided, the sum of $ ________________
.
B. Each month after the commencement of work hereunder, the
Contractor shall make a monthly request on Form HUD-92448 for
payment by the Owner for work done during the preceding month.
Each request for payment shall be filed at least ___________ days
before the date payment is desired. Subject to the approval of the
Lender and the Commissioner, the Contractor shall be entitled to
payment thereon in an amount equal to (1) the total value of classes
of the work acceptably completed; plus (2) the value of materials and
equipment not incorporated in the work, but delivered to and suitably
stored at the site; plus (3) the value of components stored off-site in
compliance with applicable HUD requirements; less (4) 10 percent
holdback and less prior payments. The “values” of (1), (2) and (3)
shall be computed in accordance with the amounts assigned to
classes of work in the “Contractor's and/or Mortgagor's Cost Breakdown,” attached hereto as Exhibit “A”. The Contractor agrees that no
materials or equipment required by the Specifications will be purchased under a conditional sale contract or with the use of any
security agreement or other vendor's title or lien retention instrument.
C. The balance due the Contractor hereunder shall be payable
upon the expiration of 30 days after the work hereunder is fully
completed, provided the following have occurred.
(1) All work hereunder requiring inspection by municipal or
other governmental authorities having jurisdiction has been inspected and approved by such authorities and by the rating or
inspection organization, bureau, association or office having jurisdiction;
(2) All certificates of occupancy, or other approvals, with respect to all units of the project have been issued by State or local
governmental authorities having jurisdiction; and
(3) Permission(s) To Occupy (Form HUD-92485) for all units of
the project have been issued by the Commissioner.
D. With its final application for payment by the Owner, the Contractor shall disclose, on a form prescribed by the Commissioner, all
unpaid obligations contracted in connection with the work performed
under this Contract. The Contractor agrees that within 15 days
following receipt of final payment, it will pay such obligations in cash
and furnish satisfactory evidence of such payment to the Owner.
Article 4—Receipts & Releases of Liens
The Owner may require the Contractor to attach to each request for
payment its acknowledgement of payment and all subcontractors'
and material supplier's acknowledgements of payment for work done
and materials, equipment and fixtures furnished through the date
covered by the previous payment. Concurrently with the final payment, the Owner may require the Contractor to execute a waiver or
release of lien for all work performed and materials furnished hereunder, and may require the Contractor to obtain similar waivers or
releases from all subcontractors and material suppliers.
Article 5—Requirements of Contractor
A. The Contractor shall furnish, at its own expense, all building and
other permits, licenses, tools, equipment and temporary structures
necessary for the construction of the project. The Contractor shall
give all required notices and shall comply with all applicable codes,
laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and with the current regulations of the National Board of Fire Underwriters, wherever applicable.
The Contractor further shall comply with the provisions of the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970. The Contractor shall immediately notify the Commissioner of the delivery of all permits, licenses, certificates of inspection, certificates of occupancy, and any
other such certificates and instruments required by law, regardless
of to whom issued, and shall cause them to be displayed to the
Commissioner upon request.
B. If the Contractor observes that the Drawings and Specifications
are at variance with any applicable codes, laws, ordinances, rules or
regulations, or protective covenants, it shall promptly notify the
Architect in writing, and any necessary changes shall be made as
provided in this Contract for changes in the Drawings and Specifications. If the Contractor performs any work knowing it to be contrary
to such codes, laws, ordinances, rules or regulations, or protective
covenants, without giving such notice to the Architect, it shall bear all
costs arising therefrom.
C. Upon completion of construction, the Contractor shall furnish to
the Owner a survey showing the location on the site of all improvements constructed thereon, and showing the location of all water,
sewer, gas and electric lines and mains, and of all existing utility
easements. Such survey shall be prepared by a licensed surveyor
who shall certify that the work is installed and erected entirely upon
the land covered by the mortgage and within any building restriction
lines on said land, and does not overhang or otherwise encroach
upon any easement or right-of-way of others. In addition, the Contractor shall furnish additional surveys when required by the Owner
for any improvements, including structures and utilities, not theretofore located on a survey. The Contractor shall furnish copies of such
survey required hereunder for the Lender and the Commissioner.
D. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for the maintenance of all landscaping which may be required by the Drawings and
Specifications until such time as both parties to this Contract shall
receive written notice from the Commissioner that such landscaping
has been finally completed. The Owner hereby agrees to make
available to the Contractor, for such purpose, without cost to the
latter, such facilities as water, hose and sprinkler.
Article 6—Assurance of Completion
The Contractor shall furnish to the Owner assurance of completion of
the work in the form of (specify) __________________________
__________________________________________________
__________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Replaces form FHA-2442 which is obsolete
Previous editions are obsolete
Page 2 of 3
.
form HUD-92442 (11/00)
ref Handbook 4430.1
Such assurance of completion shall run to the Owner and the Lender
as obligees and shall contain a provision whereby the surety agrees
that any claim or right of action that either the Owner or the Lender
might have thereunder may be assigned to the Commissioner.
Article 7—Cost Certification
In the event the Commissioner determines that there is an identity of
interest between the Contractor and the Owner, the Contractor shall
certify, on a form prescribed by the Commissioner, its cost incurred
in the performance of work under this Contract.
Article 8—Right of Entry and Interpretation
A. The Lender and its agents or assigns and the Commissioner and
his/her agents shall, at all times during construction, have the right
of entry and free access to the project and the right to inspect all work
done and materials, equipment and fixtures furnished, installed or
stored in and about the project. For such purposes, the Contractor
shall furnish such enclosed working space as the Lender or Commissioner may require and find acceptable as to location, size, accommodations and furnishings.
B. The Commissioner shall also have the right to interpret the
Contract Documents and to determine compliance therewith.
B. The Contractor shall not subcontract all of the work to be
performed hereunder without the prior written consent of the Owner,
the Lender and the Commissioner.
C. Upon request by the Owner, the Lender or the Commissioner,
the Contractor shall disclose the names of all persons with whom it
has contracted or will contract with respect to work to be done and
materials and equipment to be furnished hereunder.
D. The Contractor understands that the work under this contract is
to be financed by a building loan to be secured by a mortgage and
insured by the Commissioner, and that the terms of said loan are set
forth in a Building Loan Agreement between the Owner as Borrower
and
_________________________________________________
_________________________________________
as Lender.
The Contractor further understands that said Building Loan Agreement provides that, in the event of the failure of the Owner to perform
its obligations to the Lender thereunder, the Lender may, as attorney-in-fact for the Owner, undertake the completion of the project in
accordance with this Contract. In the event the Lender elects not to
undertake such completion, the Contractor's obligations under this
contract shall terminate.
Article 9—Assignments, Subcontracts and Termination
A. This Contract shall not be assignable by either party without the
prior written consent of the other party, the Lender and the Commissioner, except that the Owner may assign the Contract, or any rights
hereunder, to the Lender or the Commissioner.
In Witness Whereof, the parties to these presents have executed this contract in six (6) counterparts, each of which shall be deemed an original,
in the year and day first above mentioned.
(Seal) Attest:
Owner
Witness
By
Witness
Title
(Seal)
Contractor
Witness
By
Witness
Title
Note: If Contractor or owner is a corporation, Secretary should attest.
Replaces form FHA-2442 which is obsolete
Previous editions are obsolete
Page 3 of 3
form HUD-92442 (11/00)
ref Handbook 4430.1
U.S. Department of Housing
and Urban Development
Office of Housing
Federal Housing
Commissioner
Contractor's Requisition
Project Mortgages
To be submitted to mortgagee in quadruplicate
OMB Approval No. 2502-0028 (exp. 8/31/2013)
This information is used to verify program benefits consisting of distribution of insured mortgage proceeds when construction c osts are
involved. The information regarding completed work items is used by HUD to ensure that payments from mortgage proceeds are made for
work actu ally completed in a satisfactory manner. This information is a requirement under Section 207(b) of the National Housing Act
(Public Law 479, 4S8tat. 1246, 12 U.S.C. 1701 et. seq) authorizing the Secretary of HUD to insure mortgages. The information collection
does not contain information of a se nsitive nature.
Public reporting burden for this collection of information is estimated to average 6 hours per response, including the time for
reviewing
instructions, searching existing data sources, gathering and maintaining the data needed, and completing and reviewing the collection of
inrm
foation. This agency may not collect this information, and you are not required to complete this form, unless it displays a currently valid
OMB control number.
To (owner)
Requisition Number
Project
Project Number
Location
In accordance with the provision of the Construction Contract dated ________________ and Contractor's and/or
Mortgagor's Cost Breakdown (Schedule of Values) attached thereto, this requisition is submitted for the amount of $
__________________ due for work performed up to the ____________ day of ______________ and as itemized below by
the trades listed in the Schedule of Values.
Enter Amounts to Nearest Even Dollar
Trade Item
DIV
3
Concrete
4
Masonry
5
Metals
6
Rough Carpentry
6
Finish Carpentry
7
Waterproofing
7
Insulation
7
Roofing
7
Sheet Metal
8
Doors
8
Windows
8
Glass
9
Lath and Plaster
9
Drywall
9
Tile Work
9
Acoustical
9
Wood Flooring
9
Resilient Flooring
9
Painting and Decorating
10
Specialties
11
Special Equipment
11
Cabinets
11
Appliances
12
Blinds and Shades, Artwork
12
Carpets
13
Special Construction
14
Elevators
15
Plumbing and Hot Water
15
Heat and Ventilation
15
Air Conditioning
16
Electrical
Amounts Complete
(B)
Cost as per Cost
Breakdown (A)
$
$
For HUD-FHA Use
(C)
$
Accessory Buildings
2
Earth Work
2
Site Utilities
2
Roads and Walks
2
Site Improvement
2
Lawns and Planting
Previous editions are obsolete.
Page 1 of 2
form HUD-92448 (1/91)
2
Unusual Site Conditions
1
General Requirements
1
Bond Premium ($
Previous editions are obsolete.
)
Page 2 of 2
form HUD-92448 (1/91)
DIV
1
Other Fees
Trade Item
Enter Amounts to Nearest Even Dollar
For HUD-FHA Use
Amounts Complete
(C)
(B)
Cost as per Cost
Breakdown (A)
($
)
0 *
0 **
(1)
Subtotal of Breakdown Items
$
(2)
Builder's Overhead
$
%$
%$
(3)
Builder's Profit
$
%$
%$
(4)
Total of Cost Breakdown Items
$
$
$
(5)
Inventory of Materials Stored On-site (See Note Below)
$
$
(6)
Inventory of Materials Stored Off-Site (See Note Below)
$
$
(7)
Sum of Cost Breakdown Items Plus Inventories of Materials
$
$
(8)
Less Net Decrease in Cost as a Result of Approved Changes
$
$
(9)
Total After Adjusting for Net Decrease to Approved Changes
$
$
(10)
Less Retained 10%
$
$
(11)
Bal.: Total Amount Due to Date on Account of Construction Contract
$
$
(12)
Less Previous Payments
$
$
(13)
Net Amount of This Requisition
$
$
% $
% $
I certify that the Work covered by this requisition has been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents, and that I have
actually received
$
for Work performed and materials purchased up to the ______________ day of ____________ (date of previous
requisition).
Date
Contractor
* Percentage derived from subtotal of Breakdown Items (col. B divided by col. A)
and costs.
** (col. C divided by col. A) Exclusive of Bond Premium
For Use of HUD-Federal Housing Commissioner
Date
Net Amount Approved for Payment
Reviewed and Approved by (Chief, Mortgage Credit)
Note: Attached inventory of materials item
ized as to quantities
Column C Completed by
(Mortgage Credit Examiner)
Director, Housing Development
Architect's Certificate I certify, based on my on-site observations (or those of my authorized representative) and the data comprising this
requisition,
that the Work has progressed to the point indicated; that to the best of my knowledge, information and belief the Work is in accordance with
the Contract Documents; and that the Contractor is entitled to payment of the amount certified.
Date
Architect
Inspector's Certificate
Amount Modified
No Modification
I certify that I have visited the site on this date ______________________________, observed the Work, and monitored the log and
reports of the Architect (if an architect is administering the Construction Contract); that to the best of my knowledge, information and
belief the amount certified represents acceptable Work; and that I have no personal interest, present or prospective, in the property,
Inspector
applicant or proceeds of the mortgage. Date
Contractor's Prevailing Wage Certificate (For use under all sections of the National Housing Act requiring certification as to payment of
prevailing wages. To be completed with each request for insurance of advance of mortgage proceeds which includes a payment on
account of construction cost, or at the time the mortgage is presented for insurance pursuant to a commitment to insure upon
completion.)
To
Date
Manager
Project Name
Field Office
Project Number
Advance No.
The undersigned, as principal contractor in connection with the construction of the above project, states that he/she is fully familiar with
applicable wage determination decision of the Secretary of Labor and certifies that:
a. A copy of the applicable wage determination decision is posted in a conspicuous place at the site of the work and he/she has
required each
subcontractor as a part of his/her contract, to agree to pay wages at rates not less than those contained in the decision.
b. All laborers and mechanics employed in the construction of the project have been, to the date hereof, paid for such employment at
wage rates not less than those contained in the applicable wage determination decision of the Secretary of Labor and no deductions or
rebates have been made, either
directly or indirectly, from the full weekly wages earned by any person, other than permissible deductions as defined in Regulations of
the Secretary of Labor, Part 3 (29 CFR Part 3).
c. He/She has fulfilled his/her obligations, to the date hereof, under The Labor Standards Provisions of the Supplementary Conditions of
the Contract
for Construction and has included said conditions in all subcontracts.
This certificate is executed by the undersigned for the purpose of inducing the Commissioner to approve for insurance that certain
mortgage loan, or an advance thereof, made or to be made by the mortgagee in connection with the construction of the project, and with
Previous editions are obsolete.
Page 3 of 2
form HUD-92448 (1/91)
the intent that the Commissioner
rely upon this certification to establish compliance with the provisions of Section 212 of the National Housing Act, which provides in
part: The Commissioner shall not insure ... unless the principal contractor files a certificate ... certifying that the laborers and
mechanics ... have not been paid not less than the wages prevailing ... as determined by the Secretary of Labor...”
I hereby certify that all the information stated herein, as well as any information provided in the accompaniment herewith, is true
and accurate. Warning: HUD will prosecute false claims and statements. Conviction may result in criminal and/or civil penalties (18 U.S.C. 1001, 1010,
1012; 31 U.S.C. 3729, 3802). Contractor
By
Date:
X
Previous editions are obsolete.
Page 4 of 2
form HUD-92448 (1/91)
Permission to Occupy
Project Mortgages
U.S. Department of Housing
and Urban Development
Office of Housing
Federal Housing
Commissioner
OMB Approval No. 2502-0029
(Exp. 10/31/2012)
Public Reporting Burden for this collection of information is estimated to average 4 hours per response, including the time fo r reviewing
instructions, searching existing data sources, gathering and maintaining the data needed, and completing and reviewing the collection of
information. This agency may not conduct or sponsor, and a person is not required to respond to, a collection of information unless that
collection displays a valid OMB control number.
This information is being collected under Public Law 101-625 which requires the Department of to implement a system for mortgage insurance
for mortgages insured under Sections 207,221,223,232, or 241 of the National Housing Act. The information will be used by HUD to a pprove
rents, property appraisals, and mortgage amounts, and to execute a firm commitment.
Confidentiality to respondents is ensured if it would re
sult in competitive harm
in accord with the Freedom of Information Act (FOIA) provisions or if it could impact on the ability of the Department's mission to provide
housing units under the various Sections of the Housing legislation.
Project Name
Project Number
Project Location
Request Number
Request for Permission to Occupy
Federal Housing Administration
Permission is requested for the occupancy of (Number) ---------------------- living
units identified as
and located in (Describe structure, wing, entrance, etc.)
All work in connection therewith has been substantially completed and all of the above-described living units are suitable for occupancy, with
the fixtures and equipment installed and in operating condition. Light, heat, water, gas, and sanitary services have been connected and
araevailable for use. The premises have been inspected by the public authorities have jurisdiction and permission to occupy granted by them as
evidenced by the ce rtificates attached hereto. Safe and adequate approaches to the site and the aforesaid living units have been provided,
including temporary or permanent gu
ard rails, barricades, walks, lights, and other provisions necessary to the protection of tenants and the
public. Proposed rental schedules or monthly charges in triplicate and mortgagor's proposal for management of the project and compensation
to be paid therefor, if and as requested by corporate charter have beenor are herewith submitted.
-----------------------------------------------------------Mortgagor
Date (mm/dd/yyyy) ------------------------------------
By
---------------------------------------------------------
Architect's Certificate of Substantial Completion
I have inspected the units listed above and have found construction to be sufficiently complete and in accordance with contracrtequirements
so that owner may occupy the above described living or service units for the uses intended. I have examined all required certificates of perm
ission to occupy as issued by public authorities having jurisdiction and found same to be in proper order.
-----------------------------------------------------------Architect
Date (mm/dd/yyyy) -------------------------------------
By
---------------------------------------------------------
Contractor's Certification
This is to certify that all work or correction necessary to complete the above-described living units in accordance with the co ntract
requirements and in a manner acceptable to the Federal Housing Administration will be performed without delay and at no additional cost
regardlessanoyf adverse conditions resulting from the occupancy of the aforesaid living units.
--------------------------------------------------------------Contractor
Date (mm/dd/yyyy) -------------------------------------------------
By
---------------------------------------------------------
Mortgagee's Statement
Federal Housing Administration
All insurance risks have been covered in conformity with Federal Housing Administration Hazard Insurance requirements issued in
connection with this project. The above request is acceptable to the undersigned.
--------------------------------------------------------------Mortgagee
Date (mm/dd/yyyy) -------------------------------------
By
---------------------------------------------------------
To (Name of Mortgagee, Street Address, City, State, Zip):
Previous editions are obsolete
Page 1 of 2
(Original and four copies to be submitted to FHA)
form HUD-92485 (10/71)
ref. Handbook 4480
FHA Inspection Report
Examination of the living units described above, including the available means of access thereto, reveals they are suitable foorccupancy with
the exception of those enumerated below, which are considered unsuitable for occupancy at this time for the reasons stated.
Inspected -------------------------------------------(Date mm/dd/yyyy)
Approved
as reported above;
By------------------------------------------------------------------Architectural
as modified by me
Construction Representative
----------------------------------------------------------------------------Chief Architecture & Engineering Section
Approved: Date ---------------------------------------( mm/dd/yyyy)
Deputy
By-------------------------------------------------------------------Chief Underwriter;
Assistant Director for Technical Services
Deputy
Permission to Occupy
Permission is granted for the occupancy of the living units identified on the FHA Inspection Report portion of this form as sui
table for
occupancy. It is understood that this does not constitute and shall not be construed as acceptable of construction and that completion of these
living units in accordance with the contract documents is essential and will be performed prior to acceptance of the construction.
Federal Housing Administration,
By-------------------------------------------------------------------(Authorized agent)
Date (mm/dd/yyyy)
Previous editions are obsolete
---------------------------------
Page 2 of 2
(Original and four copies to be submitted to FHA)
form HUD-92485 (10/71)
ref. Handbook 4480
1
Completion Assurance
Agreement
U.S. Department of Housing
OMB Approval No. 0000-0000
and Urban Development
Office of Housing
(Exp. 00/00/00)
Public Reporting Burden for this collection of information is estimated to average 0.5 hour per response, including the time for reviewing
instructions, searching existing data sources, gathering and maintaining the data needed, and completing and reviewing the collection of
information. Send comments regarding this burden estimate or any other aspect of this collection of information, including suggestions for
reducing this burden, to the Reports Management Officer, Office of Information Policies and Systems, U.S. Department of Housing and Urban
Development, Washington, DC 20410-3600 and to the Office of Management and Budget, Paperwork Reduction Project (2502-0468),
Washington, DC 20503. Do not send this completed form to either of the above addresses.
This COMPLETION ASSURANCE AGREEMENT made this
_, 20 , by and between
day of
(Contractor), whose principal
__ , and
________ (Borrower), whose
___, and
_____ (Lender), whose
address is:
principal address is:
principal address is:
________
applicable,
Institution), whose principal address is:
____, [and if
(Depository
] (Agreement). (The
definition of any capitalized term or word used herein can be found in this Completion
Assurance Agreement, the Regulatory Agreement between Borrower and HUD, the Note,
and/or the Security Instrument.)
RECITALS:
A. Contractor and Borrower have entered into a Construction Contract dated
, 20
(Construction Contract), providing for the construction of a
Project described therein, known as HUD Project No.
_________ ______ , and a
copy of the Construction Contract being on file with HUD; and
B. Construction of the Project is to be financed by a Loan made to Borrower by Lender, which
Loan is secured by a Security Instrument, to be insured by HUD, pursuant to and under the
provisions of the National Housing Act, as amended; and
C. Lender is unwilling to make Loan advances and HUD is unwilling to insure the Loan unless
Contractor shall first furnish proper assurance to Borrower and to Lender for the performance of
the obligations of Contractor under the Construction Contract, including, but not limited to:
(1) completion of the Project in accordance with Drawings and Specifications referred to in the
Construction Contract;
(2) completion of the Project free and clear of any liens, claims or encumbrances whatsoever,
except for the lien of the Security Instrument;
Previous editions are obsolete;
Replaces form HUD-92450 (04/83)
Completion Assurance Agreement
HUD-92450M (Rev. 00/06)
2
(3) payment of all mechanics and laborers employed in the construction of the Project at
wages prevailing in the locality of the Project as determined by the Secretary of Labor in
accordance with the Davis-Bacon Act, as amended;
(4) satisfaction of any loss, damage, expense or claim that Borrower or Lender may suffer or
sustain through the failure of Contractor to fulfill the provisions of (1), (2), or (3) above or
through the failure of Contractor to fulfill all obligations under the Construction Contract.
AGREEMENT:
In consideration of the mutual promises and undertakings hereinafter contained, and for the
purpose of inducing HUD to insure advances of the Loan during construction, the parties hereto
on behalf of themselves, their successors or assigns respectively, undertake and agree that:
1. Contractor has deposited with Lender, or if Lender so elects, with a depository institution
satisfactory to Lender, a Completion Assurance Fund , in the amount of
_Dollars ($
__)
(Deposit), to secure or indemnify Borrower or Lender, as the case may be, for any expenses,
loss, or damage suffered or sustained as the result of any default by Contractor in the
performance of the Construction Contract; it being understood and agreed that the Deposit shall at
all times be under the control of Lender or its assigns and is deposited in the form of (specify as
applicable):
D
cash; or
D one or more unconditional irrevocable letter(s) of credit issued to Lender by a banking
institution, attached hereto as Exhibit “A”. The rating of the issuing banking institution and the
duration of such letter(s) of credit shall comply with Program Obligations;
2. Contractor shall complete the construction, free of all liens, on or before the Project
Substantial Completion Deadline as that term is defined in the Construction Contract. Contractor
shall correct any defects due to faulty materials or workmanship which appear within one year
from Project Substantial Completion as that term is defined in the Construction Contract (Latent
Defects). Contractor further agrees to pay for all labor and materials necessary to complete the
construction and remedy said Latent Defects. Contractor’s liability for the completion of the
construction and remedying Latent Defects shall not be limited to the amount of the Deposit. The
time frame for Latent Defects shall be extended one year from the Date of Final Completion for
the completion of work first performed after Project Substantial Completion or portions of the work
not specifically included in a Certificate of Substantial Completion (defined as any executed
Permission to Occupy in HUD-92485). The “Date of Final Completion” shall be the date the
HUD representative signs the final HUD Representative’s Trip Report (form HUD-95379) provided
that the trip report is subsequently endorsed by the Construction Manager. The Latent Defects
time frame for all work performed after the Date of Final Completion shall be extended one year
from the date any such work is completed.
Previous editions are obsolete;
Replaces form HUD-92450 (00/00)
Completion Assurance Agreement
HUD-92450M (Rev. 00/06)
3
3. The Deposit shall be held by Lender subject to disbursement at the sole discretion of HUD as
follows:
(a) to Contractor or party making such Deposit during the course of construction, as may be
deemed necessary by Lender and with prior written approval of HUD;
(b) to Borrower such portion of the Deposit as deemed necessary by HUD to recover any
overpayment to Contractor;
(c) to pay or cause to be paid any amounts due with respect to the performance of Contractor
obligations or to reimburse any party on account or amounts paid by such party on account
thereof;
(d) any balance remaining in account of Deposit may be returned to, or as directed by,
Contractor or party making such Deposit when: (i) final endorsement of the Note for
mortgage insurance by HUD has occurred, and (ii) Latent Defects assurances that are
compliant with Program Obligations have been provided in the form of a cash escrow,
letter of credit, or a surety bond from a surety on the accredited list of the U.S Treasury, in
an amount equal to two and one-half percent (2 %) of the total amount of the
Construction Contract (Latent Defects Deposit), which shall be held as part of the
Deposit. Said sum may be used for the correction of Latent Defects in the event Contractor
fails to make such corrections;
(e) any balance remaining in account of the Latent Defects Deposit shall be returned to, or as
directed by, Contractor or party making such Deposit, upon the later of, (i) fifteen (15)
months after Project Substantial Completion, (ii) fifteen (15) months after the Date of Final
Completion for completion of any work performed after Project Substantial Completion, (iii)
fifteen (15) months after completion of any work performed after the Date of Final
Completion, or (iv) at such time as all Latent Defects have been corrected to the
satisfaction of HUD.
4. Notwithstanding any of the provisions herein contained, it is expressly understood and agreed by
all the parties thereto that in the event of a default by Contractor in any of its obligations under the
Construction Contract, the entire Deposit or balance remaining therein may, at the option of Lender
and HUD, be paid to HUD together with an assignment of all rights hereunder granted to Lender by
Borrower. Contractor and Borrower hereby consent to the transfer of the rights of Lender hereunder
by assignment in the event that any other Lender or Lenders should become the holder of the
Security Instrument.
5. In the event Lender assigns the Security Instrument to HUD at any time during which the Deposit
has a balance remaining therein in the form of an unconditional irrevocable letter of credit,
Contractor authorizes Lender to draw the remaining balance of said letter of credit in cash, if so
required by HUD, and deliver such cash within forty-five (45) days after the assignment is filed for
record to HUD to be held in accordance with the terms of this Completion Assurance Agreement.
Previous editions are obsolete;
Replaces form HUD-92450 (00/00)
Completion Assurance Agreement
HUD-92450M (Rev. 00/06)
4
6. It is understood and agreed that in the event the Deposit is held by a depository institution
other than Lender, that said depository institution is not charged with any duty or responsibility of
Lender related to the performance of or compliance with any agreements between any of the
parties hereto other than that of paying over the Deposit as directed in writing by Lender.
7. The Deposit, when in the form of cash, shall be held by Lender or a depository institution
satisfactory to the Lender and in accordance with Program Obligations, in an account that is fully
insured by the United States of America. Lender may, for purposes of this Agreement, draw upon
any letter of credit included in the Deposit and convert the same to cash, which cash shall then be
held and disbursed pursuant to the terms of this Agreement.
Previous editions are obsolete;
Replaces form HUD-92450 (00/00)
Completion Assurance Agreement
HUD-92450M (Rev. 00/06)
5
Each signatory below hereby certifies that the statements and representations contained in this
Agreement and all supporting documentation thereto are true, accurate, and complete. This
Agreement has been made, presented, and delivered for the purpose of influencing an official
action of HUD in insuring the Loan, and may be relied upon by HUD as a true statement of the facts
contained therein.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have duly executed this Completion Assurance
Agreement as of the day and year first above written.
BORROWER
LENDER
By:
By:
Print name and title
Print name and title
CONTRACTOR
DEPOSITORY INSTITUTION
By:
By:
Print name and title
Print name and title
_
Attachment: Exhibit “A”
Warning:
Any person who knowingly presents a false, fictitious, or fraudulent statement or claim
in a matter within the jurisdiction of the U.S. Department of Housing and Urban
Development is subject to criminal penalties, civil liability, and administrative sanctions.
Previous editions are obsolete;
Replaces form HUD-92450 (00/00)
Completion Assurance Agreement
HUD-92450M (Rev. 00/06)
6
EXHIBIT “A”
Form of Letter of Credit
Previous editions are obsolete;
Replaces form HUD-92450 (00/00)
Completion Assurance Agreement
HUD-92450M (Rev. 00/06)
Payment Bond
OMB Approval No. 25020470 (Expires 8/31/2013)
U.S. Department of Housing
and Urban Development
Office of Housing
Federal Housing Commissioner
(This Bond is issued simultaneously with Performance Bond in
favor of Owner conditioned on the full and faithful performance of
the contract)
Project Number:
Know All Men By These Presents, that we,
of
as Principal, (hereinafter called the Principal) and
, a
as
Surety, (hereinafter called the Surety) are held and firmly bound unto
as Obligee, (hereinafter called the "Owner#), for the use and benefit of claimants as hereinafter defined, in the sum of
Dollars
$
, lawful money of the United States of America,
for the payment of which Principal and Surety bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns,
jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
Whereas, Principal has entered into a Construction Contract dated
tion of a Housing Project designated as
tion Contract is by reference made a part hereof; and is hereinafter referred to as the Contract.
Now, therefore, the conditions of this obligation is such that,
if Principal shall promptly make payment to all claimants as
hereinafter defined, for all labor and material used or reasonably
required for use in the performance of the Contract, then this
obligation shall be void; otherwise it shall remain in full force and
effect, subject, however, to the following conditions:
1. A Claimant is defined as one having a direct contract with the
Principal or with a subcontractor of the Principal for labor,
material, or both, used or reasonably required for use in the
performance of the contract, labor and material being construed
to include that part of water, gas, power, light, heat, oil, gasoline,
telephone service or rental of equipment directly applicable to the
Contract.
2. The above name Principal and Surety hereby jointly and
severally agree with the Owner that every claimant as herein
defined, who has not been paid in full before the expiration of a
period of ninety (90) days after the date on which the last of such
claimant!s work or labor was done or performed, or materials were
furnished by such claimant, may sue on this bond for the use of
such claimant, prosecute the suit to final judgment for such sum
or sums as may be justly due claimant, and have execution
thereon. The Owner shall not be liable for the payment of any
costs or expenses of any such suit.
with Owner for the construca copy of which Construc-
within ninety (90) days after such claimant did or performed the
last of the work or labor, or furnished the last of the materials for
which said claim is made, stating with substantial accuracy the
amount claimed and the name of the party to whom the materials
were furnished, or for whom the work or labor was done or
performed. Such notice shall be served by mailing the same by
registered mail or certified mail, postage prepaid, in an envelope
addressed to the Principal, Owner or Surety, at any place where
an office is regularly maintained for the transaction of business,
or served in any manner in which legal process may be served in
the state in which the aforesaid project is located, save that such
service need not be made by a public officer.
b) After the expiration of one (1) year following the date on
which Principal ceased work on said Contract, it being understood, however, that if any limitation embodied in this bond is
prohibited by any law controlling the construction hereof, such
limitation shall be deemed to be amended so as to be equal to the
minimum period of limitation permitted by such law.
c) Other than in a state court of competent jurisdiction in and
for the county or other political subdivision of the state in which
the project, or any part thereof, is situated, or in the United States
District Court for the district in which the project, or any part
thereof, is situated, and not elsewhere.
a) Unless claimant, other than one having direct contract with
the Principal, shall have given written notice to any two of the
following: The Principal, the Owner, or the Surety above named,
4. The amount of this bond shall be reduced by and to the extent
of any payment or payments made in good faith hereunder,
inclusive of the payment by Surety of mechanics! liens which may
be filed of record against said improvement, whether or not claim
for the amount of such lien be presented under and against this
bond.
Signed and Sealed this
day of
3. No suit or action shall be commenced hereunder by any
claimant:
, 20
Witness as to Principal:
.
(Seal)
(Principal)
By:
(Surety)
By:
Page 1 of 2
form HUD-92452-A (1/24/2006)
ref. Handbook 4571.1
Public reporting burden for this collection of information is estimated to average 1 hour per response, including the
time for reviewing instructions, searching existing data sources, gathering and maintaining the data needed, and
completing and reviewing the collection of information. HUD may not collect this information, and you are not required
to complete this form, unless
it displays a currently valid OMB control number.
This information collection is necessary to ensure that viable projects are developed. It is important to obtain
information from applicants to assist HUD in determining if nonprofit organizations initially funded continue to have the
financial and administra- tive capacity needed to develop a project and that the project design meets the needs of
the residents. The Department will use this information to determine if the project meets statutory requirements with
respect to the development and operation of the project, as well as ensuring the continued marketability of the
projects. This information is required in order to obtain benefits. This information is considered non-sensitive and no
assurance of confidentiality is provided.
$
(Surety)
PAYMENT BOND
No.
On Behalf of
To
Date
, 20
Expires
, 20
Page 2 of 2
form HUD-92452-A (1/24/2006)
ref. Handbook 4571.1
Performance-Payment
Bond
Dual Obligee
U. S. Department of Housing and Urban
Development
Office of Housing
Federal Housing Commissioner
OMB Approval No. 2502-0297
(exp. 8/31/2013)
Under Section 202 of the Housing Act 1959 and
Section 811 of the National Affordable Housing Act of 1990
Public reporting burden for this collection of information is estimated to average 1 hour per response, including the time for reviewing instructions, searching existing data sources, gathering and maintaining the data needed, and completing and reviewing the collection of information. HUD may not collect
this information, and you are not required to complete this form, unless it displays a currently valid OMB control number.
This information collection is necessary to ensure that viable projects are developed. It is important to obtain information from applicants to assist HUD in
determining if nonprofit organizations initially funded continue to have the financial and administrative capacity needed to develop a project and that the
project design meets the needs of the residents. The Department will use this information to determine if the project meets statutory requirements with
respect to the development and operation of the project, as well as ensuring the continued marketability of the projects. This information is required in
order to obtain benefits. This information is considered non-sensitive and no assurance of confidentiality is provided.
Project Number:
Project Name:
Location:
Know all men by these presents: That we (Name of Contractor)
a (Corporation, Partnership, or Individual)
hereinafter
!Principal"and (Surety) _
of, State of,
called
hereinafter
called the !Surety" are held and firmly bound unto (Owner)
of,
hereinafter call !Owner" and unto the Secretary of Housing and
Urban Development, hereinafter called !HUD" as their respective interests may appear as Obligees in the penal sum of
Dollars ($
) in lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we
bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, and successors , jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
The Condition Of This Obligation is such that Whereas the Principal entered into a certain contract with the Owner,
dated the
day of
, 20
, a copy of which is hereto attached and made a part hereof
for the construction of:
And Whereas, HUD has agreed to lend to Owner a sum of money to be secured by a mortgage on said project and to be used in
making payment under said contract, and desires protection as its interest may appear, in event of default by Principal under said
contract, said protection to be subject to the performance by the Obligees, or either of them, of the obligations to Principal in
connection with said Contract.
Now Therefore, if the Principal shall well, truly and faithfully perform its duties, all the undertakings, covenants, terms, conditions,
and agreements of said Contract during the original term thereof, and any authorized extension or modification thereof, with or without
notice to the Surety, and if he shall satisfy all claims and demands incurred under such contract, and fully indemnify and save harmless
the Obligees form all costs and damages which they may suffer by reason of failure to do so, and shall reimburse and repay the
Obligees all outlay and expense which they may incur in making good any default, and shall promptly make payment to all persons,
firms, subcontractors, and corporations furnishing materials for or performing labor in the prosecution of the work provided for in such
contract, and any authorized extension or modification thereof, including all amounts due for materials, lubricants, oil, gasoline, coal
and coke, repairs on machinery, equipment and tools, consumed or used in connection with the construction of such work, and all
insurance premiums on said work, and for all labor, performed in such work whether by subcontractor or otherwise, then this obligation
shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect.
Page 1 of 2
form HUD-92452-CA (12/20/2005)
ref. Handbook 4571.4 & 4571.5
Provided, Further, that the said Surety, for value received hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration
or addition to the terms of the contract or to the work to be performed thereunder or the specifications accompanying the same shall
in any way affect its obligation on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or
addition to the terms of the contract or to the work or to the specifications.
Provided, Further, that no final settlement between the Owner and the Contractor shall abridge the right of any beneficiary
hereunder, whose claim may be unsatisfied.
In Witness Whereof, this instrument is executed in six (6) counterparts, each one of which shall be deemed an original,
this the
day of
, 20
.
ATTEST:
(Principal)
By
(Principal) Secretary
(Address - ZIP Code)
(SEAL)
(Surety)
ATTEST:
By
(Attorney-in Fact)
(Address - Zip Code)
(Surety) Secretary
(SEAL)
Witness as to Surety
(Address - Zip Code)
NOTE: Date of Bond must not be prior to date of Contract. If Contractor is Partnership, all partners a must execute Bond.
Page 2 of 2
form HUD-92452-CA (12/20/2005)
ref. Handbook 4571.4 & 4571.5
HUD Survey Instructions
and Report
U.S. Department of Housing
and Urban Development
Office of Housing
Federal Housing Commissioner
for Insured Multifamily Projects
OMB Approval No. 2502-0010
(exp. 09/30/2011)
Public reporting burden for this collection of information is estimated to average 0.5 hour per response, including the time for reviewing instructions,
searching existing data sources, gathering and maintaining the data needed, and completing and reviewing the collection of information. This agency may
not collect this information, and you are not required to complete this form, unless it displays a currently valid OMB control number.
This information is necessary to secure a marketable title and title insurance for the property that provides security for project mortgage insurance furnished
under the FHA multifamily programs. This information assists in making determinations regarding the property!s compliance with applicable program
regulations, e.g., those pertaining to flood hazard, and in reaching underwriting determinations regarding property suitability and worth for the intended
use. This information is mandatory. HUD does not assure confidentiality and there are no sensitive questions.
This survey is to be used in a loan transaction for which the U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development (HUD) is
to insure a multifamily project mortgage.
Its uses will include:
Land title recordation (all cases).
Site grading plan preparation (item 1
below). Plot plan design/redesign (item 2
below).
Special Project
Features: Care
Facility, Condo/Airrights, and/or Other:
(Specify)
Standards of Performance: In every instance the survey and
map(s) and/or plat(s) must be made in accordance with the
requirements for an !ALTA/ACSM Land Title Survey" and in
compliance with the:
3. Condo/Air-rights Involved: The surveyor must provide a
survey made in accordance with any applicable jurisdictional
require- ments or, in the absence of such requirements,
professionally recognized standards.
● Minimum
Standard
Detail
Requirements
and
Classifications for ALTA/ACSM Land Title Surveys, as
adopted by the American Land Title Association and
American Congress on Surveying and Mapping, dated
2005;
4. Flood Hazard Involved: Where any portion of the site is
subject to flood hazard, show the 100 year return frequency
flood hazard elevation and flood zone for all projects plus
the 500 year return frequency flood hazard elevation and
flood zone for care facility projects. For existing projects
show the site elevation at the entrances, lowest habitable
finished floor, and basement for each primary building and
the vehicular parking area that services each primary
building. Take return frequency flood hazard elevations
from the applicable Federal Flood Insurance Rate Map.
Where such is not available, take the elevations from
available State or local equivalent data, or when not
available, work in conjunction with owner's engineer.
● Table
A,
Optional
Survey
Responsibilities
and
Specifications, thereof, items 1 through 4 and 7 through 13
except for subitems 7b
and 7c, & 16, 17 & 18;
● and the following
applicable:
requirements
as
1. Site Grading Involved: Comply with table A, item 5.
Contours may not exceed 1-foot vertical intervals, except
that 2-foot and 5- foot vertical intervals may be used where
the mean site gradient exceeds 5 percent and 10 percent
respectively. Where curbs and/ or gutters exist, show top of
curb and flow line elevations.
5. Blanket Easement Involved. Show on the map/plat the
location of any facility that is located within or traverses the
property under provisions of a blanket easement.
2. Plot Plan Design/Redesign Involved: Comply with Table A,
Item 6.
Additional Owner Requirements: The following requirements are not intended to void any other part of this
instruction.
Owner's Representative / Contact:
Name & Phone No:
Address:
Surveyor's Report: A current Surveyor$s Report (not more
than 120 days old) must be included with the survey
map(s)/plat(s) submitted to HUD for: project design
review, construction contract document sets, as required
during construction, upon project completion; and with the
map(s)/plat(s) used at initial and final closing.
!I hereby certify to the U.S. Department of Housing and
Urban Development (HUD), (Borrower), (Sponsor), (Lender),
(Title Insurance Underwriter), (Other), and to their
successors and assigns, that:
Certification: The survey map/plat must bear the following
certification:
Previous editions are obsolete
Page 1 of 2
form HUD-92457 (02/2006)
ref. Handbooks 4430.1 & 4460.1
I made an on the ground survey per record description
of the land shown hereon located in (city or town,
county, township, etc.), on (date); and that it and this
(these) map(s) was (were) made in accordance with the
HUD Survey Instructions and Report, form HUD-92457,
and the requirements for an ALTA/ACSM Land Title
Survey, as defined in the Minimum Standard Detail
Require- ments for ALTA/ACSM Land Title Surveys
dated 2005.
To the best of my knowledge, belief and information,
except as shown hereon: There are no encroachments
either way across property lines; title lines and lines of
actual possession are the same; and the premises are
free of any (subject to a) 100/500 year return frequency
flood hazard, and such flood free (flood) condi- tion is
shown on the Federal Flood Insurance Rate Map, Community Panel No. (if none, so state)."
Previous editions are obsolete
Page 2 of 2
form HUD-92457 (02/2006)
ref. Handbooks 4430.1 & 4460.1
Surveyor's Report
U.S. Department of Housing
and Urban Development
Office of Housing
Federal Housing Commissioner
Instructions: Submit a completed, signed Surveyor's Report with all survey map/plat
submissions. See the Surveyor's Instructions for required map/plat submissions.
Identify pertinent observed and otherwise known conditions on the Surveyor's Report.
I certify that, on
of
(date)
, I made a survey of the premises standing in the name
situated at (city, county, state):
known as street numbers
and shown on the accompanying survey entitled:
.
I made a careful inspection of said premises and of the buildings located thereon at the time of making such survey,
and again,
on
(date)
, and on such latter inspection, I found said premises to be
standing in the name of:
.
In my professional opinion, the following information reflects the conditions observed on the date of the last site
inspection or
disclosed in the process of researching title to the premise, and I further certify that such conditions(s) are shown on
the survey
or has/have been updated thereon under Revision Date
.
map/plat dated
1. Rights of way, old highways or abandoned roads, lanes or driveways, drains, sewer or water pipes over
and across said premises:
2. Springs, streams, rivers, ponds or lakes located, bordering on or running through said premises:
3. Cemeteries or family burying grounds located on said premises:
4. Electricity, or electromagnetic/communications signal, towers, antenna, lines, or line supports
located on, overhanging or crossing said premises:
5. Disputed boundaries or encroachments. (If the buildings, projections or cornices thereof or signs
affixed thereto, fences or other indications of occupancy encroach upon adjoining properties or the
like encroach upon surveyed premises, specify all such):
6. Earth moving work, building construction, or building additions within recent months:
7. Building or possession lines. (In case of city or town property specify definitely as to whether or not
walls are independent walls or party walls and as to all easements of support or %Beam Rights.% In
case of country property report specifically how boundary lines are evidenced, that is, whether by
fences or otherwise):
8. Recent street or sidewalk construction and/or any change in street lines either completed or
proposed by and available from the controlling jurisdiction:
9. Flood hazard.
10. Site used as a solid waste dump, sump, or sanitary landfill.
Previous editions are obsolete
Page 3 of 2
form HUD-92457 (02/2006)
ref. Handbooks 4430.1 & 4460.1
Surveyor’s Name: (print or type)
License Number:
Signature
X
Previous editions are obsolete
Page 4 of 2
form HUD-92457 (02/2006)
ref. Handbooks 4430.1 & 4460.1
DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS
■
NOT USED
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
033000
034900
035400
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
GLASS-FIBER REINFORCED CONCRETE
CAST UNDERLAYMENT
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
SECTION 033000
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete
materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes for the following:
1.
Footings.
2.
Foundation walls.
3.
Slabs-on-grade.
4.
Suspended slabs.
5.
Concrete toppings.
6.
Building walls.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1.3
1.
Section 034900 “Glass Fiber Reinforced Concrete” for precast decorative concrete.
2.
Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade.
3.
Section 321443 "Porous Pavers" for concrete pavement and walks.
4.
Structural Drawings S002 and S003 see General Structural Notes.
DEFINITIONS
A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the
following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blastfurnace slag, and silica fume; subject to compliance with requirements.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when
characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances
warrant adjustments.
1.
Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.
2.
Include substantiating substantial test data to show compliance with ACI 318 Chapter 5.
C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and
placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar
diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop
spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement. The steel reinforcement detailer shall
generate all shop drawing bending and installation details from the structural and architectural
drawings and specifications. The use of reproductions or photocopies of the contract drawings
shall not be permitted.
1.
Provide details of fabrication, bending, and placement, prepared according to ACI 315,
"Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Include special reinforcement required
for openings through concrete structures.
2.
Shop drawing re-submittals shall clearly identify all revisions to previous submittals.
a.
Heavy ink clouded outlines (revision clouds) shall be drawn around revised areas of
individual sheets.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 30 00 - 1
b.
Architect/Engineer will not review information outside of revision clouds on
resubmitted drawings.
D. Formwork Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a structural engineer
licensed in the State of Oregon detailing fabrication, assembly, and support of formwork.
1.
Shoring and Reshoring: Indicate proposed schedule and sequence of stripping formwork,
shoring removal, and installing and removing reshoring.
E. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the
structure.
1.
Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Architect.
F. Samples: For waterproofing membrane.
G. Welding certificates.
H. Qualification Data: For Installer, manufacturer, or testing agency.
1.
I.
Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in “Quality Assurance” Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with
project names and addresses, names and addresses of Architects and Owners, and other
information specified.
Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:
1.
Cementitious materials
2.
Admixtures.
3.
Form materials and form-release agents.
4.
Steel reinforcement and accessories.
5.
Waterstops.
6.
Curing compounds.
7.
Floor and slab treatments.
8.
Bonding agents.
9.
Adhesives.
10. Waterproofing membrane.
11. Semirigid joint filler.
12. Joint-filler strips.
13. Repair materials.
J.
Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements to determine compliance with specified
tolerances.
K. Minutes of preinstallation conference.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as
ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and supervisor who is an ACI-certified Concrete
Flatwork Technician.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete
products and that complies with ASTM 94/C94M requirements for production facilities and
equipment.
1.
Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA’s “Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete
Production Facilities.
C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as
documented according to ASTM E 548.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 30 00 - 2
1.
Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing
Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-01 or an equivalent certification program.
2.
Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing
Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician – Grade 1. Testing Agency
laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician –
Grade II.
D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from
the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from one source, and obtain admixtures
through one source from a single manufacturer.
E. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code-Reinforcing Steel."
F. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract
Documents:
1.
ACI 301, "Specification for Structural “Concrete", Sections 1 through 5.
2.
ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."
G. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material
evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.
H. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 1 Section “Project Management and Coordination.”
1.
2.
1.6
Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine
procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each
entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the following:
a.
Contractor’s superintendent.
b.
Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixes.
c.
Ready mix concrete manufacturer.
d.
Concrete subcontractor.
Review special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality
control, concrete finishes and finishing, cold- and hot-weather concreting procedures,
curing procedures, construction contraction and isolation joints, and joint-filler strips, forms
and form removal limitations, shoring and reshoring procedures, vapor-retarder
installation, floor and slab flatness and levelness measurement, concrete repair
procedures, and concrete protection.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage.
B. Waterstops: Store waterstops under cover to protect from moisture, sunlight, dirt, oil, and other
contaminants.
1.7
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Redesign or Departures from Requirements of the Contract Documents Initiated by Contractor:
1.
Obtain written acceptance from the Architect and Architect’s consultants.
2.
Bear costs for Contractor-initiated or construction error due to changes in type, form,
system, or details of construction from those indicated by the contract documents.
3.
Costs of review of such changes by Architect and Architect’s consultants will be deducted
from the Contract Sum by Change Order.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 30 00 - 3
2.2
1.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.
2.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to
manufacturers specified.
FORM-FACING MATERIALS
A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and
smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.
1.
Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials.
B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material.
Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.
C. Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic,
paper, or fiber tubes that will produce surfaces with gradual or abrupt irregularities not
exceeding specified formwork surface class. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to
resist plastic concrete loads without detrimental deformation.
D. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch (19 by 19 mm), minimum.
E. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with,
stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of
concrete surfaces.
1.
Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.
F. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic
form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling
of concrete on removal.
2.3
1.
Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch (25 mm) to the plane of
exposed concrete surface.
2.
Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing or
waterproofing.
STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed. Refer to General
Structural Notes.
A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of
preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.
B. Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: All reinforcing steel to be welded or bent in field:
ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed.
C. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, plain, fabricated from as-drawn steel
wire into flat sheets.
2.4
REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES
A. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and
fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports
from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice"
of greater compressive strength than concrete, and as follows:
1.
2.5
For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use
CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.
CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and
source, throughout Project:
1.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I/II.
a.
Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F. Refer to General Structural Notes.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 30 00 - 4
b.
Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.
B. Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide
aggregates from a single source.
1.
Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1 inch (25 mm).
2.
Combined Aggregate Gradation: Well graded from coarsest to finest with not more than
18 percent and not less than 8 percent retained on an individual sieve, except that less
than 8 percent may be retained on coarsest sieve and on No. 50 (0.3-mm) sieve, and less
than 8 percent may be retained on sieves finer than No. 50 (0.3 mm).
C. Water: ASTM C 94/C94-M and potable.
2.6
ADMIXTURES
A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with
other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those
permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium
chloride.
2.7
1.
Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.
2.
Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/ C494M, Type B.
3.
Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C 494M, Type D.
4.
High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type F.
5.
High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C 494M, Type G.
6.
Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.
WATERSTOPS
A. Self-Expanding B e n t o n i t e Strip Waterstops: Manufactured rectangular or trapezoidal
strip, butyl rubber with sodium bentonite or other hydrophilic polymers, for adhesive bonding
to concrete, 3/4 inch by 1 inch (19 by 25mm).
1.
2.8
Products (waterstop to be same manufacturer as 071713 Bentonite Waterproofing):
a.
CETCO; Volclay Waterstop-RX.
b.
Tremco; Superstop.
VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Sheet Vapor Retarders: ASTM E 1745, Class A. Include
adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape.
1.
manufacturer’s
recommended
Products:
a.
Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Inc.; Blackline 400.
b.
Fortifiber Building Systems Group; Moistop Ultra 15.
c.
Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co.; Florprufe 120.
d.
Insulation Solutions, Inc.; Viper VaporCheck 16.
e.
Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Perminator 15 mil.
f.
Raven Industries Inc.; Vapor Block 15.
g.
Reef Industries, Inc.; Griffolyn 15 mil Green.
h.
Stego Industries, LLC; Stego Wrap 15 mil Class A.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 30 00 - 5
2.9
CURING MATERIALS
A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application
to fresh concrete.
1.
Products:
a.
Axim Concrete Technologies; Cimfilm.
b.
BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Confilm.
c.
Burke by Edoco; BurkeFilm.
d.
ChemMasters; Spray-Film.
e.
Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc., a Dayton Superior Company;
Aquafilm.
f.
Dayton Superior Corporation; Sure Film.
g.
Euclid Chemical Company (the); Eucobar.
h.
Kaufman Products, Inc.; Vapor Aid.
i.
Lambert Corporation; Lambco Skin.
j.
L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; E-Con.
k.
MBT Protection and Repair, Div. of ChemRex; Confilm.
l.
Meadows, W.R., Inc.; Sealtight Evapre.
m.
Metalcrete Industries; Waterhold.
n.
Nox-Crete Products Group, Kinsman Corporation; Monofilm.
o.
Sika Corporation, Inc.; SikaFilm.
p.
Symons Corporation, a Dayton Superior Company; Finishing Aid.
q.
TK Products, Division of Sierra Corporation; TK-2120 TRI-FILM.
r.
Unitex; Pro-Film.
s.
Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex EnvioAssist.
B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing
approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) when dry.
C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.
D. Water: Potable.
E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1,
Class B, dissipating.
1.
Products:
a.
Anti-Hydro International, Inc.; AH Curing Compound #2 DR WB.
b.
BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Kure 200.
c.
ChemMasters; Safe-Cure Clear.
d.
Conspec by Dayton Superior; W.B. Resin Cure.
e.
Dayton Superior Corporation; Day-Chem Rez Cure (J-11-W).
f.
Edoco by Dayton Superior; Res X Cure WB.
g.
Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Kurez W VOX; TAMMSCURE
WB 30C.
h.
Kaufman Products, Inc.; Thinfilm 420.
i.
Lambert Corporation; AQUA KURE - CLEAR.
j.
L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; L&M Cure R.
k.
Meadows, W. R., Inc.; 1100-CLEAR.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 30 00 - 6
l.
Nox-Crete Products Group; Resin Cure E.
m.
Right Pointe; Clear Water Resin.
n.
SpecChem, LLC; Spec Rez Clear.
o.
Symons by Dayton Superior; Resi-Chem Clear.
p.
TK Products, Division of Sierra Corporation; TK-2519 DC WB.
q.
Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex Enviocure 100.
2.10 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber.
B. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene
butadiene.
C. Epoxy-Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing
and bonding to damp surfaces, of class, suitable for application temperature and grade to suit
requirements, and as follows:
1.
Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened
concrete.
2.11 REPAIR MATERIALS
A. Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be
applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) and that can be feathered at edges to match
adjacent floor elevations.
1.
Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement
as defined in ASTM C 219.
2.
Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions,
and application.
3.
Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3 to 6 mm) or coarse sand as
recommended by underlayment manufacturer.
4.
Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi (29 MPa) at 28 days when
according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.
tested
B. Repair Overlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be
applied in thicknesses from 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) and that can be feathered at edges to match
adjacent floor elevations.
1.
Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement
as defined in ASTM C 219.
2.
Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and
application.
3.
Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3.2 to 6 mm) or coarse sand as
recommended by topping manufacturer.
4.
Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi (34.5MPa) at 28 days when tested
according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.
2.12 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL
A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of
laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301 and in accordance with
the following:
1.
Compressive Strength: Refer to General Structural Notes.
2.
Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: Refer to General Structural Notes.
3.
Air Content: Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in
concrete at point of placement having the air content specified in the General Structural
Notes.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 30 00 - 7
A. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than
portland cement in concrete as follows:
B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than
portland cement in concrete as follows:
1.
Fly Ash: 20 percent.
2.
Combined Fly Ash and Pozzolan: 20 percent.
3.
Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50 percent.
4.
Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolan and Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50 percent
portland cement minimum, with fly ash or pozzolan not exceeding 20 percent.
C. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of
cement.
D. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Use water-reducing, high-range water-reducing or plasticizing admixture or high-range
water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer) in concrete, as required, for placement and
workability.
2.
Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low
humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.
2.13 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT
A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."
2.14 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and
ASTM C 94/C 94M and furnish batch ticket information
1.
deliver
concrete
according
to
When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and
delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32
deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
FORMWORK
A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical,
lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until concrete
structure can support such loads.
B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment,
elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.
C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as follows:
1.
Class A, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) for smooth-formed finished surfaces.
2.
Class B, 1/4 inch (6 mm) for rough-formed finished surfaces.
D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.
E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces.
Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide
top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.
1.
Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal.
2.
Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.
F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required
elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support
screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.
G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork
is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 30 00 - 8
prevent loss of concrete mortar.
locations.
Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous
H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.
I.
Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads
required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.
J.
Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt,
and other debris just before placing concrete.
K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and
maintain proper alignment.
L.
3.2
Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, before placing reinforcement.
EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work
that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates,
diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
3.3
1.
Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with
tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and
Bridges."
2.
Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings in outer face
of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and
other conditions.
REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS
A. General: Formwork, for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work, that
does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than
50 deg F (10 deg C) for 24 hours after placing concrete if concrete is hard enough to not be
damaged by form-removal operations and provided curing and protection operations are
maintained.
1.
Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements that supports
weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved its 28-day design compressive
strength.
2.
Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without
loosening or disturbing shores.
B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or
otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply
new form-release agent.
C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints.
Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete
surfaces unless approved by Architect.
3.4
SHORES AND RESHORES
A. Comply with ACI 318 (ACI 318M), and ACI 301 for design, installation, and removal of shoring
and reshoring.
1.
Do not remove shoring or reshoring until measurement of slab tolerances is complete.
B. Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshore to avoid damage to concrete. Locate and
provide adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive stress or deflection.
3.5
VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarders according to
ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Lap joints 6 inches (150 mm) and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 30 00 - 9
3.6
STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.
1.
Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before
placing concrete.
B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that
would reduce bond to concrete.
C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and
support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld
crossing reinforcing bars.
1.
Weld reinforcing bars according to AWS D1.4, where indicated.
D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.
3.7
JOINTS
A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.
B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at
locations indicated or as approved by Architect.
1.
Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across
construction joints, unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into concrete.
3.
Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset joints
in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder intersection.
4.
Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and
girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs.
5.
Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls,
near corners, and in concealed locations where possible. Span not to exceed 30’-0”.
6.
Use a bonding agent or roughen interface to ” (6mm) amplitude at locations where fresh
concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.
C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning
concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least onefourth of concrete thickness, as follows:
1.
Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each
edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch (3.3 mm). Repeat grooving of contraction joints after
applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.
2.
Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof
abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- (3.2mm-) wide joints into concrete
when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before
concrete develops random contraction cracks.
D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab
junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and
other locations, as indicated.
3.8
1.
Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete
surface, unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is
required, lace or clip sections together.
WATERSTOPS
A. Self-Expanding Strip Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other locations indicated,
according to manufacturer's written instructions, adhesive bonding, mechanically fastening and
firmly pressing into place. Install in longest lengths practicable.
3.9
CONCRETE PLACEMENT
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 30 00 - 10
A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded
items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.
B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement, unless
approved by Architect.
1.
Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to mix.
C. Adjust mix as required to maintain specified air content at the point of discharge.
D. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new
concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of
weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated.
Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.
1.
Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures
and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.
2.
Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301.
3.
Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators
vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6
inches (150 mm) into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete
that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time
necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other
embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.
E. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of
construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.
1.
Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked
around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.
2.
Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement.
3.
Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.
4.
Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required.
5.
Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured
surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb
slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.
F. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from
physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low
temperatures.
1.
When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) for
three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the
temperature range required by ACI 301.
2.
Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on
frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
3.
Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or
chemical accelerators, unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.
G. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:
1.
Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled
mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water
equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool
concrete is Contractor's option.
2.
Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep
subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
3.10 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 30 00 - 11
A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes
and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified
limits on formed-surface irregularities.
1.
Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.
B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in
an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and
defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface
irregularities.
1.
Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view or to be covered with a coating or
covering material applied directly to concrete.
C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-formed finished as-cast concrete at exposed
exterior concrete:
1.
Grout-Cleaned Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply grout of a consistency of thick
paint to coat surfaces and fill small holes. Mix one part portland cement to one and onehalf parts fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding admixture and water. Add white portland
cement in amounts determined by trial patches so color of dry grout will match adjacent
surfaces. Scrub grout into voids and remove excess grout. When grout whitens, rub
surface with clean burlap and keep surface damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours.
D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces
adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent
formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across
adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
3.11 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS
A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and
finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.
B. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bullfloated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile amplitude of inch
(6mm) in one direction.
1.
Apply scratch finish to surfaces indicated and to surfaces to receive concrete floor topping
or mortar setting beds for bonded cementitious floor finishes.
C. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or
inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots.
Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular
texture.
1.
Apply float finish to surfaces indicated, to surfaces to receive trowel finish, and to be
covered with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing, built-up or membrane roofing, or sandbed terrazzo.
D. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand
or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of
trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that
would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.
1.
Apply a trowel finish to surfaces indicated and to floor and slab surfaces exposed to view
or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage
membrane, paint, or another thin film-finish coating system.
2.
Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, according to ASTM E 1155/E 1155M for a
randomly trafficked floor surface:
a.
Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 35; and levelness, F(L) 25; with minimum
local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and levelness, F(L) 17; for slabs-on-grade.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 30 00 - 12
E. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish, to surfaces indicated and to surfaces
where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thin-set method. While
concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom.
1.
F.
Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel finished floor surfaces.
Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, parking levels,
and elsewhere as indicated.
1.
Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiberbristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with
Architect before application.
3.12 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS
A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures, unless otherwise indicated, after
work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with inplace construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to
complete the Work.
B. Equipment Bases: Provide 4” thick concrete pads under mechanical equipment as required.
Reinforce with #4 @16” (#13 @ 400mm) on center each way at center of pad. Anchor to floor
structure with #3 (#10) hooked dowels with 12” (300mm) horizontal legs, at 18” (460mm) on
center around perimeter of pad. Refer to Mechanical drawings for locations. Pad size to
extend 6” (150mm) beyond edge of equipment on all sides. Set anchor bolts for machines and
equipment at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates of manufacturer
furnishing machines and equipment.
3.13 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and with recommendations
in ACI 305R for hot-weather protection during curing.
B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or
windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and
during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing,
screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.
C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported
slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after
loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for the
remainder of the curing period.
D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure
surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.
unformed
E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1 by one or a combination of the following methods:
1.
2.
Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the
following materials:
a.
Water.
b.
Continuous water-fog spray.
c.
Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete
surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover
for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least
12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than
seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover
material and waterproof tape.
a.
Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive
floor coverings.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 30 00 - 13
3.
b.
Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive
penetrating liquid floor treatments.
c.
Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining
cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies will not interfere with
bonding of a floor covering used on Project.
Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller
according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall
within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair
damage during curing period.
a.
4.
After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging
concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing
compound
manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing compound will not interfere with
bonding of floor covering used on Project.
Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a
continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial
application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity
of coating and repair damage during curing period.
3.14 JOINT FILLING
A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least six months. Do not fill joints until
construction traffic has permanently ceased.
B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact
faces of joint clean and dry.
3.15 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove
and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.
B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two
and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve, using only enough water
for handling and placing.
C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks,
spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and
stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.
1.
Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than
1/2 inch (13 mm) in any dimension in solid concrete but not less than 1 inch (25 mm) in
depth. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water,
and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar
before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs
secured in place with bonding agent.
2.
Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and
standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color.
Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before
proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than
surrounding surface.
3.
Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and
structural performance as determined by Architect.
D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and
verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces
sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 30 00 - 14
1.
Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts,
honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch (0.25 mm) wide or
that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of
width, and other objectionable conditions.
2.
After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.
3.
Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing
operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired
areas to blend into adjacent concrete.
4.
Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment.
Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's
written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges
to match adjacent floor elevations.
5.
Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low
areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch (6 mm) to match adjacent floor
elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's
written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface.
6.
Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in
diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with
clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least 3/4 inch (19 mm)
clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and
apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original
concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with
adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.
7.
Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter with patching
mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt,
and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place
patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to
match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.
E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive
and patching mortar.
F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's
approval.
3.16 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a special inspector and qualified testing and
inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform
tests, and inspections and to submit test reports
C. Inspections: As indicated in the General Structural Notes.
D. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to
ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:
1.
Testing Frequency for PT Slabs and Columns: Obtain one composite sample for each
day's pour of each concrete mix exceeding 5 cu. yd. (4 cu. m), but less than 25 cu. yd. (19
cu. m), plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m) or fraction thereof.
2.
Testing Frequency for Foundations and Walls: Obtain at least one composite sample for
each 150 cu. yd. (114 cu. m) or fraction thereof of each concrete mix placed each day and
at least one composite sample for each 5000 square feet of surface area of slabs or walls.
a.
When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for
each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly
selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 30 00 - 15
3.
Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample,
but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform
additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.
4.
Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; ASTM C 173/C
173M, volumetric method, for structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite
sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.
5.
Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is
40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test
for each composite sample.
6.
Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M.
7.
a.
Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each
composite sample.
b.
Cast and field cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite
sample.
Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one laboratory-cured specimen at
7 days, two at 28 days, and hold one for later testing.
a.
Test one set of two field-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at
28 days.
b.
A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of
two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated.
8.
When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratorycured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures
for protecting and curing in-place concrete.
9.
Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three
consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength
and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by
more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa).
10. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, Structural Engineer, concrete
manufacturer, Building Official, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of
compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of
concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete
batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and
materials, compressive breaking strength, type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests, and
air content.
11. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may
be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of
concrete.
12. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete
when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other
requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency
may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with
ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect.
13. Provide additional tests for early stressing of tendons in PT slabs per section 033800
3.5A.
14. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
15. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply
with the Contract Documents.
E. Measure floor and slab flatness and levelness according to ASTM E 1155 (ASTM E 1155M)
within 24 hours of finishing.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 30 00 - 16
END OF SECTION
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 30 00 - 17
SECTION 034900
GLASS-FIBER REINFORCED CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Architectural precast glass-fiber-reinforced concrete decorative medallion and accents at
exterior elevations and plaza.
B.
Supports, anchors, and attachments.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 03 10 00 - Concrete Forming and Accessories: Placement of anchors specified in this
section.
B.
Section 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry: Placement of anchors specified in this section.
C.
Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers: Application of backer rods or bond breakers and joint sealers.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM A 36/A 36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2008
B.
ASTM A 153/A 153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware; 2009.
C.
ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2009a.
D.
ASTM C 33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2008.
E.
ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2007.
F.
ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2010.
G.
AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; 2010.
H.
PCI MNL-128 - Recommended Practice for Glass Fiber Reinforced Concrete Panels;
Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute; 2001, Fourth Edition.
SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate locations, fabrication details, reinforcement, metal framing details,
connection details, dimensions, and relationship to adjacent materials. Provide erection
drawings.
C.
Samples: Submit two samples 12 inch by 12 inch in size illustrating surface color, finish and
texture.
D.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate surface cleaning instructions.
E.
Fabricator Qualifications.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Designer Qualifications: Design units under direct supervision of a Professional Structural
Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in the State in which the Project is
located.
B.
Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum 5 years of documented experience.
MOCK-UP
A.
Construct one panel, with surface finish applied, including supporting backup structure,
attachments, fire, air and vapor seals applied.
B. Sand-blast unit / mock-up as directed unit level of texture is approved.
GLASS-FIBER REINFORCED CONCRETE
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
03 49 00 - 1
C.
Locate where directed.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
GLASS-FIBER REINFORCED CONCRETE
03 49 00 - 2
D.
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.8
Mock-up may NOT remain as part of the Work.
Coordinate the Work with installation of backup supporting structure, application of joint
sealers.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Handle units to position, consistent with their shape and design. Lift and support only from
support points.
B.
Protect edges of units to prevent staining, chipping, or spalling of concrete.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
GLASS-FIBER-REINFORCED CONCRETE UNITS
A.
2.3
2.4
A.
Cement: ASTM C 150 Portland Type I - Normal; white color.
B.
Concrete Aggregates: ASTM C 33.
C.
Reinforcement: Alkali resistant chopped glass fiber rovings specifically formulated for use in
concrete, with lengths varying from 1-1/2 to 2 inches.
FRAMING MATERIALS
Surface Finish Aggregate: Conforming to sample available for inspection at office of Architect.
SUPPORT DEVICES
A.
2.7
Metal Framing Members: Formed from hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A
653M, SS Grade 50 (340) Class 1, with G90/Z275 coating.
SURFACE FINISH MATERIALS
A.
2.6
Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Concrete Units: Factory-fabricated, complying with PCI MNL-128,
using rigid molds, constructed to maintain unit panel uniform in shape, size and finish.
1. Design and fabricate to comply with applicable code(s).
2. Design to withstand dead loads, positive and negative wind loads, and erection forces.
3. Control deflection of units to maintain fit with adjacent construction and openings within
their tolerances.
4. Design connections to accommodate building movement without damage to components,
wracking of joint connections, breakage of seals, or moisture penetration.
5. Concrete Mix: Of strength to accommodate panel configuration, panel size and weight,
and manufacturing criteria, air entrained.
6. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 5 or less; smoke developed index
of 15 or less; when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
7. Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.
8. Appearance: Ensure exposed-to-view finish surfaces of units are uniform in color and
appearance.
9. Finish of Exposed-to-View Precast Unit Surfaces: Sand blasted to match mock-up unit
aggregate surface.
CONCRETE MATERIALS
A.
2.5
Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Concrete:
1. Plastrglas, Inc: www.plastrglas.com.
2. Stromberg Architectural Products, Inc: www.strombergarchitectural.com.
3. Architectural Castings Inc..
4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
Connecting and Support Devices: ASTM A 36/A 36M steel; hot-dip galvanized in accordance
with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Sealant Materials: sealant and related materials, as specified in Section 07 90 05.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
GLASS-FIBER REINFORCED CONCRETE
03 49 00- 2
2.8
FABRICATION
A.
Spray-up concrete mix in multiple passes; maintain consistent quality during manufacture.
B.
Place metal framing members in position in mold.
C.
Embed anchors, inserts, plates, angles, and other cast-in items as indicated on shop drawings.
D.
Fabricate connecting devices, items fit to framing members, fasteners and accessories
necessary for proper installation.
E.
Locate hoisting devices to permit device removal after erection.
F.
Cure units to minimize appearance blemishes such as non-uniformity, staining or surface
cracking.
G.
Identify each unit with corresponding code on erection drawings, in location not visible in finish
work.
H.
Exposed Non-Galvanized Steel Components: Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and
foreign matter; prime paint in one coat, except surfaces in direct contact with concrete or
requiring field welding.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
3.3
Verify that building structure, anchors, devices, and openings are ready to receive work of this
section.
ERECTION
A.
Coordinate installation with that of structural supports, backup, and opening framing, if any.
B.
Erect units without damage to shape or finish. Replace or repair damaged panels.
C.
Erect units level and plumb within allowable tolerances.
D.
Align and maintain uniform horizontal and vertical joints as erection progresses.
E.
Site cutting of panels not permitted.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect installed units from damage.
END OF SECTION
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
GLASS-FIBER REINFORCED CONCRETE
03 49 00- 3
SECTION 035400
CAST UNDERLAYMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.2
1.3
1.4
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM C 472 - Standard Test Methods for Physical Testing of Gypsum, Gypsum Plasters and
Gypsum Concrete; 1999 (Reapproved 2009).
B.
ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2010.
C.
ASTM F2170 - Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor
Slab; 2011.
D.
ASTM F2419 - Standard Test Method for Installation of Thick Poured Gypsum Concrete and
Preparation of Surface to Receive Resilient Flooring; 2011.
E.
U" (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.
F.
HUD Materials Release - For nonstandard product.
SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data sheets documenting physical characteristics and
product limitations of underlayment materials. Include information on surface preparation,
environmental limitations, and installation instructions.
C.
Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
D.
HUD Materials Release - complete and current HUD Materials Release documentation.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.5
1.6
1.7
Liquid-applied self-leveling floor underlayment.
1. Use gypsum-based type
Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum three years of experience.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
B.
Keep dry and protect from direct sun exposure, freezing, and ambient temperature greater than
105 degrees F.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conform to applicable code for combustibility or flame spread requirements.
B.
Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of
underlayment materials in the required fire rated assembly.
MOCK-UP
A.
Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and application
workmanship.
1. Prepare mock-up in location designated by Architect.
2. Area: 6 ft x 6 ft.
3. Do not proceed with underlayment work until workmanship of mock-up has been approved
by Architect.
B.
Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
CAST UNDERLAYMENT
03 54 00 - 1
1.8
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Do not install underlayment until floor penetrations and peripheral work are complete.
B.
Maintain minimum ambient temperatures of 50 degrees F 24 hours before, during and 72 hours
after installation of underlayment.
C.
During the curing process, ventilate spaces to remove excess moisture.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
2.3
Gypsum Underlayment:
1. Hacker Industries, Inc; Product Firm-Fill High Stength: www.hackerindustries.com.
2. Maxxon Corporation; Product Gyp-Crete: www.maxxon.com.
3. Levelrock; www.usg.com
4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
MATERIALS
A.
Gypsum-Based Underlayment: Gypsum based mix, that when mixed with water in accordance
with manufacturer's directions will produce self-leveling underlayment with the following
properties:
1. Compressive Strength: Minimum 2500 psi, tested per ASTM C 472.
2. Density: Maximum 115 lb/cu ft.
3. Thickness: 3/4 inch to maximum 3-1/2 inch as indicated on the Drawings.
4. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 0/0 in
accordance with ASTM E 84.
B.
Water: Potable and not detrimental to underlayment mix materials.
C.
Primer: Manufacturer's recommended type.
D.
Joint and Crack Filler: Latex based filler, as recommended by manufacturer.
MIXING
A.
Site mix materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Mix to self-leveling consistency without over-watering.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Verify that substrate surfaces are clean, dry, unfrozen, do not contain petroleum bi-products, or
other compounds detrimental to underlayment material bond to substrate.
Remove substrate surface irregularities. Fill voids and deck joints with filler. Finish smooth.
B.
Vacuum clean surfaces and remove any contaminants that may impair adhesion.
C.
Prime substrate in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Allow to dry.
D.
Close floor openings.
E.
Verify all floor-mounted equipment is in place and openings have been protected.
APPLICATION
A.
Install over Acousti-Mat II on subfloor, including isolation and seaming strips, in accordance
with manufacturer's instructions. See report by sound engineer.
B.
Install underlayment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Pump or pour material onto substrate. Do not retemper or add water.
1. Pump, move, and screed while the material is still highly flowable.
2. Be careful not to create cold joints.
3. Wear spiked shoes while working in the wet material to avoid leaving marks.
D.
Place gypsum underlayment to 1” thickness or per details, with top surface level to 1/8 inch in 10
ft.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
CAST UNDERLAYMENT
03 54 00- 2
E.
3.4
3.5
Place after partition installation.
CURING
A.
Once underlayment starts to set, prohibit foot traffic until final set has been reached.
B.
Air cure in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect against direct sunlight, heat, and wind; prevent rapid drying to avoid shrinkage and
cracking.
B.
Do not permit traffic over unprotected floor underlayment surfaces.
END OF SECTION
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
CAST UNDERLAYMENT
03 54 00- 3
DIVISION 05 - METALS
051200
054000
055000
055213
STRUCTURAL STEEL
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
METAL FABRICATIONS
PIPE AND PIPE RAILINGS
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
SECTION 051200
STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Structural steel.
2. Grout.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for independent testing agency procedures and
administrative requirements.
2. Section 055000 “Metal Fabrications”.
3. Section 055213 “Pipe and Pipe Railings.”
4. Section 323119 “Decorative Metal Fances.”
5. Structural Drawings S002 and S003 see General Structural Notes.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A. Structural Steel: Elements of structural-steel frame, as classified by AISC's "Code of Standard
Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," that support design loads.
B. Exposed Structural Steel: Members and connections exposed to view as indicated in the
Contract Documents, or in this Specification.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components.
1. Structural steel shop drawings shall contain sufficient detail and information to allow
complete fabrication and erection of the structure without reference to the contract
drawings either on the fabrication shop floor or at the project site. The steel detailer shall
generate all shop drawing fabrication and installation details from the structural and
architectural drawings and specifications. The use of reproductions or photocopies of the
contract drawings shall not be permitted.
a. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data.
b. Include embedment drawings.
c. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field
welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld.
d. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts.
Identify pretensioned and slip-critical high-strength bolted connections.
2. Shop drawing re-submittals shall clearly identify all revisions to previous submittals.
a. Heavy ink, clouded outlines (revision clouds) shall be drawn around revised areas of
individual sheets.
b. Engineer/Architect will not review information outside of revision clouds on
resubmitted drawings.
C. Welding Certificates.
D. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers,
certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.
E. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in “Quality Assurance” Articles to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project
names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information
specified.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05 12 00 - 1
F. Mill test reports for structural steel, including chemical and physical properties.
G. Product Test Reports: Signed by manufacturers certifying that the following products comply
with requirements:
1. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis.
2. Tension-control, high-strength bolt-nut-washer assemblies.
3. Shop primers.
4. Nonshrink grout.
H. Source quality-control test reports.
I.
Certified Manufacturer’s Test Reports
J.
Written Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs): In accordance with AWS D1.1 requirements
for each welded joint proposed for use whether prequalified or by testing. Include all
welding that will be performed during fabrication (shop) and installation/erection (field)
Include the following items as applicable for the welding process:
1. Indicate as-detailed configuration, and the maximum and minimum fit-up configurations.
2. Identify specific electrode and manufacturer.
3. List actual values of welding parameters to be used so clear instruction is provided to
welders.
4. Steel specification(s) and grade(s) to be welded.
5. Thickness range of materials to be joined.
6. Type of joint.
7. Type of weld.
8. Size of weld.
9. Position of welding.
10. Flux and shielding gas.
11. Electrode diameter.
12. Voltage (except SMAW).
13. Current (amperage) or wire feed speed.
14. Travel speed.
15. Minimum Preheat and Interpass Temperatures: Provide minimum preheat and interpass
temperature for all welds, including tack welds, in accordance with AWS D1.1, Table 3.2.
The Contractor may specify higher minimum temperatures as a part of the WPS. Preheat
and interpass temperatures lower than those required by AWS D1.1, Table 3.2, are
permitted provided the WPS has been qualified by testing. Minimum preheat and
interpass temperatures shall be verified at a distance of 3 inches from the joint or for
materials over 3 inches in thickness at a distance equal to the thickness of the part.
16. Maximum Preheat and Interpass Temperatures: The maximum preheat and interpass
temperature permitted is 550 degrees F, measured at a distance of 1 inch from the joint.
This maximum temperature may not be increased with or without qualification testing.
17. Number and placement of passes.
18. Technique (stringer or weave bead).
19. Shielding gas flow rate.
20. Charpy V-notch toughness as required by this specification.
21. Other pertinent information specific to the weld.
K. Manufacturer’s Certifications: For all welding electrodes, fluxes, and shielding gasses to be
used. Certifications shall satisfy the applicable AWS A5 requirements.
L.
Test Reports: Copies of reports of tests conducted on shop and field bolted and welded
connections. Include data on type(s) of tests conducted and test results.
M. Design Calculations: Submit design calculations, bearing the seal and signature of a
Professional Engineer, employed by the Contractor and registered in the state of the project, for
the following:
1. Connections that differ from that indicated in the contract documents.
2. Requests for substitution of member sizes or material grades.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05 12 00 - 2
3.
Modification of the strength or configuration of structural framing for the convenience to
accommodate the erection sequence, construction equipment, and/or material availability.
N. Maintain one copy of each document on-site.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: The installer shall have at least five years experience in this size and
type of structure.
B. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and qualify procedures and personnel
according to AWS D1.1, “Structural Welding Code-Steel”, and ASW D1.8, “Structural Welding
Code – Seismic Supplement” for members part of the SLRS.
1. Present evidence that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for
welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.
2. Qualifications for Welding Work: Qualify welding personnel in accordance with AWS D1.1,
"Qualification," (or approved equal).
a. Qualify welders in accordance with AWS D1.1 for each process, position, and joint
configuration.
b. Welders who have not used the welding process for a period of 6 or more months
shall be recertified.
c. If recertification of welders is required, retesting will be the Contractor's responsibility.
d. WPSs for each joint type shall indicate proper AWS qualification and be available
where welding is performed.
e. Welders whose work fails to pass inspection shall be requalified before performing
further welding.
3. Welders shall meet City of Portland standards as certified by an approved testing
laboratory.
C. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:
1. AISC 303 "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" (with exceptions
noted in Part 1 of this Section).
2. AISC 360 "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, 13th edition.
3. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
4. ASTM A 6 (ASTM A 6M) "Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Steel Plates,
Shapes, Sheet Piling, and Bars for Structural Use.”
D. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A structural engineer who is licensed in the State of
Oregon and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated.
Engineering services are defined as those performed for projects with structural steel framing
that are similar to that indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off
ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel
members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration.
1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or
overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or
structures as directed.
B. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact.
1. Fasteners may be repackaged provided Owner's testing and inspecting agency observes
repackaging and seals containers.
2. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use.
3. Comply with manufacturers' written recommendations for cleaning and lubricating
ASTM F 1852 fasteners and for retesting fasteners after lubrication.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05 12 00 - 3
1.7
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint
and coating manufacturers' recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are
compatible with one another.
B. Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction
without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and
directions for installation.
1.8
EXCEPTIONS TO AISC CODE OF STANDARD PRACTICE FOR STEEL BUILDINGS AND
BRIDGES
A. Add the following paragraph to Section 1.8.1 of the AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel
Buildings and Bridges:
“The Contractor shall have sole responsibility for site safety. The Fabricator and Erector shall
review the Contract Documents and if the structure, as shown on those documents, is in conflict
with the requirements of any safety regulations, the Fabricator shall notify the Structural
Engineer of Record prior to commencing shop drawing production. If the Fabricator and/or
Erector fail to notify the Structural Engineer of Record, as stated above, they shall become
responsible for all costs for correcting such conflicts with the requirements of any and all safety
regulations.”
B. Add the following paragraph to Sections 7.5.1 AND Section 7.5.3 of the AISC Code of Standard
Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges:
“The Owner’s Designated Representative for Construction shall prepare the Embedment
Drawing. The Embedment Drawing shall be submitted to the Structural Engineer of Record for
information only. The Structural Engineer of Record shall not be responsible for the review and
approval of the Embedment Drawing.”
C. Add the following paragraph to Section 7.10.3 of the AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel
Buildings and Bridges:
“The Erector shall have the sole responsibility for determining the means and methods used to
properly and adequately brace the framing during erection.”
D. Revise the second paragraph of Section 7.10.3 of the AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel
Buildings and Bridges as follows:
“The Erector need not consider loads during erection that result from the performance of work
by, or the acts of, others, except as specifically identified by the Owner’s Designated
Representatives for Design and Construction, nor those that are unpredictable, such as loads
due to hurricane, tornado, earthquake, explosion or collision. The Erector shall determine,
furnish and install temporary supports to resist earthquake loads specified by the 2006
International Building Code for new buildings.”
E. Revise Section 7.14 of the AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges as
follows:
“The correction of minor misfits by moderate amounts of reaming or grinding, welding or
cutting, and the drawing of elements into line with drift pins, shall be considered to be normal
erection operations. Errors that cannot be corrected using the foregoing means, or that require
major welding, cutting or changes in member or Connection configuration, shall be promptly
reported to the Owner’s Designated Representatives for Design and Construction and the
Fabricator by the Erector, to enable the responsible entity to either correct the error or approve
the most efficient and economical method of correction to be used by others.”
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05 12 00 - 4
Particular note shall be paid to the commentary for this section of the AISC Code of
Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges, which reads as follows:
“As used in this Section, the term “moderate” refers to the amount of reaming, grinding, welding
or cutting that must be done on the project as a whole, not the amount that is required at an
individual location. It is not intended to address limitations on the amount of material that is
removed by reaming at an individual bolt hole, for example, which is limited by the bolt-hole
size and tolerance requirements in the AISC and RCSC Specifications.”
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS
A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content of steel products so
postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 50
percent.
B. Structural Steel Shapes, and Bars: Refer to the General Structural Notes.
C. W-Shapes: Refer to the General Structural Notes.
D. Channels, Angles, M, S-Shapes: Refer to the General Structural Notes.
E. Plate and Bar: Refer to theGeneral Structural Notes.
F. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B, structural tubing.
G. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B. Refer to the General Structural Notes.
H. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.
1. Welding electrodes shall have a minimum tensile strength of 70 ksi using AWS A5
classification test.
2. Welding filler metals, as supplied by the manufacturer, shall meet the requirements for
H16 (16 mL diffusible hydrogen per 100 grams deposited weld metal) as tested using the
mercury or gas chromatograph method as specified in AWS A4.3, "Standard Methods for
Determination of Diffusible Hydrogen Content of Martensitic, Bainitic, and Ferritic Steel
Weld Metal Produced by Arc Welding." The manufacturer’s Certificate of Conformance
shall be considered adequate proof that the supplied electrodes meet this requirement,
and no additional testing of filler metal samples or of production welds is required.
3. All low hydrogen electrodes shall be stored, handled, protected from atmospheric
exposure and redried, if required, per AWS D1.1, 5.3.
4. FCAW electrodes shall be received in moisture-resistant packages that are undamaged.
They shall be protected against contamination and injury during shipment and storage.
Electrode packages shall remain effectively sealed against moisture until the electrode is
required for use. When removed from the protective packaging and installed on
machines, care shall be taken to protect the electrodes and coatings, if present, from
deterioration or damage. Modification or lubrication of an electrode after manufacture for
any reason is not permitted, except drying shall be permitted when recommended by the
manufacturer.
2.2
BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS
A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy hex
steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and
ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) hardened carbon-steel washers.
1. Finish: Plain.
B. Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 1852, Type 1, heavy
hex head assemblies consisting of steel structural bolts with splined ends; heavy hex carbonsteel nuts; and hardened carbon-steel washers.
1. Finish: Plain.
C. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36 straight.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05 12 00 - 5
1.
2.
3.
4.
Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy hex carbon steel.
Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel.
Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) hardened carbon steel.
Finish: Plain.
D. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 193/A 193M.
1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy hex carbon steel.
2. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) hardened carbon steel.
3. Finish: Plain.
E. Clevises or Turnbuckles: ASTM A 108, Grade 1035, cold-finished carbon steel.
F. Eye Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A 108, Grade 1030, cold-finished carbon steel.
G. Sleeve Nuts: ASTM A 108, Grade 1018, cold-finished carbon steel.
H. Structural Slide Bearings: Low-friction assemblies, of configuration indicated, that provide
vertical transfer of loads and allow horizontal movement perpendicular to plane of expansion
joint while resisting movement within plane of expansion joint.
1. Mating Surfaces: PTFE and PTFE.
2. Design Load: Not less than 5,000 psi (34 MPa).
2.3
PRIMER
A. Primer: Comply with Section 099000 "Painting and Coating".
B. Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer
complying with MPI #79 and compatible with topcoat.
C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780.
2.4
GROUT
A. Nonmetallic, Non-Shrink Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout,
noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30minute working time.
2.5
FABRICATION
A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate
according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" (with
exceptions noted in Part 1 of this Specification Section).
1. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shoppriming operations.
B. Re-Entrant Corners: Provide
-inch radius at all re-entrant corners, unless noted otherwise.
C. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible.
1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1.
D. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, or punch bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces.
E. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads.
F. Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted according to SSPCSP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
G. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for passage of
other work through steel framing members.
1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes or
enlarge holes by burning.
2. Base-Plate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to
steel surfaces.
3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work.
H. Exposed Structural Steel: For structural steel exposed at interior and exterior locations.
1. Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections for delivery to site.
2. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05 12 00 - 6
3.
4.
5.
2.6
Fabricate with exposed surfaces smooth, square, and free of surface blemishes including
pitting rust, scale, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, and roughness.
Remove blemishes by filling or grinding or by welding and grinding, before cleaning,
treating and shop priming.
Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related
components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted
otherwise.
SHOP CONNECTIONS
A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for
Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.
B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances,
appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work.
C. Erection Connections, etc: Place holes, plates, or other attachments required by the Erector so
as not to interfere with or cause any other detrimental effect to structural members or their
connections. Holes and attachments are not permitted in the “protected zone” as described in
Section 1.3 and defined in the drawings.
D. Exposed Steel Shop Connections:
1. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints
butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small, uniform radius.
2. Continuously seal joined members by intermittent (stitch) welds and plastic filler.
3. Verify that weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment used will limit distortions to
allowable tolerances. Prevent weld show-through.
4. Exposed mechanical fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively
located; consistent with design of component, except where noted otherwise.
2.7
SHOP PRIMING
A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following:
1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded
members to a depth of 2 inches (50 mm).
2. Surfaces to be field welded.
3. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections.
4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials.
5. Galvanized surfaces.
6. Verify those to receive fire protective coating with manufacturer.
B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and
spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and
standards:
1. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
C. Exposed Steel Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces of exposed structural steel to the following
specifications and standards:
1. SSPC-SP3, “Power Tool Cleaning”.
D. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's
written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a dry film thickness of not
less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints,
corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.
1. Apply two coats of shop paint to inaccessible surfaces after assembly or erection. Change
color of second coat to distinguish it from first.
2.8
DIMENSIONAL TOLERANCES
A. Fabrication Tolerances: Unless otherwise noted, fabricate structural members to referenced
AISC Specifications for allowable tolerances. Do not camber in excess of amounts shown on
drawings.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05 12 00 - 7
2.9
GALVANIZING
A. Galvanize all steel exposed to weather. That does not receive fire protective coating.
B. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel
according to ASTM A 123/ A 123M.
1. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in the finished Work unless they will function
as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.
2. Galvanize lintels or shelf angles attached to structural-steel frame and located in exterior
walls.
3. Materials for galvanizing shall be geometrically suitable for galvanizing as specified in
ASTM A384 and A385.
C. Bolts, nuts and washers, and iron and steel hardware components shall be galvanized by the
hot-dip process in accordance with ASTM A 153.
D. Surface Preparation: Steel shall be free of all visible oil, grease, dirt, dust, mill scale, rust,
paint, oxides, corrosion products, and other foreign matter: Clean steel in accordance with
Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) SSPC-SP-6, “Commercial Blast Cleaning.”
E. Coating Requirements
1. Weight: The weight of the galvanized coating shall conform to Table 2 of ASTM A 123 or
Table 1 of ASTM A 153, as appropriate.
2. Surface Finish: The galvanized coating shall be continuous, adherent, as smooth and
evenly distributed as possible, and free from any defect that is detrimental to the stated
end use of the coated article.
a. Determine the integrity of the coating by visual inspection and coating thickness
measurements.
b. Where slip factors are required for slip-critical connections, these shall be obtained
after galvanizing by suitable treatment of the faying surfaces in accordance with the
latest edition of the Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490
bolts as approved by the Research Council on Structural Connections of the
Engineering Foundation.
3. Adhesion: The galvanized coating shall be sufficiently adherent to withstand normal
handling during transport and erection.
F. Touch-Up and Repair
1. Mechanical Damage: Repair areas damaged by welding; flame cutting; or during
handling, transport, or erection in accordance with ASTM A 780 by one of the following
methods:
a. Zinc-Based Solder: In accordance with ASTM A 780, Annex A1.
1)
Apply the zinc-based solder in a minimum thickness of 4 mils (3 mils for
material less than 1/4-inch thick).
2)
Verify coating thickness by measurements with a magnetic or
electromagnetic gauge.
2. Wet Storage Stain
a. Remove any wet storage stain if formed and discovered prior to leaving the
galvanizer’s plant unless late pick up or acceptance of delivery has necessitated the
material being stored in unfavorable conditions. Remove wet storage stain before
installation so that premature failure of the coating will not occur. Remove wet
storage stain as follows:
1)
Arrange the object so that their surfaces dry rapidly.
2)
Remove light deposits by means of a stiff bristle (not wire) brush. Heavier
deposits are to be removed by brushing with a 5 percent solution of sodium
or potassium dichromate with the addition of 0.1 percent by volume of
concentrated sulfuric acid. Apply with a stiff bristle brush, and leave for
approximately 30 seconds before thoroughly rinsing and drying.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05 12 00 - 8
3)
4)
Alternatively, a proprietary product, such as Oakite Highlite or equal, which
is intended for this purpose, may be used according to manufacturer’s
recommendations.
Check coating thickness in the affected areas to ensure that the zinc coating
remaining after the removal of wet storage stain is sufficient to meet or
exceed the requirements of the specification.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A. Verify elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods,
bearing plates, and other embedments, with steel erector present, for compliance with
requirements.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural
steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in
intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel,
connections, and bracing are in place, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Do not remove temporary shoring supporting composite deck construction until cast-inplace concrete has attained its design compressive strength.
3.3
ERECTION
A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC
303 "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" with exception noted in Part 1
of this Specification Section, and AISC 360 “Specification for Structural Steel Buildings”.
B. Base and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing
materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting base and bearing plates. Clean bottom surface
of base and bearing plates.
1. Set base and bearing plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as
required.
2. Weld plate washers to top of base plate.
3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed.
Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or
bearing plate before packing with grout.
4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and base or bearing plates so no
voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply
with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.
C. Align and adjust various members that form part of complete frame or structure before
permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will
be in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for
discrepancies in elevations and alignment.
1. Level and plumb individual members of structure.
D. Splice members only where indicated.
E. Do not use thermal cutting during erection.
F. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins.
G. Reaming: Light drifting will be permitted to draw the parts together, but drifting to match unfair
holes will not be permitted. Any enlargement of holes necessary to make connections in the
field shall be done by reaming with twist drills, care being taken not to weaken the adjoining
metal. If, in the judgment of the Engineer/Architect, the extent of the reaming is such that holes
cannot be properly filled or accurately adjusted after reaming, the faulty member shall be
discarded and replaced with a new one, and all costs and expenses resulting therefrom shall
be paid by the Contractor.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05 12 00 - 9
H. Cutting and Fitting: No cutting of sections, either flanges, webs, stems or angles shall be done
by the Contractor without the consent of the Engineer/Architect, unless this cutting is
particularly specified or shown on the drawings
I.
3.4
Corrective Measures
1. Any errors in locations or inaccuracies in the setting of anchor bolts, base plates, bearing
plates, or other items of attachment or support for steel work shall be reported to the
Engineer/Architect, and shall be corrected in a manner subject to the approval of the
Engineer/Architect.
2. Any misfits due to errors in fabrication shall be reported immediately to the
Engineer/Architect, along with proposed method of correction of same and
Engineer/Architect approval obtained before proceeding with corrective measures.
3. No members shall be cut or burned without specific approval in writing.
4. Bolted or welded connections, joints, or fastenings, which are classified as defective in the
opinion of the Engineer/Architect, shall be corrected by the Contractor in a manner subject
to the Engineer/Architect’s approval.
FIELD CONNECTIONS
A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for
Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.
B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances,
appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work.
1. Comply with AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" (with
exceptions noted in Part 1 of this Specification Section) for bearing, adequacy of
temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field
welds.
2. For non-moment frame connections, remove backing bars or runoff tabs, back gouge, and
grind steel smooth (for moment frames, reference Item 5 below).
3. FCAW electrodes shall be protected from atmospheric exposure as follows:
a. Electrodes not consumed within 24 hours of accumulated exposure outside closed or
heated storage shall not be used for seismic critical welds.
b. Electrode spools shall be identified and monitored for total atmospheric exposure
time. Electrodes that have been exposed for periods exceeding an accumulated 24
hours may be dried when manufacturer’s recommendations show that drying is
effective at removing moisture and restoring electrodes to their designated diffusible
hydrogen level. Dry as specified by the manufacturer. If the electrode or the
electrode spool is damaged by baking, the electrode shall not be used.
4. Each Welder working on the project shall be assigned an identification symbol or mark.
Each Welder shall mark or stamp this identification symbol at each weldment completed
and inspected by the welder. Stamps, if used, shall be low-stress type. All welds shall be
marked or stamped.
C. Erection Connections, etc: Place holes, plates, or other attachments required by the Erector so
as not to interfere with or cause any other detrimental effect to structural members or their
connections. Holes and attachments are not permitted in the “protected zone” as described in
Section 1.3 and defined in the drawings.
D. Exposed Steel Field Connections:
1. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints
butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small, uniform radius.
2. Continuously seal joined members by intermittent (stitch) welds and plastic filler.
3. Verify that weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment used will limit distortions to
allowable tolerances. Prevent weld show-through.
4. Exposed mechanical fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively
located; consistent with design of component, except where noted otherwise.
5. Remove erection bolts; fill holes with plug welds and grind smooth.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05 12 00 - 10
3.5
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to
inspect field welds and high-strength bolted connections and tests and to prepare test reports in
accordance with “Testing and Inspection” Article 3.6 below.
3.6
TESTING AND INSPECTION
A. All structural steel work is subject to special inspection. Testing Agency and Inspector
Requirements:
1. Special Inspector: Testing Agency shall provide qualified "Special Inspector" who will
perform the inspection services.
2. Testing agency will conduct and interpret tests, and state in each report whether test
specimens comply with or deviate from requirements.
3. Testing agency will notify the Owner and Engineer/Architect immediately of discrepancies
in the work which are time-critical or affect the construction progress.
4. Inspector will:
a. Verify material identification.
b. Verify bolt tightening.
c. Inspect welding.
B. Fabrication Inspection: When approved by the Building Official, the Owner, and
Engineer/Architect, full-time special inspection in the fabrication shop by the Owner's Testing
Agency may be waived, subject to the following:
1. The Fabricator participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an
AISC-Certified Plant.
2. All shop inspection is provided by the Contractor, per the requirements herein, and is
documented. Reports and test results are to be available for the Owner's Inspector to
review.
3. Periodic inspection by the Owner's Inspection Agency is allowed by the Fabricator.
C. Contractor Responsibilities Related to Shop and Field Inspections:
1. Maintain complete records of all quality control and testing performed by the Contractor.
2. Furnish all electrical power, turning or moving of members, hoisting, staging, and other
facilities required for inspection.
3. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural steel work is being
fabricated or erected so required inspection and testing can be accomplished.
4. Correct deficiencies in, or remove and replace structural steel that inspections and test
reports indicate do not comply with specified requirements.
5. Additional testing, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of
corrected work with specified requirements.
6. Grant Inspectors full authority to inspect all material and work that fails to conform in every
respect to these specifications.
7. When required by Engineer/Architect or Owner’s Independent Testing Agency or
Contractor’s engaged inspection organization, make adequate platforms available to the
Inspector for the purpose of checking high-strength bolts and welds. Scaffolding shall be
provided to ensure safe performance of this operation.
D. Shop and Field Tests and Inspections
1. Bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's "Load and
Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490
Bolts."
2. Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspection, welded connections will be tested
and inspected as required by the Contract Documents and Specifications, according to
AWS D1.1. Inspection procedures at Testing Agency’s option, are listed below:
a. Procedures
1)
Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05 12 00 - 11
2)
b.
3.
3.7
Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on
finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not
be accepted.
3)
Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94 and ASTM E 142; minimum quality
level "2-2T."
4)
Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.
Inspector shall:
1)
Verify Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs) sheet has been provided
and has been reviewed with each welder performing the weld. Welds not
executed in conformance with the WPSs are rejectable.
2)
Verify fit-up meets tolerances of WPSs and mark joint prior to welding.
3)
Verify welding consumables per WPSs.
4)
Verify welding qualification and identifications.
5)
Observe preheat and interpass temperatures, and weld pass sequence for
conformance with WPSs.
6)
Nondestructive test all complete penetration groove welds for conformance
with weld quality and standard of acceptance per requirements for testing of
welds subject to tensile stress by ultrasonic methods in AWS D1.1. Pass
sound through entire weld volume from two crossing directions to the extent
feasible. Nondestructive test all complete penetration groove welds of beam
flanges to column flanges and column stiffeners and cap plates, and all
complete penetration groove welds of column splices and columns to base
plates for conformance with weld quality and standard of acceptance per
requirements for testing of welds by magnetic particle testing in AWS D.1 in
addition to ultrasonic testing methods.
7)
All partial penetration, fillet, and other remaining welds shall be visually
inspected.
8)
Where ultrasonic testing is performed, the entire weld shall be tested.
All slide-bearing assemblies to be inspected for damage, and for scratched or soiled
surfaces.
REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on galvanized items with zinc-based solder according to
ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Touchup Painting: After installation, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field
connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted joists and accessories, bearing
plates, and abutting structural steel.
1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand-tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3 power-tool
cleaning.
2. Apply a compatible primer of same type as shop primer used on adjacent surfaces
C. Field paint items to receive fire protective coating per drawings
1.
Approved manufacturer: Contego International
END OF SECTION
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05 12 00 - 12
SECTION 05 40 00
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Exterior non-load-bearing wall framing.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for masonry shelf angles and connections.
2. Section 092116 "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for interior non-load-bearing, metal-stud
framing and ceiling-suspension assemblies for interior non-load-bearing, metal-studframed, shaft-wall assemblies.
3. Structural Drawings S002 and S003 see General Structural Notes.
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of cold-formed metal framing product and accessory indicated.
1. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.
B. Shop Drawings: Show layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed metal
framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners.
Show reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing,
bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining work.
1.4
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For testing agency.
B. Welding Certificates.
C. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency, unless otherwise stated, indicating that
each of the following complies with requirements, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests
for current products:
1. Steel sheet.
2. Expansion anchors.
3. Power-actuated anchors.
4. Mechanical fasteners.
5. Vertical deflection clips.
6. Horizontal drift deflection clips
7. Miscellaneous structural clips and accessories.
D. Research/Evaluation Reports: For cold-formed metal framing.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indicated.
B. Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency, or in-house
testing with calibrated test equipment indicating steel sheet complies with requirements,
including base-metal thickness, yield strength, tensile strength, total elongation, chemical
requirements, and metallic-coating thickness.
C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural
Welding Code--Steel," and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."
D. AISI Specifications and Standards: Comply with AISI's "North American Specification for the
Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members" and its "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel
Framing - General Provisions."
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
05 40 00 - 1
E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect cold-formed metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during
delivery, storage, and handling.
B. Store cold-formed metal framing, protect with a waterproof covering, and ventilate to avoid
condensation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
cold-formed metal framing that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited
to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide cold-formed metal framing by
one of the following:
1. Allied Studco.
2. AllSteel & Gypsum Products, Inc.
3. California Expanded Metal Products Company.
4. Clark Steel Framing.
5. Consolidated Fabricators Corp.; Building Products Division.
6. Craco Metals Manufacturing, LLC.
7. Custom Stud, Inc.
8. Dale/Incor.
9. Design Shapes in Steel.
10. Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries Company.
11. Formetal Co. Inc. (The).
12. Innovative Steel Systems.
13. Marino Ware; A Division of Ware Industries.
14. Quail Run Building Materials, Inc.
15. SCAFCO Corporation.
16. Southeastern Stud & Components, Inc.
17. Steel Construction Systems.
18. Steeler, Inc.
19. Super Stud Buildling Products, Inc.
20. United Metal Products, Inc.
2.2
MATERIALS
A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content of steel products so
postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25
percent.
B. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and
coating weight as follows:
1. Grade: ST50H (ST340H).
2. Coating: G60 (Z180).
C. Steel Sheet for Vertical Deflection Clips: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, zinc coated, of
grade and coating as follows:
1. Grade: 50 (340), Class 1 or 2.
2. Coating: G90 (Z275).
2.3
EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING
A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched,
with stiffened flanges, and as follows:
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0428 inch (1.09 mm).
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
05 40 00 - 2
2.
3.
Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches (41 mm).
Section Properties: Reference General Structural Notes.
B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated,
unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and as follows:
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0428 inch (1.09 mm.
2. Flange Width: 1-1/4 inches (32 mm).
C. Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer's standard head clips, capable of accommodating
upward and downward vertical displacement of primary structure through positive mechanical
attachment to stud web.
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries Company.
b. Marino Ware, a Division of Ware Industries.
c. SCAFCO Corporation
d. The Steel Network, Inc.
D. Double Deflection Tracks: Manufacturer's double, deep-leg, U-shaped steel tracks, consisting
of nested inner and outer tracks; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges.
1. Outer Track: Of web depth to allow free vertical movement of inner track, with flanges
designed to support horizontal and lateral loads and transfer them to the primary structure,
and as follows:
a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0538 inch (1.37 mm).
b. Flange Width: 1 inch (25 mm) plus twice the design gap.
2. Inner Track: Of web depth indicated, and as follows:
a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0538 inch (1.37 mm).
b. Flange Width: Dimension equal to sum of outer deflection track flange width plus 1
inch (25 mm).
E. Drift Clips: Manufacturer's standard bypass or head clips, capable of isolating wall stud from
upward and downward vertical displacement and lateral drift of primary structure.
2.4
FRAMING ACCESSORIES
A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural
Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members.
B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise
indicated, as follows:
1. Supplementary framing.
2. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking.
3. Web stiffeners.
4. Anchor clips.
5. End clips.
6. Hole reinforcing plates.
7. Backer plates.
2.5
ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS
A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to
ASTM A 123/A 123M.
B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, threaded carbon-steel hex-headless bolts, and carbonsteel nuts; and flat, hardened-steel washers; zinc coated by hot-dip process according to
ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
05 40 00 - 3
C. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain,
without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488
conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
D. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated
from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10
times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified
independent testing agency.
E. Mechanical Fasteners: Elco Dril-Flex or Hilti Kwik-Flex conforming to ICC Legacy Report ER4780, or Los Angeles Department of Building and Safety Research Report RR 25095, dual
hardner, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping steel drill screws. The self-drilling
point lead tapping threads shall have a minimum hardness of HRL. The load bearing screen
shank shall have a maximum of hardness of HRL 34.
1. Head Type: Hex washer head, Undercut flathead, custom head styles as noted on
drawings.
F.
2.6
Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780.
B. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I; and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 404.
Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for
placement and hydration.
C. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout
containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, and
plasticizing and water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107, with fluid consistency
and 30-minute working time.
D. Shims: Load bearing, high-density multimonomer plastic, nonleaching.
E. Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick, selected from
manufacturer's standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A. Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Cold-formed metal framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field
assembled.
B. Install cold-formed metal framing according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing
- General Provisions" and to manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent
requirements are indicated.
C. Install shop- or field-fabricated, cold-formed framing and securely anchor to supporting
structure.
1. Screw, bolt, or weld wall panels at horizontal and vertical junctures to produce flush, even,
true-to-line joints with maximum variation in plane and true position between fabricated
panels not exceeding 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).
D. Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with
connections securely fastened.
1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.
2. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening,
or riveting. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.
a. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and
quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
05 40 00 - 4
b.
Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, and complying
with requirements for spacing, edge distances, and screw penetration.
E. Install framing members in one-piece lengths unless splice connections are indicated for track
or tension members.
F. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in
intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place,
undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent
connections to framing are secured.
G. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold-formed metal framing.
Independently frame both sides of joints.
H. Install insulation, specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation," in built-up exterior
framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are
inaccessible on completion of framing work.
3.3
I.
Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's
standard punched openings.
J.
Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed metal framing level, plumb, and true to line to a
maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows:
1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from plan
location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing
or other finishing materials.
EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION
A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to
supporting structure as indicated.
B. Fasten both flanges of studs to bottom track, unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as
follows:
1. Stud Spacing: As indicated.
C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or
warped surfaces and similar requirements.
D. Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical
loads while providing lateral support.
1. Connect vertical deflection clips to infill studs and anchor to building structure.
2. Connect drift clips to cold formed metal framing and anchor to building structure.
E. Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced in rows indicated on Shop Drawings but not
more than 48 inches (1220 mm) apart. Fasten at each stud intersection.
1. Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched
studs.
2. Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and
stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud
flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges.
F. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip
angles, continuous angles, anchors, fasteners, and stud girts, to provide a complete and stable
wall-framing system.
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform
field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting.
C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.
D. Remove and replace work where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified
requirements.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
05 40 00 - 5
E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
3.5
REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and
installed cold-formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and
manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
Installer, that ensure that cold-formed metal framing is without damage or deterioration at time
of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
05 40 00 - 6
SECTION 05 50 00
METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Shop fabricated steel items, including:
B.
Steel Canopy Frames.
C.
Metal Guardrails.
D.
Countertop Support Brackets.
E.
Bollards.
F.
Elevator door sills.
G.
Elevator guide rail supports.
H.
Overhead door frames and track support.
I.
Storefront back up steel framing.
J.
Stair Edge angle.
K.
Cast-in corner-guards.
L.
Miscellaneous metal fabricated items as shown on the drawings.
1.2
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 05 52 13 - Pipe and Tube Railings.
B.
Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Paint finish.
C.
Section 14 20 10 - Passenger Elevators: Pit ladders.
1.3
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ANSI A14.3 - American National Standard for Ladders -- Fixed -- Safety Requirements; 2002.
B.
ASTM A 36/A 36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2008.
C.
ASTM A 53/A 53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,
Welded and Seamless; 2007.
D.
ASTM A 123/A 123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron
and Steel Products; 2009.
E.
ASTM A 153/A 153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware; 2009.
F.
ASTM A 283/A 283M - Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength
Carbon Steel Plates; 2003 (Reapproved 2007).
G.
ASTM A 325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi
Minimum Tensile Strength; 2009a.
H.
ASTM A 325M - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated 830 MPa
Tensile Strength (Metric); 2009.
I.
ASTM A 500/A 500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon
Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2010.
J.
ASTM A 501 - Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel
Structural Tubing; 2007.
K.
ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2009a.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
METAL FABRICATIONS
05 50 00 - 1
1.4
L.
ASTM A 666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel
Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2003.
M.
AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination;
American Welding Society; 2007.
N.
AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; 2010.
O.
SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer; Society for Protective Coatings; 1999 (Ed. 2004).
P.
SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); Society for
Protective Coatings; 2002 (Ed. 2004).
SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size
and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details
where applicable.
1. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net
weld lengths.
C.
Welders' Certificates: Submit certification for welders employed on the project, verifying AWS
qualification within the previous 12 months.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
2.3
MATERIALS - STEEL
A.
Steel Sections: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B.
Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B cold-formed structural tubing.
C.
Plates: ASTM A 283.
D.
Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Grade B Schedule 40, black finish.
E.
Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: , galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M where connecting galvanized
components.
F.
Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666 Type 304, soft temper, 0.0359 inch thick; smooth No. 4 finish.
G.
Welding Materials: AWS D1.1/D1.1M; type required for materials being welded.
H.
Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities
having jurisdiction.
I.
Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying with
VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.
FABRICATION
A.
Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site.
B.
Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured.
C.
Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt
tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.
D.
Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related
components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted
otherwise.
FABRICATED ITEMS (including but not limited to)
A.
MTL CANOPY-1 Building Entrance Canopy: Structural Steel as detailed on Drawings.
1. Fascia and Gutter: Brake-formed Stainless Steel as detailed.
B.
MTL CANOPY-2 Courtyard Entrance Canopy: AESS Structural Steel as detailed on Drawings.
1. Finish: Alkyd primer for field finishing per Section 09 90 00.
C.
GUARDRAIL-1: Steel guardrail at First Floor apartment units and loading dock.
1. Material: Steel shapes as detailed on Drawings.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
METAL FABRICATIONS
05 50 00 - 2
2.4
2.5
D.
2. Finish: Alkyd primer for field finishing per Section 09 90 00.
Steel angle corner guards: As detailed, galvanized and painted.
E.
Bumper Posts and Guard Rails: As detailed; prime paint finish.
F.
Bollards: Steel pipe, concrete filled, crowned cap, as detailed; prime paint finish.
G.
Ledge Angles, Shelf Angles, Channels, and Plates Not Attached to Structural Framing:
For support of masonry; prime paint finish.
H.
Lintels: As detailed; prime paint finish.
I.
Door Frames for Overhead Door Openings: Channel sections; prime paint finish.
J.
Elevator Hoistway Divider Beams: Beam sections; prime paint finish.
FINISHES - STEEL
A.
All exterior steel metal fabrications to be galvanized prior to prime painting
B.
Prime paint all steel items.
1. Exceptions: Galvanize exterior exposed and items to be embedded in concrete or
masonry.
2. Exceptions: Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete, where field welding is
required, and items to be covered with sprayed fireproofing.
C.
Prepare surfaces to be primed in accordance with SSPC-SP 3.
D.
Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing.
E.
Prime Painting: one coat applied at factory; intermediate coat applied as specified in Section
09 90 00.
F.
Paint Topcoat: See Section 09 90 00.
G.
Galvanizing of Non-structural Items: Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM A 123/A 123M
requirements.
FABRICATION TOLERANCES
A.
Squareness: 1/8 inch maximum difference in diagonal measurements.
B.
Maximum Offset Between Faces: 1/16 inch.
C.
Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1/16 inch.
D.
Maximum Bow: 1/8 inch in 48 inches.
E.
Maximum Deviation From Plane: 1/16 inch in 48 inches.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
3.3
Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.
PREPARATION
A.
Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required.
B.
Supply setting templates to the appropriate entities for steel items required to be cast into
concrete or embedded in masonry.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects.
B.
Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until
completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments.
C.
Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
D.
Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled.
E.
After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not galvanized , except surfaces to be in
contact with concrete.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
METAL FABRICATIONS
05 50 00 - 3
F.
3.4
All exposed bolt heads and nuts to be rotated verticle.
TOLERANCES
A.
Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative.
B.
Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch.
C.
Maximum Out-of-Position: 1/4 inch.
END OF SECTION
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
METAL FABRICATIONS
05 50 00 - 4
SECTION 05 52 13
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Wall mounted handrails.
B.
Stair railings and guardrails.
C.
Free-standing railings at steps.
D.
Balcony railings and guardrails.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Placement of anchors in concrete.
B.
Section 06 10 00 – Rough Carpentry: blocking.
B.
Section 06 20 00 - Finish Carpentry:
C.
Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Placement of backing plates in stud wall
construction.
D.
Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Paint finish.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM A 53/A 53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,
Welded and Seamless; 2007.
B.
ASTM A 123/A 123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron
and Steel Products; 2009.
C.
ASTM A 500/A 500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon
Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2010.
D.
ASTM A 501 - Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel
Structural Tubing; 2007.
E.
ASTM E 935 - Standard Test Methods for Performance of Permanent Metal Railing Systems
and Rails for Buildings; 2000 (Reapproved 2006).
F.
ASTM E 985 - Standard Specification for Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails for
Buildings; 2000 (Reapproved 2006).
SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, anchorage, size and type of
fasteners, and accessories.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Handrails and Railings:
1. Julius Blum Co., www.juliusblum.com
2. C. R. Laurence Co., Inc: www.crlaurence.com.
3. The Wagner Companies: www.wagnercompanies.com.
4. Custom built steel and aluminum is acceptable.
3.5. Handrails to be standard vertical spindle aluminum powder coated railing.
4.6. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B.
Non-Weld Pipe Fittings:
RAILINGS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Design, fabricate, and test railing assemblies in accordance with the most stringent
requirements of ASTM E 985 and applicable local code.
B.
Design railing assembly, wall rails, and attachments to resist lateral force of 75 lbs at any point
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
05 52 13 - 1
without damage or permanent set. Test in accordance with ASTM E 935.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
05 52 13 - 2
2.3
2.4
C.
Allow for expansion and contraction of members and building movement without damage to
connections or members.
D.
Dimensions: See drawings for configurations and heights.
1. Hand Rails and Wall Rails: 1-1/2 inches diameter, round.
2. Posts: as shown on drawings.
3. Balusters: 1/2 inch square solid bar.
4. Cast-in embeds: galvanized steel angles or plates with welded studs as required, where
shown.
E.
Provide anchors, brackets and other components as required to attach to structure, made of
same materials as railing components unless otherwise indicated; where exposed fasteners are
unavoidable provide flush countersunk fasteners.
1. For anchorage to concrete, provide inserts to be cast into concrete, for bolting anchors.
2. For anchorage to stud walls, provide backing plates, for bolting anchors.
F.
Handrail / guardrail supports:
1. At stair towers- Julius Blum cast iron #306
2. At other handrails - Julius Blum 176 Nickel-silver concealed anchor
G.
Provide slip-on non-weld mechanical fittings to join lengths, seal open ends, and conceal
exposed mounting bolts and nuts, including but not limited to elbows, T-shapes, splice
connectors, flanges, escutcheons, and wall brackets.
STEEL RAILING SYSTEM
A.
Steel Tube: ASTM A 500, Grade B cold-formed structural tubing.
B.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Grade B Schedule 40, black finish.
C.
Non-Weld Mechanical Fittings: Slip-on, galvanized malleable iron castings, for Schedule 40
pipe, with flush setscrews for tightening by standard hex wrench, no bolts or screw fasteners.
D.
Welding Fittings: Factory- or shop-welded from matching pipe or tube; seams continuously
welded; joints and seams ground smooth.
E.
Exposed Fasteners: No exposed bolts or screws.
F.
Galvanizing: In accordance with requirements of ASTM A 123/A 123M.
1. All exterior handrails and guardrails to be galvanized or powder coated.
G.
Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666 Type 304, soft temper, 0.0359 inch thick; smooth No. 4 finish.
FABRICATION
A.
Accurately form components to suit specific project conditions and for proper connection to
building structure.
B.
Fit and shop assemble components in largest practical sizes for delivery to site.
C.
Fabricate components with joints tightly fitted and secured. Provide spigots and sleeves to
accommodate site assembly and installation.
D.
Fabricate rails in continuous sections where possible. At rail spices provide continuous weld,
ground smooth. Provide welded end caps on all hand rails.
D.
Welded Joints:
1. Exterior Components: Continuously seal joined pieces by intermittent welds and plastic
filler. Drill condensate drainage holes at bottom of members at locations that will not
encourage water intrusion.
2. Interior Components: Continuously seal joined pieces by intermittent welds and plastic
filler.
3. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints
butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.
PART 3 EXECUTION
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
05 52 13 - 3
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
3.3
3.4
Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.
PREPARATION
A.
Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required.
B.
Supply items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry with setting templates,
for installation as work of other sections.
C.
Apply one coat of bituminous paint to concealed aluminum surfaces that will be in contact with
cementatious or dissimilar materials.
D.
Verify wall assembly and blocking in wall at points of attachment.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Install components plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects, with tight
joints.
C.
Anchor railings securely to structure.
D.
Field weld anchors as indicated on drawings. Touch-up welds with primer. Grind welds
smooth.
E.
Conceal anchor bolts and screws whenever possible. Where not concealed, use flush
countersunk fastenings.
TOLERANCES
A.
Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch per floor level, non-cumulative.
B.
Maximum Offset from True Alignment: 1/4 inch.
C.
Maximum Out-of-Position: 1/4 inch.
END OF SECTION
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
05 52 13 - 4
DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
061000
061600
061733
062000
064100
ROUGH CARPENTRY
SHEATHING
PRE-FABRICATED PLYWOOD I JOISTS
FINISH CARPENTRY
ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
SECTION 061000
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1.
Framing with dimension lumber.
2.
Framing with engineered wood products.
3.
Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.
4.
Wood blocking, cants, and nailers.
5.
Wood furring.
B. Related Requirements:
1.3
1.
Section 061600 "Sheathing."
2.
Section 061733 “Pre-Fabricated Plywood I Joists.”
3.
Section 092116 “Gypsum Board Assemblies.”
4.
Structural Drawings S002 and S003 see General Structural Notes.
DEFINITIONS
A. Exposed Framing: Framing not concealed by other construction.
B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal (38 mm actual) or greater but less than 5
inches nominal (114 mm actual) in least dimension.
C. Timber: Lumber of 5 inches nominal (114 mm actual) or greater in least dimension.
D. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:
1.
NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association.
2.
NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority.
3.
WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
4.
WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.
E. Each piece of lumber shall bear the grade mark of a recognized association of a recognized
association or independent inspection agency. Comply with HUD UM 38j: HUD building
product standards and certification program and the grademarking of lumber.
F. Each piece of pressure treated lumber shall bear grade mark of a recognized association of a
recognized association or independent inspection agency. Comply with HUD UM 48 pressure
treated lumber and plywood.
G. HUD Materials Release: Engineering wood products.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component
materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.
1.
Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate
type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.
2.
For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of
treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 10 00 - 1
3.
1.5
Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of
treatment.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit
stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the
ALSC Board of Review.
B. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:
1.
Wood-preservative-treated wood.
2.
Engineered wood products.
3.
Power-driven fasteners.
4.
Powder-actuated fasteners.
5.
Metal framing anchors.
C. HUD Materials Release for Engineering Wood Products: LVL lumber, complete and current.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fireretardant treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction
that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification
marking is representative of the material tested.
1.7
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation.
Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide
for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency
is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency
certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the
ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.
1.
Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
2.
Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for
moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed
sizes for dry lumber.
3.
Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: Kiln dried with 15 percent for 4-inch nominal thickness
or less, 19 percent for more than 4-inch nominal thickness.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 10 00 - 2
C. Engineered Wood Products: Provide engineered wood products acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that
show compliance with building code in effect for Project.
1.
Allowable Design Stresses: Provide engineered wood products with allowable design
stresses, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated.
Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational
engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a
qualified independent testing agency.
D. FRT (Fire Retardant Treated) lumber is not required.
1.
2.2
WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2.
B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use
material that is warped or that does not comply with requirements for untreated material.
C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board
of Review.
D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
2.3
1.
Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, stripping, and similar members in
connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
2.
Wood sills, blocking, furring, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or
concrete.
DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING
A. Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: Construction or No. 2 grade, unless noted otherwise on
the drawings.
1. Application: Interior partitions not indicated as load-bearing.
2. Species:
a. Mixed southern pine; SPIB.
b. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA.
c. Hem-fir; WCLIB, or WWPA.
d. Spruce-pine-fir (south); NeLMA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
e. Northern species; NLGA.
f.
Eastern softwoods; NeLMA.
g. Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA.
B. Load-Bearing Partitions: No. 2 grade, unless otherwise noted on the drawings.
1. Application: Exterior walls and interior load-bearing partitions.
2. Species:
a. Douglas fir-larch; WCLIB or WWPA.
b. Douglas fir-larch (north); NLGA.
C. Joists, Rafters, and Other Framing Not Listed Above: No. 2 grade, unless noted otherwise on
the drawings.
1. Species:
a. Douglas fir-larch; WCLIB or WWPA.
2.4
TIMBER FRAMING
A. Provide timber framing complying with the following requirements, according to grading rules of
grading agency indicated:
1. Species and Grade: Douglas fir-larch, Douglas fir-larch (north), or Douglas fir-south; No. 1
grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
2. Maximum Moisture Content: 19 percent.
3. Additional Restriction: Free of heart centers.
2.5
ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 10 00 - 3
A. Engineered Wood Products, General: Products shall contain no urea formaldehyde.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 10 00 - 4
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of engineered wood product from single source from a
single manufacturer.
C. Laminated-Veneer Lumber: Structural composite lumber made from wood veneers with grain
primarily parallel to member lengths, evaluated and monitored according to ASTM D 5456 and
manufactured with an exterior-type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Boise Cascade Corporation.
b. Georgia-Pacific.
c. TJI.
d. Weyerhaeuser Company.
e. IdaPac.
2. Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending, Edgewise: 2900 psi (20.0 MPa) for 12-inch nominal(286-mm actual-) depth members.
3. Modulus of Elasticity, Edgewise: 1,800,000 psi (12 400 MPa).
4. Tolerances:
a. Depth: + 1/16”.
b. Width: + 1/6”.
5. Identification:
a. Laminated Veneer Lumber (LVL) shall be identified by a stamp indicating the product
type and grade, manufacturer’s name, plant number and the independent inspection
agency’s logo.
D. Parallel-Strand Lumber: Structural composite lumber made from wood strand elements with
grain primarily parallel to member lengths, evaluated and monitored according to ASTM D 5456
and manufactured with an exterior-type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Louisiana-Pacific Corporation.
b. Weyerhaeuser Company.
2. Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending, Edgewise: 2900 psi (20 MPa) for 12-inch nominal- (286mm actual-) depth members.
3. Modulus of Elasticity, Edgewise: 2,200,000 psi (15 100 MPa).
4. Tolerances:
a. Depth: + 1/16”.
b. Width: + 1/6”.
5. Identification:
a. Parallel Strand Lumber (PSL) shall be identified by a stamp indicating the product
type and grade, manufacturer’s name, plant number and the independent inspection
agency’s logo.
E. Rim Boards: Product designed to be used as a load-bearing member and to brace wood Ijoists at bearing ends, complying with research/evaluation report for I-joists.
1. Manufacturer: Provide products by same manufacturer as I-joists.
2. Material: product made from any combination solid lumber, wood strands, and veneers.
3. Thickness: 1-1/4 inches (32 mm).
4. Provide performance-rated product complying with APA PRR-401, rim board grade,
factory marked with APA trademark indicating thickness, grade, and compliance with APA
standard.
2.6
MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of
other construction, including the following:
1. Blocking.
2. Nailers.
3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.
4. Cants.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 10 00 - 5
5.
6.
Furring.
Grounds.
B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber of any species.
C. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to
eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.
2.7
FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified
in this article for material and manufacture.
1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative
treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating
complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.
D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.
E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1 (ASME B18.2.3.8M).
F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6);
with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.
2.8
METAL FRAMING CONNECTORS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with substitution requirements, provide
product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co.
2. KC Metals Products, Inc.
3. Phoenix Metal Products, Inc.
4. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.
5. USP Structural Connectors.
B. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M,
G60 (Z180) coating designation.
1. Use for interior locations unless otherwise indicated.
C. Hot-Dip, Heavy-Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M; structural steel (SS), highstrength low-alloy steel Type A (HSLAS Type A), or high-strength low-alloy steel Type B
(HSLAS Type B); G185 (Z550) coating designation; and not less than 0.036 inch (0.9 mm)
thick.
1. Use for wood-preservative-treated lumber and where indicated.
D. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304.
1. Use for exterior locations and where indicated.
E. Bridging: Rigid, V-section, nailless type, 0.050 inch (1.3 mm) thick, length to suit joist size and
spacing.
F. Joist Ties: Flat straps, with holes for fasteners, for tying joists together over supports.
2.9
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Glass-fiber-resilient insulation, fabricated in strip form, for use as a sill
sealer; 1-inch (25-mm) nominal thickness, compressible to 1/32 inch (0.8 mm); selected from
manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated.
B. Adhesives for Gluing to Concrete or Masonry: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that
is approved for use indicated by adhesive manufacturer.
1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 10 00 - 6
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and
fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit.
Locate furring, nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching
other construction.
B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame
Construction," unless otherwise indicated.
C. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with
manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written
instructions. Install fasteners through each fastener hole.
E. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.
F.
Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures,
specialty items, and trim.
1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where
framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips
not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c.
G. Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as indicated
and as follows:
1. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level, at ceiling, and at not more than 96
inches (2438 mm) o.c. with solid wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately
fitted to close furred spaces.
2. Fire block concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each floor level, at
ceiling line of top story, and at not more than 96 inches (2438 mm) o.c. Where fire
blocking is not inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted solid wood blocks of
same width as framing members and 2-inch nominal- (38-mm actual-) thickness.
3. Fire block concealed spaces between floor sleepers with same material as sleepers to
limit concealed spaces to not more than 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m) and to solidly fill space
below partitions.
4. Fire block concealed spaces behind combustible cornices and exterior trim at not more
than 20 feet (6 m) o.c.
H. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with
fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with
function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or
optimum joint arrangement.
I.
Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated
lumber.
1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water.
2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water.
J.
Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated,
complying with the following:
1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.
2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.
K. Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully
penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials.
Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails
snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 10 00 - 7
3.2
WOOD, BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION
A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated
and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other
work involved.
B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with
surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
C. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressure-preservative-treated, key-beveled lumber not
less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact
thickness of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required.
D. Provide blocking for all bathroom accessories, stair railing, and wall hung items.
3.3
WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION
A. Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required
for tolerance of finish work.
B. Furring to Receive Gypsum Board: Install 1-by-2-inch nominal- (19-by-38-mm actual-) size
furring vertically at 16 inches (406 mm) o.c.
3.4
WALL AND PARTITION FRAMING INSTALLATION
A. General: Provide single bottom plate and double top plates using members of 2-inch nominal
(38-mm actual) thickness whose widths equal that of studs, except single top plate may be
used for non-load-bearing partitions. Fasten plates to supporting construction unless otherwise
indicated.
1. For exterior walls, provide 2-by-6-inch nominal- (38-by-140-mm actual-) size wood studs
spaced 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated. Drawings dictate.
2. For interior partitions and walls, provide 2-by-4-inch nominal- (38-by-89-mm actual-) size
wood studs spaced 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated. Drawings dictate.
3. Provide continuous horizontal blocking at midheight of partitions more than 96 inches
(2438 mm) high, using members of 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness and of same
width as wall or partitions.
B. Construct corners and intersections with three or more studs.
C. Frame openings with multiple studs and headers. Provide nailed header members of thickness
equal to width of studs. Support headers on jamb studs.
1. For non-load-bearing partitions, provide double-jamb studs and headers not less than 4inch nominal (89-mm actual) depth for openings 48 inches (1200 mm) and less in width, 6inch nominal (140-mm actual) depth for openings 48 to 72 inches (1200 to 1800 mm) in
width, 8-inch nominal (184-mm actual) depth for openings 72 to 120 inches (1800 to 3000
mm) in width, and not less than 10-inch nominal (235-mm actual) depth for openings 10 to
12 feet (3 to 3.6 m) in width. Drawings dictate.
2. For load-bearing walls, provide double-jamb studs for openings 60 inches (1500 mm) and
less in width, and triple-jamb studs for wider openings. Provide headers of depth
indicated or as otherwise indicated. Drawings dictate.
D. Provide diagonal bracing in exterior walls, at both walls of each external corner, at 45-degree
angle, full-story height unless otherwise indicated. Use metal wall bracing, let into studs in saw
kerf.
E. Framer shall confirm walls are flush and furr as needed.
3.5
FLOOR JOIST FRAMING INSTALLATION
A. General: Install floor joists with crown edge up and support ends of each member with not less
than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) of bearing on wood or metal, or 3 inches (76 mm) on masonry.
Attach floor joists as follows:
1. Where supported on wood members, by toe nailing or by using metal framing anchors.
2. Where framed into wood supporting members, by using wood ledgers as indicated or, if
not indicated, by using metal joist hangers.
B. Frame openings with headers and trimmers supported by metal joist hangers; double headers
and trimmers where span of header exceeds 48 inches (1200 mm).
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
ROUGH CARPENTRY
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
06 10 00 - 8
C. Provide solid blocking of 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness by depth of joist at ends of
joists unless nailed to header or band.
D. Lap members framing from opposite sides of beams, girders, or partitions not less than 4
inches (102 mm) or securely tie opposing members together. Provide solid blocking of 2-inch
nominal (38-mm actual) thickness by depth of joist over supports.
E. Provide solid blocking between joists under jamb studs for openings.
F.
Under non-load-bearing partitions, provide double joists separated by solid blocking equal to
depth of studs above.
G. Provide bridging of type indicated below, at intervals of 96 inches (2438 mm) o.c., between
joists.
1. Diagonal wood bridging formed from bevel-cut, 1-by-3-inch nominal- (19-by-64-mm actual) size lumber, double-crossed and nailed at both ends to joists.
2. Steel bridging installed to comply with bridging manufacturer's written instructions.
3.6
TIMBER FRAMING INSTALLATION
A. Install timber with crown edge up and provide not less than 4 inches (102 mm) of bearing on
supports. Provide continuous members unless otherwise indicated; tie together over supports
as indicated if not continuous.
B. Install wood posts using metal anchors indicated.
3.7
STAIR FRAMING INSTALLATION
A. Provide stair framing members of size, space, and configuration indicated or, if not indicated, to
comply with the following requirements:
1. Material: Laminated-veneer lumber or parallel-strand lumber.
2. Notching: Notch rough carriages to receive treads, risers, and supports; leave at least 51/2 inches (89 mm) of effective depth.
3. Spacing: At least four framing members for each 36-inch (914-mm) clear width of stair.
B. Provide stair framing with no more than 3/16-inch (4.7-mm) variation between adjacent treads
and risers and no more than 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) variation between largest and smallest treads
and risers within each flight.
3.8
PROTECTION
A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite
protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment.
Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.
B. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes wet,
apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPAregistered label.
END OF SECTION
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 10 00 - 9
SECTION 061600
SHEATHING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Wall sheathing.
2. Roof sheathing.
3. Subflooring.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for plywood backing panels.
2. Section 072500 "Weather Barriers" for water-resistive barrier applied over wall sheathing.
3. Structural Drawings S002 and S003 see General Structural Notes.
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component
materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.
1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements. Indicate
type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.
2. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of
treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.
3. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of
treatment.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For adhesives, documentation including printed
statement of VOC content.
2. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.4: For composite wood products, documentation indicating
that product contains no urea formaldehyde.
3. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit IEQ 4: For adhesives and composite wood products,
documentation indicating that products comply with the testing and product requirements
of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of
Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental
Chambers."
1.4
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Evaluation Reports: For following products, from ICC-ES:
1. Preservative-treated plywood.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fireretardant-treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction
that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification
marking is representative of the material tested.
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Stack panels flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation.
Protect sheathing from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored.
Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
SHEATHING
06 16 00 - 1
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS
A. Plywood
B. Oriented Strand Board. Confirm manufacturer specification for wet environment installation.
C. Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified, but not less than thickness
indicated.
D. Factory mark panels to indicate compliance with applicable standard.
E. Verify with structural documents.
2.2
PRESERVATIVE-TREATED PLYWOOD
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2.
1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no
arsenic or chromium.
B. Mark plywood with appropriate classification marking of an inspection agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings and plywood in contact with masonry or
concrete or used with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
2.3
WALL SHEATHING
A. Plywood Wall Sheathing: Exposure 1 sheathing.
1. Span Rating: Not less than 24/0.
B. Oriented-Strand-Board Wall Sheathing: Exposure 1 sheathing.
1. Span Rating: Not less than 24/0. Confirm manufacturer
specification for wet environment installation.
C.
Verify with structural documents.
D.
OSB is approved at this installation.
C.E.
No treatment to cut edges is included (verify requirement with manufacturer).
2.4
ROOF SHEATHING
A. Plywood Roof Sheathing: Exposure 1 sheathing.
1. Span Rating: Not less than 24/0.
B. Oriented-Strand-Board Roof Sheathing: Exposure 1 sheathing.
C.
D.
1. Span Rating: Not less than 24/0.
OSB is approved at this installation.
No treatment to cut edges is included (verify requirement with manufacturer).
1.
2.5
SUBFLOORING
A. Plywood Subflooring: Exposure 1 single-floor panels or sheathing.
1. Span Rating: Not less than 24 o.c.
B. Oriented-Strand-Board Subflooring: Exposure 1.
1. Span Rating: Not less than 24o.c.
C.
OSB is approved at this installation.
D.
No treatment to cut edges is included (verify requirement with manufacturer).
1.
2.6
FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified
in this article for material and manufacture.
B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.
D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
SHEATHING
06 16 00 - 2
E. Screws for Fastening Wood Structural Panels to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954,
except with wafer heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for
material being fastened.
1. For wall and roof sheathing panels, provide screws with organic-polymer or other
corrosion-protective coating having a salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours
according to ASTM B 117.
2.7
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with APA AFG-01 that is
approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by manufacturers of both adhesives
and panels.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
SHEATHING
06 16 00 - 3
1.
Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to
use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange joints so that pieces
do not span between fewer than three support members.
B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting
construction unless otherwise indicated.
C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following:
1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.
2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's "International Building Code."
D. Use common wire nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully
penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials.
Make tight connections. Install fasteners without splitting wood.
E. Coordinate wall and roof sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so
these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from
passing through completed assembly.
F. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of
structural support elements.
G. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so
sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is
forecast.
3.2
WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No. E30, "Engineered Wood
Construction Guide," for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated.
B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below:
1. Subflooring:
a. Glue and nail to wood framing.
b. Screw to cold-formed metal framing.
c. Space panels 1/8 inch (3 mm) apart at edges and ends.
2. Wall and Roof Sheathing:
a. Nail to wood framing.
b. Screw to cold-formed metal framing.
c. Space panels 1/8 inch (3 mm) apart at edges and ends.
END OF SECTION
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
SHEATHING
06 16 00 - 4
SECTION 061733
PRE-FABRICATED PLYWOOD I JOISTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. This Section includes wood chord and plywood or orientated strand board web joists for floor
framing; bridging, bracing and anchorage; framing for openings; and preservative treatment of
wood.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 061000 “Rough Carpentry”.
2. Section 061600 “Sheathing”.
1.3
REFERENCES
A. APA – Engineered Wood Association:
1. APA/EWA PSI 400 – Performance Standard for Wood I Joists.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials:
1. ASTM D2559 – Standard Specification for Adhesives for Structural Laminated Wood
Products for Use Under Exterior (Wet Use) Exposure Conditions.
C. National Evaluation Service (NES): Report No. NER-200.
D. HUD Materials Release: For nonstandard product.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings which indicate sizes and spacings of joists, fastener
description and spacings, loads, framed openings, stamped by a professional engineer
licensed in the State of Oregon. Submit joist configurations, bearing and anchor details,
bridging and bracing.
B. Design Calculations: Submit design calculations that conform to the dimensions and design
loads shown in the drawings, stamped by a professional engineer licensed in the State of
Oregon.
C. HUD Materials Release: Complete and current HUD materials release.
1.5
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Evaluation reports, from ICC-ES.
1.6
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Design members and their connections to supporting structure for the more stringent of the
applied loads and deflection limitations shown on the drawings or as required by the applicable
building code.
B. Where joist size and spacing is indicated on the drawings, products with a lesser strength or
stiffness (EI) shall not be substituted nor shall equivalent products at a larger spacing.
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with the following:
1. I-Joist Quality Assurance Agency.
2. Manufacturers Requirements.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
PRE-FABRICATED PLYWOOD I JOISTS
06 17 33 - 1
3.
4.
1.8
National Evaluation Services (NES) Report NO. NER-200.
APA Design/Construction Guide: I Joists for Residential Floors (Form x 710).
QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with
minimum three years experience.
B. Design joists and associated components under direct supervision of Professional Engineer
experienced in design of this Work and licensed in the State of Oregon.
1.9
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Division 1 Section – Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.
B. Protect structural components from warping or distortion by stacking in vertical position, braced
to resist movement. Protect from weather by covering with waterproofing sheeting, securely
anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Boise Cascade Corporation.
2. Georgia-Pacific.
3. Pacific Woodtech Corporation.
4. Weyerhaeuser Company.
2.2
ACCESSORIES
A. Adhesive: ASTM D2559.
B. Wood Blocking, Support Members and Framing for Openings, beveled plates.
C. Fasteners:
1. Fasteners: Hot dipped galvanized steel for high humidity and treated wood locations,
unfinished steel elsewhere.
2.3
FABRICATION
A. Fabricate joists to achieve structural requirements specified.
B. Brace members for support during transit.
C. Fabricate to achieve minimum end bearing per manufacturer’s requirements.
D. Frame special sized openings in web as indicated on Drawings.
2.4
MATERIALS
A. Flange Material: Structural composite lumber made from wood veneers with grain primarily
parallel to member lengths, evaluated and monitored according to ASTM D 5456 and
manufactured with an exterior-type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559.
B. Web Material: Either oriented strand board or plywood, complying with DOC PS 1 or
DOC PS 2, Exposure 1.
C. Structural Properties: Provide units matching the depths indicated and with design strength
and stiffness (EI) values not less than those indicated.
D. Provide units complying with APA PRI-400, factory marked with APA trademark indicating
nominal joist depth, joist class, span ratings, mill identification, and compliance with APA
standard.
2.5
IDENTIFICATION
A. Each of the joists shall be factory marked with APA trademark indicating nominal joist depth,
joist class, span ratings, mill identification, and compliance with APA standard.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
PRE-FABRICATED PLYWOOD I JOISTS
06 17 33 - 2
A. Division 1 Section – Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B. Verify supports and openings are ready to receive joists.
3.2
PREPARATION
A. Coordinate placement and bearing and support items.
3.3
ERECTION
A. Install products to comply with manufacturer’s written instructions.
B. Set structural members level and plumb, in correct position.
C. Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer’s written instructions.
fasteners in each intended fastener hole.
Install
D. Make provisions for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure
plumb and in alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing.
E. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Architect/Engineer.
F. Do not splice members between supports unless otherwise indicated.
G. Place headers and supports to frame openings.
H. Frame openings between joists with lumber and provide blocking and framing as required to
support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items and trim in accordance with Division 6 Section
“Rough Carpentry”.
I.
3.4
Coordinate placement of sheathing with work of this Section.
STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Joists shall be stored in a vertical position and protected from the weather.
3.5
ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Division 1 Section – Quality Requirements: Tolerances.
B. Framing Members: 1/2” maximum, from indicated position.
END OF SECTION
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
PRE-FABRICATED PLYWOOD I JOISTS
06 17 33 - 3
SECTION 062000
FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Finish carpentry items.
B.
Wood door frames for pre-hung doors.
C.
Wood sills
D.
Hardware and attachment accessories.
E.
Wood base.
F.
Guardrail caps
G. Other items shown on the drawings.
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Support framing, grounds, and concealed blocking.
B.
Section 06 41 00 - Architectural Wood Casework: Shop fabricated custom cabinet work.
C.
Section 08 14 16 - Flush Wood Doors.
D.
Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Painting and finishing of finish carpentry items.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ANSI A208.1 - American National Standard for Particleboard; 1999.
B.
ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2010.
C.
AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2009.
D.
BHMA A156.9 - American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware; Builders Hardware
Manufacturers Association; 2003 (ANSI/BHMA A156.9).
E.
HUD Standard UM 70b Particle Board for Interior Stair Treads.
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Coordinate the work with mechanical rough-in, plumbing rough-in, electrical rough-in,
installation of associated and adjacent components, and other equipment.
B.
Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious
manner.
SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data:
1. Provide instructions for attachment hardware and finish hardware.
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods, jointing details,
and accessories.
1. Provide the information required by AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards.
D.
Samples: Submit two samples of wood trim 6 inches long.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
FINISH CARPENTRY
06 20 00-1
E.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.7
Full documentation that Particle Board stair treads meets HUD 70b criteria.
Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this
section with minimum five years of documented experience.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Protect work from moisture damage.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
FINISH CARPENTRY ITEMS
A.
Quality Grade: Unless otherwise indicated provide products of quality specified by
AWI//AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards for Premium Grade.
B.
Surface Burning Characteristics: Provide materials having fire and smoke properties as
required by applicable code.
C.
Interior Woodwork Items:
1. Moldings, Bases, Casings, and Miscellaneous Trim: MDF prepare for paint finish.
a. Wall base: 1 x 4 MDF painted
b. Door trim: 1 x 3 MDF painted
2. Window Sills: MDF prepare for paint finish.
SHEET MATERIALS
A.
2.3
2.4
SHEET MATERIALS
A.
Wainscot Sheathing : APA PRP-108, Structural I Rated Sheathing, Exposure 1, and as follows:
1. Span Rating: 24/0 (610/0).
2. Thickness: 3/4 inch, nominal.
B.
Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: PS 1 A-D plywood, or medium
density fiberboard; 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick; flame spread index of 25 or less, smoke
developed index of 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
FASTENINGS
A.
2.5
2.8
Adhesive for Purposes Other Than Laminate Installation: Suitable for the purpose; not
containing formaldehyde or other volatile organic compounds.
B.
Fasteners: Of size and type to suit application; zinc-plated finish in concealed locations.
C.
Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Primer: as specified in Section 09 90 00.
B.
Wood Filler: water base, tinted to match surface finish color.
C.
Metal Edge Trim: Schluter ECK-K
HARDWARE
A.
2.9
Medium Density Firberboard MDF: ANSI A208.1; composed of wood chips, sawdust, or flakes
of medium density, made with waterproof resin binders; of grade to suit application; sanded
faces.
1. Density: 49 lbs per cubic foot.
2. Formaldehyde: No added formaldehyde
3. Moisture content: 5.5 percent maximum
4. Thickness: as shown
5. Width as shown.
Hardware: Comply with BHMA A156.9.
FABRICATION
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
FINISH CARPENTRY
06 20 00-2
A.
Shop assemble work for delivery to site, permitting passage through building openings.
B.
When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting.
Provide trim for scribing and site cutting.
2.10 SHOP FINISHING
A.
Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws.
B.
Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations.
C.
Prep and prime for opaque (painted) finish
D.
Back prime woodwork items to be field finished, prior to installation.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.
B.
Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting work of this section are placed and
ready to receive this work.
INSTALLATION
A.
3.3
3.4
Install work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards
requirements for grade indicated.
B.
Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level.
C.
Carefully scribe work abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use
additional overlay trim to conceal larger gaps.
D.
Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
PREPARATION FOR SITE FINISHING
A.
Set exposed fasteners. Apply wood filler in exposed fastener indentations. Sand work smooth.
B.
Site Finishing: See Section 09 90 00.
C.
Before installation, prime paint surfaces of items or assemblies to be in contact with
cementitious materials.
TOLERANCES
A.
Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/16 inch.
B.
Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials: 1/32 inch.
END OF SECTION
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
FINISH CARPENTRY
06 20 00-3
SECTION 064100
ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Specially fabricated cabinet units.
B.
Countertops.
C.
Cabinet hardware.
D.
Factory finishing.
E.
Rigid Thermal foil doors and accessories
F.
Preparation for installing utilities.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications: Countertop supports.
B.
Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Support framing, grounds, and concealed blocking.
C.
Section 09 30 00 - Tiling: Tiling of countertops.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ANSI A208.1 - American National Standard for Particleboard; 1999.
B.
AWI (QCP) - Quality Certification Program, www.awiqcp.org; current edition at
www.awiqcp.org.
C.
AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2009.
D.
BHMA A156.9 - American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware; Builders Hardware
Manufacturers Association; 2003 (ANSI/BHMA A156.9).
E.
HPVA HP-1 - American National Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood; Hardwood
Plywood & Veneer Association; 2004 (ANSI/HPVA HP-1).
F.
NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; National Electrical Manufacturers
Association; 2005.
G.
PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; National Institute of Standards and Technology
(Department of Commerce); 2005.
H.
1.4
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.5
Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting not less than one week before
starting work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers.
SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods, jointing details,
and accessories.
1. Provide the information required by AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards.
C.
Product Data: Provide data for hardware accessories.
D.
Samples: Submit actual samples of architectural cabinet construction, minimum 12 inches
square, illustrating proposed cabinet, countertop, and shelf unit substrate and finish.
E.
Samples: Submit actual sample items of proposed pulls, hinges, shelf standards, and locksets,
demonstrating hardware design, quality, and finish.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK
06 41 00 - 1
1.6
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this
section with minimum five years of documented experience.
1. Accredited participant in the specified certification program prior to the commencement of
fabrication and throughout the duration of the project.
B.
Quality Certification: Provide AWI Quality Certification Program inspection report and quality
certification of completed work.
1. Provide labels or certificates indicating that the work complies with requirements of AWS
Grade or Grades specified.
MOCK-UP
A.
1.8
B.
Locate where directed.
C.
Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.9
Provide mock-up of typical base cabinet, wall cabinet, and countertop, including hardware,
finishes, and plumbing accessories.
Protect units from moisture damage.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
During and after installation of custom cabinets, maintain temperature and humidity conditions
in building spaces at same levels planned for occupancy.
PART 200PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Northwest Caseworks, LLC; www.nwcaseworks.net
B.
Lanz Cabinets
C.
McCarthy Manufacturing
A.D. Merrilatt
B.E. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
C.F. Single Source Responsibility: Provide and install this work from single fabricator.
2.2
2.3
CABINETS
A.
Quality Grade: Unless otherwise indicated provide products of quality specified by
AWI//AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards for Custom Grade.
B.
Plastic Laminate Faced Cabinets: Custom grade.
C.
Cabinets at Apartment Units:
1. Finish - Exposed Exterior Surfaces: Decorative laminate.
2. Finish - Exposed Interior Surfaces: Decorative laminate.
3. Finish - Concealed Surfaces: Decorative laminate.
4. Door and Drawer Front Edge Profiles: Square edge with thin applied band.
5. Door and Drawer Front Retention Profiles: Fixed panel.
6. Casework Construction Type: Type A - Frameless.
7. Interface Style for Cabinet and Door: Style 1 - Overlay; reveal overlay.
8. Cabinet Style: Flush overlay.
9. Cabinet Doors and Drawer Fronts: Flush style - ZUNI
10. Drawer Side Construction: Doweled.
11. Drawer Construction Technique: Dowel joints.
WOOD-BASED COMPONENTS
A.
Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.
B.
Provide wood harvested within a 500 mile radius of the project site.
C.
Wood fabricated from timber recovered from riverbeds or otherwise abandoned is permitted,
unless otherwise noted, provided it is clean and free of contamination; identify source; provide
ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
06 41 00 - 2
lumber re-graded by an inspection service accredited by the American Lumber Standard
Committee, Inc.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK
06 41 00 - 3
2.4
LAMINATE MATERIALS
A.
2.5
COUNTERTOPS
A.
2.6
2.7
2.8
Tile Countertops: Tile bonded to substrate after installation of substrate on cabinet. Provide
alternate for plastic laminate with metal edge.
1. Location: Apartment Kitchen countertops.
a. T-1 Tile: Through body porcelain tile.
2. Location: Apartment bathroom countertops
a. T-2Tile: Through body porcelain tile.
3. Adhesive and Grout: Materials and installation as specified in Section 09 30 00.
4. Substrate: Plywood.
5. Exposed Edge Treatment: nosing as indicated on drawings.
6. Back and End Splashes: Same material, coved joint, bullnose top edge.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Adhesive: Type recommended by fabricator to suit application complying with VOC limitations
as defined by
B.
Fasteners: Size and type to suit application.
C.
Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Of size and type to suit application; galvanized
or chrome-plated finish in concealed locations and stainless steel finish in exposed locations.
D.
Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel.
E.
Grommets: Standard painted metal or rubber grommets for cut-outs, in color to match adjacent
surface.
HARDWARE
A.
Hardware: BHMA A156.9, types as scheduled for quality grade specified.
B.
Adjustable Shelf Supports: Standard side-mounted system using recessed metal shelf
standards or multiple holes for pin supports and coordinated self rests, polished chrome finish,
for nominal 1 inch spacing adjustments.
C.
Drawer and Door Pulls: "U" shaped wire pull, steel with satin finish, 4 inch centers.
D.
Catches: Magnetic.
E.
Drawer Slides:
1. Type: Standard extension.
2. Static Load Capacity: Commercial grade.
3. Mounting: Side mounted.
4. Stops: Integral type.
5. Features: Provide self closing/stay closed type.
F.
Hinges: European style concealed self-closing type, BHMA No. 646, steel with satin finish.
G.
Pulls: 5/16” dia. Metal rod pulls - Mockett DP55A
SITE FINISHING MATERIALS
A.
2.9
Manufacturers:
1. Brentwood Corp. Rigid Thermal foil Products; www.brendwoodcorp.com (doors, drawers,
fronts and trims.
2. Wilsonart International, Inc: www.wilsonart.com.
3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
Finishing: Site finished as specified in Section 09 90 00.
FABRICATION
A.
Assembly: Shop assemble cabinets for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit
passage through building openings.
B.
Edging: Fit shelves, doors, and exposed edges with specified edging. Do not use more than
one piece for any single length.
C. Fitting: When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for
ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
06 41 00 - 4
cutting. Provide matching trim for scribing and site cutting.
D.
Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures. Verify locations of cutouts from on-site dimensions.
Prime paint cut edges.
2.10 SHOP FINISHING
A.
Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws.
B.
For opaque finishes, apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations and sand smooth.
C.
Finish work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards, Section 5
- Finishing for Grade specified and as follows:
1. Opaque:
a. System - 4, Latex Acrylic, Water-based.
b. Color: As selected by Architect.
c. Sheen: Flat.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.
B.
Verify location and sizes of utility rough-in associated with work of this section.
INSTALLATION
A.
Set and secure custom cabinets in place, assuring that they are rigid, plumb, and level.
B.
Use fixture attachments in concealed locations for wall mounted components.
C.
Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units.
D.
Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not
use additional overlay trim for this purpose.
E.
Secure cabinets to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages.
F.
Coordinate installation of utilities including mechanical, plumbing and electrical items.
ADJUSTING
A.
Test installed work for rigidity and ability to support loads.
B.
Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly.
CLEANING
A.
Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings, and fixtures.
END OF SECTION
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK
06 41 00 - 5
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
071300
071713
071800
071900
072100
0725 00
074646
075400
0762 00
077200
078400
079005
SHEET WATERPROOFING
BENTONITE PANEL WATERPROOFING
TRAFFIC COATING
WATER REPELLENTS
THERMAL INSULATION
WEATHER BARRIERS
FIBER CEMENT SIDING
THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
ROOF ACCESSORIES
FIRESTOPPING
JOINT SEALERS
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
SECTION 071300
SHEET WATERPROOFING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Sheet membrane.
B.
Cant strips and other accessories.
C.
Drainage panels and Protection boards.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Concrete substrate.
B.
Section 07 25 00 – Weather Barriers
C.
Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Metal parapet, coping, and counter
flashing.
D.
Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers: Sealant for joints in substrates.
E.
Section 22 10 06 - Plumbing Piping Specialties: Roof drain and plumbing vent flashing flanges.
F.
Section 32 14 13 - Precast Concrete Paving: Finished walking surfaces over sheet membrane
waterproofing.
G.
Section 32 - Exterior Improvements: Landscape planter construction.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM D 412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic ElastomersTension; 2006a.
B.
ASTM D 570 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics; 1998 (Reapproved
2005).
C.
ASTM D 624 - Standard Test Method For Tear Strength of Conventional Vulcanized Rubber
and Thermoplastic Elastomers; 2000 (Reapproved 2007).
D.
ASTM E 96/E 96M - Standard Test Methods For Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2005.
E.
NRCA ML104 - The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual; National Roofing Contractors
Association; Fifth Edition, with interim updates.
SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide data for membrane, surface conditioner, flexible flashings, joint cover
sheet, and joint and crack sealants.
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate special joint or termination conditions and conditions of interface with
other materials.
D.
Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
E.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions
requiring special attention, and acceptable installation temperatures.
F.
Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's
name and registered with manufacturer.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Membrane Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in waterproofing sheet
membranes with 20 years experience.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section approved
by manufacturer.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
SHEET WATERPROOFING
07 13 00 - 1
1.6
MOCK-UP
A.
1.7
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
1.8
Construct mockup 100 sq ft of horizontal waterproofed panel; to represent finished work
including internal and external corners.
Maintain ambient temperatures above 40 degrees F for 24 hours before and during application
and until liquid or mastic accessories have cured.
WARRANTY
A.
See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B.
Contractor shall correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial
Completion; remove and replace materials concealing waterproofing at no extra cost to Owner.
C.
Provide five year manufacturer warranty for waterproofing failing to resist penetration of water ,
except where such failures are the result of structural failures of building. Hairline cracking of
concrete due to temperature change or shrinkage is not considered a structural failure.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
2.3
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Siplast ; 2-PLY SBS.
B.
Other Acceptable Modified Bituminous Manufacturers:
1. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com.
2. Koppers Inc: www.koppers.com.
3. U.S. Intec, Inc: www.usintec.com.
3.4. Fortifiber
4.5. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
MEMBRANE MATERIALS
A.
Sheet Waterproofing - General: Modified bituminous membrane, adhesive bonded.
1. Product: Paradiene 20 TG / 30 FR TG manufactured by Siplast.
B.
Modified Bituminous Membrane: Asphalt and polymer modifiers of styrene-butadiene-styrene
(SBS) type, reinforced with non-woven polyester; smooth surfaced.
1. Formulated for seaming by heat welding.
2. Thickness: 90 Mils.
3. Tensile Strength: 90 psi, measured in accordance with ASTM D 412.
4. Ultimate Elongation: 35 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D 412.
5. Water Absorption: Method I, 0.8 percent increase in weight, maximum, measured in
accordance with ASTM D 570, water immersion.
C.
Seaming Materials: As recommended by membrane manufacturer.
D.
Membrane Sealant: As recommended by membrane manufacturer.
E.
Flexible Flashings: .060 inch thick thermoplastic flashing membrane with fiberglass
reinforcement..
1. Product: Sarnafil G476-20 manufactured by Sika Sarnafil.
F.
Termination Bars: Aluminum; compatible with membrane and adhesives.
G.
Surface Conditioner: water-based type, compatible with membrane as recommended by
membrane manufacturer.
H.
Adhesives: As recommended by membrane manufacturer.
I.
Thinner and Cleaner: As recommended by adhesive manufacturer, compatible with sheet
membrane.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Separation Layer: Non-asphaltic slip sheet consisting of a polyethylene material not less the 6
mils
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
SHEET WATERPROOFING
07 13 00 - 2
B.
Drainage Composite: 100% recycled polypropylene drainage core of fused, entangle filaments
with a geocomposite fabric bonded to each side.
1. Product: Siplast Paradiene Drianage Mat by Siplast; Irving, TX
C.
Counter flashings: SM-3 as specified in Section 07 62 00.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify existing conditions before starting work. Proceed with waterproofing membrane
installation only after substrate preparation is complete. Owner’s representative and
waterproofing Applicator must accept substrate before proceeding with membrane installation.
B.
Verify substrate surfaces are durable; free of matter detrimental to adhesion or application of
waterproofing system.
C.
Verify that items that penetrate surfaces to receive waterproofing are securely installed.
PREPARATION
A.
Protect adjacent surfaces not designated to receive waterproofing.
B.
Clean and prepare surfaces to receive waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions. Vacuum substrate clean.
C.
Do not apply waterproofing to surfaces unacceptable to membrane manufacturer.
D.
Seal cracks and joints with sealant using depth to width ratio as recommended by sealant
manufacturer.
E.
Surfaces for Adhesive Bonding: Apply surface conditioner at a rate recommended by
manufacturer. Protect conditioner from rain or frost until dry.
INSTALLATION - MEMBRANE
A.
Adhesion test strips are required prior to actual installation. Test strips approximately 6 inches
wide by 1-1/2 feet long shall be installed by the applicator to test the adhesion prior to the
actual installation in representative areas. Do not install self-adhered membrane until a
successful adhesion test has been completed. Refer to membrane manufacturer's quality
assurance requirements for additional information.
B.
Install membrane waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Roll out membrane. Minimize wrinkles and bubbles.
D.
Self-Adhering Membrane: Remove release paper layer. Roll out on substrate with a
mechanical roller to encourage full contact bond.
E.
Overlap edges and ends and seal by method recommended by manufacturer, minimum 3
inches. Seal permanently waterproof.
F.
Reinforce membrane with multiple thickness of membrane material over joints, whether joints
are static or dynamic.
G.
Weather lap joints on sloped substrate in direction of drainage. Seal joints and seams.
H.
Coordinate with drain installation; see Section 22 10 06.
I.
Install flexible flashings. Seal items penetrating through membrane with flexible flashings. Seal
watertight to membrane.
J.
Extend membrane over cants and up intersecting surfaces at membrane perimeter minimum 6
inches above horizontal surface for first ply and
_ inches at subsequent plies laid in shingle
fashion.
K.
Seal membrane and flashings to adjoining surfaces. Install termination bar at all edges. Install
counterflashing over all exposed edges.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
SHEET WATERPROOFING
07 13 00 - 3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
INSTALLATION - SEPARATION LAYER AND DRAINAGE COMPOSITE/DRAINAGE PANEL
A.
Install separation layer over the completed waterproof membrane in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Place drainage composite over separation layer, butt joints, place to encourage drainage
downward and cover all all cut edges in order to protect the waterproofing membrane from
damage.
INSULATION AND FILTER FABRIC
A.
Install specified insulation over drainage composite in parallel courses with end joints staggered
and tightly butted.
B.
Insulation shall be neatly cut to fit around penetrations and projections.
C.
Do not install more insulation than can be covered by overburden by the end of the day.
D.
Install filter fabric with proper overlaps according to manufacturer's instructions.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Owner will provide testing services in accordance with Section 01 40 00 - Quality
Requirements. Contractor shall provide temporary construction and materials for testing.
B.
On completion of horizontal membrane installation, dam installation area in preparation for
flood testing.
C.
Flood deck to minimum depth of 4 inch with clean water. Flood planters to full depth of planter
with clean water. After 48 hours, inspect for leaks.
D.
If leaking is found, remove water, repair leaking areas with new waterproofing materials as
directed by Architect; repeat flood test. Repair damage to building.
E.
When area is proven watertight, drain water and remove dam.
PROTECTION
A.
Do not permit traffic over unprotected or uncovered membrane.
END OF SECTION
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
SHEET WATERPROOFING
07 13 00 - 4
SECTION 071713
BENTONITE PANEL WATERPROOFING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Bentonite clay waterproofing panels and accessories, underslab
B.
Bentonite clay waterproofing panels and accessories, below grade walls with drainage panels
and protection boards.
C.
Protection boards.
D.
Drainage panels.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Concrete slab-on-grade requirements.
B.
Section 31 23 23 - Fill.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
NRCA ML104 - The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual; National Roofing Contractors
Association; Fifth Edition, with interim updates.
SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide product criteria, characteristics, accessories, jointing and seaming
methods, and termination conditions.
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate required flashings, sealing at openings and penetrations.
D.
Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
E.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special preparation of substrate, panel
attachment methods, hot and cold weather requirements, and perimeter conditions requiring
special attention.
F.
Water Sample Test Result: Submit a water sample (2 liters) to waterproofing manufacturer to
test for contamination and compatibility with waterproofing membrane. Submit to Owner a letter
of compatibility recommending the appropriate waterproofing formulation for the project
conditions.
G.
Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's
name and registered with manufacturer.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform Work in accordance with NRCA Waterproofing and Dampproofing Manual.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum five years experience.
MOCK-UP
A.
Construct mock-up of 100 sq ft of horizontal waterproofing, representing finished work including
internal and external corners and sealing.
B.
Locate where directed.
C.
Mockup may remain as part of the Work.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Maintain bentonite products dry. Protect with waterproof cover.
B.
Maintain minimum ambient storage temperatures of 40 degrees F for bentonite gel products.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Maintain ambient temperatures above 40 degrees F for 24 hours before and during application.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
BENTONITE PANEL WATERPROOFING
07 17 13 - 1
1.9
WARRANTY
A.
See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B.
Contractor shall correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial
Completion; remove and replace materials concealing waterproofing at no extra cost to Owner.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
2.3
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Tremco, www.tremcosealants.com ; Product Paraseal.
B.
Other Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Cetco, www.buildingmaterials.cetco.com: Voltex DS
2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
MATERIALS
A.
Where indicated on the Drawings, provide a complete dual-waterproofing, resealable,
composite sheet membrane system composed of high-density polyethylene with a sodiumbentonite face designed for buried concrete or masonry construction having the following
attributes.
B.
Membrane properties: Equal to "Paraseal Membrane," for use on buried vertical and horizontal
conditions such as backfilled foundation walls, between-slab plaza and parking decks, below
slab with bentonite-side down, earth-covered roofs, retaining walls and ponds:
1. Puncture resistance:
169 lbs.
ASTM E154
2. Tensile strength:
4,000 psi
ASTM D412
3. Water vapor permeance:
0.03 perms ASTM E96
1. Percent elongation:
700 percent ASTM D638, Type 4 Dumbbell
5. Resistance to hydrostatic head:
150 feet
ASTM D751
6. Warranted crack-bridging capability:1/8 inch
7. VOC ContentL
0g/L US EPA Method 310
C.
Bentonite: Granulated pure, dry, bentonite clay comprised of 90 percent minimum sodium
montmorillonite; 90 percent minimum passing No. 20 mesh sieve and 10 percent maximum
passing No. 200 mesh sieve.
D.
Nominal Panel Size: 48 x 288 inches.
1. Minimum Bentonite Fill: 1 lb/sq ft.
2. Minimum Panel Weight: 18 lbs.
E.
Joint Packing: Hydrobar Tubes.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Bentonite Panel Accessories
1. For installation at horizontal-to-vertical junctures, provide "Paragranular" loose bentonite
granules in weatherproof 50 lb. bags and capable of swelling to occupy a minimum
volume of 17 ml when 2 grams are dispersed into deionized water.
2. For detailing vertical junctures and penetrations, provide "Paramastic" non-hydrated
expandable mastic of trowel grade consistency containing not less that 55 percent high
swelling Wyoming sodium bentonite.
3. Provide the following fasteners as needed:
a. Case-hardened steel nail with fluted shank having a minimum 1" length and a
minimum 1" diameter cap for use on green concrete and masonry substrates.
b. Powder shot steel pin having a minimum 3/4" diameter washer for use on hardened
concrete and grouted masonry substrates.
c. Steel staples approved by membrane manufacturer for use according to Project
conditions.
4. Provide the following seam tapes as needed:
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
BENTONITE PANEL WATERPROOFING
07 17 13 - 2
a.
" Permanent Seam Tape" reinforced, rubberized-asphaltic waterproofing seam tape
4" wide by 60 mils thick for sealing membrane overlaps wherever flood-testing is
required and elsewhere as required by Project conditions or designs.
b. " Para JT Tape" non-reinforced, adhesive tape of partially cross-linked polymeric
elastomers 2" wide by 1/8" thick for molding form-fit seals around difficult contours
and for taping seams within overlaps.
5. Provide "Paraterm Bar" extruded aluminum bar with upper flange to receive sealant for
terminations at grade line and on parapet walls.
6. Provide "Vulkem 116 Sealant" for completing termination seals and other sealing
recommended by manufacturer meeting 4% max VOC content by weight when supplied in
a 10.1 floz. tube.
7. Provide "TremProof 250GCC” for polyurethane, liquid-applied, elastomeric waterproofing
flashing meeting SCAQMD mandated VOC level of 100g/L max.
8. Provide "Parastick'N'Dry" pressure sensitive, double-sided tape laminate of bentonite
sandwiched between a netting and non-woven fabric for wrapping through-concrete
imbeds and other detailing.
9. Provide "Superstop" flexible, reinforced, bentonite-laminate waterstop strips 1/2" by 1" by
20' -0" with pressure-sensitive adhesive backing for sealing static cold joints in concrete.
10. Provide "Paraprimer" versatile adhesive bonding agent primer formulated for use with
tapes and pressure-sensitive waterproofing accessories.
11. Provide an TremDrain 1000 drainage mat from the TREMDrain series of products
composed of a filter fabric laminated to free-draining high-density dimpled polystrene
drainage core. Consisting of 50% by weight recycled content.
B.
Accessories
1. Adhesive: Manufacturer's recommended type.
2. Drainage Panel: 1/4 inch thick formed plastic, hollowed sandwich, as recommended by
Bentonite pane manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B.
Verify substrate surfaces are smooth and durable; free of matter detrimental to application of
waterproofing system.
C.
Verify that items that penetrate surfaces to receive waterproofing are securely installed.
PREPARATION
A.
Clean and prepare surfaces to receive waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
B.
Remove concrete fins, projections, and form ties.
C.
Fill holes, cracks, honeycombs, and voids with bentonite gel seal, minimum 1/8 inch thick,
extending minimum 3 inches beyond defect.
APPLICATION - GENERAL
A.
Install panels in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Cut panels parallel to corrugations to prevent bentonite loss.
C.
Seal construction joints with joint seal.
APPLICATION - VERTICAL SURFACES
A.
Install single-ply panels with masonry nails , starting at base of foundation.
B.
Fold panels around corners with corrugations vertical. Install unfolded panels with corrugations
horizontal.
C.
Lap adjoining panels 1-1/2 inches.
D.
Stagger vertical joints at mid-panel on succeeding courses.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
BENTONITE PANEL WATERPROOFING
07 17 13 - 3
3.5
3.6
3.7
E.
Stagger vertical joints minimum 16 inches on succeeding courses.
F.
Install one extra layer of panels at external corners.
G.
Place joint packing continuous along junction of wall and footing. Secure to prevent movement.
APPLICATION - BELOW SLABS UNDER HYDROSTATIC CONDITIONS
A.
Lay single-ply panels in slab form. Align panels with edge of slab. Do not lay panels over pile
caps or footings supporting slab edges. Stagger joints of adjoining panel rows.
B.
Lap joints minimum 4 inch. Secure laps to prevent displacement.
C.
Extend panels up vertical surfaces minimum 12 inches.
D.
Install joint seal in 1 inch high beads around penetrations through panels and 1/2 inch high
beads around chair legs not placed on pads. Cover beads with polyethylene sheet collars, cut
to size.
E.
Lay joint seal continuously along and around protrusions, penetrations, and at abutting walls.
Secure to prevent movement.
INSTALLATION - DRAINAGE PANEL AT VERTICAL SURFACES
A.
Place drainage panel directly over waterproofing, butt joints, place to encourage drainage
downward.
B.
Scribe and cut panels around projections, penetrations, and interruptions.
PROTECTION
A.
Do not permit traffic over unprotected or uncovered waterproofing.
B.
Cover installed waterproofing with temporary polyethylene sheeting. Do not allow panels to be
exposed to moisture. Replace damaged or wet panels prior to placing reinforcement and
concrete above. Remove sheeting just before backfilling or concrete pouring begins.
END OF SECTION
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
BENTONITE PANEL WATERPROOFING
07 17 13 - 4
SECTION 071800
TRAFFIC COATINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Preparation of Substrate to Receive Pedestrian Traffic Waterproofing
B. Pedestrian Traffic Waterproofing/Flashing Application
1.2
REFERENCE STANDARDS
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
A.
ASTM D 412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic ElastomersTension; 2006a.
B.
ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2010.
C.
ASTM E 96/E 96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2005.
SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Include product characteristics and limitations. Identify dissolving solvents,
fuels, and potential destructive compounds.
C.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include special environmental conditions required to
install traffic membrane and potential incompatibilities with adjacent materials.
D.
Maintenance Data: Include procedures for stain removal, repairing surface, and cleaning.
E.
Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in
Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products of the type
specified in this section, with not less than three years of documented experience.
B.
Applicator Qualifications: Contractor shall be certified in writing by the waterproofing materials
manufacturer to install the primary waterproofing products
MOCK-UP
A.
Provide one mock-up, at elevated deck with membrane system applied to representative
substrate.
B.
Locate where directed.
C.
Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Maintain storage area at minimum ambient temperature of 55 degrees F.
B.
Keep away from fire or open flame.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Do not install materials when temperature is below 50 degrees F or above 90 degrees F.
B.
Maintain this temperature range, 24 hours before, during and 72 hours after application.
C.
Restrict traffic from area where materials are being installed or are curing.
WARRANTY
A.
See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B.
Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
C.
Provide five year manufacturer warranty for removal and replacement.
1. Include coverage for delamination of system from substrate.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
TRAFFIC COATINGS
07 18 00 - 1
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
Traffic Coating:
1. Pli-Dek ICC-ES ESR-2097
2. Neogard Pedaguard (matching Pli-Dek thickness, quality, warranty, detail)
2.3. WestCoat (matching Pli-Dek thickness, quality, warranty, detail)
3.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
TRAFFIC COATINGS
A. Liquid Applied Pedestrian Traffic Waterproofing System: A reinforced fluid-applied, self-leveling
Polyacrylic emulsion waterproofing system, having an aggregate surfacing or colored abrasion
resistant topcoat as selected by owner/specifier from manufacturer’s standard palette of colors.
Pli-Dek ICC-ES ESR-2097
Provide alternate urethane top coat.
2.3
MATERIALS
A. Membrane/Flashing Waterproofing
1. GU80-1 Base Coat (gray): A Portland Cement and silicon dioxide composition that is to be
mixed with GU80-1 Liquid Admixture.
2. GU80-1 Liquid Admixture: An acrylic polymer emulsion.
Fiberglass Mat: Chopped strand ¾ oz. woven mat.
3. PD Resin Base Coat: A high build elastomeric acrylic resin.
4. GU80-a Top Coat/Custom Top coat (white) A Portland cement and silicon dioxide composition
to be mixed with GU80-1 Liquid Admixture.
5. GS88-1 Sealer: Pigmented water based coating.
6. GS99-1 Sealer: Water based, clear sealer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
3.3
3.4
Verify that substrate is ready to receive work, surface is clean, dry and free of substances that
could adversely affect bond.
PREPARATION
A.
Clean substrate surface free of foreign matter.
B.
Patch concrete substrate with filler to produce surface conducive to bond.
C.
Install cant strips securely at intersecting surfaces.
D.
Protect adjacent surfaces.
INSTALLATION
A.
Apply system materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Apply surfacing to top coat before set.
C.
Apply sealant to junction of horizontal and intersecting surfaces to achieve watertight seal.
PROTECTION
A.
Do not permit traffic over unprotected surfaces.
END OF SECTION
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
TRAFFIC COATINGS
07 18 00- 6
SECTION 071900
WATER REPELLENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.2
1.3
1.4
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 01 61 16 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions.
B.
Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM D 3960 - Standard Practice for Determining Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content
of Paints and Related Coatings; 2005.
B.
ASTM D 5095 - Standard Test Method for Determination of the Nonvolatile Content in Silanes,
Siloxanes, and Silane-Siloxane Blends Used in Masonry Water Repellent Treatments; 1991
(Reapproved 2007).
C.
MPI (APL) - Master Painters Institute Approved Products List; Master Painters and Decorators
Association; current edition, www.paintinfo.com.
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
Water repellents / paint repellent applied to exterior concrete surfaces.
Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a meeting at least one week prior to starting work; require
attendance of affected installers; invite Architect and Owner.
SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide product description, details of tests performed, limitations, and chemical
composition.
C.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and conditions requiring
special attention; cautionary procedures required during application.
D.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in
this section with minimum three years documented experience.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum three years experience.
C.
Owner reserves the right to provide continuous independent inspection of surface preparation
and application of water repellent.
MOCK-UP
A.
Prepare a representative surface 36 by 36 inch in size using specified materials and
preparation and application methods on surfaces identical to those to be coated; approved
mock-up constitutes standard for workmanship.
B.
For proposed substitutions, prepare side-by-side mock-ups of specified and substitute products.
C.
Locate where directed.
D.
Mockup may not remain as part of the Work.
E.
Mockup to be ‘tagged’ and tested for graffiti removal using manufacturer’s recommended
cleaner and cleaning process.
FIELD CONDITIONS
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
WATER REPELLENTS
07 19 00 - 1
A.
Do not apply water repellent when ambient temperature is lower than 50 degrees F or higher
than 100 degrees F.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Acrylic Water Repellents:
1. Prosocol; www.prosoco.com
2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B.
Silane Water Repellents:
1. Prosoco SL 100
MATERIALS
A.
Exact product to be used will be determined by mock-up testing meeting specified
requirements; prepare mock ups as specified above; submit cost breakdown for each
product used in mock-up, including both unit and total costs.
B.
Water Repellent: Non-glossy, colorless, penetrating, water-vapor-permeable, non-yellowing
sealer, that dries invisibly leaving appearance of substrate unchanged.
1. Applications: Vertical surfaces and non-traffic horizontal surfaces.
2. Number of Coats: As required by manufacturer.
3. VOC Content: As specified in Section 01 61 16.
4. Moisture Absorption When Applied to Masonry: 5 percent, maximum, when tested in
accordance with ASTM C 140 using masonry sample completely coated with water
repellent.
5. Maintains dry appearance when wetted.
6. Products: Solvent-based silane, or blend that reacts chemically with concrete and
masonry; minimum 62 percent nonvolatile content by weight.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B.
Verify joint sealants are installed and cured.
C.
Verify surfaces to be coated are dry, clean, and free of efflorescence, oil, or other matter
detrimental to application of water repellent.
PREPARATION
A.
Protection of Adjacent Work:
1. Protect adjacent landscaping, property, and vehicles from drips and overspray.
2. Protect adjacent surfaces not intended to receive water repellent.
B.
Prepare surfaces to be coated as recommended by water repellent manufacturer for best
results.
C.
Remove loose particles and foreign matter.
D.
Allow surfaces to dry completely to degree recommended by water repellent manufacturer
before starting coating work.
APPLICATION
A.
Apply water repellent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, using procedures and
application methods recommended as producing the best results.
B.
Apply per manufacturer written requirements, minimum.
C.
Remove water repellent from unintended surfaces immediately by a method instructed by water
repellent manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
WATER REPELLENTS
07 19 00 - 2
SECTION 072100
THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Batt insulation in exterior wall construction
B.
Mineral Wool Board insulation at exterior wall rainscreen
C.
Acoustic Batt insulation in wood floor construction
D.
Acoustic Batt insulation in framed walls
E.
Batt insulation with on underside of first floor slab
F.
Batt insulation for filling perimeter window and door shim spaces and crevices in exterior wall
and roof.
G.
Acoustic Duct Liner
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Structural General Notes: Rigid Polystrene Insulation: Geofoam.
B.
Section 05 40 00 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Supporting construction for batt insulation.
C.
Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Supporting construction for batt insulation.
D.
Section 07 13 00 - Sheet Waterproofing: Rigid insulation over membrane waterproofing.
E.
Section 07 25 00 - Weather Barriers: Separate air barrier and vapor retarder materials.
F.
Section 07 54 00 - Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing: Insulation specified as part of roofing
system. (INSUL- 6)
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM C 552 - Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation; 2007.
B.
ASTM C 578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation; 2009.
C.
ASTM C 612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation;
2009.
D.
ASTM C 665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light
Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2006.
E.
ASTM D 2842 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular Plastics; 2006.
F.
ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2010.
G.
ASTM E 96/E 96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2005.
H.
ASTM E 136 - Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace At
750 Degrees C; 2009b.
I.
UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
J.
HUD UM 71a - HUD building product standards and certification program for polystyrene foam
insulaiton board.
SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, and product
limitations.
C.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include information on special environmental
conditions required for installation and installation techniques.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
THERMAL INSULATION
07 21 00 -1
D.
1.5
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Do not install insulation adhesives when temperature or weather conditions are detrimental to
successful installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
2.3
APPLICATIONS
A.
Insulation at Perimeter of Foundation: Extruded polystyrene board.
B.
Insulation Inside Masonry Cavity Walls: Insul -2 / 2A Mineral Wool Board board.
C.
Insulation on top of waterproof membrane at Courtyard: Expanded polystyrene board.
D.
Insulation at underside of First Floor concrete slab: Batt insulation with separate vapor retarder.
E.
Insulation in Metal Framed Walls: Batt insulation with no vapor retarder.
F.
Insulation in Wood Framed Walls: Batt insulation with no vapor retarder.
G.
Acoustic Insulation in Metal and Wood Framed Floors and Walls: Batt insulation with no vapor
retarder.
FOAM BOARD INSULATION MATERIALS
A.
2.4
Insulation:
1. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com.
2. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com.
3. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com.
4. Thermafiber, Inc: www.thermafiber.com.
5. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, Type X; Extruded polystyrene board with
cut cell surfaces; with the following characteristics:
1. Flame Spread Index: 75 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
2. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
3. Board Size: 48 x 96 inch. Or 48 x 48 inch.
4. Board Thickness: 4 Inches or R-22 mininmum.
5. Board Edges: Square.
6. Thermal Conductivity (k factor) at 25 degrees F: 0.2.
7. Compressive Resistance: 25 psi.
8. Board Density: 1.3 lb/cu ft.
9. Water Absorption, maximum: 0.1 percent, volume.
10. Manufacturers:
a. Dow Chemical Co: www.dow.com.
b. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com.
c. Firestone
11. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
FIBER BOARD INSULATION MATERIALS
A.
Glass Matt Faced Roofboard: Unfaced flame spread index of 0 (zero) when tested in
accordance with ASTM E 84.
B.
Smoke Developed Index: 0 (zero), when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
C.
Board Size: 48 x 48 inch.
D.
Board Thickness: 1/4 inch or per roofing manufacturer.
E.
Manufacturers:
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
THERMAL INSULATION
07 21 00 -2
F.
2.5
1.
Densdeck
2.
Isogard
Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
BATT INSULATION MATERIALS
A.
Where batt insulation is indicated, either glass fiber or mineral fiber batt insulation may be used,
at Contractor's option, unless indicated on drawings for acoustic or firerating.
B.
Glass Fiber Batt Insulation: Flexible preformed batt or blanket, complying with ASTM C 665;
friction fit.
1. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
2. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
3. Combustibility: Non-combustible, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 136.
4. Formaldehyde Content: Zero.
5. Thermal Resistance: Per drawings.
6. Thickness: as required.
7. Facing: Unfaced.
8. Manufacturers:
a. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com.
b. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com.
c. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com.
9. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
C.
Mineral Fiber Batt Insulation: Flexible preformed batt or blanket, complying with ASTM C 665;
friction fit; unfaced flame spread index of 0 (zero) when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
1. Location: At all assemblies requiring fire-rated acoustical construction.
2. Smoke Developed Index: 0 (zero), when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
3. Thickness: Per drawings.
4. Manufacturers:
a. Thermafiber, Inc: www.thermafiber.com.
b. Roxul: Product: www.roxul.com.
c. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
D.
Glass Fiber Batt Acoustic Insulation: Flexible preformed batt or blanket, complying
with ASTM C 665; friction fit.
1. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
2. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
3. Combustibility: Non-combustible, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 136.
4. Formaldehyde Content: Zero.
5. Thickness:
a. 3 1/2 inches at walls where shown.
6. Facing: Unfaced.
7. Manufacturers:
a. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com.
b. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com.
c. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com.
8. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
THERMAL INSULATION
07 21 00 -3
2.6
E.
Mineral Fiber Batt Insulation: Flexible preformed batt or blanket, complying with ASTM C
665;mechanically fastened with stick pins; unfaced flame spread index of 0 (zero) when
tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
1. Provide foil facing on one side; with flame spread index of 25 or less, when tested in
accordance with ASTM E 84.
2. Location: At underside of First Floor concrete deck slab.
3. Smoke Developed Index: 0 (zero), when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
4. Thermal Resistance: As required per drawings.
5. Manufacturers:
a. Thermafiber, Inc: www.thermafiber.com.
b. Roxul: Product: www.roxul.com.
c. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
F.
Acoustic Duct Liner Batt Insulation: Flexible preformed batt or blanket, made from glass
fiber bonded with a thermosetting resin.
1. Maximum flame spread index of 25 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
2. Location: On the walls inside the VTAC closets
3. Smoke Developed Index: 50, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
4. Manufacturers:
a. Johns Manville: Linacouistic RC.
b. Owens Corning: Quiet R
c. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Sheet Vapor Retarder: Specified in Section 07 25 00.
B.
Insulation Fasteners: Impaling clip of unfinished steel with washer retainer and clips, to be
adhered to surface to receive insulation, length to suit insulation thickness and substrate,
capable of securely and rigidly fastening insulation in place.
C.
Nails or Staples: Steel wire; electroplated or galvanized; type and size to suit application.
PART 300EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation materials are dry and that substrates
are ready to receive insulation.
B.
Verify substrate surfaces are flat, free of honeycomb, fins, irregularities, or materials or
substances that may impede adhesive bond.
BOARD INSTALLATION AT FOUNDATION PERIMETER
A.
Install boards horizontally on foundation perimeter.
B.
Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane.
BOARD INSTALLATION AT EXTERIOR WALLS
A.
Adhere a 6 inch wide strip of polyethylene sheet over expansion joints with double beads of
adhesive each side of joint.
1. Extend sheet full height of joint.
B.
Install boards horizontally on walls.
1. Place boards to maximize adhesive contact.
2. Butt edges and ends tightly to adjacent boards and to protrusions.
C.
Extend boards over expansion joints, unbonded to wall on one side of joint.
D.
Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane.
E.
Tape insulation board joints.
BOARD INSTALLATION AT CAVITY WALLS
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
THERMAL INSULATION
07 21 00 -4
3.5
3.6
A.
Install boards to fit snugly between wall ties.
B.
Install boards horizontally on walls.
1. Place boards to maximize adhesive contact.
2. Butt edges and ends tightly to adjacent boards and to protrusions.
C.
Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane.
BATT INSTALLATION
A.
Install insulation and vapor retarder in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Install in exterior wall and ceiling spaces without gaps or voids. Do not compress insulation.
C.
Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Insulate miscellaneous gaps and voids.
D.
Fit insulation tightly in cavities and tightly to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services
within the plane of the insulation.
E.
Tape insulation batts in place.
F.
At wood framing, place vapor retarder on warm side of insulation by stapling at 6 inches on
center. Lap and seal sheet retarder joints over member face.
G.
At metal framing, place vapor retarder on warm side of insulation; lap and seal sheet retarder
joints over member face.
H.
Tape seal tears or cuts in vapor retarder.
I.
Extend vapor retarder tightly to full perimeter of adjacent window and door frames and other
items interrupting the plane of the membrane. Tape seal in place.
J.
Coordinate work of this section with requirements for vapor retarder specified in Section 07 25
00.
PROTECTION
A.
Do not permit installed insulation to be damaged prior to its concealment.
END OF SECTION
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
THERMAL INSULATION
07 21 00 -5
SECTION 072500
WEATHER BARRIERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Water-Resistive Barrier: Under exterior wall cladding, over sheathing or other substrate; not air
tight or vapor retardant.
B.
Water-Resistive vapor permeable transition and flashing membrane
C.
Complete Work as shown on the Drawings and specified herein to bridge gaps and seal the
water-resistive vapor permeable air barrier membrane against air leakage and water intrusion.
1. Connections of the walls to the roof membrane
2. Connections of the walls to the foundations
3. Seismic and expansion joints
4. Openings and penetrations of window and door frames, store front, curtain wall
5. Piping, conduit, duct and similar penetrations
6. Masonry ties, screws, bolts and similar penetrations
7. All other air leakage pathways in the building envelope
D.
Install primary water-resistive vapor permeable air barrier, flashing, lap seam tapes, sill pan and
ventilation strip accessories.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Water-resistive barrier under exterior cladding.
B.
Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Metal flashings installed in conjunction with
weather barriers.
C.
Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers: Sealant materials and installation techniques.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
1.5
1.6
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
AATCC Test Method 127 - Water Resistance: Hydrostatic Pressure Test; 2008.
B.
ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2010.
C.
ASTM E 96/E 96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2005.
D.
ICC-ES AC38 - Acceptance Criteria for Water-Resistive Barriers; ICC Evaluation Service, Inc.;
2009.
E.
ICC-ES AC212 - Acceptance Criteria for Water-Resistive Coatings Used as Water-Resistive
Barriers over Exterior Sheathing; ICC Evaluation Service, Inc.; 2009.
SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide data on material characteristics.
C.
Shop Drawings: Provide drawings of special joint conditions.
D.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation.
MOCK-UP
A.
1.7
Weather Barrier: Assemblies that form either water-resistive barriers, air barriers, or vapor
retarders.
Install air barrier, vapor retarder, and water-resistive barrier materials.
FIELD CONDITIONS
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
WEATHER BARRIERS
07 25 00 - 1
A.
Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the materials manufacturers before,
during and after installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
WEATHER BARRIER ASSEMBLIES
A.
Water-Resistive Barrier: Provide on exterior walls under exterior cladding
1. Fortifiber Weathersmart Commercial.
B.
WATER-RESISTIVE VAPOR PERMEABLE AIR BARRIER MATERIALS (Basis of Design)
1. Primary self-adhered air barrier sheet membrane shall be Fortifiber Weather Smart
Commercial having the following properties:
a. Air Leakage: <0.01 cfm/ft. sq. when tested in accordance with ASTM E 2357 and <
0.0000263 cfm/sq. ft. @ 75 Pa (0.000134 L/s/m sq @ 75 Pa) when tested in
accordance with ASTM E 2178
b. Water Vapor Permeance tested to ASTM E 96 Method B: 50 perms
(2875ng/Pa.s.m2)
c. Water Resistance tested to AATCC 127, 550 mm hydrostatic head for 5 hours: No
leakage
d. Tensile Strength tested to ASTM D 882: 44.8 lbf/inch (78 N/mm), machine direction;
25 lbf/inch (43.8 N/mm), cross-machine direction
e. Application Temperature: Ambient temperature must be above 20 degrees F
f.
Surface Burning Characteristics tested to ASTM E 84: Class A, Flame-spread index
of less than 10, Smoke-development index of less than 15
C.
WATER-RESISTIVE VAPOR PERMEABLE TRANSITION AND FLASHING MEMBRANE
1. Self-adhered air barrier transition and flashing membrane shall be Fortifiber Fortiflash selfadhered water-resistive vapor permeable membrane having the following properties:
a. 40 Mils.
b. Air Leakage: < 0.0000263 cfm/sq. ft. @ 75 Pa (0.000134 L/s/m sq @ 75 Pa) when
tested in accordance with ASTM E 2178
c. Water Vapor Permeance tested to ASTM E 96 Method B: 50 perms
(2875ng/Pa.s.m2)
d. Water Resistance tested to AATCC 127, 550 mm hydrostatic head for 5 hours: No
leakage
D.
WATER-RESISTIVE VAPOR PERMEABLE TRANSITION AND FLASHING MEMBRANE (SAM-2)
1. Self-adhered air barrier transition and flashing membrane shall be Fortifiber Butyl
self-adhered water-resistive vapor permeable membrane having the following
properties:
a. 20 Mils.
b. Air Leakage: <0.0000263 cfm/sq.ft. @ 75 Pa (0.000123 L/s/m sq @ 75 Pa) when
tested in accordance with ASTM E 2178.
c. Water Vapor Permeance tested to ASTM E 96 Method B: 50 perms
(2875ng/Pa.s.m2)
d. Water Resistance tested to AATCC 127. 550 mm hydrostatic head for 5 hours: No
leakage.
E.
PENETRATION AND BEDDING SEALANT
1. Fortifiber Moistop Sealant.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to accept the work of this section.
Remove projections, protruding fasteners, and loose or foreign matter that might interfere with
proper installation.
INSTALLATION
A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
WEATHER BARRIERS
07 25 00 - 2
3.4
3.5
1.
Tape laps in WB-1 in accordance with manufacturers written instructions.
B.
Self-Adhesive Sheets:
1. Prepare substrate in manner recommended by sheet manufacturer; fill and tape joints in
substrate and between dissimilar materials.
2. Lap sheets shingle-fashion to shed water and seal laps air tight.
3. Once sheets are in place, press firmly into substrate with resilient hand roller; ensure that
all laps are firmly adhered with no gaps or fishmouths.
4. Use same material, or other material approved by sheet manufacturer for the purpose, to
seal to adjacent construction and as flashing.
5. At wide joints, provide extra flexible membrane allowing joint movement.
C.
Openings and Penetrations in Exterior Weather Barriers:
1. Install flashing over sills, covering entire sill frame member, extending at least 5 inches
onto weather barrier and at least 6 inches up jambs; mechanically fasten stretched edges.
2. At openings to be filled with frames having nailing flanges, seal head and jamb flanges
using a continuous bead of sealant compressed by flange and cover flanges with at least
4 inches wide; do not seal sill flange.
3. At openings to be filled with non-flanged frames, seal weather barrier to all sides of
opening framing, using flashing at least 9 inches wide, covering entire depth of framing.
4. At head of openings, install flashing under weather barrier extending at least 2 inches
beyond face of jambs; seal weather barrier to flashing.
5. At interior face of openings, seal gap between window/door frame and rough framing,
using joint sealant over backer rod.
6. Service and Other Penetrations: Form flashing around penetrating item and seal to
weather barrier surface.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Do not cover installed weather barriers until required inspections have been completed.
B.
Obtain approval of installation procedures by the weather barrier manufacturer based on a
mock-up installed in place, prior to proceeding with remainder of installation.
PROTECTION
A.
Do not leave materials exposed to weather longer than recommended by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
WEATHER BARRIERS
07 25 00 - 3
SECTION 074646
FIBER CEMENT SIDING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.2
1.3
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 05 40 00 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Siding substrate.
B.
Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Siding substrate.
C.
Section 07 25 00 - Weather Barriers: Weather barrier under siding.
D.
Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers.
E.
Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Water-resistive barrier under siding.
F.
Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Field painting.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
1.4
1.5
ASTM C 1186 - Standard Specification for Flat Fiber Cement Sheets; 2008.
SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. Manufacturer's requirements for related materials to be installed by others.
2. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
3. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
4. Installation methods, including nail patterns.
C.
Test Report: Applicable model code authority evaluation report (e.g. ICC-ES).
D.
Maintenance Instructions: Periodic inspection recommendations and maintenance procedures.
E.
Warranty: Submit copy of manufacturer’s warranty, made out in Owner’s name, showing that it
has been registered with manufacturer.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.6
Wood-fiber cement siding.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified in this
section with minimum 3 years of experience.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Store products under waterproof cover and elevated above grade, on a flat surface.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
SIDING
A.
Panel Siding: Vertically oriented panels made of cement and cellulose fiber formed under high
pressure with integral surface texture, complying with ASTM C 1186 Type A Grade II; with
machined edges, for nail attachment.
1. Texture: Smooth.
2. Nominal Length (Height): 96 – 120 inches, nominal.
3. Nominal Width: 48 inches.
4. Thickness: 7/16 inch, nominal, 5/4 thickness at locations shown.
5. Finish: As specified in Section 09 90 00 Painting and Coating. Pre-primed by manufacturer.
6. Color: As scheduled.
7. Warranty: 50 year limited; transferable.
8. Panel Siding Manufacturers:
a. James Hardie Building Products, Inc Hardie Reveal Panel: www.jameshardie.com.
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
020712 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
7/16/2012 Construction Documents
FIBER CEMENT SIDING
07 46 46 – 1
2.2
ACCESSORIES
A.
Plywood Furring Strips: AWPA U1, Category UCFB, Commodity Specification H, chemically
treated and pressure impregnated; capable of providing a maximum flame spread rating of 25
when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84, with no evidence of significant combustion when
test is extended for an additional 20 minutes both before and after accelerated weathering test
performed in accordance with ASTM D 2898.
1. Kiln dry wood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber and
15 percent for plywood.
B.
Trim: Same material and texture as siding, size and profile as shown on drawings.
C.
Metal: Manufacturer’s recommended “J” trim and other shapes as required, where shown.
D.
Fasteners: Galvanized or corrosion resistant; length as required to penetrate minimum 1-1/4
inch into furring without penetrating weather barrier.
E.
Joint Sealer: As specified in Section 07 90 05 Joint Sealers.
F.
Finish: As specified in Section 09 90 00 Painting and Coating.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
3.2
B.
Verify that water-resistive barrier has been installed over substrate completely and correctly.
C.
Do not begin until unacceptable conditions have been corrected.
D.
If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory
preparation before proceeding.
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Examine substrate and clean and repair as required to eliminate conditions that would be
detrimental to proper installation.
Install sheet metal flashing:
1. Above door and window trim and casings.
2. Above horizontal trim in field of siding.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
1. Read warranty and comply with all terms necessary to maintain warranty coverage.
2. Install in accordance with conditions stated in model code evaluation report applicable to
location of project.
3. Use trim details indicated on drawings.
4. Touch up all field cut edges before installing.
5. Pre-drill nail holes if necessary to prevent breakage.
B.
Over Wood Studs, Gypsum Sheathing, Insulation and Preservative-Treated Plywood Furring
Strips: Fasten siding into furring strips.
C.
Over Steel Studs, Gypsum Sheathing and Preservative-Treated Plywood Furring Strips: Use
hot-dipped galvanized self-tapping screws. Fasten siding into furring strips without penetrating
weather barrier.
D.
Allow space between both ends of siding panels that butt against trim for thermal movement;
seal joint between panel and trim with exterior grade sealant.
E.
Joints in Vertical Siding: Install Z-flashing in horizontal joints between successive courses of
vertical siding.
F.
Do not install siding less than 6 inches from surface of ground nor closer than 1 inch to roofs,
patios, porches, and other surfaces where water may collect.
G.
Finish Painting: Specified in Section 09 90 00.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
FIBER CEMENT SIDING
07 46 46- 2
3.4
PROTECTION
A.
Protect installed products until completion of project.
B.
Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
FIBER CEMENT SIDING
07 46 46- 3
SECTION 075400
THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
SECTION INCLUDES ROOF ASSMEBLY TAPERED INSULATION
A.
Adhered system with thermoplastic roofing membrane.
B.
Insulation, flat and tapered.
C.
Vapor retarder / Insulation adhesive.
D.
Cover board.
E.
Flashings.
F.
Roofing cant strips, stack boots, roofing expansion joints, and walkway pads.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Wood nailers and curbs.
B.
Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Counterflashings, reglets,.
C.
Section 07 72 00 - Roof Accessories: Roof-mounted units; prefabricated curbs.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM C 1177/C 1177M - Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as
Sheathing; 2008.
B.
ASTM C 1289 - Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal
Insulation Board; 2008.
C.
ASTM D 6878 - Standard Specification for Thermoplastic Polyolefin Based Sheet Roofing;
2008.
D.
ASTM E 1980 - Standard Practice for Calculating Solar Reflectance Index of Horizontal and
Low-Sloped Opaque Surfaces; 2001.
E.
NRCA ML104 - The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual; National Roofing Contractors
Association; Fifth Edition, with interim updates.
F.
UL (RMSD) - Roofing Materials and Systems Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current
edition.
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.5
Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section.
1. Review preparation and installation procedures and coordinating and scheduling required
with related work.
SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide data indicating membrane materials, flashing materials, insulation,
vapor retarder, surfacing, fasteners, and cover board.
C.
Specimen Warranty: For approval.
D.
Shop Drawings: Indicate joint or termination detail conditions, conditions of interface with other
materials, setting plan for tapered insulation, and walkway pad layout.
E.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate membrane seaming precautions, special
procedures, and perimeter conditions requiring special attention.
F.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
G.
Manufacturer's Field Reports: Indicate procedures followed, ambient temperatures, humidity,
wind velocity during application, and supplementary instructions given.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE
ROOFING
07 54 00 - 1
H.
1.6
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in
this section with minimum five years of documented experience.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section:
1. With minimum five years documented experience.
2. Approved by membrane manufacturer.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.8
Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's
name and registered with manufacturer.
Deliver products in manufacturer's original containers, dry, undamaged, with seals and labels
intact.
B.
Store products in weather protected environment, clear of ground and moisture.
C.
Protect foam insulation from direct exposure to sunlight.
WARRANTY
A.
See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B.
Material Warranty: Provide membrane manufacturer's warranty agreeing to replace material
that shows manufacturing defects within 5 years after installation.
C.
System Warranty: Provide manufacturer's system warranty agreeing to repair or replace
roofing that leaks or is damaged due to wind or other natural causes.
1. Warranty Term: 20 years.
2. For repair and replacement include costs of both material and labor in warranty.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Thermoplastic Polyolefin Membrane Materials
1. Firestone Building Products Co; UltraPly TPO: www.firestonebpco.com.
2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B.
Insulation:
1. Atlas Roofing Corporation: www.atlasroofing.com.
2. GAF Materials Corporation: www.gaf.com.
3. Dow Chemical Co: www.dow.com.
4. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com.
5. Firestone Co: www.firestone.com
6. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
ROOFING - UNBALLASTED APPLICATIONS
A.
Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing: One ply membrane, fully adhered, over vapor retarder and
insulation.
B.
Roofing Assembly Requirements:
1. Solar Reflectance Index (SRI): 78, minimum, calculated in accordance with ASTM E 1980.
a. Field applied coating may not be used to achieve specified SRI.
2. Roof Covering External Fire-Resistance Classification: UL Class A.
3. Insulation Thermal Value (R), minimum: 28; provide insulation of thickness required.
C.
Acceptable Insulation Types - Constant Thickness Application: Any of the types specified.
1. Minimum 2 layers of polyisocyanurate or extruded polystyrene board.
D.
Acceptable Insulation Types - Tapered Application: Any of the types specified.
1. Tapered extruded polystyrene board covered with uniform thickness polyisocyanurate or
extruded polystyrene board.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE
ROOFING
07 54 00 - 2
2.
2.3
2.4
ROOFING MEMBRANE AND ASSOCIATED MATERIALS
A.
Membrane:
1. Material: Thermoplastic polyolefin (TPO) complying with ASTM D 6878.
2. Reinforcing: Internal fabric.
3. Thickness: .060 inch, minimum.
4. Sheet Width: Factory fabricated into largest sheets possible.
5. Solar Reflectance: 0.75, minimum, initial, and 0.65, minimum, 3-year, certified by Cool
Roof Rating Council.
6. Thermal Emissivity: 0.80, minimum, initial, and 0.79, minimum, 3-year, certified by Cool
Roof Rating Council.
7. Color: White.
B.
Seaming Materials: As recommended by membrane manufacturer.
C.
Flexible Flashing Material: Same material as membrane.
D.
Molded TPO Inside and Outside Corners
1. thickness: .060"
2. color: match roof membrane
COVER BOARD
A.
2.5
Cover Board: Glass mat faced gypsum panels, ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, fire resistant type, 1/2
inch thick.
1. Products:
a. Georgia-Pacific DensDeck, DensDeck Prime, or DensDeck DuraGuard:
www.gp.com/build.
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
INSUL 6 INSULATION
A.
INSUL 6 Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: Rigid cellular foam, complying with ASTM C 1289,
Type II, Class 1, cellulose felt or glass fiber mat both faces; Grade 1 and with the following
characteristics:
1. Compressive Strength: 16 psi
2. Board Size: 48 x 96 inch.
3. Board Thickness: 3 1/2 inch applied in two layers for a total thickness of 7 inches.
4. Thermal Resistance: R-value of 49.
5. Board Edges: Square.
6. Manufacturers:
a. Atlas Roofing Corporation: www.atlasroofing.com.
b. Dow Chemical Co: www.dow.com.
c. GAF Materials Corporation: www.gaf.com.
7. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B.
Composite Board Insulation: Top layer perlite, bottom layer polyisocyanurate complying with
ASTM C 1289, and with the following characteristics:
1. Polyisocyanurate surfaces faced with aluminum foil.
2. Board Size: 48 x 96 inch.
3. Board Thickness: 3 1/2 inches.
4. Thermal Resistance: R-value of 49.
5. Board Edges: Square.
Tapered Insulation for canopy roofs:
1. Expanded polystyrene insulation, pre-cut and tapered to provide drainage as shown.
C.
2.6
Uniform thickness polyisocyanurate or extruded polystyrene board covered with tapered
extruded polystyrene board.
ACCESSORIES
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE
ROOFING
07 54 00 - 3
A.
Stack Boots: Prefabricated flexible boot and collar for pipe stacks through membrane;
elastomeric material compatible with membrane.
B.
Cant and Edge Strips: Wood fiberboard, compatible with roofing materials ; cants formed to 45
degree angle.
C.
Insulation Joint Tape: Glass fiber reinforced type as recommended by insulation manufacturer,
compatible with roofing materials; 6 inches wide; self adhering.
D.
Insulation Fasteners: Appropriate for purpose intended and approved by roofing manufacturer.
E.
Membrane Adhesive: As recommended by membrane manufacturer.
F.
Insulation Adhesive/ Vapor retarder: As recommended by insulation manufacturer.
G.
Sealants: As recommended by membrane manufacturer.
H.
Walkway Pads: Type as recommended by membrane manufacturer; size as indicated.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A.
Perform work in accordance with NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual and manufacturer's
instructions.
B.
Do not apply roofing membrane during unsuitable weather.
C.
Do not apply roofing membrane when ambient temperature is outside the temperature range
recommended by manufacturer.
D.
Do not apply roofing membrane to damp or frozen deck surface or when precipitation is
expected or occurring.
E.
Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than can be
weatherproofed the same day.
F.
Coordinate the work with installation of associated counterflashings installed by other sections
as the work of this section proceeds.
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work.
B.
Verify deck is supported and secure.
C.
Verify deck is clean and smooth, flat, free of depressions, waves, or projections, properly
sloped and suitable for installation of roof system.
D.
Verify deck surfaces are dry and free of snow or ice.
E.
Verify that roof openings, curbs, and penetrations through roof are solidly set, and cant strips
are in place.
WOOD DECK PREPARATION
A.
Verify flatness and tightness of joints of wood decking. Fill knot holes with latex filler.
B.
Confirm dry deck by moisture meter with 12 percent moisture maximum.
INSULATION - UNDER MEMBRANE
A.
Apply vapor retarder / adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1. Extend vapor retarder adhesive under cant strips and blocking to deck edge.
2. Install flexible flashing from vapor retarder to air seal material of wall construction, lap and
seal to provide continuity of the air barrier plane.
B.
Attachment of Insulation: Embed insulation in adhesive in full contact, in accordance with
roofing and insulation manufacturers' instructions.
C.
Lay subsequent layers of insulation with joints staggered minimum 6 inch from joints of
preceding layer.
D.
Place tapered insulation to the required slope pattern in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE
ROOFING
07 54 00 - 4
3.5
E.
Lay boards with edges in moderate contact without forcing. Cut insulation to fit neatly to
perimeter blocking and around penetrations through roof.
F.
Tape joints of insulation in accordance with roofing and insulation manufacturers' instructions.
G.
At roof drains, use factory-tapered boards to slope down to roof drains over a distance of 18
inches.
H.
Do not apply more insulation than can be covered with membrane in same day.
MEMBRANE APPLICATION
A.
Roll out membrane, free from wrinkles or tears. Place sheet into place without stretching.
B.
Shingle joints on sloped substrate in direction of drainage.
C.
Fully Adhered Application: Apply adhesive to substrate at rate of gal/square as recommended
by the manufacturer. Fully embed membrane in adhesive except in areas directly over or within
3 inches of expansion joints. Fully adhere one roll before proceeding to adjacent rolls.
C.D. Mechanically Fastened Application: Acceptable upon review by Architect of proposed system.
D.E. Overlap edges and ends and seal seams by contact adhesive, minimum 3 inches. Seal
permanently waterproof. Apply uniform bead of sealant to joint edge.
E.F. At intersections with vertical surfaces:
1. Membrane to extend over cant strips and up parapet walls to top and extend across top of
parapet and lap down over wall moisture barrier
2. Fully adhere flexible flashing over membrane and up to reglets.
3. Insert flashing into reglets and secure.
F.G. Around roof penetrations, seal flanges and flashings with flexible flashing.
G.H. Coordinate installation of roof drains and sumps and related flashings.
3.6
3.7
3.8
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field quality control
and inspection.
B.
Require site attendance of roofing and insulation material manufacturers daily during
installation of the Work.
CLEANING
A.
Remove bituminous markings from finished surfaces.
B.
In areas where finished surfaces are soiled by work of this section, consult manufacturer of
surfaces for cleaning advice and conform to their documented instructions.
C.
Repair or replace defaced or damaged finishes caused by work of this section.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect installed roofing and flashings from construction operations.
B.
Where traffic must continue over finished roof membrane, protect surfaces using durable
materials.
END OF SECTION
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE
ROOFING
07 54 00 - 5
SECTION 076200
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1CCGENERAL
1.1
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Fabricated sheet metal items, including flashings, counterflashings, gutters, downspouts, and
downspout leaders, exhaust hoods.
B.
Reglets and accessories.
RELATED REQUIGEMENTS
A.
1.3
1.4
B.
Section 07 54 00 - Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing: Roofing system.
C.
Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers.
D.
Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Field painting.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
AAMA 2605 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for
Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2005.
B.
ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2009a.
C.
ASTM A 666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel
Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2003.
D.
ASTM D 226 - Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and
Waterproofing; 2006.
E.
ASTM D 4586 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free; 2007.
F.
SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning
Contractors' National Association; 2003.
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.5
1.6
1.7
Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Wood nailers.
Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section.
SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods,
flashings, terminations, and installation details.
C.
Samples: Submit two samples 6 x 6 inch in size illustrating metal finish color.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform work in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual requirements and
standard details, except as otherwise indicated.
B.
Fabricator and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in sheet metal work with five
years of documented experience.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope
metal sheets to ensure drainage.
B.
Prevent contact with materials that could cause discoloration or staining.
PART 200PRODUCTS
2.1
SHEET MATERIALS
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
07 62 00 - 1
A.
SM-1 & SM-2 Pre-Finished Galvanized Steel: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G90/Z275 zinc
coating; minimum 0.02 inch thick base metal, shop pre-coated with PVDF coating.
1. PVDF (Polyvinylidene Fluoride) Coating: Superior Performance Organic Finish, AAMA
2605; multiple coat, thermally cured fluoropolymer finish system.
2. Colors: As shown on drawings, Minimum TWO colors.
B.
SM-3 Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666 Type 304, soft temper, .025 inch thick; smooth No. 4 finish.
C.
SM-4 Louver ‘blank-off’ panel: Pre-Finished Galvanized Steel: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with
G90/Z275 zinc coating; minimum 0.02 inch thick base metal, shop pre-coated with PVDF
coating.
1. PVDF (Polyvinylidene Fluoride) Coating: Superior Performance Organic Finish, AAMA
2605; multiple coat, thermally cured fluoropolymer finish system.
2. Color: Black.
D. SM-5 Xtreme Trim for fiber cement siding as manufactured by Tamlyn 800-334-1676.
1.
Extruded 26ga prepainted aluminum profiles for fiber cement siding & soffit.
2.2
2.3
2.4
ACCESSORIES
A.
Fasteners: Galvanized steel, with soft neoprene washers.
B.
Underlayment: ASTM D 226, organic roofing felt, Type I ("No. 15").
C.
Primer: Zinc chromate type.
D.
Protective Backing Paint: Zinc molybdate alkyd.
E.
Sealant: Type as specified in Section 07 90 05.
F.
Plastic Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type I. Compatible with substrate as recommended by
substrate manufacturer.
G.
Reglets: Surface mounted type, galvanized steel with factory-applied fluoropolymer paint finish
; face and ends covered with plastic tape ; SM Surface-Mounted Reglet manufactured by Fry
Reglet Corporation; www.fryreglet.com.
H.
Insect screen: 18 x 16 mesh, 0,0110” wire diameter, woven, color: black.
FABRICATION
A.
Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects.
B.
Form pieces in longest possible lengths.
C.
Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners.
D.
Form material with flat ‘S’ lock seams, except where otherwise indicated. At moving joints, use
sealed lapped, bayonet-type or interlocking hooked seams.
E.
Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs; seam for rigidity, seal with
sealant.
F.
Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch (6 mm) and hemmed to form
drip.
G.
Fabricate flashings to allow toe to extend 4 inches over roofing membrane. Return and brake
edges.
LEADER AND DOWNSPOUT FABRICATION
A.
Leaders and Downspouts: Fabricated from SM-1 metal; Profile and Size as indicated on
Drawings. Pre-painted Bronze/Brown or white
B.
Accessories: Profiled to suit leaders and downspouts.
1. Downspout Supports: Brackets. Pre painted Bronze/Brown or White.
C.
Downspout Boots: Steel.
D.
Seal metal joints.
PART 3 EXECUTION
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
07 62 00 - 2
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents through roof are solidly set, reglets
in place, and nailing strips located.
B.
Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure.
PREPARATION
A.
Install surface mounted reglets true to lines and levels. Seal top of reglets with sealant.
B.
Back paint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film
thickness of 15 mil.
INSTALLATION
A.
Insert flashings into reglets to form tight fit. Secure in place with lead wedges. Pack remaining
spaces with lead wool. Seal flashings into reglets with sealant.
B.
Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only where
permitted.
C.
Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings.
D.
Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines
accurate to profiles.
E.
Seal metal joints watertight.
F.
Secure leaders and downspouts in place using concealed fasteners.
G.
Connect downspouts to downspout boots. Grout connection watertight.
SCHEDULE
A.
Through-Wall Flashing in Masonry: SM-3
B.
Flashing at Fascia and Cornices at Entrance Canopies : SM-3
C.
Window and Door Head and Sill Flashings: SM-2
D.
Coping, Cap, Parapet, Sill and Ledge Flashings: SM-1
E.
Counterflashings at Roofing Terminations (over roofing base flashings): SM-1
F.
Counterflashings at Curb-Mounted Roof Items: SM-1
G.
Louver ‘blank-off’ panel: SM-4
H.
Exposed items to be prepainted white or brown/bronze.
I.
Cement Siding & Soffit panels: SM-5
END OF SECTION
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
07 62 00 - 3
SECTION 077200
ROOF ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Manufactured curbs, equipment rails, and pedestals.
B.
Roof hatches, guardrail and Ships Ladder.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.3
1.4
1.5
Section 07 54 00 - Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing: Roofing membrane.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2009a.
B.
UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; current edition.
SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used.
1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3. Installation methods.
4. Maintenance requirements.
C.
Ships Ladder Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used.
1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3. Installation methods.
4. Maintenance requirements.
5. Field verify floor to floor heights and connections
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
B.
Store products under cover and elevated above grade.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURED CURBS
A.
Manufactured Curbs, Equipment Rails, and Other Roof Mounting Assemblies:
1. AES Manufacturing Inc.: www.aescurb.com.
2. The Pate Company: www.patecurbs.com.
3. Roof Products & Systems (RPS) by Commercial Products Group of Hart & Cooley, Inc:
www.rpscurbs.com.
4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B.
Manufactured Curbs, Equipment Rails, and Other Roof Mounting Assemblies: Factoryassembled hollow sheet metal construction with fully mitered and welded corners, integral
counterflashing, internal reinforcing, and top side and edges formed to shed water.
1. Sheet Metal: Hot-dip zinc coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, SS
Grade 33; G60 coating designation; 18 gage, 0.048 inch thick.
2. Roofing Cants: Provide integral sheet metal roofing cants dimensioned to begin slope at
top of roofing insulation; 1:1 slope; minimum cant height 4 inches.
3. Manufacture curb bottom and mounting flanges for installation directly on roof deck, not on
insulation; match slope and configuration of roof deck.
4. Provide the layouts and configurations shown on the drawings.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
ROOF ACCESSORIES
07 72 00 - 1
2.2
C.
Curbs Adjacent to Roof Openings: Provide curb on all sides of opening, with top of curb
horizontal for equipment mounting.
1. Insulate inside curbs with 1-1/2 inch thick fiberglass insulation.
2. Height Above Finished Roof Surface: 6 inches, minimum.
3. Height Above Roof Deck: 14 inches, minimum.
D.
Equipment Rails: Two-sided curbs in straight lengths, with top horizontal for equipment
mounting.
1. Height Above Finished Roof Surface: 6 inches, minimum.
2. Height Above Roof Deck: 14 inches, minimum.
E.
Pipe, Duct, and Conduit Mounting Pedestals: Vertical posts, minimum 8 inches square unless
otherwise indicated.
1. Provide sliding channel welded along top edge with adjustable height steel bracket,
manufactured to fit item supported.
2. Height Above Finished Roof Surface: 6 inches, minimum.
3. Height Above Roof Deck: 14 inches, minimum.
ROOF HATCHES
A.
Manufacturers - Roof Hatches:
1. Dur-Red ProductsNSH 2'6" x 8'0": www.dur-red.com
2. Acudor Products Inc: www.acudor.com.
3. Bilco Co.: www.bilco.com
4. Milcor by Commercial Products Group of Hart & Cooley, Inc: www.milcorinc.com.
5. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B.
Roof Hatches: Factory-assembled galvanized steel frame and cover, complete with operating
and release hardware.
1. Style: Provide flat metal covers unless otherwise indicated.
2. Mounting: Provide frames and curbs suitable for mounting on curb provided by others.
3. Smoke Hatches: Where "smoke" or "smoke/heat" operation is indicated, provide the
following additional features and omit manual operation for access:
a. Smoke Release Mechanism: Automatic opening on melting of replaceable UL-listed
fusible link at 165 deg F.
b. UL-listed as automatically operated smoke and heat vent.
4. For Stair Access: Single leaf; 30 by 96 inches.
C.
Frames/Curbs: One-piece curb and frame with integral cap flashing to receive roof flashings;
extended bottom flange to suit mounting.
1. Material: Galvanized steel, 14 gage, 0.0747 inch thick.
2. Finish: Factory prime paint.
3. Insulation: 1 inch rigid glass fiber, located on outside face of curb.
4. Curb Height: 4 inches.
D.
Metal Covers: Flush, insulated, hollow metal construction.
1. Capable of supporting 40 psf live load.
2. Material: Galvanized steel; outer cover 14 gage, 0.0747 inch thick, liner 22 gage, 0.03
inch thick.
3. Finish: Factory prime paint.
4. Insulation: 1 inch rigid glass fiber.
5. Gasket: Neoprene, continuous around cover perimeter.
E.
Hardware: Steel, zinc coated and chromate sealed, unless otherwise indicated or required by
manufacturer.
1. Lifting Mechanisms: Compression or torsion spring operator with shock absorbers that
automatically opens upon release of latch; capable of lifting covers despite 10 psf load.
2. Hinges: Heavy duty pintle type.
3. Hold open arm with vinyl-coated handle for manual release.
4. Latch: Upon closing, engage latch automatically and reset manual release.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
ROOF ACCESSORIES
07 72 00- 2
5.
6.
7.
Manual Release: Pull handle on interior.
Smoke Hatches: Manual release operation not to disturb automatic release mechanisms;
easy resetting by Owner's maintenance personnel; provide latch designed to prevent
relatching unless the automatic release mechanism has been properly reset for automatic
operation.
Locking: Padlock hasp on interior.
F.
Guardrail
1. Safety Railing System: Manufacturer's standard steel pipe rail curb mounted guardrail
assembly.
G.
Inclined Metal Ladder
1. Aluminum Ships Ladder and Components: Ladder, mounting brackets and handrails on
both sides.
a. Model: Model SL Aluminum Ships Ladder as manufactured by Precision Ladders,
LLC.
b. Capacity: Unit shall support a 500 lb (227 kg) total load without failure.
c. Ladder Stringer: 5 inch by 2 inch by 3/16 inch (127 mm by 51 mm by 5 mm) extruded
6005-T5 aluminum channel. Pitch: 60 to 75 degrees.
d. Ladder Mounting Brackets:
1) Floor Bracket: 2 inch by 3 inch by 1/4 inch (51 mm by 76 mm by 6 mm)
aluminum angle.
2) Top Bracket: 4-3/4 inch by 5 inch by 1/4 inch (121 mm by 127 mm by 6 mm)
aluminum angle.
e. Handrails: 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) Schedule 40, 6005-T5 aluminum pipe provided with
internal aluminum fittings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
EXAMINATION
A.
Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
B.
If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory
preparation before proceeding.
PREPARATION
A.
Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
B.
Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best
result for the substrate under the project conditions.
INSTALLATION
A.
3.4
CLEANING
A.
3.5
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, in manner that maintains roofing weather
integrity.
Clean installed work to like-new condition.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect installed products until completion of project.
B.
Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
ROOF ACCESSORIES
07 72 00- 3
SECTION 078400
FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 GENERA
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
SECTION INCUDES
A.
Firestopping systems.
B.
Firestopping of all joints and penetrations in fire-resistance rated and smoke-resistant
assemblies , whether indicated on drawings or not , and other openings indicated.
REATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 01 61 16 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions.
B.
Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Gypsum wallboard fireproofing.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM E 119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials;
2009c.
B.
ASTM E 814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops; 2009.
C.
ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; Intertek Testing Services NA, Inc.; current edition.
D.
FM 4991 - Approval of Firestop Contractors; Factory Mutual Research Corporation; 2001.
E.
FM P7825 - Approval Guide; Factory Mutual Research Corporation; current edition.
F.
SCAQMD 1168 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168; current edition;
www.aqmd.gov.
G.
UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.
SUBMITTAS
A.
See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Schedule of Firestopping: List each type of penetration, fire rating of the penetrated assembly,
and firestopping test or design number.
C.
Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance ratings, and limitations.
D.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation and installation instructions.
E.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
F.
Certificate from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of materials used.
G.
Qualification statements for installing mechanics.
QUAITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fire Testing: Provide firestopping assemblies of designs that provide the scheduled fire ratings
when tested in accordance with methods indicated.
1. Listing in the current-year classification or certification books of UL, FM, or ITS (Warnock
Hersey) will be considered as constituting an acceptable test report.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in
this section with minimum three years documented experience.
C.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section and:
1. Approved by Factory Mutual Research under FM Standard 4991, Approval of Firestop
Contractors , or meeting any two of the following requirements:.
2. With minimum five years documented experience installing work of this type.
3. Able to show at least 5 satisfactorily completed projects of comparable size and type.
4. Licensed by authority having jurisdiction.
MOCK-UP
A.
Install one firestopping assembly representative of each fire rating design required on project.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
FIRESTOPPING
07 84 00 - 1
1.
2.
1.7
Where one design may be used for different penetrating items or in different wall
constructions, install one assembly for each different combination.
Where firestopping is intended to fill a linear opening, install minimum of 1 linear ft.
B.
Obtain approval of authority having jurisdiction before proceeding.
C.
If accepted, mock-up will represent minimum standard for the Work.
D.
If accepted, mock-up may remain as part of the Work. Remove and replace mock-ups not
accepted.
FIED CONDITIONS
A.
Comply with firestopping manufacturer's recommendations for temperature and conditions
during and after installation. Maintain minimum temperature before, during, and for 3 days after
installation of materials.
B.
Provide ventilation in areas where solvent-cured materials are being installed.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS
A.
2.2
Firestopping: Any material meeting requirements.
1. Fire Ratings: Use any system listed by UL or tested in accordance with ASTM E 814 that
has F Rating equal to fire rating of penetrated assembly and minimum T Rating Equal to F
Rating and that meets all other specified requirements.
MATERIAS
A.
Firestopping Sealants FS-1: Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound
(VOC) content than required by South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168.
B.
Elastomeric Silicone Firestopping: Single component silicone elastomeric compound and
compatible silicone sealant.
1. Manufacturers:
a. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc: www.adfire.com.
b. 3M Fire Protection Products: www.3m.com/firestop.
c. Hilti, Inc: www.us.hilti.com.
d. Specified Technologies, Inc: www.stifirestop.com.
e. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
C.
Foam Firestoppping: Single component silicone foam compound.
1. Manufacturers:
a. 3M Fire Protection Products: www.3m.com/firestop.
b. Hilti, Inc: www.us.hilti.com.
c. Specified Technologies, Inc: www.stifirestop.com.
d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
D.
Fiber Firestopping: Mineral fiber insulation used in conjunction with elastomeric surface sealer
forming airtight bond to opening.
1. Manufacturers:
a. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc; www.adfire.com.
b. Pecora Corporation; www.pecora.com.
c. Thermafiber, Inc; www.thermafiber.com.
d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
E.
Primers, Sleeves, Forms, Insulation, Packing, Stuffing, and Accessories: Type required for
tested assembly design.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Verify openings are ready to receive the work of this section.
PREPARATION
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
FIRESTOPPING
07 84 00 - 2
A.
3.3
3.4
B.
Remove incompatible materials that could adversely affect bond.
C.
Install backing materials to arrest liquid material leakage.
INSTAATION
A.
Install materials in manner described in fire test report and in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions, completely closing openings.
B.
Do not cover installed firestopping until inspected by authority having jurisdiction.
C.
Install labelling required by code.
CEANING
A.
3.5
Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter that could
adversely affect bond of firestopping material.
Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation.
END OF SECTION
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
FIRESTOPPING
07 84 00 - 3
SECTION 079005
JOINT SEALERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Sealants and joint backing.
B.
Precompressed foam sealers.
C.
Fire rated Acoustical Putty Pads
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 01 61 16 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions.
B.
Section 07 14 00 - Fluid-Applied Waterproofing: Sealants required in conjunction with
waterproofing.
C.
Section 07 25 00 - Weather Barriers: Sealants required in conjunction with air barriers and
vapor retarders:
D.
Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping: Firestopping sealants.
E.
Section 07 54 00 - Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing: Sealants required in conjunction with
roofing.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM C 834 - Standard Specification for Latex Sealants; 2010.
B.
ASTM C 919 - Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications; 2008.
C.
ASTM C 920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2010.
D.
ASTM C 1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2009.
E.
ASTM D 1056 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials--Sponge or Expanded
Rubber; 2007.
F.
SCAQMD 1168 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168; current edition;
www.aqmd.gov.
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.5
1.6
1.7
Coordinate the work with other sections referencing this section.
SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria,
substrate preparation, limitations, and color availability.
C.
Samples: Submit two samples, 1/2 x 3 inch in size illustrating sealant colors for selection.
D.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, surface preparation, and
perimeter conditions requiring special attention.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in
this section with minimum three years documented experience.
B.
Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum five years experience.
MOCK-UP
A.
Provide mock-up of sealant joints in conjunction with window and wall under provisions of
Section 01 40 00.
B.
Construct mock-up with specified sealant types and with other components noted.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
JOINT SEALERS
07 90 05 - 1
1.8
C.
Locate where directed.
D.
Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
1.9
Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after
installation.
WARRANTY
A.
See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B.
Correct defective work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
C.
Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve airtight
seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Silicone Sealants:
1. Momentive Performance Materials, Inc (formerly GE Silicones): www.momentive.com.
2. Dow Corning.
3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B.
Polyurethane Sealants:
1. Sika Corporation: usa.sika.com.
2. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com.
3. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com.
4. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems: www.chemrex.com.
5. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
C.
Butyl Sealants:
1. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com.
2. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com.
3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
D.
Acrylic Emulsion Latex Sealants:
1. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com.
2. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com.
3. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems: www.chemrex.com.
4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
E.
Preformed Compressible Foam Sealers:
1. EMSEAL Joint Systems, Ltd: www.emseal.com.
2. Dayton Superior Corporation: www.daytonsuperior.com.
3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
Acoustic Putty Pads
1.
Soundprooffing Company Inc: Putty Pads
2.
Kinetics Noise Control: IsoBacker: acoustical Outlet Back Putty Pad
D
2.2
SEALANTS
A.
Sealants and Primers - General: Provide products having volatile organic compound (VOC)
content as specified in Section 01 61 16.
B.
Type JS-1 - General Purpose Exterior Sealant: Polyurethane; ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class
25, Uses M, G, and A; single component. (SANDED)
1. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.
2. Product: Sikaflex 1a manufactured by Sika Corporation.
3. Applications: Use for:
a. Control, expansion, and soft joints in masonry.
b. Joints between concrete and other materials.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
JOINT SEALERS
07 90 05 - 2
c.
Other exterior joints in masonry, masonry veneer and concrete for which no other
sealant is indicated.
C.
Type JS-2 - Exterior Sealant: Acrylic, solvent release curing; ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class
12-1/2, Uses M, G, and A; single or multi- component.
1. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.
2. Applications: Use for:
a. Joints between Fiber Cement Siding.
D.
Type JS-3 - Exterior Metal Lap Joint Sealant: Butyl or polyisobutylene, nondrying, nonskinning,
noncuring.
1. Applications: Use for:
a. Concealed sealant bead in sheet metal work.
E.
Type JS-4 - General Purpose Interior Sealant: Acrylic emulsion latex; ASTM C 834, Type OP,
Grade NF single component, paintable.
1. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.
2. Product: manufacturer’s recommended
3. Applications: Use for:
a. Interior wall and ceiling control joints.
b. Joints between door and window frames and wall surfaces.
c. Other interior joints for which no other type of sealant is indicated.
F.
Type JS-5 - Acoustical Sealant: Butyl or acrylic sealant; ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2,
Uses M and A; single component, solvent release curing, non-skinning.
1. Product: Manufacturer’s recommended
2. Applications: Use for concealed locations only:
a. Sealant bead between top stud runner and structure and between bottom stud track
and floor.
G.
Type JS-6 - Bathtub/Tile Sealant: Silicone; ASTM C 920, Uses I, M and A; single component,
mildew resistant.
1. Product: manufacturer’s recommended
2. Applications: Use for:
a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and floor and wall surfaces, color: white.
b. Joints between kitchen and bath countertops and wall surface, color: white.
c. Joints between all-glass, glass panels and adjacent wall surface, color: clear.
H.
Type APP-1 - Fire Rated Acoustical Putty Pad: .
1. Product: Manufacturer’s recommended
2. Applications: Acoustic sealant around unsealed outlet boxes and electrical boxes in
sound rated wall assemblies.
.
2.3
ACCESSORIES
A.
Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.
B.
Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer;
compatible with joint forming materials.
C.
Joint Backing: Round foam rod compatible with sealant; ASTM D 1056, sponge or expanded
rubber; oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width.
D.
Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit
application.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that substrate surfaces and joint openings are ready to receive work.
B.
Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
JOINT SEALERS
07 90 05 - 3
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
3.4
B.
Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C 1193.
D.
Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfigurement.
INSTALLATION
A.
Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of
surfaces and material installation instructions.
B.
Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C 1193.
C.
Perform acoustical sealant application work in accordance with ASTM C 919.
D.
Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve width-to-depth ratio, neck
dimension, and surface bond area as recommended by manufacturer, except where specific
dimensions are indicated.
E.
Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used.
F.
Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags.
G.
Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer
when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.
H.
Tool joints concave.
CLEANING
A.
3.5
Clean adjacent soiled surfaces.
PROTECTION
A.
3.6
Remove loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of sealant.
Protect sealants until cured.
SCHEDULE
A.
Exterior Joints for Which No Other Sealant Type is Indicated: Type JS-1.
B.
Exterior Wall Expansion Joints: Type JS-1.
C.
Lap Joints in Exterior Sheet Metal Work: Type JS-3.
D.
Butt Joints in Exterior Metal Work and Siding: Type JS-1.
E.
Joints Between Exterior Metal Frames and Adjacent Work (except masonry): Type JS-1.
F.
Under Exterior Door Thresholds: Type JS-1.
G.
Interior Joints for Which No Other Sealant is Indicated: Type JS-4; None; N/A.
H.
Joints Between Plumbing Fixtures and Walls and Floors, and Between Countertops and Walls:
Type JS-6.
I.
In STC-Rated Walls, Between Metal Stud Track/Runner and Adjacent Construction: Type JS5.
J.
In STC-Rated Walls at outlet and miscellaneous electrical back boxes: APP-1
K.
At Cement fiber panel to panel joints: Type JS-2
END OF SECTION
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
JOINT SEALERS
07 90 05 - 4
DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS
081113
081416
081613
083100
083613
084126
084313
085313
087100
088000
088300
089100
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
FIBERGLASS DOORS
ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
SECTIONAL DOORS
ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS
VINYL WINDOWS
DOOR HARDWARE
GLAZING
MIRRORS
LOUVERS
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
SECTION 081113
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Steel frames for wood doors.
B.
Fire-rated steel doors and frames.
C.
Thermally insulated steel doors.
D.
Sound-rated steel doors and frames.
E.
Steel glazing frames.
F.
Accessories, including glazing, louvers, and matching panels.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware.
B.
Section 08 80 00 - Glazing: Glass for doors and borrowed lites.
C.
Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Field painting.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ANSI/ICC A117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and
Facilities; International Code Council; 2003.
B.
ANSI A250.8 - SDI-100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames;
2003.
C.
ANSI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for
Steel Doors and Frames; 1998 (R2004).
D.
ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2009a.
E.
ASTM C 1363 - Standard Test Method for Thermal Performance of Building Assemblies by
Means of a Hot Box Apparatus; 2005.
F.
ASTM E 90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound
Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements; 2009.
G.
ASTM E 413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation; 2004.
H.
ASTM E 1408 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of the Sound Transmission
Loss of Door Panels and Door Systems; 1991 (Reapproved 2000).
I.
BHMA A156.115 - Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Steel Frames; 2006.
J.
NAAMM HMMA 840 - Guide Specifications for Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors
and Frames; The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; 2007.
K.
NAAMM HMMA 860 - Guide Specifications for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; The National
Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; 1992.
L.
NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2010.
M.
UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.
N.
UL 10B - Standard for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
O.
UL 10C - Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; Current Edition,
Including All Revisions.
P.
Each exterior insulated steel door shall bear the grade mark of a recognized association of a
recognized association or independent inspection agency. Comply with HUD UM 89: HUD
building product standards and certification program for exterior insulated steel door systems.
SUBMITTALS
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
08 11 13 - 1
1.5
1.6
A.
See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations,
reinforcement type and locations, anchorage and fastening methods, and finishes; and one
copy of referenced grade standard.
C.
Shop Drawings: Details of each opening, showing elevations, glazing, frame profiles, and
identifying location of different finishes, if any.
D.
Samples: Submit two samples of metal, 2 x 2 inches in size showing factory finishes, colors,
and surface texture.
E.
Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's published instructions, including any special installation
instructions relating to this project.
F.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certification that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in
this section with minimum five years documented experience.
B.
Maintain at the project site a copy of all reference standards dealing with installation.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Store in accordance with NAAMM HMMA 840.
B.
Protect with resilient packaging; avoid humidity build-up under coverings; prevent corrosion.
PART 200PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
2.3
Steel Doors and Frames:
1. Assa Abloy Ceco, Curries, or Fleming: www.assaabloydss.com.
2. Windsor Republic Doors: www.republicdoor.com.
3. Steelcraft: www.steelcraft.com.
3.4. Ceco
4.5. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
DOORS AND FRAMES
A.
Requirements for All Doors and Frames:
1. Accessibility: Comply with ANSI/ICC A117.1.
2. Door Top Closures: Flush with top of faces and edges.
3. Door Edge Profile: Beveled on both edges.
4. Door Texture: Smooth faces.
5. Hardware Preparation: In accordance with BHMA A156.115, with reinforcement welded in
place, in addition to other requirements specified in door grade standard.
6. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing.
B.
Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with more
than one type of requirement, comply with all the specified requirements for each type; for
instance, an exterior door that is also indicated as being sound-rated must comply with the
requirements specified for exterior doors and for sound-rated doors; where two requirements
conflict, comply with the most stringent.
STEEL DOORS
A.
Exterior Doors:
1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 3, physical performance Level A, Model 2, seamless.
2. Galvanizing: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in
accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness.
3. Insulating Value: U-value of .40 maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 1363
4. Weatherstripping: Integral, recessed into door edge or frame.
B.
Interior Doors , Fire-Rated:
1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 2, physical performance Level B, Model 1, full flush.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
08 11 13 - 2
2.
2.4
2.5
Fire Rating: As indicated on Door and Frame Schedule, tested in accordance with UL
10C ("positive pressure").
a. Provide units listed and labeled by UL.
b. Attach fire rating label to each fire rated unit.
C.
Interior Doors , Sound-Rated:
1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 2, physical performance Level B, Model 2, seamless.
2. STC Rating of Assembled Door, Frame, and Seals: 35, calculated in accordance with
ASTM E 413, tested in accordance with ASTM E 90 or ASTM E 1408.
3. Core: Polyurethane.
4. Sound Seals: Integral, concealed in door or frame.
5. Force to Open and Close and Latch: Not more than 5 pounds.
D.
Panels: Same construction, performance, and finish as doors.
STEEL FRAMES
A.
General:
1. Comply with the requirements of grade specified for corresponding door, except:
a. Frames for Wood Doors: Comply with frame requirements specified in ANSI A250.8
for Level 1, 18 gage
2. Finish: Same as for door.
3. Provide mortar guard boxes for hardware cut-outs in frames to be installed in masonry or
to be grouted.
4. Frames in Masonry Walls: Size to suit masonry coursing with head member 4 inches high
to fill opening without cutting masonry units.
B.
Exterior Door Frames: Fully welded.
1. Frames for Wood Doors: Comply with frame requirements specified in ANSI A250.8 for
Level 2, 16 gage.
2. Galvanizing: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in
accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness.
3. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing.
4. Weatherstripping: Integral, recessed into door edge or frame.
C.
Interior Door Frames, Fire-Rated: Knock-down type.
1. Fire Rating: Same as door, labeled.
2. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing.
D.
Mullions for Pairs of Doors: Fixed, of profile similar to jambs.
E.
Frames for Interior Glazing or Borrowed Lights: Construction and face dimensions to match
door frames, and as indicated on drawings.
F.
Transom Bars: Fixed, of profile same as jamb and head.
ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A.
Louvers: Roll formed steel with overlapping frame; ; factory-installed.
1. In Fire-Rated Doors: UL-listed fusible link louver, same rating as door.
2. Style: Standard straight slat blade.
3. Louver Free Area: 50 percent.
4. Fasteners: Concealed fasteners.
B.
Glazing: As specified in Section 08 80 00 , factory installed.
C.
Removable Stops: Formed sheet steel, shape as indicated on drawings, mitered or butted
corners ; prepared for countersink style tamper proof screws.
D.
Grout for Frames: Portland cement grout of maximum 4-inch slump for hand troweling; thinner
pumpable grout is prohibited.
E.
Silencers: Resilient rubber, fitted into drilled hole; 3 on strike side of single door, 3 on center
mullion of pairs, and 2 on head of pairs without center mullions.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
08 11 13 - 3
F.
2.6
Temporary Frame Spreaders: Provide for all factory- or shop-assembled frames.
FINISH MATERIALS
A.
Primer: Rust-inhibiting, complying with ANSI A250.10 , door manufacturer's standard.
B.
Finish: As specified in Section 09 90 00.
1. Color: As shown on Drawings.
C.
Bituminous Coating: Asphalt emulsion or other high-build, water-resistant, resilient coating.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B.
Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
Coat inside of frames to be installed in masonry or to be grouted, with bituminous coating, prior
to installation.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with the requirements of the specified door grade standard and NAAMM
HMMA 840.
B.
In addition, install fire rated units in accordance with NFPA 80.
C.
Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction.
D.
Grout frames in masonry construction, using hand trowel methods; brace frames so that
pressure of grout before setting will not deform frames.
E.
Coordinate installation of hardware.
F.
Coordinate installation of glazing.
G.
Coordinate installation of electrical connections to electrical hardware items.
TOLERANCES
A.
Clearances Between Door and Frame: As specified in ANSI A250.8.
B.
Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 in measured with straight edge, corner to corner.
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement.
B.
Adjust sound control doors so that seals are fully engaged when door is closed.
C.
Test sound control doors for force to close, latch, and unlatch in accordance with ASTM E
1408; adjust as required to comply.
SCHEDULE
A.
Refer to Door and Frame Schedule on the drawings.
END OF SECTION
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
08 11 13 - 4
SECTION 081416
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
Flush wood doors; flush configuration; fire rated, non-rated, and acoustical.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 06 20 00 - Finish Carpentry: Installation of wood doors and frames
B.
Section 08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.
C.
Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware.
D.
Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Site finishing of doors.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ANSI A135.4 - American National Standard for Basic Hardboard; 2004.
B.
ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; Intertek Testing Services NA, Inc.; current edition.
C.
NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2010.
D.
NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; National Fire Protection
Association; 2008.
E.
UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.
F.
UL 10B - Standard for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
G.
UL 10C - Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; Current Edition,
Including All Revisions.
H.
WDMA I.S.1-A - Architectural Wood Flush Doors; Window and Door Manufacturers
Association; 2004.
I.
Each flush wood door shall bear the grade mark of a recognized association of a recognized
association or independent inspection agency. Comply with HUD UM 52a - Wood Flush Doors
SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and
characteristics.
C.
Shop Drawings: Show doors and frames, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts, beveling,
blocking for hardware, factory machining, factory finishing, cutouts for glazing and other details.
1. Provide the information required by AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards.
2. Include certification program label.
D.
Specimen warranty.
E.
Samples: Submit two samples of door construction, 12 x 12 inch in size cut from top corner of
door.
F.
Samples: Submit two samples of door veneer, 6 x 6 inch in size illustrating wood grain, stain
color, and sheen.
G.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation instructions.
H.
Warranty, executed in Owner's name.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Maintain one copy of the specified door quality standard on site for review during installation
and finishing.
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
08 14 16 - 1
1.6
1.7
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in
this section with minimum three years of documented experience.
C.
Installed Fire Rated Door and Transom Panel Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated
class as indicated.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Package, deliver and store doors in accordance with specified quality standard.
B.
Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage.
C.
Protect doors with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic. Do not store in damp or
wet areas; or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. Seal top and bottom edges with
tinted sealer if stored more than one week. Break seal on site to permit ventilation.
WARRANTY
A.
See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals for additional warranty requirements.
B.
Interior Doors: Provide manufacturer's warranty for the life of the installation.
C.
Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances,
defective materials, and telegraphing core construction.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
Wood Veneer Faced Doors:
1. Graham Wood Doors: www.grahamdoors.com.
2. Eggers Industries: www.eggersindustries.com.
3. Haley Brothers: www.haleybros.com.
4. Marshfield DoorSystems, Inc: www.marshfielddoors.com.
5. Masonite.
5.6. Lynden.
6.7. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
DOORS AND PANELS
A.
All Doors: See drawings for locations and additional requirements.
1. Quality Level: Custom Grade, Heavy Duty performance, in accordance with WDMA I.S.1A.
B.
Interior Doors: Type II, 1 3/4". At apartment unit interior doors: 1 3/8" inches thick hollow core,
flush construction.
1. Provide solid core doors at all locations except provide hollow core doors at locations
scheduled.
2. Fire Rated Doors: Tested to ratings indicated on drawings in accordance with NFPA 252,
UL 10B, or UBC Standard 7-2-94 ("neutral pressure"); UL or WH (ITS) labeled without any
visible seals when door is open.
3. Hardboard facing with factory opaque finish where indicated on drawings.
DOOR AND PANEL CORES
A.
Non-Rated Solid Core and 20 Minute Rated Doors: Type particleboard core (PC), plies and
faces as indicated above.
B.
Fire Rated Doors: Mineral core, Type FD, plies and faces as indicated above; with core
blocking as required to provide adequate anchorage of hardware without through-bolting.
C.
Hollow Core Doors: Type Standard (SHC/FSHC); plies and faces as indicated above.
DOOR FACINGS
A.
Hardboard Facing for Opaque Finish: AHA A135.4, Class 1 - Tempered, S2S (smooth two
sides) hardboard, composition face, 1/8 inch thick.
B.
Facing Adhesive: Type II - water resistant.
ACCESSORIES
A. Metal Louvers: SU-50 manufactured by L and L Louvers Inc.:
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
08 14 16 - 2
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.6
Material and Finish: Roll formed steel.
Louver Blade: Inverted V blade, sight proof.
Louver Free Area: 50 percent.
Frame: surface mounted style with surface fasteners.
DOOR CONSTRUCTION
A.
Fabricate doors in accordance with door quality standard specified.
B.
Where supplementary protective edge trim is required, install trim after veneer facing has been
applied full-width.
C.
Factory machine doors for hardware other than surface-mounted hardware, in accordance with
hardware requirements and dimensions.
D.
Factory fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings, with edge
clearances in accordance with specified quality standard.
1. Exception: Doors to be field finished.
E.
Provide edge clearances in accordance with the quality standard specified.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B.
Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.
C.
Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out-of-tolerance for size or
alignment.
INSTALLATION
A.
3.3
3.4
3.5
Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and specified quality standard.
1. Install fire-rated doors in accordance with NFPA 80 requirements.
B.
Factory-Finished Doors: Do not field cut or trim; if fit or clearance is not correct, replace door.
C.
Field-Finished Doors: Trimming to fit is acceptable.
1. Adjust width of non-rated doors by cutting equally on both jamb edges.
2. Trim maximum of 3/4 inch off bottom edges.
3. Trim fire-rated doors in strict compliance with fire rating limitations.
D.
Use machine tools to cut or drill for hardware.
E.
Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware.
TOLERANCES
A.
Conform to specified quality standard for fit and clearance tolerances.
B.
Conform to specified quality standard for telegraphing, warp, and squarenes.
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement.
B.
Adjust closers for full closure.
SCHEDULE
A.
Refer to Door and Frame Schedule appended to the Drawings.
END OF SECTION
201207 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
08 14 16 - 3
SECTION 081613
FIBERGLASS DOORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) doors.
B.
Frames for fiberglass reinforced plastic doors.
C.
Hinges and other door hardware.
D.
Accessories.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware: Other door hardware.
B.
Section 08 80 00 - Glazing.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ANSI A250.4 - American National Standard Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for
Physical Endurance for Steel Doors and Hardware Reinforcings ; 2001.
B.
Water Penetration Resistance: Operating Swing Door, shall have no water infiltration at a static
air pressure differential of 574 Pa (12 psf) when tested in accordance with AAMA 101 and
ASTM E331.
C.
Structural Requirements:
1. Design to accommodate existing substrate conditions.
2. Design glass according to AAMA 101
3. Design fiberglass according to AAMA 101.
4. Fixed, combination, and operable windows and doors shall conform to the uniform load
deflection test at a minimum static air pressure difference of (Building Design Pressure)
psf applied in the positive and negative direction in accordance with AAMA 101 and ASTM
E330. There shall be no deflection in excess of L/175 of the span of any framing member.
5. Allow for deflection of building structure. Ensure no structural loads are imposed on
windows, sliding doors, swing doors or metal panel assemblies. In lieu of other specific
requirements the minimum requirements are:
6. As specified by the structural engineer.
7. Vertical differential movement from slab to slab of ½”.
8. Horizontal displacement between floors in any horizontal plane is:
a. Serviceability condition of 0.002 times the floor to floor height. Windows must
maintain air and water tightness requirements for this amount of deformation.
b. Ultimate failure condition of 0.02 times the floor to floor height but not less than ½”.
The windows frames must remain in place.
D.
Operational Requirements:
1. Operating Windows resistance to forced entry shall meet the Grade 10 rating when tested
in accordance with AAMA 101 and ASTM F588.
2. Operating Windows shall meet the performance criteria for ease of operation in
accordance with AAMA 101.
E.
Thermal Requirements:
1. U-value: 0.26
2. Condensation Resistance: 61
3. Solar Heat Gain: 0.23
F.
.3 Energy Star: Windows and doors must be ENERGY STAR® certified. Window/door
manufacture must provide required document and labeling.
SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
020712 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
FIBERGLASS DOORS
08 16 13 - 1
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
B.
Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard details, installation instructions, and hardware
and anchor recommendations.
C.
Test Reports: Show compliance with specified criteria.
D.
Shop Drawings: Show layout and profiles; include assembly methods.
1. Indicate product components, including hardware reinforcement locations and
preparations, accessories, finish colors, patterns, and textures.
2. Indicate wall conditions, door and frame elevations, sections, materials, gages, finishes,
location of door hardware by dimension, and details of openings; use same reference
numbers indicated on Drawings to identify details and openings.
E.
Selection Samples: Submit two complete sets of color chips, illustrating manufacturer's
available finishes, colors, and textures.
F.
Verification Samples: Submit door surface samples for each finish specified, 10 inch by 10 inch
in size, illustrating finishes, colors, and textures.
G.
Door Corner Sample: Submit corner cross sections, 10 inch by 10 inch in size, illustrating
construction, finish, color, and texture.
H.
Maintenance Data: Include instructions for repair of minor scratches and damage.
I.
Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in
Owner's name and registered with manufacturer; include detailed terms of warranty.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products of the type
specified in this section, with not less than three years of documented experience.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing products of the type specified in this
section with not less than three years of documented experience.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Mark doors with location of installation, door type, color, and weight.
B.
Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with
identification labels intact.
C.
Store materials in original packaging, under cover, protected from exposure to harmful weather
conditions and from direct contact with water.
1. Store at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer.
2. Do not use non-vented plastic or canvas shelters.
3. Immediately remove wet wrappers.
D.
Store in position recommended by manufacturer, elevated minimum 4 inches above grade, with
minimum 1/4 inches space between doors.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Do not install doors until structure is enclosed.
B.
Maintain temperature and humidity at manufacturer's recommended levels during and after
installation of doors.
WARRANTY
A.
See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B.
Provide five (5) year manufacturer warranty covering materials and workmanship , including
degradation or failure due to chemical contact.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Molded Fiberglass Doors:
1. Cascadia Windows Ltd. www.cascadiawindows.com 301 / 302 Series Door assemblies.
2. ChemPruf Door Company, Ltd : www.chem-pruf.com.
020712 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
FIBERGLASS DOORS- 2
08 16 13
3.
4.
4.5.
5.6.
2.2
DOOR AND FRAME ASSEMBLIES
A.
2.3
2.4
Tiger Door LLC : www.tigerdoor.com.
Warminster Fiberglass: www.warminsterfiberglass.com.
Therma Tru.
Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
Door and Frame Assemblies: Factory-fabricated, prepared and machined for hardware.
1. Mechanical Durability: Tested to ANSI A250.4 Level A (1,000,000 cycles), minimum;
tested with hardware and fasteners intended for use on project.
2. Screw-Holding Capacity: Tested to 900 psi, minimum.
3. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 25 or less, smoke developed
index of 450 or less; when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
4. Flammability: Self-extinguishing when tested in accordance with ASTM D635.
5. Clearance between door and frame: 1/8 inch, maximum.
6. Clearance between bottom of door and finished floor: 3/4 inch, maximum; not less than
1/4 inch clearance to threshold.
COMPONENTS
A.
Doors: Through-color gel coating on fiberglass reinforced polyester resin construction with
reinforced core.
1. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches, overall.
2. Subframe and Reinforcements: Fiberglass pultrusions or polymer foam; no metal or
wood.
3. Waterproof Integrity: All edges, cut-outs, and hardware preparations factory fabricated of
fiberglass reinforced plastic; provide cut-outs with joints sealed independently of glazing or
louver inserts or trim.
4. Hardware Preparations: Factory reinforce, machine, and prepare for all hardware
including field installed items; provide solid blocking for each hardware item; make field
cutting, drilling or tapping unnecessary; obtain manufacturer's templates for hardware
preparations.
5. Finish: Smooth finish and preprime with waterborne polyurethane which meets the
general intent of AA<A-625, Color: to match window assembly.
B.
Frames: Profiles and dimensions as indicated on drawings; same type and construction used
in mechanical durability test for doors.
1. Corner Joints: Mitered with concealed corner blocks or angles of same material as frame;
fiberglass and aluminum joined with screws; steel and stainless steel spot welded; sealed
watertight with silicone sealant.
2. At hardware cut-outs provide continuous backing or mortar guards of same material as
frame, sealed watertight.
3. Frame Anchors: Stainless steel, Type 304; provide 3 anchors in each jamb for heights up
to 84 inches with one additional anchor for each additional 24 inches in height.
C.
Hinge and Hardware Fasteners: Stainless steel, Type 304; wood screws.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Glazing and Louver Stops: Pultruded fiberglass unless otherwise indicated or required by fire
rating; provided by door manufacturer to fit factory made openings, color and texture to match
door; fasteners not penetrating waterproof integrity.
1. Exterior Doors: Provide non-removable stops on outside and continuous compression
gasket weatherseal.
2. Glazed Openings: Provide removable stops on one side.
3. Opening Sizes: As indicated on drawings.
B.
Glazing: Insulated glass GL-1S, as specified in Section 08 80 00.
C.
Hardware: Manufacturer's standard.
1. Hinges: Face mount 3D adjustable hinges, by Roto.
2. Locksets: Manufacturer's standard lever-style handles.
020712 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
FIBERGLASS DOORS- 3
08 16 13
3.
4.
5.
Closers: Manufacturer's standard.
Weather-stripping: Manufacturer's standard.
Lock-bar: Roto, multi-point, full perimeter lock-bar
D.
Thresholds: Pultruded fiberglass, with skid resistant surface, full width of door opening, 1/2
inch high by 6 inches wide; same color as frame.
E.
Fasteners: 300 Series stainless steel.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before door fabrication; show
recorded measurements on shop drawings.
B.
Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
C.
If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory
preparation before proceeding.
PREPARATION
A.
Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best
result for the substrate under the project conditions.
B.
Clean and prepare substrate in accordance with manufacturer's directions.
C.
Protect adjacent work and finish surfaces from damage during installation.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; do not penetrate frames with anchors.
B.
Set units plumb, level, and true-to-line, without warping or racking doors, and with specified
clearances; anchor in place.
C.
Separate aluminum and other metal surfaces from sources of corrosion of electrolytic action at
points of contact with other materials.
ADJUSTING
A.
3.5
B.
Adjust hardware for smooth and quiet operation.
C.
Adjust doors to fit snugly and close without sticking or binding.
CLEANING
A.
3.6
Lubricate, test, and adjust doors to operate easily, free from warp, twist or distortion, and to fit
watertight for entire perimeter.
Clean installed products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions prior to owner’s
acceptance.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect installed products from damage during subsequent work.
END OF SECTION
020712 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
FIBERGLASS DOORS- 4
08 16 13
SECTION 083100
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.2
1.3
1.4
ACCESS DOORS AND
PANELS
Access door and frame units, fire-rated and non-fire-rated, in wall and ceiling locations.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Field paint finish.
B.
Section 23 : Mechanical components requiring access.
C.
Section 26: Electrical components requiring access.
D.
D. Fire Rating: When in common walls, exterior walls, or ceiling/floor assemblies, access
hatches are required to be fire rated and rating is the responsibility of the supplier & installer.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; Intertek Testing Services NA, Inc.; current edition.
B.
UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.
SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide sizes, types, finishes, hardware, scheduled locations, and details of
adjoining work.
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate exact position of all access door units.
D.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation requirements and rough-in
dimensions.
E.
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of all access units.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
2.3
Access Doors:
1. Acudor Products Inc: www.acudor.com.
2. Karp Associates, Inc: www.karpinc.com.
3. Milcor by Commercial Products Group of Hart & Cooley, Inc: www.milcorinc.com.
4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
A.
All Units: Factory fabricated, fully assembled units with corner joints welded, filled, and ground
flush; square and without rack or warp; coordinate requirements with assemblies units are to be
installed in.
B.
Units in Fire Rated Assemblies: Fire rating equivalent to the fire rated assembly in which they
are to be installed.
1. Provide products listed and labeled by UL or ITS (Warnock Hersey) as suitable for the
purpose specified and indicated.
2. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of
fire rated doors.
WALL AND CEILING UNITS
A.
Door and Frame Units: Formed steel.
1. Frames and flanges: .062 inch steel.
2. Door panels: 0.070 inch double sheet with integral non-combustible insulation filler.
3. Size: As indicated or required.
4. Hardware:
a. Hinge: Concealed constant force closure spring type.
b. Lock: Cylinder lock with latch, two keys for each unit.
020712 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
08 31 00 - 1
5.
Prime coat with alkyd primer.
020712 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
08 31 00 - 1
B.
Non-Fire Rated Door and Frame Units in interior unit Walls:
C.
Fire Rated Door and Frame Units in Walls:
1. In Gypsum Board on Steel or Wood Studs:
a. Fire rating as required by local codes. Rating is clear on Architectural plans and wall
types.
b. Model FB-5060-DW manufactured by Acudor Products, Inc..
D.
Non-Fire Rated Door and Frame Units in Ceilings:
E.
AP-1 Fire Rated Door and Frame Units in Ceilings and Walls:
1. In Gypsum Board on Metal or Wood Furring:
a. 1 hour fire rating.
b. Model FW-5050-DW manufactured by Acudor Products, Inc..
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Verify that rough openings are correctly sized and located.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Install frames plumb and level in openings. Secure rigidly in place.
C.
Position units to provide convenient access to the concealed work requiring access.
END OF SECTION
020712 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
08 31 00- 2
SECTION 083613
SECTIONAL DOORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Overhead sectional doors, electrically operated.
B.
Operating qardware and supports.
C.
Electrical controls.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: Steel cqannel opening frame.
B.
Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware: Lock cylinders.
C.
Section 08 80 00 - Glazing: Glazing for door ligqts.
D.
Section 22 05 13 - Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing Equipment.
E.
Section 26 27 17 - Equipment Wiring.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sqeet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by tqe Hot-Dip Process; 2009a.
B.
ASTM B 209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sqeet and Plate;
2007.
C.
ASTM B 221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2008.
D.
ASTM E 330 - Standard Test Metqod for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors,
Skyligqts and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2002 (Reapproved
2010).
E.
DASMA 102 - American National Standard Specifications for Sectional Overqead Type Doors;
Door & Access Systems Manufacturers' Association, International; 2004.
F.
NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2007.
G.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2008.
SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Sqop Drawings: Indicate opening dimensions and required tolerances, connection details,
ancqorage spacing, qardware locations, and installation details.
C.
Product Data: Sqow component construction, ancqorage metqod, and qardware.
D.
Samples: Mubmit two panel finisq samples, 6 x 6 incq in size, illustrating color and finisq.
E.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include any special procedures required by project
conditions.
F.
Operation Data: Include normal operation, troublesqooting, and adjusting.
G.
Maintenance Data: Include data for motor and transmission, shaft and gearing, lubrication
frequency, spare part sources.
H.
Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms qave been completed in Owner's
name and registered witq manufacturer.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing tqe products specified in
tqis section witq minimum five years of documented experience.
020712 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
SECTIONAL DOORS
08 36 13 - 1
1.6
B.
Installer: Company specializing in performing tqe work of tqis section witq minimum five years
of experience.
C.
Conform to applicable code for motor and motor control requirements.
D.
Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories
Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified.
WARRANTY
A.
See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals for warranty requirements.
B.
Correct defective Work witqin a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
C.
Warranty: Include coverage for electric motor and transmission.
D.
Provide five year manufacturer warranty for electric operating equipment.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
2.3
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Overhead Door Corporation.
B.
Other Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Clopay Corporation: www.clopaydoor.com.
2. Wayne-Dalton Corporation: www.wayne-dalton.com.
C.
Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
STEEL DOOR COMPONENTS
A.
Steel Doors: Stile and rail steel witq solid panels; standard lift operating style witq track and
qardware; complying witq DASMA 102, Commercial application.
1. Performance: Witqstand positive and negative wind loads equal to 1.5 times design wind
loads specified by local code without damage or permanent set, when tested in
accordance with ASTM E 330, using 10 second duration of maximum load.
2. Door Nominal Thickness: 2 incqes tqick.
3. Exterior Finisq: Pre-finisqed witq baked enamel of color as selected.
4. Interior Finisq: Pre-finisqed witq baked enamel of color as selected.
5. Operation: Electric,
B.
Door Panels: Stile and rail construction, of perforated steel sqeet 0.058 incq tqick, with welded
joints; rabbeted weather joints at meeting rails, minimun 50% free area.
1. Finish: Same as stile and rails.
DOOR COMPONENTS
A.
Track: Rolled galvanized steel, 0.090 incq tqick; 3 incq wide, continuous one piece per side;
galvanized steel mounting brackets 1/4 incq tqick.
B.
Hinge and Roller Assemblies: Heavy duty qinges and adjustable roller qolders of galvanized
steel; floating qardened steel bearing rollers, located at top and bottom of eacq panel, eacq
side.
C.
Lift Mecqanism: Torsion spring on cross qead sqaft, witq braided galvanized steel lifting
cables.
Spring Counterbalance: Torsion spring counterbalance mecqanism sized to weigqt of tqe door,
witq a qelically wound, oil tempered torsion spring mounted on a steel sqaft; cable drum of die
cast aluminum witq qigq strengtq galvanized aircraft cable witq minimum 7 to 1 safety factor.
a.
Standard Cycle Spring: 10,000 cycle. OVHD-2
b.
High Cycle Spring: 25,000 cycles. OVHD-1
D.
E.
Bottom (Sill) panel: Panel taper as required to matcq finisqed cross slope, field verify
F.
Sill Weatherstripping: Resilient qollow rubber strip, one piece; fitted to bottom of door panel, full
lengtq contact.
020712 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
SECTIONAL DOORS
08 36 13 - 2
G.
2.4
H.
Head Weatqerstripping: EPDM rubber seal, one piece full lengtq.
I.
Keyed lock witq interlock switcq for automatic operator.
MATERIALS
A.
2.5
Jamb Weatqerstripping: Roll formed steel section full qeigqt of jamb, fitted witq resilient
weatqerstripping, placed in moderate contact witq door panels.
Sqeet Steel: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sqeet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, witq G60/Z180 coating,
plain surface.
ELECTRICAL OPERATION
A.
Electrical Cqaracteristics:
1. 1/2 qp motor (extra quiet operation); manually operable in case of power failure, transit
speed of 12 incqes per second.
2. Contractor engineered system coordinate witq building electrical system.
3. Refer to Section 26 27 17 - Equipment Wiring: Electrical connections.
B.
Motor: Comply witq requirements of Section 22 05 13, belt-drive – drive mecqanism, with
vibration isolation system (VIS).
C.
Wiring Terminations: Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes,
and materials indicated. Enclose terminal lugs in terminal box sized to NFPA 70.
D.
Disconnect Switch: Factory mount disconnect switch in control panel.
E.
Electric Operator: Side mounted on cross head shaft, adjustable safety friction clutch; brake
system actuated by independent voltage solenoid controlled by motor starter; enclosed gear
driven limit switch; enclosed magnetic cross line reversing starter; mounting brackets and
hardware.
F.
Safety Edge: At bottom of door panel, full width; electro-mechanical sensitized type, wired to
stop door upon striking object; hollow neoprene covered to provide weatherstrip seal.
G.
Control Station: Standard key-operated (open-close-stop) momentary type control for each
electric operator.
1. 24 volt circuit.
2. Surface mounted.
3. Locate at inside door jamb.
H.
Interconnection to Security System:
I.
Radio Control Antenna Detector:
J.
Loop Detector and Treadle:
K.
Provide auxiliary chain hoist: for emergency manual operation while disconnecting motor,
without affecting timing of limit switch. Mount disconnect and operator so they are accessible
from floor level. Include interlock device to automatically prevent motor from operating when
emergency operator is engaged
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that wall openings are ready to receive work and opening dimensions and tolerances are
within specified limits.
B.
Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.
PREPARATION
A.
Prepare opening to permit correct installation of door unit to perimeter air and vapor barrier
seal.
B.
Apply primer to wood frame.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install door unit assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
020712 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
SECTIONAL DOORS
08 36 13 - 3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
B.
Anchor assembly to wall construction and building framing without distortion or stress.
C.
Securely brace door tracks suspended from structure. Secure tracks to structural members
only.
D.
Fit and align door assembly including hardware.
E.
Coordinate installation of electrical service. Complete power and control wiring from disconnect
to unit components.
F.
Coordinate installation of sealants and backing materials at frame perimeter as specified in
Section 07 90 05.
G.
Install perimeter trim and closures.
TOLERANCES
A.
Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/16 inch.
B.
Maximum Variation from Level: 1/16 inch.
C.
Longitudinal or Diagonal Warp: Plus or minus 1/8 inch from 10 ft straight edge.
D.
Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work.
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust door assembly for smooth operation and full contact with weatherstripping.
B.
Have manufacturer's field representative present to confirm proper operation and identify
adjustments to door assembly for specified operation.
CLEANING
A.
Clean doors and frames in preparation for field finishing as specified in Section 09 90 00.
B.
Remove temporary labels and visible markings.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect installed products from damage during subsequent construction.
B.
Do not permit construction traffic through overhead door openings after adjustment and
cleaning.
END OF SECTION
020712 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
SECTIONAL DOORS
08 36 13 - 4
SECTION 084126
ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
All-glass entrances.
B.
Balanced doors.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 05 40 00 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Supplementary supports.
B.
Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM A 666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel
Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2003.
B.
ASTM B 221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2008.
C.
ASTM B 221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars,
Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes Metric; 2007.
D.
ASTM C 920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2010.
E.
ASTM C 1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2006.
F.
ASTM C 1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass--Kind HS, Kind FT Coated
and Uncoated Glass; 2004.
SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Manufacturer's descriptive literature for each component in all-glass entrance
assembly.
C.
Shop Drawings: Drawings showing layout, dimensions, identification of components, and
interface with adjacent construction.
1. Include field measurements of openings.
2. Include elevations showing:
a. Appearance of all-glass entrance layouts.
b. Locations and identification of manufacturer-supplied door hardware and fittings.
c. Locations and sizes of cut-outs and drilled holes for other door hardware.
3. Include details of:
a. Requirements for support and bracing at openings.
b. Installation details.
c. Appearance of manufacturer-supplied door hardware and fittings.
D.
Selection Samples: Two sets, representing manufacturer's full range of available metal
materials and finishes.
E.
Design Data: Design calculations, bearing seal and signature of structural engineer licensed to
practice in the State in which the Project is located, documenting compliance of exterior
assemblies with wind pressure criteria.
F.
Certificates: Contractor's certification that installer of entrance assemblies meets specified
qualifications.
G.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For manufacturer-supplied operating hardware.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
020712 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES
AND STOREFRONTS
08 41 26 - 1
1.6
A.
Designer Qualifications: Design under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer
experienced in design of this type of work and licensed in the State in which the Project is
located.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Minimum three years of experience installing entrance assemblies
similar to those specified in this section.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
MANUFACTURERS
A.
All-Glass Entrances:
1. Avanti Systems USA, Inc: www.avantisystemsusa.com.
2. Vitro America: www.vitroamerica.com.
2.3. Kawneer North America.
3.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B.
Fittings and Hardware:
1. C. R. Laurence Co., Inc: www.crlaurence.com.
2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
C.
Balanced Door Hardware:
1. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
ASSEMBLIES
A.
2.3
2.4
2.5
Entrances and Storefronts: Factory fabricated assemblies consisting of frameless glass panels
fastened with metal structural fittings in configuration indicated on the drawings.
1. Operational Loads: Designed to withstand door operation under normal traffic without
damage, racking, sagging, or deflection.
2. Prepared for all specified hardware whether specified in this section or not.
3. Finished metal surfaces protected with strippable film.
4. Factory assembled to greatest extent practicable; may be disassembled to accommodate
shipping constraints.
FITTINGS
A.
Exposed Fittings: Extruded aluminum, clear anodized finish.
B.
Fixed Glazed Panel Fittings: Sufficient to structurally support glazing and doors under specified
loads; including but not limited to panel corner patches.
C.
Sidelight Fittings: No rails; provide extruded aluminum channels, for recessed installation in
construction above and below glazing panels for frameless appearance.
D.
Balanced Door Fittings: Continuous rail at top and bottom of door:
1. Rail Cross-Section: 1-3/4 inches wide by 4 inches high.
2. Rail Profile: Tapered.
DOOR HARDWARE
A.
Finish of Exposed Metals: Match finish of fittings.
B.
Balanced Door Hardware: Provided by storefront manufacturer:
1. Top and Bottom Arm Assemblies:
a. Material: Stainless steel.
b. Pivot Bearings: Rated for door weight of 1770 pounds, with radial load of 2000
pounds.
2. Closers: Concealed overhead closers, with hydraulic backcheck and full stroke checking,
integrally header-mounted; adjustable speed, closing speed, backcheck, and spring power
without requiring header removal.
3. Hinge Tube: Carbon steel tube, 5/32 inch minimum wall thickness.
MATERIALS
020712 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES
AND STOREFRONTS
08 41 26 - 2
A.
Glass: Tempered float glass meeting requirements of ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality Q3, fully
tempered in accordance with ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, and as follows:
1. Thickness: 1/2 inch.
2. Color: Clear, Class 1.
3. Prepare glazing panels for indicated fittings and hardware before tempering.
4. Polish edges that will be exposed in finished work to bright flat polish.
5. Temper glass materials horizontally; visible tong marks or tong mark distortions are not
permitted.
B.
Aluminum Components: Conforming to ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063, Temper T5.
C.
Stainless Steel Components: Conforming to ASTM A 666, Type 304.
D.
Sealant: One-part silicone sealant, conforming to ASTM C 920, clear.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that openings are acceptable.
B.
Do not begin installation until substrates and openings have been properly prepared.
C.
If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory
preparation before proceeding.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Tolerances:
1. Horizontal Components and Sight Lines: Not more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet variation from
level, non-cumulative.
2. Vertical Components and Sight Lines: Not more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet variation from
plumb, non-cumulative.
3. Variation from Plane or Indicated Location: Not more than 1/16 inch.
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust doors to operate correctly, without binding to frame, sill, or adjacent doors.
B.
Adjust door hardware for smooth operation.
CLEANING
A.
3.5
Clean installed work to like-new condition.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect installed products until completion of project.
B.
Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
020712 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES
AND STOREFRONTS
08 41 26 - 3
SECTION 084313
ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Aluminum-framed storefront, with vision glass.
B.
Aluminum doors and frames.
C.
Weatherstripping.
D.
Perimeter sheet metal frame stop and sealant.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: Steel attachment devices.
B.
Section 07 25 00 - Weather Barriers: Perimeter air and vapor seal between glazing system and
adjacent construction.
C.
Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers: Perimeter sealant and back-up materials.
D.
Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware: Hardware items other than specified in this section.
E.
Section 08 80 00 - Glazing: Glass and glazing accessories.
1.3
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
AAMA CW-10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site; American
Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2004.
B.
AAMA 501.2 - Field Check of Metal Storefronts, Curtain Walls, and Sloped Glazing Systems for
Water Leakage; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2009 (part of AAMA 501).
C.
AAMA 1503 - Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance
of Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections; American Architectural Manufacturers
Association; 2009.
D.
AAMA 2604 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for
High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2005.
E.
ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures; American Society of Civil
Engineers; 2005.
F.
ASTM A 36/A 36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2008.
G.
ASTM A 123/A 123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron
and Steel Products; 2009.
H.
ASTM B 209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate;
2007.
I.
ASTM B 221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2008.
J.
ASTM E 283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior
Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the
Specimen; 2004.
K.
ASTM E 330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors,
Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2002 (Reapproved
2010).
L.
ASTM E 331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights,
Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2000 (Reapproved 2009).
M.
SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); Society for
Protective Coatings; 2002 (Ed. 2004).
020712 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS
08 43 13 - 1
N.
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Coordinate with installation of other components that comprise the exterior enclosure.
B.
Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct a preinstallation meeting one week before starting work of
this section; require attendance by all affected installers.
SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide component dimensions, describe components within assembly,
anchorage and fasteners, glass and infill, door hardware, internal drainage details.
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate system dimensions, framed opening requirements and tolerances,
affected related Work, expansion and contraction joint location and details, and field welding
required.
D.
Design Data: Provide framing member structural and physical characteristics, engineering
calculations, dimensional limitations.
E.
Hardware Schedule: Complete itemization of each item of hardware to be provided for each
door, cross-referenced to door identification numbers in Contract Documents.
F.
Samples: Submit two samples 12 x 12 inches in size illustrating finished aluminum surface,
glass, glazing materials.
G.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that the products supplied meet or exceed the specified
requirements.
H.
Report of field testing for water leakage.
I.
Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's
name and registered with manufacturer.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Designer Qualifications: Design structural support framing components under direct
supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and
licensed at the State in which the Project is located.
B.
Manufacturer and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing aluminum
glazing systems with minimum five years of documented experience.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Handle products of this section in accordance with AAMA CW-10.
B.
Protect finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed
coatings that bond to aluminum when exposed to sunlight or weather.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
1.9
All fenestration products (windows and doors) shall be in accordance with 24 CFR Section s
200.935 and HUD UH 111: HUD building product standards and certification program for
fenestration products (windows and doors).
Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F. Maintain this
minimum temperature during and 48 hours after installation.
WARRANTY
A.
See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B.
Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
C.
Provide five year manufacturer warranty against failure of glass seal on insulating glass units,
including interpane dusting or misting. Include provision for replacement of failed units.
D.
Provide five year manufacturer warranty against excessive degradation of exterior finish.
Include provision for replacement of units with excessive fading, chalking, or flaking.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
020712 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS
08 43 13 - 2
2.1
2.2
2.3
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Kawneer North American ; Product Tri-Fab 451 T.
B.
Other Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. United States Aluminum Corp: www.usalum.com.
2. Vistawall Architectural Products: www.vistawall.com.
3. Tubelite, Inc. 300 ES Energy Saver: www.tubeliteinc.com.
4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
STOREFRONT
A.
Aluminum-Framed Storefront: Factory fabricated, factory finished aluminum framing members
with infill, and related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices.
1. Unitized, shop assembly.
2. Glazing Rabbet: For 1 inch insulating glazing.
3. Glazing Position: Centered (front to back).
4. Vertical Mullion Dimensions: 4 1/2" x 2".
5. Design Wind Load: positive and negative based on structural design criteria.
6. Water Leakage Test Pressure Differential: no leakage at minimum static air pressure
differential of 8 lbf/sq ft.
7. Air Infiltration Test Pressure Differential: 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. at 6.24 psf.
8. Condensation Resistance Factor: 70 frame, 69 glass, minimum
9. Overall U-Value Including Glazing: 0.47, maximum.
10. Finish: High performance organic coating AAMA 2604: multiple coats, thermally cured
flouoropolymenr sytesm.
11. Color: Bronze / Dark Brown.
B.
Performance Requirements:
1. Design and size components to withstand the specified load requirements without damage
or permanent set, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 330, using loads 1.5 times the
design wind loads and 10 second duration of maximum load.
a. Design Wind Loads: Comply with requirements of 2010 Oregon Structural Specialty
Code code.
b. Member Deflection: Limit member deflection to flexure limit of glass in any direction,
with full recovery of glazing materials.
2. Movement: Accommodate movement between storefront and perimeter framing and
deflection of lintel, without damage to components or deterioration of seals.
3. Air Infiltration: Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.06 cu ft/min/sq ft of wall area,
measured at specified differential pressure across assembly in accordance with ASTM E
283.
4. Condensation Resistance Factor: Measure in accordance with AAMA 1503 with 1 inch
insulating glass installed.
5. Water Leakage: None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E 331 at specified
pressure differential.
6. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network any
water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, and migrating moisture
occurring within system.
7. Air and Vapor Seal: Maintain continuous air barrier and vapor retarder throughout
assembly, primarily in line with inside pane of glass and inner sheet of infill panel and heel
bead of glazing compound.
8. Expansion/Contraction: Provide for expansion and contraction within system components
caused by cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F over a 12 hour period without
causing detrimental effect to system components, anchorages, and other building
elements.
COMPONENTS
020712 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS
08 43 13 - 3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
A.
Aluminum Framing Members: Tubular aluminum sections, thermally broken with interior
section insulated from exterior, drainage holes and internal weep drainage system.
1. Framing members for interior applications need not be thermally broken.
2. Glazing stops: Flush.
3. Structurally Reinforced Members: Extruded aluminum with internal reinforcement of
structural steel member.
B.
Doors: Glazed aluminum.
1. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches.
2. Top Rail: 6 inches wide.
3. Vertical Stiles: 6 inches wide.
4. Bottom Rail: 10 inches wide.
5. Glazing Stops: Square.
6. Custom Aluminum grille insert:
a. 1/2 inch square aluminum tube or flat bar
b. exterior mounted.
c. finish to match door.
d. see elevation for pattern.
7. Finish: Same as storefront.
MATERIALS
A.
Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).
B.
Structural Steel Sections: ASTM A 36/A 36M; galvanized in accordance with requirements of
ASTM A 123/A 123M.
C.
Fasteners: Stainless steel.
D.
Exposed Flashings: SM-2 as specified in Section 07 62 00.
E.
Concealed Flashings: .025 inch thick stainless steel.
F.
Perimeter Sealant: Type JS-1 specified in Section 07 90 05.
G.
Glass: As specified in Section 08 80 00.
1. Glass in Exterior Framing: Type GL-1S.
2. Glass in Interior Framing: Type GL-2S.
3. Glass in Doors: Type GL-1.
H.
Glazing Gaskets: Type to suit application to achieve weather, moisture, and air infiltration
requirements.
I.
Glazing Accessories: As specified in Section 08 80 00.
J.
Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Steel Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, zinc rich.
FINISHES
A.
High Performance Organic Finish: AAMA 2604; multiple coats, thermally cured fluoropolymer
system.
B.
Color: Bronze / Dark Brown pre finished.
C.
Touch-Up Materials: As recommended by coating manufacturer for field application.
HARDWARE
A.
Door Hardware: As specified in Section 08 71 00.
B.
Weatherstripping: Wool pile, continuous and replaceable; provide on all doors.
C.
Sill Sweep Strips: Resilient seal type, retracting, of neoprene; provide on all doors.
D.
Threshold: Extruded aluminum, one piece per door opening, ribbed surface; provide on all
exterior doors.
E.
Automatic Door Operators and Actuators where scheduled: As specified in Section 08 42 29.
ACCESSORIES
020712 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS
08 43 13 - 4
A. Sheet Metal frame stop: 1” horizontal x 1” vertical x continuous aluminum angle finish to match
frame.
2.8
FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of
assembly, yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal.
B.
Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline, and weatherproof.
C.
Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors.
D.
Coat concealed metal surfaces that will be in contact with cementitious materials or dissimilar
metals with bituminous paint.
E.
Arrange fasteners and attachments to conceal from view.
F.
Reinforce exterior horizontal head rail to receive custom grille track brackets and attachments.
G.
Reinforce components internally for door hardware and door operators.
H.
Reinforce framing members for imposed loads.
I.
Finishing: Apply factory finish to all surfaces that will be exposed in completed assemblies.
1. Touch-up surfaces cut during fabrication so that no natural aluminum is visible in
completed assemblies, including joint edges.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work.
B.
Verify that wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of
this section.
INSTALLATION
A.
A. Install sheet metal window frame stops at head, jambs and sill.
B.
Coordinate installation of membrane flashing at head, jambs and sill.
C.
Install wall system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
D.
Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and
other irregularities.
E.
Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure.
F.
Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional
tolerances, aligning with adjacent work.
F.
Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation.
G.
Install sill flashings. Turn up ends and edges; seal to adjacent work to form water tight dam.
H.
Where fasteners penetrate sill flashings, make watertight by seating and sealing fastener heads
to sill flashing.
I.
Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier materials.
J.
Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of
thermal barrier.
K.
Set thresholds in bed of mastic and secure.
L.
Install hardware using templates provided.
1. See Section 08 71 00 for hardware installation requirements.
2. See Section 08 42 29 for operator and actuator installation requirements.
M. Install glass in accordance with Section 08 80 00, using glazing method required to achieve
performance criteria.
N.
Install perimeter sealant in accordance with Section 07 90 05.
020712 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS
08 43 13 - 5
3.3
3.4
3.5
O.
Touch-up minor damage to factory applied finish; replace components that cannot be
satisfactorily repaired.
P.
Coordinate automatic door operator installation, no exposed cabling or wiring.
TOLERANCES
A.
Maximum Variation from Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 ft non-cumulative or 1/16 inches per 10 ft,
whichever is less.
B.
Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 1/32 inch.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for independent testing and inspection
requirements. Inspection will monitor quality of installation and glazing.
B.
Test installed storefront for water leakage in accordance with ASTM E 1105 and AAMA 503-08.
C.
Water Infiltration Field Test pressure of 8 PSF.
D.
Test installed door operators, manual and power assist for proper operation and balance.
E.
Failed windows will be re-tested at contractor expense.
ADJUSTING
A.
3.6
3.7
Adjust operating hardware and sash for smooth operation.
CLEANING
A.
Remove protective material from pre-finished aluminum surfaces.
B.
Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean
wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean.
C.
Remove excess sealant by method acceptable to sealant manufacturer.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect installed products from damage during subsequent construction.
END OF SECTION
020712 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS
08 43 13 - 6
SECTION 085313
VINYL WINDOWS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Factory fabricated tubular extruded plastic windows with fixed and operating sash.
B.
Factory glazed including infill panels.
C.
Operating hardware.
D.
Insect screens.
E.
Perimeter sheet metal frame stop and sealant.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers: Perimeter sealant and back-up materials.
B.
Section 08 80 00 - Glazing.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 - Voluntary Specifications for Aluminum, Vinyl (PVC) and
Wood Windows and Glass Doors; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2008.
B.
AAMA 1503 - Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance
of Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections; American Architectural Manufacturers
Association; 2009.
C.
ASTM E 283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior
Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the
Specimen; 2004.
D.
ASTM E 330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors,
Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2002 (Reapproved
2010).
E.
ASTM E 331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights,
Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2000 (Reapproved 2009).
F.
ASTM E 1105 - Standard Test Method for Field Determination of Water Penetration of Installed
Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls, by Uniform or Cyclic Static Air Pressure
Difference; 2000 (Reapproved 2008)
G.
FS L-S-125 - Screening, Insect, Nonmetallic; Federal Specifications and Standards; Revision B,
1972.
H.
AAMA 2400-02 Standard Practice for Installation of Windows with a Mounting Flange in Stud
Frame Construction
I.
All fenestration products (windows and doors) shall be in accordance with 24 CFR Section s
200.935 and HUD UH 111: HUD building product standards and certification program for
fenestration products (windows and doors).
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Performance Requirements: As specified in PART 2, with the following additional
requirements:
B.
System Design: Design and size components to withstand dead and live loads caused by
pressure and suction of wind acting normal to plane of window.
1. Calculate design pressures in accordance with applicable code
C.
Deflection: Limit member deflection to 1/175 of the longer dimension with full recovery of
glazing materials for individual window units within the opening assembly.
D.
Assembly: To accommodate, without damage to components or deterioration of seals,
movement between window and perimeter framing, deflection of lintel.
E.
Thermal Resistance of Assembly (Excluding Vision Areas): value of 0.27
020712 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
VINYL WINDOWS
08 53 13 - 1
1.5
F.
Air Infiltration: Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.3 cu ft/min/sq ft of wall area, measured
at a reference differential pressure across assembly of 1.57 psf as measured in accordance
with ASTM E 283.
G.
Vapor Seal: No vapor seal failure at interior static pressure of 1 inch, 72 degrees F, and 40
percent relative humidity.
H.
Condensation Resistance Factor: CRF of 60 when measured in accordance with AAMA 1503.
I.
Water Leakage: None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E 331 at a pressure
differential of 12 psf in the lab.
J.
System Internal Drainage: Drain water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing
channels, or migrating moisture occurring within system, to the exterior by a weep drainage
network.
K.
Air and Vapor Seal: Maintain continuous air barrier and vapor retarder throughout assembly,
primarily in line with inside pane of glass and heel bead of glazing compound. Position thermal
insulation on exterior surface of air barrier and vapor retarder.
L.
Thermal Movement: Design sections to permit movement caused by thermal expansion and
contraction of plastic to suit glass, infill, and perimeter opening construction.
M.
Design Temperature Range: 120 F degrees.
N.
Each fenestration product shall bear the grade mark of a recognized association or
independent inspection agency. Comply with HUD UM 111 – Building Product Standards and
Certification Program for Fenestration Products (Windows and Doors)
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.6
1.7
Pre-installation Meeting: Convene before starting work of this section.
SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide component dimensions, anchorage and fasteners, glass, internal
drainage details.
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate opening dimensions, framed opening tolerances, affected related
work, installation requirements, location of safety rated glass.
D.
Samples: Submit two window and frame sections, 12 x 12 inch in size, illustrating window
frame section, mullion section, screen and frame, and finished surfaces.
E.
Submit two samples of operating hardware.
F.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products of this section meet or exceed specified
requirements.
G.
Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in
Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
MOCK-UP
A.
Reference Masonry Veneer Section 04 20 01 for criteria for mock-up assembly.
B.
Mock-up testing and approval to be complete prior to finalizing window order/fabrication.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.9
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this
section, with not less than five years of documented experience.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum five years of experience.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Protect finished surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings that
bond when exposed to sunlight or weather.
020712 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
VINYL WINDOWS
08 53 13 - 2
1.L0 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F.
B.
Maintain this minimum temperature during and after installation of sealants.
1.LL WARRANTY
A.
See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B.
Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
C.
Provide five year manufacturer warranty for insulated glass units from seal failure, interpane
dusting or misting, and replacement of same. Include coverage for degradation of color finish.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS VW-1
A.
2.2
COMPONENTS
A.
2.3
Frames: 3 1/2 inch wide x 3 1/4 inch deep profile; chambered glaze bead.
C.
Mullion: 4 7/8 inch wide x 3 /14 inch deep profile.
D.
Sills: 3 1/2 inch nominal thickness, with pressure equalize drainage system
E.
Insect Screens: Woven fiberglass mesh; 14/18 mesh size.
1. Color: gray
F.
Operable Sash Weather Stripping: extruded; permanently resilient, profiled to effect weather
seal.
GLASS AND GLAZING MATERIALS
Glass and Glazing Materials: As specified in Section 08 80 00 of Types described below:
1. Glass in Exterior Lights: GL-1 / GL-1S Type (Safety glazing as required to meet current
2010 OSSC)
SEALANT MATERIALS
A.
2.5
Windows: Extruded, hollow, tubular, ultra-violet resistant polyvinyl chloride (PVC) with integral
color; factory fabricated; with vision glass, related flashings, anchorage and attachment
devices.
1. Performance Requirements: AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440C W45
2. Configuration: Fixed, non-operable, outward opening, side hinged, outward opening, and
top hinged sash.
3. Color: Brown exterior, white interior.
B.
A.
2.4
Tubular Plastic Windows:
1. Manufacturer; Product
2. Atrium Windows ; 9000 Series.
3. Pella
4. Milgard
5. Westcoast
6. Cascade Winpro
2.7. Mercer
3.8. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
Perimeter Sealant and Backing Materials: Hot melt PIB backed with silicone.
HARDWARE
A.
Sash lock: Lever handle with cam lock. Awning Extension max opening of 6” at windows below
42”.
B.
Operator: fitted to projecting sash arms with limit stops (maximum opening of 4".
C.
Projecting Sash Arms: Cadmium plated steel, friction pivot joints with nylon bearings,
removable pivot clips for cleaning.
D. Finish for exposed Hardware: baked enamel, color match to window frame.
020712 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
VINYL WINDOWS
08 53 13 - 3
2.6
ACCESSORIES
A. Sheet Metal frame stop: 1” horizontal x 5/8” vertical x continuous galvanized sheet metal angle.
2.7 FABRICATION
020712 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
VINYL WINDOWS
08 53 13 - 4
A.
Fabricate framing, mullions and sash members with fusion welded corners and joints, in a rigid
jig. Supplement frame sections with internal reinforcement where required for structural rigidity.
B.
Form sills in one piece. Slope sills for wash.
C.
Form snap-in glass stops, closure molds, weather stops, and flashings of extruded PVC for
tight fit into window frame section.
D.
Form weather stop flange to perimeter of unit.
E.
Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of
assembly, yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal.
F.
Arrange fasteners to be concealed from view.
G.
Permit internal drainage weep holes and channels to migrate moisture to exterior. Provide
internal drainage of glazing spaces to exterior through weep holes.
H.
Assemble insect screen frame, miter and reinforced frame corners. Fit mesh taut into frame
and secure. Fit frame with four spring loaded steel pin retainers.
I.
Double weatherstrip operable units.
J.
Factory glaze window units.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
Install sheet metal window frame stops at head, jambs and sill.
B.
Coordinate installation of membrane flashing at head, jambs and sill.
C.
Install window units in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
D.
Attach window frame and shims to perimeter opening to accommodate construction tolerances
and other irregularities.
E.
Align window plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain dimensional tolerances and
alignment with adjacent work.
F.
Install sill.
G.
Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. Pack
fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal
barrier.
H.
Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier materials.
I.
Install operating hardware.
J.
Install glass and infill panels in accordance with Section 08 80 00, to glazing method required to
achieve performance criteria.
K.
Install perimeter sealant and backing materials in accordance with Section 07 90 05.
TOLERANCES
A.
3.4
Verify wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of this
Section.
Maximum Variation from Level or Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 ft non-cumulative or 0.5 inches
per 100 ft, whichever is less.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Test installed windows for compliance with performance requirements for water penetration, in
accordance with ASTM E 1105 and AAMA 503-08 using uniform pressure and same pressure
difference as specified for laboratory tests.
1. Test four window assemblies of each floor, as directed by owner/architect.
2.
If any window fails, test additional windows at Contractor's expense.
3.
Water Infiltration Test Pressure to be no reduction based on laboratory test
pressure of window per ASTM E331 Laboratory.
020712 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
VINYL WINDOWS
08 53 13 - 5
4.
B.
3.5
Replace windows that have failed field testing and retest until performance is satisfactory.
ADJUSTING
A.
3.6
Failed windows to be re-tested at contractor’s expense.
Adjust hardware for smooth operation and secure weather tight closure.
CLEANING
A.
Remove protective material from pre-finished surfaces.
B.
Wash surfaces by method recommended and acceptable to sealant and window manufacturer;
rinse and wipe surfaces clean.
C.
Remove excess sealant by moderate use of mineral spirits or other solvent acceptable to
sealant manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
020712 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
VINYL WINDOWS
08 53 13 - 6
SECTION 087100
DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Hardware for wood, hollow steel and aluminum doors.
B.
Hardware for fire-rated doors.
C.
Electrically operated and controlled hardware.
D.
Thresholds.
E.
Weatherstripping, seals and door gaskets.
F.
Gate locks.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.
B.
Section 08 14 16 - Flush Wood Doors.
C.
Section 08 36 13 - Sectional Doors: Hardware for same, except cylinders; installation of
cylinders.
D.
Section 08 43 13 - Aluminum-Framed Storefronts: Weatherstrip for doors.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ANSI/ICC A117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and
Facilities; International Code Council; 2003.
B.
BHMA A156.1 - American National Standard for Butts and Hinges; Builders Hardware
Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 2006 (ANSI/BHMA A156.1).
C.
BHMA A156.2 - American National Standard for Bored and Preassembled Locks & Latches;
Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2003 (ANSI/BHMA A156.2).
D.
BHMA A156.3 - American National Standard for Exit Devices; Builders Hardware
Manufacturers Association; 2001 (ANSI/BHMA A156.3).
E.
BHMA A156.4 - American National Standard for Door Controls - Closers; Builders Hardware
Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 2000 (ANSI/BHMA A156.4).
F.
BHMA A156.12 - American National Standard for Interconnected Locks & Latches; Builders
Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2005 (ANSI/BHMA A156.12).
G.
BHMA A156.16 - American National Standard for Auxiliary Hardware; Builders Hardware
Manufacturers Association; 2002 (ANSI/BHMA A156.16).
H.
BHMA A156.18 - American National Standard for Materials and Finishes; Builders Hardware
Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 2006 (ANSI/BHMA A156.18).
I.
BHMA A156.21 - American National Standard for Thresholds; Builders Hardware
Manufacturers Association; 2009 (ANSI/BHMA A156.21).
J.
BHMA A156.22 - American National Standard for Door Gasketing and Edge Seal Systems,
Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2005 (ANSI/BHMA A156.22).
K.
BHMA A156.115 - Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Steel Frames; 2006.
L.
BHMA A156.115W - Hardware Preparation in Wood Doors with Wood or Steel Frames; 2006.
M.
36 CFR 1191 - Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and
Facilities; Final Rule; current edition; (ADAAG - Americans with Disabilities Act, Accessibility
Guidelines).
N.
NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2010.
O.
NFPA 101 - Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures; National Fire
Protection Association; 2009.
020712 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 1
P.
1.4
1.5
1.6
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Coordinate the manufacture, fabrication, and installation of products onto which door hardware
will be installed.
B.
Furnish templates for door and frame preparation to manufacturers and fabricators of products
requiring internal reinforcement for door hardware.
C.
Convey Owner's keying requirements to manufacturers.
SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Manufacturer's catalog literature for each type of hardware, marked to clearly
show products to be furnished for this project.
C.
Hardware Schedule: Provide detailed listing of each item of hardware to be installed on each
door.
Use door numbering scheme as included in the Contract Documents. Identify electrically
operated items and include power requirements.
D.
Keying Schedule: Submit for approval of Owner.
E.
Keys: Deliver with identifying tags to Owner by security shipment direct from hardware
supplier.
F.
Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in
Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.7
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in
this section with minimum three years of documented experience.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.8
UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.
Package hardware items individually; label and identify each package with door opening code
to match hardware schedule.
WARRANTY
A.
See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B.
Provide ten year warranty for door closers and locksets and exit devices.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Hinges:
Ives. Equivalent by Bommer, Stanley are acceptable.
B.
Power Transfers:
Von Duprin EPT. Equivalent by Precision is acceptable.
C.
Locks:
Falcon W series. Equivalent by Dorma, Corbin Russwin, Yale,
Kwikset are acceptable.
D.
Unit Locks:
Schlage, Dorma, Corbin Russwin, Yale, or Kwikset are
acceptable.
E.
Narrow Locks:
Accurate Lock.
F.
Cylinders:
To match locksets. Schlage Everest C. Equivalent by Dorma.,
Corbin Russwin, Yale, or Kwikset are acceptable.
G.
Flushbolts/Coordinators:
Ives. Equivalent by DCI, Trimco are acceptable.
H.
Panic Hardware:
Falcon 1600, 1700 & 25 series. Equivalent by Dorma, Corbin
Russwin are acceptable.
I.
Closers:
Falcon SC 70 & 80. Equivalent by Dorma, Norton are
acceptable.
020712 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 2
J.
Auto Operators:
Falcon 8200 series. Equivalent by Dorma and Norton are
acceptable.
K.
Kickplates:
Ives 8400 series, Equivalent by Tice, Trimco are acceptable.
L.
Stops:
Ives WS407CVX/CCV series. Equivalent by Trimco is
acceptable.
2.2
M. Overhead Stops:
Glynn Johnson. Equivalent by ABH, Rixson are acceptable.
N.
Seals:
NGP. Equivalent by Pemko, Reese, Steelcraft are acceptable.
O.
Power Supplies:
Schlage Electronics. Equivalent Securitron is acceptable.
P.
Track Hardware:
Stanley & KN Crowder. Equivalent by Johnson or Lawrence are
acceptable.
Q.
Electric Strikes:
Von Duprin. Equivalent by Trine and HES are acceptable.
DOOR HARDWARE - GENERAL
A.
Provide all hardware specified or required to make doors fully functional, compliant with
applicable codes, and secure to the extent indicated.
B.
Provide all items of a single type of the same model by the same manufacturer.
C.
Provide products that comply with the following:
1. Applicable provisions of federal, state, and local codes.
2. Fire-Rated Doors: NFPA 80.
3. All Hardware on Fire-Rated Doors: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose
specified and indicated.
4. Hardware for Smoke and Draft Control Doors (Indicated as "S" on Drawings): Provide
hardware that enables door assembly to comply with air leakage requirements of the
applicable code.
2.3
HINGES
2.4
LOCKS AND LATCHES
A.
Locks: Provide a lock for every door, unless specifically indicated as not requiring locking.
B.
Locks must meet ANSI A156.2 Grades:
1. Series 4000, Grade 1 at building entrance doors.
2. Series 4000, Grade 2 at living unit entrance doors and common area doors.
3. Series 4000, Grade 3 at doors within the units.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work; labeled, fire-rated doors and frames are
present and properly installed, and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings.
B.
Verify that electric power is available to power operated devices and of the correct
characteristics.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and applicable codes.
B.
Use templates provided by hardware item manufacturer.
C.
Do not install surface mounted items until finishes applied to substrate are complete.
D.
Install hardware on fire-rated doors and frames in accordance with code and NFPA 80.
E.
Mounting heights for hardware from finished floor to center line of hardware item: As listed in
Schedule, unless otherwise noted:
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
020712 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 3
A.
3.4
3.5
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust work under provisions of Section 01 70 00.
B.
Adjust hardware for smooth operation.
C.
Adjust gasketing for complete, continuous seal; replace if unable to make complete seal.
CLEANING
A.
3.6
3.7
Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01 40 00.
Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation. Clean finished hardware per
manufacturer's instructions after final adjustments has been made. Replace items that cannot
be cleaned to manufacturer's level of finish quality at no additional cost.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01 70 00.
B.
Do not permit adjacent work to damage hardware or finish.
SCHEDULE
A.
See drawings.
END OF SECTION
020712 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00- 4
SECTION 088000
GLAZING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
1.2
1.3
1.4
Glazing compounds and accessories.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 01 11 50 – Contractor Engineered Components: Canopy Glazing
B.
Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers: Sealant and back-up material.
C.
Section 08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Glazed doors and borrowed lites.
D.
Section 08 36 13 - Sectional Doors: Glazed infill panels.
E.
Section 08 41 26 – All –glass Entrances and Storefronts.
F.
Section 08 43 13 - Aluminum-Framed Storefronts: Glazed infill.
G.
Section 08 53 13 - Vinyl Windows: Glazed windows.
H.
Section 10 28 00 - Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories: Mirrors.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
16 CFR 1201 - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials; current edition.
B.
ASTM C 864 - Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets,
Setting Blocks, and Spacers; 2005.
C.
ASTM C 1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2006.
D.
ASTM C 1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass--Kind HS, Kind FT Coated
and Uncoated Glass; 2004.
E.
ASTM C 1172 - Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass; 2009.
F.
ASTM C 1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2009.
G.
ASTM E 1300 - Standard Practice for Determining Load Resistance of Glass in Buildings;
2009a.
H.
ASTM E 2190 - Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation;
2008.
I.
GANA (GM) - GANA Glazing Manual; Glass Association of North America; 2004.
J.
GANA (SM) - FGMA Sealant Manual; Glass Association of North America; 2008.
K.
SIGMA TM-3000 - Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units; Sealed Insulating
Glass Manufacturers Association; 2004.
L.
Each piece of insulated glass shall bear the grade mark of a recognized association of a
recognized association or independent inspection agency. Comply with HUD UM 82a: HUD
building product standards and certification program for sealed insulating glass units.
M.
All fenestration products (windows and doors) shall be in accordance with 24 CFR Section s
200.935 and HUD UH 111: HUD building product standards and certification program for
fenestration products (windows and doors).
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.5
Glass.
Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting one week before starting work of
this section; require attendance by all affected installers.
SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
020712 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
GLAZING
08 80 00 - 1
1.6
1.7
1.8
B.
Product Data on Glass Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics,
size limitations, special handling or installation requirements.
C.
Product Data on Glazing Compounds: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental
characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. Identify available colors.
D.
Certificates: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
E.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that sealed insulated glass meets or exceeds specified
requirements.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual and FGMA Sealant Manual for glazing
installation methods.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum 5 years documented experience.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F.
B.
Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing
compounds.
WARRANTY
A.
See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B.
Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Provide a five (5) year warranty to include coverage for seal
failure, interpane dusting or misting, including replacement of failed units.
C.
Laminated Glass: Provide a five (5) year warranty to include coverage for delamination,
including replacement of failed units.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
GLAZING TYPES
A.
Type GL-1 - Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Vision glazing.
1. Application(s): All exterior glazing unless otherwise indicated.
2. Outboard Lite: Annealed float glass, 1/4 inch thick, minimum.
a. Tint: Clear.
b. Coating: Low-E type, on #2 surface.
3. Inboard Lite: Annealed float glass, 1/4 inch thick, minimum.
a. Tint: Clear.
4. Total Thickness: 1 inch.
5. Total Visible Light Transmittance: 64 percent, nominal.
6. Total Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: .27 percent, nominal.
7. Glazing Method: Gasket glazing.
8. Glazing: Cardinal IG type 366 Low-E
B.
Type GL-1S - Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Safety glazing:
1. Applications: Provide this type of glazing in the following locations:
a. Glazed lites in exterior doors.
b. Glazed sidelights and panels next to doors.
c. Other locations required by applicable federal, state, and local codes and regulations.
d. Other locations indicated on the drawings.
2. Type: Same as GL-1 except use fully tempered float glass for inboard lites.
3. Tint: Clear.
4. Glazing: Cardinal IG type 366 Low-E
C.
Type GL-2 - Single Vision Glazing:
1. Applications: All interior glazing unless otherwise indicated. (Glazing for All-Glass
Entrances and Storefronts in Section 08 41 25)
2. Type: Annealed float glass.
020712 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
GLAZING
08 80 00 - 2
3.
4.
D.
Tint: Clear.
Thickness: 1/4 inch.
Type GL-2S - Single Safety Glazing: Non-fire-rated.
1. Applications: Provide this type of glazing in the following locations:
a. Glazed lites in doors, except fire doors.
b. Sliding glass doors.
c. Shower and bathtub enclosures and doors.
d. Glazed sidelights to doors, except in fire-rated walls and partitions.
e. Glazed view windows and panels in partitions enclosing athletic activity rooms,
except in fire-rated walls and partitions.
f.
Other locations required by applicable federal, state, and local codes and regulations.
g. Other locations indicated on the drawings.
2. Type: Fully tempered float glass as specified.
3. Tint: Clear.
4. Thickness: 1/4 inch.
5. Glazing Method: Gasket glazing.
E. Type GL-3 – Sealed insulated spandrel glass.
1. Application(s): All exterior spandrel glazing unless otherwise indicated.
2. Outboard Lite: Annealed float glass, 1/4 inch thick, minimum.
a.
Tint: Clear..
3. Inboard Lite: Annealed float glass, 1/4 inch thick, minimum.
a.
Spandrel coating on Surface #3
4.
Coating: OPACI-COAT-500
a:
Color: to be determined.
5. Total Thickness: 1 inch.
F.
G.
2.2
2.3
Type GL-4S - Canopy Glazing: Laminated tempered safety glass.
1. Application: Exterior canopies.
2. Laminated with 0.030 inch thick plastic interlayer; comply with ASTM C 1172
3. Comply with ASTM C1036, Type I, transparent flat, class 1 clear, quality Q3 (glazing
select) and ASTM C 1048
4. Thickness: as required to meet design loads.
Type GL-5 – Polycarbonate Sheeting
1.
Entry gate / security panel
2.
¼” thick LEXAN 9034 High-impact polycarbonate sheeting.
3.
Temperature exposure: -40 to +180 Degrees
4.
Color: Clear.
5.
Manufacturer: U.S. Plastic Corp., General Electric Company
EXTERIOR GLAZING ASSEMBLIES
A.
Structural Design Criteria: Select type and thickness to withstand dead loads and wind loads
acting normal to plane of glass at design pressures calculated in accordance with 2010 Oregon
Structural Specialty Code code.
1. Use the procedure specified in ASTM E 1300 to determine glass type and thickness.
2. Limit glass deflection to 1/200 or flexure limit of glass, whichever is less, with full recovery
of glazing materials.
3. Thicknesses listed are minimum.
B.
Air and Vapor Seals: Provide completed assemblies that maintain continuity of building
enclosure vapor retarder and air barrier:
1. In conjunction with vapor retarder and joint sealer materials described in other sections.
2. To maintain a continuous air barrier and vapor retarder throughout the glazed assembly
from glass pane to heel bead of glazing sealant.
GLASS MATERIALS
020712 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
GLAZING
08 80 00 - 3
2.4
2.5
A.
Float Glass Manufacturers:
1. PPG Industries, Inc: Solarban 70XL, www.ppgglazing.com.
2. AGC Flat Glass North America, Inc: www.afgglass.com.
3. Guardian Industries Corp: www.sunguardglass.com.
4. Pilkington North America Inc: www.pilkington.com.
5. Cardinal Corp: www.cardinalcorp.com
5. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B.
Float Glass: All glazing is to be float glass unless otherwise indicated.
1. Annealed Type: ASTM C 1036, Type I, transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality Q3 (glazing
select).
2. Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Types: ASTM C 1048.
3. Tinted Types: Color and performance characteristics as indicated.
4. Thicknesses: As indicated; for exterior glazing comply with specified requirements for
wind load design regardless of specified thickness.
C.
Laminated Glass: Float glass laminated in accordance with ASTM C 1172.
1. Laminated Safety Glass: Comply with 16 CFR 1201 test requirements for Category II.
2. Plastic Interlayer: 0.060 inch thick, minimum.
3. Where fully tempered is specified or required, provide glass that has been tempered by
the tong-less horizontal method.
SEALED INSULATING GLASS UNITS
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Any of the manufacturers specified for float glass.
2. Any fabricator certified by glass manufacturer for type of glass, coating, and treatment
involved and capable of providing specified warranty, if any.
3. Cardinal Glass Industries: www.cardinalcorp.com.
4. Viracon, Apogee Enterprises, Inc: www.viracon.com.
5. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B.
Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Types as indicated.
1. Locations: Exterior, except as otherwise indicated.
2. Durability: Certified by an independent testing agency to comply with ASTM E 2190.
3. Edge Spacers: Aluminum, bent and soldered corners.
4. Edge Seal: Glass to elastomer with supplementary silicone sealant.
5. Edge Seal Color: black.
6. Purge interpane space with dry hermetic air.
GLAZING COMPOUNDS
A.
2.6
Manufacturers:
1. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com.
2. Momentive Performance Materials, Inc (formerly GE Silicones): www.momentive.com.
3. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com.
4. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems: www.chemrex.com.
5. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
GLAZING ACCESSORIES
A.
Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness, ASTM C 864 Option I.
Length of 0.1 inch for each square foot of glazing or minimum 4 inch x width of glazing rabbet
space minus 1/16 inch x height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area.
B.
Glazing Gaskets: Resilient silicone extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot; ASTM
C 864 Option I; black color.
C.
Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type.
D.
Glazing Channels: Aluminum channels, size as required for glazing installation.
020712 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
GLAZING
08 80 00 - 4
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance.
B.
Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that may
impede moisture movement, weeps are clear, and ready to receive glazing.
PREPARATION
A.
Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry.
B.
Install sealants in accordance with ASTM C 1193 and FGMA Sealant Manual.
C.
Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
INSTALLATION - EXTERIOR/INTERIOR DRY METHOD (GASKET GLAZING)
A.
Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners.
B.
Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure on gasket to
attain full contact.
C.
Install removable stops without displacing glazing gasket; exert pressure for full continuous
contact.
MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A.
Glass and Glazing product manufacturers to provide field surveillance of the installation of their
products.
B.
Monitor and report installation procedures and unacceptable conditions.
CLEANING
A.
Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces.
B.
Remove labels after Work is complete.
C.
Clean glass and adjacent surfaces.
PROTECTION
A.
3.7
After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste; do not mark
heat absorbing or reflective glass units.
SCHEDULE
A.
Vinyl Windows: Type GL-1/ GL-1S, GL-3 manufacturer's standard thickness, factory glazed.
B.
Metal-Framed Storefronts and Curtain Wall: Type GL-1/ GL-1S, thicknesses required to
comply with performance requirements, exterior dry method.
C.
Aluminum Entrances: Type GL-1S, exterior wet/dry method with Type manufacturer's
recommended compound.
D.
Overhead Sectional Doors: Type GL-1S, at exterior wet/dry method with Type manufacturer's
recommended compound.
E.
Vinyl patio doors: Type GL-1S, manufacturer's standard thickness, factory glazed.
F.
Hollow Steel Frames - Interior: Type GL-2/GL-2S, dry method.
G.
Entry Gate Security panels – GL-5
END OF SECTION
020712 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
GLAZING
08 80 00 - 5
SECTION 088300
MIRRORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.2
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.3
1.5
1.6
1.7
Section 10 28 00 - Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories: Metal-framed mirrors.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
1.4
Glass mirrors.
ANSI Z97.1 - American National Standard for Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings,
Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test; 2004.
B.
ASTM C 1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2006.
C.
ASTM C 1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2009.
D.
GANA (GM) - GANA Glazing Manual; Glass Association of North America; 2004.
E.
GANA (SM) - FGMA Sealant Manual; Glass Association of North America; 2008.
F.
GANA (TIPS) - Mirrors Handle with Extreme Care: Tips For the Professional on the Care and
Handling of Mirrors; National Association of Mirror Manufacturers; 2004
(http://www.mirrorlink.org/members/technical.h
SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data on Mirror Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics,
size limitations, special handling or installation requirements.
C.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that mirrors, meets or exceeds specified requirements.
D.
Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in
Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual for glazing installation methods.
B.
Fabricate, store, transport, receive, install, and clean mirrors in accordance with
recommendations of GANA (TIPS) "Mirrors Handle with Extreme Care: Tips For the
Professional on the Care and Handling of Mirrors."
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Do not install mirrors when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F.
B.
Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing
compounds.
WARRANTY
A.
See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B.
Provide five year manufacturer warranty for reflective coating on mirrors and replacement of
same.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
Mirrors:
1. Arch Aluminum & Glass Co., Inc: www.arch.amarlite.com.
2. Binswanger Mirror/ACI Distribution: www.binswangerglass.com.
3. Lenoir Mirror Co: www.lenoirmirror.com.
4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
MATERIALS
020712 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
MIRRORS
08 83 00 - 1
2.3
A.
Mirror Glass - General: Select materials and/or provide supports as required to limit mirrored
glass deflection to 1/200 or flexure limit of glass with full recovery of glazing materials,
whichever is less.
B.
GL-3 Mirror Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type 1 transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality Q1, ¼ inch
minimum thick.
1. Sizes noted on Drawings.
GLAZING ACCESSORIES
A.
Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type.
B.
Mirror Attachment Accessories: Stainless steel clips.
C.
Mirror Adhesive: Chemically compatible with mirror coating and wall substrate.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that openings for mirrored glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance.
B.
Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions, and ready
to receive mirrors.
PREPARATION
A.
Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry.
B.
Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer. Prime
surfaces scheduled to receive sealant.
C.
Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C 1193 for solvent release sealants. Install
sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A.
Install mirrors in accordance with GANA recommendations.
B.
Set mirrors plumb and level, free of optical distortion.
C.
Set mirrors with edge clearance free of surrounding construction including countertops or
backsplashes.
D.
Frameless Mirrors: Set mirrors with clips. Anchor rigidly to wall construction.
CLEANING
A.
Remove wet glazing materials from finish surfaces.
B.
Remove labels after work is complete.
C.
Clean mirrors and adjacent surfaces.
PROTECTION
A.
After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste.
END OF SECTION
020712 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
MIRRORS
08 83 00 - 2
SECTION 089100
LOUVERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 04 20 01 - Masonry Veneer: Prepared exterior wall opening.
B.
Section 07 46 46 - Fiber Cement Siding: Exterior wall cladding and finish.
C.
Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim and ‘blank-off’ panels.
D.
Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers.
E.
Section 23 31 00 - HVAC Ducts and Casings: Ductwork attachment to louvers , and blank-off
panels.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
AAMA 2604 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for
High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2005.
B.
AMCA 500-L - Laboratory Methods of Testing Louvers for Rating; Air Movement and Control
Association International, Inc.; 2007.
C.
AMCA 511 - Certified Ratings Program for Air Control Devices; Air Movement and Control
Association International, Inc.; 2007.
D.
ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2009a.
E.
ASTM B 209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate;
2007.
F.
ASTM B 221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2008.
SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide data describing design characteristics, maximum recommended air
velocity, design free area, materials and finishes.
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate louver layout plan and elevations, opening and clearance dimensions,
tolerances; head, jamb and sill details; blade configuration, screens, blankout areas required,
and frames.
D.
Samples: Submit two samples 2 by 2 inches in size illustrating finish and color of exterior and
interior surfaces.
E.
Test Reports: Independent agency reports showing compliance with specified performance
criteria.
F.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
G.
Maintenance Data: Include lubrication schedules, adjustment requirements.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.6
Louvers, frames, and accessories.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products of the type
specified in this section, with minimum five years of documented experience.
WARRANTY
A.
See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B.
Provide twenty year manufacturer warranty against distortion, metal degradation, and failure of
connections.
020712 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
LOUVERS
08 91 00 - 1
1.
Finish: Include coverage against degradation of exterior finish.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
2.3
Wall Louvers:
1. Airolite Company, LLC: www.airolite.com.
2. Greenheck Fan Corporation: www.greenheck.com
3. American Warming and Ventilating: www.awv.com.
4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
LOUVERS
A.
Louvers: Factory fabricated and assembled, complete with frame, mullions, and accessories;
AMCA Certified under AMCA 511.
1. Wind Load Resistance: Design to resist positive and negative wind load of 25 psf without
damage or permanent deformation.
2. Intake Louvers: Design to allow maximum of 0.01 oz/sq ft water penetration at calculated
intake design velocity based on design air flow and actual free area, when tested in
accordance with AMCA 500-L.
3. Drainable Blades: Continuous rain stop at front or rear of blade aligned with vertical gutter
recessed into both jambs of frame.
4. Screens: Provide insect screens at intake louvers and bird screens at exhaust louvers.
B.
Stationary Louvers Type LOUV-1: Horizontal blade, extruded aluminum construction, with
intermediate mullions matching frame.
1. Free Area: 50 percent, minimum.
2. Blades: Straight.
3. Frame: 4 inches deep, channel profile; corner joints mitered and , with continuous
recessed caulking channel each side.
4. Metal Thickness: Frame 0.081 inch; blades 0.081 inch.
5. Finish: Fluoropolymer coating, 2-coat Kynar 500, 1.2 mil thick, finished after fabrication.
6. Color: As scheduled.
BRICK VENTS
A. Brick Vents: Factory fabricated and assembled, complete with frame and water stop.
1. Free Area: 50 percent, minimum.
2. Blades: 45 degree slope x 0.125 in. metal thickness.
3. Frame: 4 inches deep x 0.125 in. thick
4. Size: 12 in wide x 7 ¾ in high typical, other sizes as shown on drawings.
5. Finish: Fluoropolymer coating, Kynar 500, 1.2 mil thick, finished after fabrication.
6. Color: Custom color to match adjacent brick.
7. Accessories: insect screen, stainless steel anchors, aluminum duct extension to equal wall
assembly thickness.
8. Manufacturer: Greenheck Extruded Aluminum Brick Vent “BVE”
2.4
2.4
MATERIALS
A.
Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M),.
B.
Steel Sheet: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G90/Z275 coating.
C.
Insect Screen: 18 x 16 size aluminum mesh.
D.
Polyvinylidene Fluoride Coating: Minimum 70 percent Kynar 500/Hylar 500 resin, two coat
finish, complying with AAMA 2604.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Blank-Off Panels SM-4: Same material as louver, painted black on interior side; provide where
duct connected to louver is smaller than louver frame, sealing off louver area outside duct.
020712 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
LOUVERS
08 91 00- 2
B.
Screens: Frame of same material as louver, with reinforced corners; removable, screw
attached; installed on inside face of louver frame.
C.
Fasteners and Anchors: Stainless steel.
D.
Head and Sill Flashings: See Section 07 62 00.
E.
Sealant: JS-1 type, as specified in Section 07 90 05.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that prepared openings and flashings are ready to receive work and opening dimensions
are as indicated on shop drawings.
B.
Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install louver assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Coordinate with installation of flashings by others.
C.
Install louvers level and plumb.
D.
Align louver assembly to ensure moisture shed from flashings and diversion of moisture to
exterior.
E.
Secure louver frames in openings with concealed fasteners.
F.
Install perimeter sealant and backing rod in accordance with Section 07 90 05.
G.
Coordinate with installation of mechanical ductwork and ‘blank-off’ portion of louver not used.
CLEANING
A.
Strip protective finish coverings.
B.
Clean surfaces and components.
END OF SECTION
020712 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
LOUVERS
08 91 00- 3
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
092116
093000
096500
096800
099000
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
TILING
RESILIENT FLOORING
CARPETING
PAINTING AND COATING
020712 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
SECTION 092116
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Performance criteria for gypsum board assemblies.
B.
Metal stud wall framing.
C.
Metal channel ceiling framing.
D.
Shaft wall system.
E.
Gypsum sheathing.
F.
Cementitious backing board.
G.
Gypsum wallboard.
H.
Joint treatment and accessories.
I.
Water-resistive barrier over exterior wall sheathing.
J.
Acoustic (sound-dampening) wall and ceiling board.
1.2
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 01 61 16 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions.
B.
Section 05 40 00 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Exterior wind-load-bearing metal stud framing.
C.
Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Building framing and sheathing.
D.
Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking product and execution requirements.
E.
Section 07 21 00 - Thermal Insulation: Acoustic insulation.
F.
Section 07 25 00 - Weather Barriers: Water-resistive barrier over sheathing.
G.
Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping: Top-of-wall assemblies at fire rated walls.
H.
Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers: Acoustic sealant.
I.
Section 09 30 00 - Tiling: Tile backing board.
1.3
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
AISI SG02-1 - North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural
Members; American Iron and Steel Institute ; 2001 with 2004 supplement. (replaced SG-971)
B.
ANSI A108.11 - American National Standard for Interior Installation of Cementitious Backer
Units ; 1999 (R2005).
C.
ANSI A118.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Test Methods and Specifications
for Cementitious Backer Units ; 1999 (R2005).
D.
ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or ZincIron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process ; 2009a.
E.
ASTM C475/C475M - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing
Gypsum Board ; 2002 (Reapproved 2007).
F.
ASTM C645 - Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members ; 2009a.
G.
ASTM C754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive
Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products ; 2009a.
H.
ASTM C840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board ; 2008.
I.
ASTM C954 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel
Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs From 0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84
mm) in Thickness ; 2007.
020712 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
09 21 16 - 1
J.
ASTM C1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the
Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs ;
2007.
K.
ASTM C1047 - Standard Specification for Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum
Veneer Base ; 2009.
L.
ASTM C1177/C1177M - Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as
Sheathing ; 2008.
M.
ASTM C1280 - Standard Specification for Application of Gypsum Sheathing ; 2009.
N.
ASTM C1325 - Standard Specification for Non-Asbestos Fiber-Mat Reinforced Cement
Substrate Sheets ; 2008b.
O.
ASTM C1396/C1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board ; 2009a.
P.
ASTM C1629/C1629 - Standard Classification for Abuse-Resistant Nondecorated Interior
Gypsum Panel Products and Fiber-Reinforced Cement Panels ; 2006.
Q.
ASTM D3273 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of
Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber ; 2000 (Reapproved 2005).
R.
ASTM E72 - Standard Test Methods of Conducting Strength Tests of Panels for Building
Construction ; 2005.
S.
ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials ;
2010.
T.
ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound
Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements ; 2009.
U.
ASTM E413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation ; 2004.
V.
GA-216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; Gypsum Association ; 2007.
W. GA-600 - Fire Resistance Design Manual; Gypsum Association ; 2009.
X.
1.4
1.5
UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc. ; current edition.
SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate special details associated with fireproofing and acoustic seals.
C.
Product Data: Provide data on metal framing, gypsum board, accessories, and joint finishing
system.
D.
Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data on partition head to structure connectors, showing
compliance with requirements.
E.
Test Reports: For all stud framing products that do not comply with ASTM C645 or C 754,
provide independent laboratory reports showing maximum stud heights at required spacings
and deflections.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing , with minimum five years of
documented experience.
B.
Copies of Documents at Site: Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document
that prescribes execution requirements.
020712 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
09 21 16 - 2
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
A.
Provide completed assemblies complying with ASTM C840 and GA-216.
B.
Interior Partitions Indicated as Acoustic: Provide completed assemblies with the following
characteristics:
1. Acoustic Attenuation: STC as shown on drawings, calculated in accordance with ASTM
E413, based on tests conducted in accordance with ASTM E90.
C.
Shaft Walls at HVAC Shafts: Provide completed assemblies with the following characteristics:
1. Air Pressure Within Shaft: Sustained loads of 5 lbf/sq ft with maximum mid-span
deflection of L/240.
2. Acoustic Attenuation: calculated in accordance with ASTM E413, based on tests
conducted in accordance with ASTM E90.
D.
Shaft Walls at Elevator Shafts: Provide completed assemblies with the following
characteristics:
1. Air Pressure Within Shaft: Intermittent loads of 5 lbf/sq ft with maximum mid-span
deflection of L/240.
2. Acoustic Attenuation: calculated in accordance with ASTM E413, based on tests
conducted in accordance with ASTM E90.
E.
Fire Rated Assemblies: Provide completed assemblies with the following characteristics:
1. UL Assembly Numbers: Provide construction equivalent to that listed for the particular
assembly in the current UL Fire Resistance Directory.
METAL FRAMING MATERIALS
A.
Manufacturers - Metal Framing, Connectors, and Accessories:
1. Clark Western Building Systems : www.clarkwestern.com.
2. Dietrich Metal Framing : www.dietrichindustries.com.
3. Scafco Steel Stud Manufacturing Co. www.scafco.com
4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B.
Non-Loadbearing Framing System Components: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, of size
and properties necessary to comply with ASTM C754 for the spacing indicated, with maximum
deflection of wall framing of L/240 at 5 psf.
1. Exception: The minimum metal thickness and section properties requirements of ASTM
C645 are waived provided steel of 40 ksi minimum yield strength is used, the metal is
continuously dimpled, the effective thickness is at least twice the base metal thickness,
and maximum stud heights are determined by testing in accordance with ASTM E72 using
assemblies specified by ASTM C754.
2. Studs: "C" shaped with flat or formed webs with knurled faces.
3. Runners: U shaped, sized to match studs.
4. Ceiling Channels: C shaped.
5. Furring: Hat-shaped sections, minimum depth of 7/8 inch.
6. Resilient Channels: 1/2 inch depth.
a. Manufacturers – Dietrich RC-1 Deluxe RC channel at
ceilings
C.
Non-Loadbearing Framing System Components at walls supporting Stone Tile T-3 provide
minimum 350S 125-30 (20 ga.) studs with matching head and sill tracks.
D.
Loadbearing Studs for Application of Gypsum Board: As specified in Section 05 40 00.
E.
Shaft Wall Studs and Accessories: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, of size and properties
necessary to comply with ASTM C754 and specified performance requirements.
1. Manufacturers - Shaft Wall Studs and Accessories:
a. Same manufacturer as other framing materials.
020712 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
09 21 16 - 3
2.3
F.
Ceiling Hangers: Type and size as specified in ASTM C754 for spacing required.
G.
Partition Head to Structure Connections: Provide mechanical anchorage devices that
accommodate deflection using slotted holes, screws and anti-friction bushings, preventing
rotation of studs while maintaining structural performance of partition.
1. Structural Performance: Maintain lateral load resistance and vertical movement capacity
required by applicable code, when evaluated in accordance with AISI North American
Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members.
2. Material: ASTM A653/A653M steel sheet, SS Grade 50/340, with G60/Z180 hot dipped
galvanized coating.
3. Provide components UL-listed for use in UL-listed fire-rated head of partition joint systems
indicated on drawings.
4. Deflection and Firestop Track:
a. Provide mechanical anchorage devices as described above that accommodate
deflection while maintaining the fire-rating of the wall assembly.
BOARD MATERIALS
A.
Manufacturers - Gypsum-Based Board:
1. American Gypsum: www.americangypsum.com.
2. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC : www.gp.com/gypsum.
3. National Gypsum Company : www.nationalgypsum.com.
4. USG Corporation : www.usg.com.
5. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B.
Gypsum Wallboard: Paper-faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to
minimize joints in place; ends square cut.
1. Application: Use for vertical surfaces and ceilings, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273.
a. Mold-resistant board is required whenever board is being installed before the building
is enclosed and conditioned.
3. At Assemblies Indicated with Fire-Rating: Use type required by indicated tested
assembly; if no tested assembly is indicated, use Type X board, UL or WH listed.
4. Thickness:
a. Vertical Surfaces: 5/8 inch.
b. Ceilings: 5/8 inch.
c. Multi-Layer Assemblies: Thicknesses as indicated on drawings.
5. Mold-Resistant Paper-Faced Products:
a. American Gypsum; M-Bloc.
b. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Brand XP Gypsum Board.
c. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Hi-Abuse Brand XP Wallboard.
d. USG Corporation; Sheetrock Brand Mold Tough Gypsum Panels.
e. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
C.
Backing Board For Wet Areas: One of the following products:
1. Application: Surfaces behind tile in wet areas including tub and shower surrounds and
shower ceilings.
2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273.
3. ANSI Cement-Based Board: Non-gypsum-based; aggregated Portland cement panels
with glass fiber mesh embedded in front and back surfaces complying with ANSI A118.9
or ASTM C1325.
a. Thickness: 1/2 inch.
b. Products:
1) Custom Building Products; Wonderboard.
2) National Gypsum Company; PermaBase Brand Cement Board.
3) USG Corporation; Durock Brand Cement Board.
4) Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
020712 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
09 21 16 - 4
2.4
D.
Backing Board For Non-Wet Areas: Water-resistant gypsum backing board as defined in
ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to minimum joints in place; ends square cut.
1. Application: Vertical surfaces behind thinset tile, except in wet areas.
2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273.
3. Type: Regular and Type X, in locations indicated.
4. Type X Thickness: 5/8 inch.
5. Regular Board Thickness: 5/8 inch.
6. Edges: Tapered.
7. Products:
a. American Gypsum; M-Bloc.
b. CertainTeed Corporation; ProRoc Brand Moisture & Mold Resistant Gypsum Board.
c. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC; DensShield Tile Backer.
d. USG Corporation; Sheetrock Brand Mold Tough Gypsum Panels.
e. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
E.
Acoustical Sound Dampening Wall and Ceiling Board: Refer to details and sound engineers
report.
1. Thickness: Per drawings.
2. Long Edges: Tapered.
3. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273.
F.
Exterior Sheathing Board: Sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut.
1. Application: Exterior sheathing, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273.
3. Glass-Mat-Faced Sheathing: Glass mat faced gypsum substrate as defined in ASTM
C1177/C1177M.
4. Core Type: Type X.
5. Type X Thickness: 5/8 inch.
6. Edges: Square, for vertical application.
7. Glass-Mat-Faced Products:
a. CertainTeed Corporation; GlasRoc Brand.
b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC; DensGlass Gold Sheathing.
c. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Brand e2XP Extended Exposure Sheathing.
d. FlameBlock; www.lpcorp.com/flameblock
e. Dricon; www.wolmanizedwood.com/products/fireretardants/dricon
f.
Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
G.
Shaftwall and Coreboard: Type X; 1 inch thick by 24 inches wide, beveled long edges, ends
square cut.
1. Paper Faced Type: Gypsum shaftliner board or gypsum coreboard as defined ASTM
C1396/C1396M; water-resistant faces.
2. Products:
a. American Gypsum; Shaft Liner.
b. CertainTeed Corporation; ProRoc Brand Shaftliner Type X.
c. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Brand 1" Fire-Shield Shaftliner.
d. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Brand 1" Fire-Shield Shaftliner XP (moldresistant).
e. Pacific Coast Building Products, Inc; PABCORE Gypsum Shafliner Board type X.
f.
Temple-Inland Inc; SilentGuard Gypsum Shaftliner.
g. USG Corporation; Sheetrock Gypsum Liner Panels.
h. USG Corporation; Sheetrock Gypsum Liner Panels--Enhanced (mold-resistant).
i.
Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Acoustic Insulation: As specified in Section 07 21 00.
B.
Acoustic Sealant: As specified in Section 07 90 05.
020712 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
09 21 16 - 5
C.
Water-Resistive Barrier: As specified in Section 07 25 000.
D.
Finishing Accessories: ASTM C1047, galvanized steel or rolled zinc, unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Types: As detailed or required for finished appearance.
2. Special Shapes: In addition to conventional cornerbead and control joints, provide U-bead
at exposed panel edges.
3. Manufacturers - Finishing Accessories:
a. Same manufacturer as framing materials.
E.
Joint Materials: ASTM C475 and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project
conditions.
1. Tape: 2 inch wide, coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners , except as otherwise
indicated.
2. Ready-mixed vinyl-based joint compound.
3. Powder-type vinyl-based joint compound.
F.
High Build Drywall Surfacer: Vinyl acrylic latex-based coating for spray application, designed to
take the place of skim coating and separate paint primer in achieving Level 5 finish.
G.
Screws for Attachment to Steel Members Less Than 0.03 inch In Thickness, to Wood
Members, and to Gypsum Board: ASTM C1002; self-piercing tapping type ; cadmium-plated
for exterior locations.
H.
Screws for Attachment to Steel Members From 0.033 to 0.112 inch in Thickness: ASTM C954;
steel drill screws for application of gypsum board to loadbearing steel studs.
I.
Acoustical leaf spring ceiling hanger (Acoustical Hanger): WAVE Hanger as designed by
Kinetics Noise Control (Kinetics), Dublin, Ohio, and provided by Kinetics
1. Vertical Load Capacity. Hangers shall have sufficient capacity to support weight of isolated
ceiling material as constructed. In a vertical load test comparable to a sound-isolated
drywall ceiling installation, the acoustical leaf spring ceiling hanger shall have a minimum
design load capacity of either 44- or 22-lbs., depending on the model selected. Design
Load capacity shall be based on a safety factor where the load-to-failure, defined as either
pullout of the attachment screws from the substrate or rupture of the hanger, is a minimum
10 times the allowable maximum Design Load. Anchors for attachment of the acoustical
leaf spring ceiling hanger to the sub-structure shall be 10 x 1-1/2-in. Round Washer Recex
Lo Root screws. The anchors shall be provided by the manufacturer of the acoustical leaf
spring ceiling hangers.
2. Deflection and Natural Frequency. Acoustical leaf spring ceiling hanger shall deflect 0.44in. (minimum) at rated load; Natural Frequency at rated load shall be 4.8-hz (maximum).
3. Acoustical leaf spring ceiling hanger shall be rated for 2-g seismic restraint capacity.
4. Acoustical leaf spring ceiling hanger shall be manufactured using continuous-formed,
hardened spring steel into which a standard galvanized steel furring channel, 7/8-in. x
minimum 20-gauge, is captured. The drywall furring channel shall be supported by the
acoustical leaf spring ceiling hanger, and cannot be directly attached to or contacting any
non-isolated building elements.
J. Resilient Sound Isolation Clips: RSIC-1 clips by PAC International, Inc. Rubber isolator
mounted to 16 gauge galvanized steel clip.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence. Drywaller shall
inspect framing prior to start of gypsum board installation.
B.
Provide 3 foot x 3 foot mock up of gypsum board finish for owner approval.
SHAFT WALL INSTALLATION
A.
Shaft Wall Framing: Install in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.
1. Install studs at spacing required to meet performance requirements.
020712 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
09 21 16 - 6
B.
3.3
3.4
3.5
Shaft Wall Liner: Cut panels to accurate dimension and install sequentially between special
friction studs.
FRAMING INSTALLATION
A.
Wood Framing: Install in accordance with ASTM and manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Suspended Ceilings and Soffits: Space framing and furring members as indicated.
1. Laterally brace entire suspension system.
C.
Studs: Space studs as indicated.
1. Extend partition framing to structure in all locations.
2. Partitions Terminating at Structure: Attach top runner to structure, maintain clearance
between top of studs and structure, and connect studs to track using specified mechanical
devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; verify free movement of top of
stud connections; do not leave studs unattached to track.
D.
Openings: Reinforce openings as required for weight of doors or operable panels, using not
less than double studs at jambs.
E.
Standard Wall Furring: Install at concrete walls scheduled to receive gypsum board, not more
than 4 inches from floor and ceiling lines and abutting walls. Secure in place on alternate
channel flanges at maximum 24 inches on center.
F.
Acoustic Furring: Install resilient channels at maximum 24 inches on center. Locate joints over
framing members.
G.
Furring for Fire Ratings: Install as required for fire resistance ratings indicated and to GA-600
requirements.
H.
Blocking: Install wood blocking for support of:
1. Framed openings.
2. Wall mounted cabinets.
3. Interior casework.
4. Plumbing fixtures.
5. Toilet accessories.
6. Wall mounted door hardware.
7. Wheelchair lift frame and controls as required.
8. Wood wall finishes.
9. Signage
ACOUSTIC ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION
A.
Spacing and location of acoustical leaf spring ceiling hanger shall be determined by the
manufacturer based on ceiling type. Maximum hanger spacing shall be 48-in. along each
drywall furring channel and 24-in. between drywall furring channels. Installation drawing details
shall be provided by the manufacturer to assure optimum sound control and structural integrity
of the sound-isolated drywall ceiling system.
B.
Install resilient sound isolation clips and drywall furring channels in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Acoustic Insulation: Place tightly within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around
electrical and mechanical items within partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions.
D.
Acoustic Sealant: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1. Place one bead continuously on substrate before installation of perimeter framing
members.
2. Place continuous bead at perimeter of each layer of gypsum board.
3. In non-fire-rated construction, seal around all penetrations by conduit, pipe, ducts, and
rough-in boxes.
BOARD INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with ASTM C 840, GA-216, and manufacturer's instructions. Install to minimize butt end
joints, especially in highly visible locations.
020712 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
09 21 16 - 7
3.6
3.7
3.8
B.
Fire-Rated Construction: Install gypsum board in strict compliance with requirements of
assembly listing.
C.
Exterior Sheathing: Comply with ASTM C1280. Install sheathing vertically, with edges butted
tight and ends occurring over firm bearing.
D.
Cementitious Backing Board: Install over steel framing members, wood framing members, and
plywood substrate where indicated, in accordance with ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's
instructions.
E.
Installation on Metal Framing: Use screws for attachment of all gypsum board .
F.
Installation on Wood Framing: For rated assemblies, comply with requirements of listing
authority. For non-rated assemblies, install as follows:
1. Single-Layer Applications: Screw attachment.
2. Double-Layer Application: Install base layer using screws or nails. Install face layer using
screws or adhesive.
G.
Gypsum board finish shall be level 4 (very light orange peel)
INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES
A.
Control Joints: Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces and as indicated.
1. Not more than 30 feet apart on walls and ceilings over 50 feet long.
B.
Corner Beads: Install at external corners, using longest practical lengths.
C.
Edge Trim: Install at locations where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials and as
indicated.
JOINT TREATMENT
A.
Paper Faced Gypsum Board: Use fiberglass joint tape, bedded with ready-mixed vinyl-based
joint compound and finished with ready-mixed vinyl-based joint compound.
B.
Finish gypsum board in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C840, as follows:
1. Level 3: Walls and ceilings to receive paint finish or wall coverings, unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Level 4: Ceilings at First Floor Lobby, Community Room, Fitness Center, Mail Room, and
Hallways.
3. Level 1: Fire rated wall areas above finished ceilings, whether or not accessible in the
completed construction.
C.
Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to
receive finishes.
1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch.
2. Taping, filling, and sanding is not required at surfaces behind adhesive applied ceramic
tile and fixed cabinetry.
3. Taping, filling and sanding is not required at base layer of double layer applications.
D.
Where Level 5 finish is indicated, spray apply high build drywall surfacer over entire surface
after joints have been properly treated; achieve a flat and tool mark-free finish.
E.
Fill and finish joints and corners of cementitious backing board as recommended by
manufacturer.
TOLERANCES
A.
Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet
in any direction. Gyp Board installer shall be responsible for confirming framing is within
tolerances and shall approve all surfaces. Any surfaces not in compliance with this section
shall be the responsibility of th Drywall installer per acceptance of framing. Drywall installer
shall make framer aware of any issues in writing 10 days prior to installing gyp board.
Cardboard strips may be required by Gyp board installer and shall be the responsibility of
drywall installer once framing is accepted by Drywall installer as to its true and plumb nature.
Cardboard strips shall be used as needed to curb the tolerances to the naked eye.
END OF SECTION
020712 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
09 21 16 - 8
SECTION 093000
TILING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Tile for floor applications.
B.
Tile for wall applications.
C.
Tile for counters.
D.
Tile accessories.
E.
Tile trim.
F.
Non-ceramic trim.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 06 41 00 - Architectural Wood Casework: Cabinetry support of tiled countertops.
B.
Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ANSI A108 Series/A118 Series/A136.1 - American National Standard Specifications for the
Installation of Ceramic Tile (Compendium); 2005.
B.
ANSI A108.1a - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile in
the Wet-Set Method, with Portland Cement Mortar; 2005.
C.
ANSI A108.1b - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile on a
Cured Portland Cement Mortar Setting Bed with Dry-Set or Latex Portland Cement Mortar;
1999 (R2005).
D.
ANSI A108.1c - Specifications for Contractors Option: Installation of Ceramic Tile in the WetSet Method with Portland Cement Mortar or Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland
Cement Mortar Bed with Dry-Set or Latex Portland Cement
E.
ANSI A108.5 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with
Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 1999 (R2005).
F.
ANSI A108.6 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with
Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile-Setting and -Grouting Epoxy; 1999 (R2005).
G.
ANSI A108.8 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with
Chemical Resistant Furan Resin Mortar and Grout; 1999 (R2005).
H.
ANSI A108.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with
Modified Epoxy Emulsion Mortar/Grout; 1999 (R2005).
I.
ANSI A108.10 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Grout in Tilework;
1999 (R2005).
J.
ANSI A108.12 - American National Standard for Installation of Ceramic Tile with EGP (Exterior
glue plywood) Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 1999 (R2005).
K.
ANSI A118.1 - American National Standard Specifications for Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar;
1999 (R2005).
L.
ANSI A118.3 - American National Standard Specifications for Chemical Resistant, Water
Cleanable Tile Setting and -Grouting Epoxy and Water Cleanable Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive;
1999 (R2005).
M.
ANSI A118.4 - American National Standard Specifications for Latex-Portland Cement Mortar;
1999 (R2005).
N.
ANSI A118.6 - American National Standard Specifications for Standard Cement Grouts for Tile
Installation; 1999 (R2005).
020712 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
TILING
09 30 00 - 1
1.4
O.
ANSI A118.7 - American National Standard Specifications for Polymer Modified Cement Grouts
for Tile Installation; 1999 (R2005).
P.
ANSI A118.11 - American National Standard Specifications for EGP (Exterior glue plywood)
Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 1999 (R2005).
Q.
ANSI A136.1 - American National Standard for Organic Adhesives for Installation of Ceramic
Tile; 1999 (R2005).
R.
ANSI A137.1 - American National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile; 2008.
S.
TCNA (HB) - Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation; 2010.
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide manufacturers' data sheets on tile, mortar, grout, and accessories.
Include instructions for using grouts and adhesives.
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate tile layout, patterns, color arrangement, perimeter conditions,
junctions with dissimilar materials, control and expansion joints, thresholds, ceramic
accessories, and setting details.
D.
Samples: Mount tile and apply grout on two plywood panels, minimum 18 x 18 inches in size
illustrating pattern, color variations, and grout joint size variations.
E.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
F.
Maintenance Data: Include recommended cleaning methods, cleaning materials, stain removal
methods, and polishes and waxes.
G.
Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
2. Extra Tile: 1 percent percent of each size, color, and surface finish combination, but not
less than 10 square feet of each type.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Maintain one copy of The Tile Council of North America Handbook and ANSI A108 Series/A118
Series on site.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the types of products
specified in this section, with minimum 5 years of documented experience.
C.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing tile installation, with minimum of 5
years of documented experience.
MOCK-UP
A.
See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for mock-up.
B.
Construct tile mock-up where indicated on the drawings, incorporating all components specified
for the location.
1. Minimum size of mock-up is indicated on the drawings.
2. Approved mock-up may remain as part of the Work.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.9
Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting one week before starting work of
this section; require attendance by all affected installers.
Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Do not install adhesives in an unventilated environment.
020712 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
TILING
B.
Maintain ambient and substrate temperature of 50 degrees F during installation of mortar
materials.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
TILE
A.
Manufacturers: All products of each type by the same manufacturer.
1. Dal-Tile Corporation: www.daltile.com. Hilary Noah (541) 513-5843
2. Pental Granite and Marble: www.pentalonline.com, Cindy Mahaffey (503) 445-8603.
3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Porcelain Ceramic Tile Type Unit Kitchen Countertops: ANSI A137.1 , and as follows:
Delano manufactured by Daltile .
Moisture Absorption: 0 to 0.5 percent.
Size and Shape: 24"x 24" x 3/8", square.
Edges: Square.
Surface Finish: polished.
Colors: to be determined.
Grout joint width: 1/8"
Trim: 3" x 12" Bullnose trim for backsplash. No cove pieces.
Accessories: Schluter Rondel-Step finish: AE Satin, Anodized Aluminum at exposed
counter edge.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Porcelain Ceramic Tile Type Unit Bathroom Countertops: ANSI A137.1 , and as follows:
Delano manufactured by Daltile .
Moisture Absorption: 0 to 0.5 percent.
Size and Shape: 24 x 24 x 3/8.
Edges: Square.
Surface Finish: polished.
Colors: to be determined, separate color.
Grout Joint width: 1/8"
Trim: 3" x 12" Bullnose trim for backsplash. No cove pieces.
Accessories: Schluter Rondel-Step finish: AE Satin, Anodized Aluminum at exposed
counter edge.
C.
2.2
G.
Lobby floor Tile: ANSI A137.1 , and as follows:
1. Geotech manufactured by Pental.
2. Moisture Absorption: 0 to 0.5 percent.
3. Size and Shape: 24 x 24and cut 3 x3 and 4 x 24.
4. Edges: Square.
5. Surface Finish: Matte.
6. Color: TBA
H.
Elevator Lobby Wall Tile: ANSI A137.1 , and as follows:
1. Matchpoint manufactured by Daltile.
2. Moisture Absorption: 0 to 0.5 percent.
3. Size and Shape: random.
4. Edges: Square.
5. Surface Finish: Matte.
6. Color: TBA
COUNTERTOP ASSEMBLIES
A.
Quality Standard: Custom Grade, in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork
Standards.
B.
Tile Countertops: Tile bonded to substrate after installation of substrate on cabinet.
1. Tile: Porcelain Tile T-1 and T-2.
2. Substrate: PS 1 Exterior Grade, A-C veneer grade, minimum 5-ply; minimum 3/4 inch
thick; join lengths using metal splines.
B.
Back and End Splashes: Same material, bullnose top edge.
020712 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
TILING
C.
2.3
Laminate Countertops: Laminate bonded to substrate after installation of substrate on cabinet.
1. Laminate: To be selected by Architect.
2. Substrate: Per manufacturer.
3. Back and End Splashes: Same material, square top edge.
3.4.
TRIM AND ACCESSORIES
A.
Non-Ceramic Trim: Brushed stainless steel, style and dimensions as indicated on drawings, for
setting using tile mortar or adhesive.
1. Applications: Use in the following locations:
a. Open edges of floor tile.
b. Transition between floor finishes of different heights.
c. Borders and other trim as indicated on drawings.
2. Manufacturer:
a. Schluter-Systems: www.schluter.com.
B. Metal Stair Nosing: metal stair nosing at tile stair treads
1.
Schluter TREP-FL
2. Manufacturer:
a. Schluter-Systems: www.schluter.com.
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
ADHESIVE MATERIALS
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Laticrete ; Product as recommended for installation.
2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B.
Organic Adhesive: ANSI A136.1, thinset bond type; use Type I in areas subject to prolonged
moisture exposure.
MORTAR MATERIALS
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Laticrete International, Inc..
2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B.
Mortar Bond Coat Materials:
1. Dry-Set Portland Cement type: ANSI A118.1.
2. Latex-Portland Cement type: ANSI A118.4.
3. Epoxy: ANSI A118.3.
4. For Exterior Glue Plywood: ANSI A118.11.
GROUT MATERIALS
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Laticrete International, Inc..
2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B.
Standard Grout: PermaColor Grout, specified in ANSI A118.6 or A118.7.
1. Colors: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's custom range.
2. Epoxy Grout
ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A.
Cleavage Membrane: No. 15 asphalt saturated felt.
B.
Uncoupling Membrane: 1/8 inch thick polyurethane matting with three-dimensional grid
structure with dovetail shaped cavities and fleece webbing laminated to the underside to
provide a mechanical bond to the substrate adhesive (DITRA).
1. Acceptable Product: Schluter Systems "DITRA."
2. Use at all tile flooring installations.
C.
Waterproofing Membrane at Countertops: Complying with ANSI A118.10.
D.
Sealant: high performance, one component neutral cure, 100% silicone sealant designed for
ceramic tile and stone applications: Laticrete International, Latasil.
020712 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
TILING
E.
Metal lath: Tile manufacturer’s recommended self-furring metal lath.
F.
Mesh Tape: 2-inch wide self-adhesive fiberglass mesh tape.
G.
Grout sealer: grout manufacturer’s recommended sealer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of
work and are ready to receive tile.
B.
Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of
work, are dust-free, and are ready to receive tile.
C.
Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are ready for tile installation by testing for moisture
emission rate and alkalinity; obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended
by tile manufacturer and setting materials manufacturer.
D.
Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location.
E.
Verify that tile support at cabinets to receive tiled countertops is flat, stable, and ready to
receive tile.
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
3.4
Protect surrounding work from damage.
B.
Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean.
C.
Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable
flatness tolerances.
D.
Prepare substrate surfaces for adhesive installation in accordance with adhesive
manufacturer's instructions.
INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A.
Install tile and stair treads and grout in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI
A108.1 through A108.13, manufacturer's instructions, and The Tile Council of North America
Handbook recommendations.
B.
Lay tile to pattern indicated. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings.
C.
Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant joint space. Form corners and bases
neatly. Align floor joints.
D.
Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make
joints watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar, or excess grout.
E.
Form internal angles square and external angles bullnosed.
F.
Install non-ceramic trim in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
G.
Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units.
H.
Keep expansion joints free of adhesive or grout. Apply sealant to joints.
I.
Allow tile to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting.
J.
Grout tile joints. Use standard grout unless otherwise indicated.
K.
Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials and junction of dissimilar planes.
INSTALLATION - FLOORS -0THIN-SET METHODS
A.
Over interior concrete substrates, install in accordance with The Tile Council of North America
Handbook Method F113, dry-set or latex-Portland cement bond coat, with standard grout,
unless otherwise indicated.
1. Use uncoupling membrane under all tile unless other underlayment is indicated.
2. Where epoxy bond coat and grout are indicated, install in accordance with The Tile
Council of North America Handbook Method F131.
B.
Over wood substrates, install in accordance with The Tile Council of North America Handbook
Method F142, with standard grout, unless otherwise indicated.
020712 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
TILING
1.
3.5
3.6
INSTALLATION - COUNTERTOP TILELAMINATE
A.
Securely attach countertops to cabinets using concealed fasteners. Make flat surfaces level;
shim where required.
B.
Attach wood countertops using screws with minimum penetration into substrate board of 5/8
inch.
C.
Prepare exterior glue plywood base with dot and dash saw cuts 6-8 inch on center through the
plywood board to prevent warping.
D.
On tiled laminated countertops install in accordance with The Tile Council of North America
Handbook Method C512-09 Thin-Set over waterproof membrane on two layers of exterior
glue plywood (EGP)..in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
SEALING
A.
3.7
Seal all grout surfaces.
CLEANING
A.
3.8
Where epoxy bond coat and grout are indicated, install in accordance with The Tile
Council of North America Handbook Method F143.
Clean tile and grout surfaces.
PROTECTION
A.
Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for 4 days after installation.
END OF SECTION
020712 / Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
TILING
SECTION 096500
RESILIENT FLOORING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Resilient sheet flooring.
B.
Resilient tile flooring.
C.
Resilient base.
D.
Resilient stair accessories.
E.
Installation accessories.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 01 61 16 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions.
B.
Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Restrictions on curing compounds for concrete
slabs and floors.
C.
Section 03 54 00 - Cast Underlayment: Self-leveling floor underlayment.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM E 648 - Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using
a Radiant Heat Energy Source; 2009a.
B.
ASTM F 710 - Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring;
2008.
C.
ASTM F 1303 - Standard Specification for Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering with Backing; 2004
(Reapproved 2009).
D.
ASTM F 1861 - Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base; 2008.
E.
ASTM F 2034 - Standard Specification for Sheet Linoleum Floor Covering; 2008.
F.
BAAQMD 8-51 - Bay Area Air Quality Management District Regulation 8, Rule 51, Adhesive
and Sealant Products; www.baaqmd.gov; 2002.
G.
FS RR-T-650 - Treads, Metallic and Nonmetallic, Skid Resistant; Federal Specifications and
Standards; Revision E, 1994.
H.
GEI (SCH) - GREENGUARD "Children and Schools" Certified Products; GREENGUARD
Environmental Institute; current listings at www.greenguard.org.
I.
SCAQMD 1168 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168; current edition;
www.aqmd.gov.
SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance
characteristics; including sizes, patterns and colors available; and installation instructions.
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate seaming plan.
D.
Verification Samples: Submit two samples, 4 x 4 inch in size illustrating color and pattern for
each resilient flooring product specified.
E.
Concrete Testing Standard: Submit a copy of ASTM F 710.
F.
Certification: Prior to installation of flooring, submit written certification by flooring manufacturer
and adhesive manufacturer that condition of sub-floor is acceptable.
G.
Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials,
and suggested schedule for cleaning, stripping, and re-waxing.
0207012/ Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
RESILIENT FLOORING
09 65 00 - 1
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.6
Protect roll materials from damage by storing on end.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Maintain temperature in storage area between 55 degrees F and 90 degrees F.
B.
Store materials for not less than 48 hours prior to installation in area of installation at a
temperature of 70 degrees F to achieve temperature stability. Thereafter, maintain conditions
above 55 degrees F.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
TILE and SHEET FLOORING
A.
Rubber tile flooring: 100 percent rubber composition, color and pattern through total
thickness:
1. Total Thickness: 3/8 inch minimum.
2. Tile size: Interlock tiles 24” x 24"
3. Color: Johnsonite P-517 Cloud 9.
4. Accessories: underlocking transitions.
5. Adhesives: Manufacturer’s recommended low VOC adhesives
6. Manufacturers:
a. Johnsonite, Inc: www.johnsonite.com.
b. Roppe Corp.: www.roppe.com
c. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B.
Marmoleum Sheet Flooring: Homogeneous wear layer bonded to backing, with color and
pattern through wear layer thickness:
1. Minimum Requirements: Comply with ASTM F 2034, Type corresponding to type
specified.
2. VOC Content: Certified as Low Emission by one of the following :
a. GreenGuard Children and Schools; www.greenguard.org.
3. Backing: Jute fabric.
4. Wear Layer Thickness: 0.080 inch, minimum, excluding backing.
5. Sheet Width: 79 inch, minimum.
6. Color: Color ‘A’ to be determined.
7. Seams: Heat welded.
8. Manufacturers:
a. Forbo Flooring Systems; Product MCS (Marmoleum Composition sheet):
www.forboflooringna.com.
b. Liberty
c. Shaw
d. Armstrong
C. Marmoleum Welding Rod: Solid color linoleum produced by flooring manufacturer for heat
welding seams, in color in color matching predominant flooring color.
2.2
RESILIENT BASE
A.
Resilient Base: ASTM F 1861, ; top set Style B, Cove, and as follows:
1. Height: 4 inch.
2. Thickness: 0.125 inch thick.
3. Finish: Satin.
4. Color: To Be Determined.
5. Accessories: Premolded external corners and end stops.
6. Manufacturers:
a. Burke Flooring: www.burkemercer.com.
b. Johnsonite, Inc: www.johnsonite.com.
c. Roppe Corp: www.roppe.com.
d. Flexco
B. Resilient Base: ASTM F 1861, ; top set Style B, Cove, and as follows:
RESILIENT FLOORING
0207012/ Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
09 65 00 - 2
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.4
Height: 6” inch.
Thickness: 0.125 inch thick.
Finish: Satin.
Color: To Be Determined.
Accessories: Premolded external corners and end stops.
Manufacturers:
a. Burke Flooring: www.burkemercer.com.
b. Johnsonite, Inc: www.johnsonite.com.
c. Roppe Corp: www.roppe.com.
d. Flexco
ACCESSORIES
A.
Subfloor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by adhesive material manufacturer.
B.
Primers, Adhesives, and Seaming Materials: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring
manufacturer.
1. Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content than
required by the more stringent of the South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule
No.1168 and the Bay Area Air Quality Management District Regulation 8, Rule 51.
C.
Moldings, Transition and Edge Strips: Same material as flooring.
D.
Sealer and Wax: Types recommended by flooring manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that surfaces are flat to tolerances acceptable to flooring manufacturer, free of cracks
that might telegraph through flooring, clean, dry, and free of curing compounds, surface
hardeners, and other chemicals that might interfere with bonding of flooring to substrate.
B.
Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of
work, are dust-free, and are ready to receive resilient base.
C.
Verify that concrete sub-floor and self leveling underlayment surfaces are dry enough and
ready for resilient flooring installation by testing for moisture emission rate and alkalinity in
accordance with ASTM F 710; obtain instructions if test results are not within limits
recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer.
D.
Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location.
PREPARATION
A.
Prepare sub-floor surfaces as recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers.
B.
Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other
defects with sub-floor filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface.
C.
Prohibit traffic until filler is cured.
D.
Clean substrate.
INSTALLATION
A.
Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub-floor conditions.
B.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set.
D.
Fit joints tightly.
E.
Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion.
F.
Where type of floor finish, pattern, or color are different on opposite sides of door, terminate
flooring under centerline of door.
G.
Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, where flooring terminates, and where
indicated.
1. Metal Strips: Attach to substrate before installation of flooring using stainless steel
RESILIENT FLOORING
0207012/ Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
09 65 00 - 3
screws.
2. Resilient Strips: Attach to substrate using adhesive.
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
H.
Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to produce
tight joints.
I.
At movable partitions, install flooring under partitions without interrupting floor pattern.
TILE FLOORING
A.
Mix tile from container to ensure shade variations are consistent when tile is placed, unless
manufacturer's instructions say otherwise.
B.
Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to building lines to produce symmetrical tile pattern.
C.
Install tile to ashlar pattern. Allow minimum 1/2 full size tile width at room or area perimeter.
RESILIENT BASE
A.
Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches between joints.
B.
Miter internal corners. At external corners, use premolded units. At exposed ends, use
premolded units.
C.
Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces.
D.
Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions.
STAIR COVERINGS
A.
Install stringers configured tightly to stair profile.
B.
Adhere over entire surface. Fit accurately and securely.
CLEANING
A.
Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage.
B.
Clean in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
PROTECTION
A.
Prohibit traffic on resilient flooring for 48 hours after installation.
END OF SECTION
0207012/ Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
RESILIENT FLOORING
09 65 00 - 4
SECTION 096800
CARPETING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Carpet, stretched-in with cushion underlay and glue down.
B.
Accessories.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 01 61 16 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions.
B.
Section 09 68 13 - Tile Carpeting.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM D 2859 - Standard Test Method for Ignition Characteristics of Finished Textile Floor
Covering Materials; 2006.
B.
ASTM E 648 - Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using
a Radiant Heat Energy Source; 2009a.
C.
CRI (CIS) - Carpet Installation Standard; Carpet and Rug Institute; 2009.
D.
CRI (GLC) - Green Label Testing Program - Approved Product Categories for Carpet; Carpet
and Rug Institute; Current Edition.
E.
CRI (GLCC) - Green Label Testing Program - Approved Product Categories for Carpet
Cushion; Carpet and Rug Institute; Current Edition.
F.
CRI (GLP) - Green Label Plus Carpet Testing Program - Approved Products; Carpet and Rug
Institute; Current Edition.
G.
NFPA 253 - Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using
a Radiant Heat Energy Source; National Fire Protection Association; 2006.
SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate seaming plan, method of joining seams, direction of carpet pile and
pattern, location of edge moldings and edge bindings.
C.
Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance
characteristics; sizes, patterns, colors available, and method of installation.
D.
Samples: Submit two samples 12 x 12 inch in size illustrating color and pattern for each carpet
and cushion material specified.
E.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures.
F.
Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials,
and suggested schedule for cleaning.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing specified carpet with
minimum five years documented experience.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing carpet with minimum five years
documented experience.
C.
Carpet Cushion shall bear the grade mark of a recognized association of a recognized
association or independent inspection agency. Comply with HUD UM 72a - Building Product
Standard and Certification Program For Carpet Cushion
0207012/ Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
CARPETING
09 68 00 - 1
D.
1.6
Carpet shall bear the grade mark of a recognized association of a recognized association or
independent inspection agency. Comply with HUD UM 44d - Building Product Standard and
Certification Program For Carpet, Carpet requirements: At Units - Type 1, Class 1. At Common
Areas - Type1, Class 2.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Store materials in area of installation for minimum period of 24 hours prior to installation.
B.
Maintain minimum 70 degrees F ambient temperature 24 hours prior to, during and 24 hours
after installation.
C.
Ventilate installation area during installation and for 72 hours after installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
2.3
CARPET
A.
CPT-1 Carpet:
1. Product: Freebird manufactured by Shaw.
2. At all units Type 1, Class 1
3. Color: To Be Determined.
4. Style: HGG48.
5. Critical Radiant Flux: Minimum of 0.22 watts/sq cm, when tested in accordance with
ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253.
6. Surface Flammability Ignition: Pass ASTM D 2859 (the "pill test").
7. VOC Content: Provide CRI Green Label Plus certified product; in lieu of labeling,
independent test report showing compliance is acceptable.
8. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements..
B.
CPT-6 Carpet:
1. Product: Teasel Two manufactured by Bigelow.
2. Stairs
3. Color: To Be Determined.
4. Style: BC217.
5. Construction: Ultra Performance System
6. Pile Weight: 30 oz /square yard
7. Protective System: Sentry Plus
8. Fiber system: Everset fibers by Mohawk
9. Flammability: Class 1 (gluedown) ASTM E 648
10. Smoke Density: Less the 450 (Class B) ASTM 662
11. VOC Content: Provide CRI Green Label Plus certified product; in lieu of labeling,
independent test report showing compliance is acceptable.
12. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
CUSHION
A.
2.4
Carpet:
1. Shaw Industries Group, Inc..: www.shawfloors.com.
2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
Cushion: Rebond Pad
1. VOC Content: Provide CRI Green Label certified product; in lieu of labeling, independent
test report showing compliance is acceptable.
2. Nominal Thickness: 3/8 inch.
3. Weight: 72 oz/sq yd.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Sub-Floor Filler: Type recommended by carpet manufacturer.
0207012/ Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
CARPETING
09 68 00 - 2
B.
Tackless Strip: Carpet gripper, of type recommended by carpet manufacturer to suit
application, with attachment devices.
C.
Moldings and Edge Strips: See
D.
Seam Adhesive: Recommended by manufacturer.
E.
Contact Adhesive: Compatible with carpet material ; releasable type.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of
work and are ready to receive carpet.
B.
Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location.
PREPARATION
A.
Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor or local low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and
other defects with sub-floor filler.
B.
Clean substrate.
INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A.
Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub-floor conditions.
B.
Install carpet and cushion in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and CRI Carpet
Installation Standard.
C.
Verify carpet match before cutting to ensure minimal variation between dye lots.
D.
Lay out carpet and locate seams in accordance with shop drawings:
1. Locate seams in area of least traffic, out of areas of pivoting traffic, and parallel to main
traffic.
2. Do not locate seams perpendicular through door openings.
3. Align run of pile in same direction as anticipated traffic and in same direction on adjacent
pieces.
4. Locate change of color or pattern between rooms under door centerline.
5. Provide monolithic color, pattern, and texture match within any one area.
E.
Install carpet tight and flat on subfloor, well fastened at edges, with a uniform appearance.
STRETCHED-IN CARPET
A.
Install tackless strips with pins facing the wall around entire perimeter, except across door
openings. Use edge strip where carpet terminates at other floor coverings.
B.
Space tackless strips slightly less than carpet thickness away from vertical surfaces, but not
more than 3/8 inch.
C.
Install cushion in maximum size pieces using spot adhesive to adhere to sub-floor.
D.
Lay out cushion so that seams will be perpendicular to, or offset from, minimum 6 inches from
carpet seams.
E.
Butt cushion edges together and tape seams.
F.
Trim cushion tight to edge of tackless strip and around projections and contours.
G.
Double cut carpet seams , with accurate pattern match. Make cuts straight, true, and unfrayed.
Apply seam adhesive to all cut edges immediately.
H.
Join seams using hot adhesive tape. Form seams straight, not overlapped or peaked, and free
of gaps.
I.
Following seaming, hook carpet onto tackless strip at one edge, power stretch, and hook firmly
at other edges. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for method and amount of stretch.
J.
Trim carpet neatly at walls and around interruptions. Tuck edges into space between tackless
strip and wall.
0207012/ Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
CARPETING
09 68 00 - 3
3.5
3.6
3.7
DIRECT-GLUED CARPET
A.
Double cut carpet seams, with accurate pattern match. Make cuts straight, true, and unfrayed.
Apply seam adhesive to cut edges of woven carpet immediately.
B.
Apply contact adhesive to floor uniformly at rate recommended by manufacturer. After sufficient
open time, press carpet into adhesive.
C.
Apply seam adhesive to the base of the edge glued down. Lay adjoining piece with seam
straight, not overlapped or peaked, and free of gaps.
D.
Roll with appropriate roller for complete contact of adhesive to carpet backing.
E.
Trim carpet neatly at walls and around interruptions.
INSTALLATION ON STAIRS
A.
Use one piece of carpet for each tread and the riser below. Apply seam adhesive to all cut
edges.
B.
Install carpet with pile direction in the length of the stair.
C.
Adhere carpet tight to stair treads and risers.
CLEANING
A.
Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces.
END OF SECTION
0207012/ Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
CARPETING
09 68 00 - 4
P.O. Box 1330
Roswell, GA 30077
77o-642-9000
MEA
MEA
660 Westhollow Ct.
Roswell, GA 30075
Fax 770-518-7407
Certifications
May 27, 2008
Home Foundations By Shaw Industries (760)
P.O.Box 2128
Dalton,Georgia 30722-2128
Attn: Mrs. Paulette Townsend
NOTICE OF CARPET CERTIFICATION
The product described below is approved for listing in the MEA Directory of Certified Carpet. Laboratory
test results show this quality has physical characteristics which meet and/or exceed the requirements of
HUD/FHA UM-44d.
QUALITY :
HGG48 Freebird
CODE NO:
5188
5
Fiber
Nylon
Texture
F
COLORS:
00100 Sahara Buff
00101 Sisal
00102 Fine Linen
00103 Nature's Mist
00104 Knapsack
001OS Sand Pebble
00106 Gentle Beige
00107 Chic Ivory
00200 Moonlit Path
00201 Wheat Field
Frank M. Brown
Administrator
00202 Regal Gold
00300 New Growth
00400 Coastal Breeze
00500 Ster1ing
00600 Aged Copper
00700 Taupe Stone
00701 Teak
00702 Mocha Froth
00703 Barn Owl
00704 Fresh Coffee
Pile Height
fThickness
0.57
Pile Weight
25.0
Pile Density
1579
SECTION 099000
PAINTING AND COATING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Surface preparation.
B.
Field application of paints, stains, varnishes, and other coatings.
C.
Materials for back-priming woodwork.
D.
Scope: Finish all interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory-finished
and unless otherwise indicated, including the following:
1. Both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telecom equipment before
installing equipment.
2. Exposed surfaces of steel lintels and ledge angles.
3. Mechanical and Electrical:
a. In finished areas, paint all insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and
exposed ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports, mechanical equipment, and
electrical equipment, unless otherwise indicated.
b. In finished areas, paint shop-primed items.
E.
Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items:
1. Items fully factory-finished unless specifically so indicated; materials and products having
factory-applied primers are not considered factory finished.
2. Items indicated to receive other finishes.
3. Items indicated to remain unfinished.
4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, and operating parts of
equipment.
5. Non-metallic roofing and flashing.
6. Stainless steel, anodized aluminum, bronze, terne, and lead items.
7. Marble, granite, slate, and other natural stones.
8. Floors, unless specifically so indicated.
9. Brick, architectural concrete, cast stone, integrally colored plaster and stucco.
10. Glass.
11. Concrete masonry in utility, mechanical, and electrical spaces.
12. Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 01 61 16 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions.
B.
Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: Shop-primed items.
C.
Section 05 51 00 - Metal Stairs: Shop-primed items.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM D 4442 - Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of Wood and
Wood-Base Materials; 2007.
B.
GreenSeal GS-11 - Paints; 1993.
C.
SSPC (PM1) - Good Painting Practice: SSPC Painting Manual, Vol. 1; Society for Protective
Coatings; Fourth Edition.
D.
USGBC LEED-NC - LEED Green Building Rating System for New Construction and Major
Renovations; U.S. Green Building Council; 2009.
SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
0207012/ Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
PAINTIEG AND COATING
09 90 00 - 1
1.5
1.6
1.7
B.
Product Data: Provide data on all finishing products, including VOC content.
C.
Samples: Submit two paper chip samples, 8 1/2 x 11 inch in size illustrating range of colors
available for each surface finishing product scheduled.
D.
Certification: By manufacturer that all paints and coatings comply with VOC limits specified.
E.
Certification: By manufacturer that all paints and coatings do not contain any of the prohibited
chemicals specified; GreenSeal GS-11 certification is not required but if provided shall
constitute acceptable certification.
F.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special surface preparation procedures.
G.
Maintenance Data: Submit data on cleaning, touch-up, and repair of painted and coated
surfaces.
H.
Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
2. Extra Paint and Coatings: 1 gallon of each color; new un-opened containers, store where
directed.
3. Label each container with color in addition to the manufacturer's label.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified,
with minimum five years documented experience.
B.
Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified with
minimum five years experience.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability.
B.
Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand
code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and
instructions for mixing and reducing.
C.
Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90
degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature
ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.
B.
Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of
substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations.
C.
Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is outside the
humidity ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.
D.
Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F for interiors; 50 degrees F
for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
E.
Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish Finishes: 65 degrees F for interior or exterior,
unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
F.
Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Provide all paint and coating products used in any individual system from the same
manufacturer; no exceptions.
B.
Paints:
1. Base Manufacturer: Sherwin-Williams www.sherwin-williams.com.
2. Glidden Professional: www.gliddenprofessional.com.
0207012/ Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
PAINTING AND COATING
09 90 00- 2
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
2.2
2.3
Benjamin Moore & Co: www.benjaminmoore.com.
Parker Paint Mfg Co Inc., a Comex Group company: www.parkerpaint.com.
Pratt & Lambert Paints: www.prattandlambert.com.
Kelly-Moore Paints; www.kellymoore.com
Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
PAINTS AND COATINGS - GENERAL
A.
Paints and Coatings: Ready mixed, unless intended to be a field-catalyzed coating.
1. Provide paints and coatings of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and
uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties,
and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.
2. Provide materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under
conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing
and field experience.
3. Supply each coating material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from a
single production run.
4. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute coatings or add materials to coatings unless such procedure
is specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions.
B.
Primers: Where the manufacturer offers options on primers for a particular substrate, use
primer categorized as "best" by the manufacturer.
C.
Moisture Barrier Primer/Finish: at all exterior walls provide Moisture Barrier Primer in lieu of
standdard primier.
D.
Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: Comply with Section 01 61 16.
E.
Flammability: Comply with applicable code for surface burning characteristics.
F.
Colors: As indicated in Color Schedule
1. In finished areas, finish pipes, ducts, conduit, and equipment the same color as the
wall/ceiling they are mounted on/under.
PAINT SYSTEMS - EXTERIOR
A.
A. Paint – Fiber Cement Panel, Opaque, Alkyd, 2 Coat:
1. One coat of Primer Plus. Apply per manufacturer.
2. Top coat. Two layers 100% acrylic satin or eggshell.
2.4
B.
Paint- Wood, Opaque, Alkyd, 2 Coat:
1. One coat of alkyd primer sealer.
2. One coat of alkyd enamel satin or eggshell.
C.
Paint- Wood,Transparent, Sealer, Optional Stain:
1. One coat of clear sealer.
D.
Paint- Masonry/Concrete, Opaque, Alkyd, 2 Coat:
1. One coat of block filler.
2. Flat: One coat of alkyd enamel.
E.
Paint- Ferrous Metals, Unprimed, Alkyd, 3 Coat:
1. One coat of alkyd primer.
2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel.
F.
Paint- Ferrous Metals, Primed, Alkyd, 2 Coat:
1. Touch-up with rust-inhibitive primer recommended by top coat manufacturer.
2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel.
G.
Paint- Galvanized Metals, Latex, 3 Coat:
1. One coat galvanize primer.
2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of latex enamel.
PAINT SYSTEMS - INTERIOR
A.
Paint- Gypsum board, latex/acrylic, 3 coat at bathrooms.
0207012/ Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
PAINTING AND COATING
09 90 00- 3
1.
2.
2.5
One coat of alkyd primer sealer
Semi-gloss; Two coats of latex-acrylic enamel
B.
Paint- Wood, Transparent, Varnish, No Stain:
1. One coat sealer.
2. Satin: Two coats of varnish.
C.
Paint- Concrete/Masonry, Opaque, Latex, 2 Coat:
1. One coat of block filler.
2. Semi-gloss: One coat of latex enamel.
D.
Paint- Ferrous Metals, Primed, Latex, 2 Coat:
1. Touch-up with latex primer.
2. Gloss: Two coats of latex enamel.
E.
Paint- Galvanized Metals, Latex, 3 Coat:
1. One coat galvanize primer.
2. Gloss: Two coats of latex enamel.
F.
Paint- Gypsum Board/Plaster, Latex-Acrylic, 3 Coat:
1. One coat of alkyd primer sealer. (Moisture Vapor Barrier at interior side of exterior walls)
2. Satin or Eggshell: Two coats of latex-acrylic enamel.
ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A.
Accessory Materials: Provide all primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding
materials, and clean-up materials required to achieve the finishes specified whether specifically
indicated or not; commercial quality.
B.
Patching Material: Latex filler.
C.
Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer.
B.
Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any
condition that may potentially affect proper application.
C.
Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.
D.
Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply
finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums:
1. Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent.
2. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12 percent.
3. Interior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D 4442.
4. Exterior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D 4442.
PREPARATION
A.
Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to coating application.
B.
Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best
result for the substrate under the project conditions.
C.
Remove or mask surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim,
escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.
D.
Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat.
E.
Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium phosphate
and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.
F.
Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces to be Painted: Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt or
alkali powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium
phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding
metals with a solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow to dry.
0207012/ Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
PAINTING AND COATING
09 90 00- 4
3.3
3.4
G.
Gypsum Board Surfaces to be Painted: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime
defects after repair.
H.
Galvanized Surfaces to be Painted: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with
solvent. Apply coat of etching primer.
I.
Corroded Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Prepare using at least SSPC-PC 2 (hand tool
cleaning) or SSPC-SP 3 (power tool cleaning) followed by SSPC-SP 1 (solvent cleaning).
J.
Uncorroded Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Remove grease, mill scale, weld
splatter, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by hand or power
tool wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of
phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Prime
paint entire surface; spot prime after repairs.
K.
Shop-Primed Steel Surfaces to be Finish Painted: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer
and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with
solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. Re-prime entire shop-primed item.
L.
Interior Wood Surfaces to Receive Opaque Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. Seal
knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has
dried; sand between coats. Back prime concealed surfaces before installation.
M.
Interior Wood Surfaces to Receive Transparent Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to sealing,
seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after sealer
has dried; sand lightly between coats. Prime concealed surfaces with gloss varnish reduced 25
percent with thinner.
N.
Exterior Wood Surfaces to Receive Opaque Finish: Remove dust, grit, and foreign matter.
Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections. Fill nail holes with tinted exterior calking
compound after prime coat has been applied. Back prime concealed surfaces before
installation.
O.
Exterior Wood to Receive Transparent Finish: Remove dust, grit, and foreign matter; seal
knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes with tinted exterior calking
compound after sealer has been applied. Prime concealed surfaces.
P.
Wood Doors to be Field-Finished: Seal wood door top and bottom edge surfaces with clear
sealer.
APPLICATION
A.
Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical
components and paint separately.
B.
Exterior Wood to Receive Opaque Finish: If final painting must be delayed more than 2 weeks
after installation of woodwork, apply primer within 2 weeks and final coating within 4 weeks.
C.
Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
D.
Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is
applied.
E.
Apply each coat to uniform appearance.
F.
Sand wood and metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish.
G.
Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior
to applying next coat.
H.
Wood to Receive Transparent Finishes: Tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into the grain
before set. Wipe excess from surface.
I.
Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed
prior to finishing.
CLEANING
A.
Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and
remove daily from site.
0207012/ Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
PAINTING AND COATING
09 90 00- 5
3.5
3.6
PROTECTION
A.
Protect finished coatings until completion of project.
B.
Touch-up damaged coatings after Substantial Completion.
SCHEDULE - COLORS
A.
P-1: TO BE DETERMINED
3.7 PAVEMENT MARKING SCHEDULE
A.
Paint the following items with colors indicated below:
1. Pedestrian Crosswalks: white
2. Lane striping where separating traffic in opposite directions: yellow
3. Lane striping where separating traffic in same direction: white
4. Handicap Symbols: per code
5. Parking stall striping: white
END OF SECTION
0207012/ Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
PAINTING AND COATING
09 90 00 - 6
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
101400
102800
104400
105523
SIGNAGE
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
MAIL BOXES
0207012/ Moreland Station Apartment Building
1/11/2013 Bid Documents
SECTION 101400
SIGNAGE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Metal Building Name Signage and address numbers.
B.
Room and door signs.
C.
Interior directional and informational signs.
D.
Emergency evacuation maps.
1.2
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
1.3
REFERENCE STANDARDS
1.4
1.5
A.
ANSI/ICC A117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and
Facilities; International Code Council; 2003.
B.
ATBCB ADAAG - Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines; 2002.
SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Manufacturer's printed product literature for each type of sign, indicating sign
styles, font, foreground and background colors, locations, overall dimensio